FRANKLIN WATER MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENT FRANKLIN, …...2. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. IEEE Standard 112, Test Method "B". 5. IEEE

FRANKLIN WATER

MANAGEMENT

DEPARTMENT

FRANKLIN,

TENNESSEE

CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS AND

SPECIFICATIONS

FOR THE

FRANKLIN WATER TREATMENT MODIFICATIONS

SSR PROJECT NO.:

12-41-013.0

June, 2015

VOLUME 2 OF 3

CONSTRUCTION SET

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

AND SPECIFICATIONS

PREPARED FOR:

FRANKLIN WATER TREATMENT MODIFICATIONS

PREPARED BY:

SMITH SECKMAN REID, INC. TEL: (615) 383-1113 FAX: (615) 386-8469

SSR PROJECT NO.:

12-41-013.0

DATE:

JUNE 22, 2015

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

FRANKLIN WATER TREATMENT IMPROVEMENTS

CITY OF FRANKLIN ENGINEER/ARCHITECT SEALS PAGE

PROCESS ENGINEER

PROCESS ENGINEER

MECHANICAL ENGINEER

CIVIL ENGINEER

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER

PLUMBING ENGINEER

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEER

ARCHITECT

jgriffey

Snapshot

jgriffey

Snapshot

jgriffey

Snapshot

jgriffey

Snapshot

jgriffey

Snapshot

jgriffey

Snapshot

jgriffey

Snapshot

jgriffey

Snapshot

jgriffey

Snapshot

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SSR-12-41-013.0 00 01 10 – 1 Construction Set

SECTION 00 01 10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section

Number Title

(VOLUME 1 OF 3)

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 01 01 Cover and Title Page

00 01 07 Engineers Seals Page

00 01 10 Table of Contents

00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids

00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders

00 41 00 Bid Form

00 45 13 Bidder Qualification Questionnaire

00 51 00 Notice of Award

00 52 00 Agreement

00 52 89 Indemnification Agreement

00 55 00 Notice to Proceed

00 61 10 Bid Bond

00 61 11 Performance Bond

00 61 12 Payment Bond

00 66 00 Resident Project Representative

00 72 00 Modified General Conditions

00 83 13 Project Sign

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 13 Summary of Work

01 21 00 Allowances, Alternates, and Guaranteed Prices

01 22 00 Measurement and Payment

01 25 13 Product Options and Substitutions

01 26 57 Change Order Procedures

01 29 73 Schedule of Values

01 29 76 Payment Procedures

01 31 13 Coordination

01 31 19 Pre-Construction Conference

01 31 20 Progress Meetings

01 32 00 Construction Photographs

01 33 00 Submittals

01 45 00 Quality Control

01 45 29 Laboratory Testing Services

01 51 00 Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities

01 56 43 Stream Disturbance Controls

Construction Set 00 01 10 – 2 SSR-12-41-013.0

01 57 00 Temporary Controls

01 57 13 Erosion and Sediment Control

01 57 33 Bypass Pumping

01 61 00 Material and Equipment

01 74 13 Cleaning and Restoration

01 76 00 Protection of Existing Facilities

01 77 00 Contract Closeout

01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data

01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds

01 78 39 Project Record Documents

01 78 43 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials

01 79 00 Facility Online Training

01 88 23 Starting of Systems

01 88 26 Plant Startup

01 99 00 Reference Forms

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 32 13 Subsurface Exploration

02 41 00 Demolition

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

03 01 40 Concrete Repair

03 11 00 Concrete Formwork

03 15 00 Concrete Accessories

03 21 00 Concrete Reinforcement

03 31 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete

03 35 00 Concrete Finishing

03 39 00 Concrete Curing

03 61 00 Grout

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

04 22 00 Masonry Mortar and Grout

04 25 00 Unit Masonry

DIVISION 05 – METALS

05 05 20 Anchor Systems

05 12 00 Structural Steel

05 21 00 Steel Joists

05 31 23 Steel Roof Deck

05 44 13 Steel Roof Trusses

05 51 00 Metal Stairs

05 51 33 Metal Ladders

05 52 00 Handrails and Railings

05 53 00 Gratings and Floor Plates


DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry

06 74 13 Molded Fiberglass Grating

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing

07 21 00 Building Insulation

07 25 00 Membrane Weather Barrier

07 41 13 Metal Roof

07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels

07 53 10 EPDM Membrane Roofing

07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

07 72 33 Roof Hatches

07 84 00 Firestopping

07 92 00 Joint Sealers

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 11 13 Steel Doors and Frames

08 33 10 Overhead Coiling Doors

08 51 13 Aluminum Windows

08 71 00 Door Hardware

08 80 00 Glazing

08 90 00 Louvers and Vents

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies

09 77 20 Decorative Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels

09 96 00 Painting and Coatings

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 14 16 Building Plaque

10 14 20 Signage Requirements

10 53 00 Pre-Engineered Post Supported Aluminum Canopy

(VOLUME 2 OF 3)

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

11 05 13 Motors

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression

21 05 20 Fire Extinguishers, Fire Valves and Cabinets


21 13 13 Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing

22 05 23 Valves for Plumbing Piping

22 05 29 Hangers for Plumbing Piping

22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation

22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties

22 13 16 Storm and Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping

22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties

22 13 29 Sanitary Waste Pumps

22 33 36 Water Heater - Electric

22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC

23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

23 05 48 Vibration Isolation

23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

23 07 00 HVAC Insulation

23 09 13 Instrumentation and Control Devices

23 09 33 Electric Controls

23 11 23 Facility Natural Gas Piping

23 31 13 Sheetmetal Ductwork

23 31 17 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Ductwork and Accessories

23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories

23 34 20 Bifurcated Inline Centrifugal Fans

23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets

23 74 00 Packaged DX Rooftop Units

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical

26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

26 05 34 Conduit

26 05 37 Boxes

26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems

26 21 00 Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance

26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers

26 24 13 Switchboards

26 24 16 Panelboards


26 27 26 Wiring Devices

26 28 18 Enclosed Switches

26 29 23 Variable Frequency Motor Drives

26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices

26 51 00 Interior Lighting

26 56 00 Exterior Lighting

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

27 13 00 Communications Cabling

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 11 00 Site Preparation and Clearing

31 23 16 Excavation, Trenching, and Grading

31 23 17 Rock Removal

31 23 19 Removal of Water

31 23 23 Bedding, Backfilling, and Compaction

31 50 00 Sheeting and Bracing

31 68 13 Foundation Rock Anchors

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 05 19 Geotextiles

32 11 00 Base and Subgrade Treatment under Pavement

32 12 00 Asphalt Concrete Paving

32 12 83 Pavement Cutting

32 13 13 Portland Cement Concrete Paving

32 14 23 Pavement Patching

32 15 00 Temporary Paving

32 16 13 Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Sidewalks

32 17 23 Pavement Marking

32 31 00 Chain Link Fences and Gate

32 90 00 Site Rehabilitation

(VOLUME 3 OF 3)

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

33 05 16 Precast Concrete Vaults

33 05 20 Tunneling under Highways

33 11 00 Piping

33 12 00 Valves

33 13 00 Testing and Disinfection of Piping and Systems

33 39 00 Manholes and Catch Basins

DIVISION 35 – WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

35 20 16 Hydraulic Gates


DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION

40 27 00 Hangers, Anchors, and Supports

40 41 13 Pipe Insulation and Heat Tracing

40 90 00 Instrumentation and Controls

DIVISION 43 – PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE

EQUIPMENT

43 21 06 Basic Requirements for Pumping Equipment

43 21 17 Vertical Turbine Pumps

43 21 39 Submersible Pumps

DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

46 05 00 General Requirements for Equipment

46 05 13 Existing Equipment Removal, Rework, or Relocation

46 21 56 Passive Raw Water Intake Screen

46 33 44

46 43 44 Peristaltic Pumps

46 41 23 Submersible Mixers

46 41 26 Floating Mechanical Mixer

46 43 73 Tube Settlers

46 43 79 Sludge Collectors

46 61 21 Granular Activated Carbon Pressure Contactors

46 61 33 Membrane Filtration Equipment

46 66 23 Ultraviolet Advanced Oxidation System

46 99 13 Tools and Miscellaneous Equipment

APPENDICES

Appendix A – Exploratory Geotechnical Investigations

1. Report of Geotechnical Exploration – GEOServices, LLC.

2. Report of Geotechnical Exploration – TTL

Appendix B – Guaranteed Price Proposals

1. Membrane Filtration System – General Electric Water and Process Technologies

2. Ultraviolet Advanced Oxidation System – Trojan Technologies

Appendix C – Hazardous Material Survey

1. Limited Lead-Based Paint Investigation Report – KAM Environmental

SSR-12.41.013.0 11 05 13 – 1 Construction Set

SECTION 11 05 13

MOTORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Description of Work:

1. This Section includes basic requirements for factory- and field-installed motors.

2. See individual Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements for motor-driven equipment.

3. All electric motors supplied under these Contract Documents shall conform to this specification as minimum requirements.

4. Rating of the motors offered shall in no case be less than the horsepower required in the Contract Documents.

5. Motor efficiency shall be a prime consideration in selection of all motors. Unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications, motors shall meet the Motor Efficiency requirements specified herein.

B. Related Documents:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Modified General Conditions, and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

2. Section 09 96 00 – Painting

3. Division 26 – Electrical

4. All other sections where motors are specified or required.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Design, manufacturer and test motors, controllers and components in accordance with the latest edition of the following standards:

1. NEMA - National Manufacturers Association Standards.

2. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

4. IEEE Standard 112, Test Method "B".

5. IEEE Standard 519-1992.

6. NEMA - ICS-3-303.

Construction Set 11 05 13 – 2 SSR-12.41.013.0

7. IEEE Standard 444 (ANSI C34.3).

8. Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EP Act).

B. Provide equipment and material with UL or ETL listing, in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction of the Work and suitable for its intended use.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents including Section 01 33 00.

B. Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide name of manufacturer, nameplate data and ratings per NEMA MG-1; service factor, type of enclosure, motor rpm (full load), maximum temperature rise, nominal efficiency, guaranteed minimum efficiency at 50, 75, and 100 percent full load, minimum power factor at 50, 75, and 100 percent, shipping, installed, and operating weights; enclosure type and mounting arrangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug locations; information on coatings or finishes, and name of the equipment to be driven.

C. Shop Drawings for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:

1. Each installed unit's type and details.

2. Nameplate legends.

3. Motor outline, dimensions and weight.

4. Manufacturer's descriptive information of motor features.

5. Diagrams of power, signal, and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of motor and for each control scheme.

6. Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70.

7. Bearing type, lubrication and life.

8. Space heater voltage and watts.

9. Description, ratings, and wiring diagram of motor thermal protection.

10. Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1.

11. Maximum brake horsepower required by the equipment driven by the motor.

12. Name of the equipment to be driven.

D. Include motor submittals with related equipment. Submittals for motors only without related equipment will not be reviewed.

E. Factory Tests:


1. The manufacturer's factory motor Prototype Tests per IEEE Standard 112 Appendix A on motors through 250 horsepower shall be submitted as Product Data for the motor, actual factory tests for motors is not required:

a. Winding resistance in ohms and converted to 25 degrees C.

b. Resistive Unbalance and Quarter Voltage Impedance, as applicable.

c. Locked-Rotor current (Single phase).

d. High Potential.

e. No-Load Excitation (volts, amperes, RPM).

f. Bearing vibration check.

g. Efficiency, Power Factor, Current at 115 percent, 100 percent, 75 percent, 50 percent, and no load.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. For all inverter duty motors: Manufacturer's certification that the motor is compatible with the variable frequency drive to be used.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply with the following:

1. Compatible with the following:

a. Magnetic controllers.

b. Multi-speed controllers.

c. Reduced-voltage controllers.

2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use throughout speed range without overheating.

3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.

4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.


B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for belt tensioning.

C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

D. Motors shall be rated for the type of environment that they will be installed in accordance with the Room and Area Classifications described in Section 01 61 00. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that correctly rated motors are installed in all designated environments.

1.06 SHOP TESTS

A. Perform motor shop tests in accordance with the IEEE Code for polyphase induction machines. Use NEMA report-of-test forms and submit results to the Engineer, in five copies, for his approval.

B. Test each motor and submit report; for power factor and efficiency at 50, 75 and 100 percent of its rated horsepower; for insulation resistance and dielectric strength; for heating; and for compliance with all specific performance requirements.

C. For motors less than 50 HP, provide guaranteed performance data based on previous testing of the motor design. For motors of 50 HP or larger, make complete tests of each motor and furnish certified test data sheets

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Emerson US Electrical Motors.

B. General Electric, Inc.

C. Reliance Electric Co.

D. Siemens.

E. Or approved equal.

2.02 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. All electric motors shall conform to ANSI Standards for Rotating Electrical Machinery (Designation C50) and to NEMA Standards MG-1 for Motors and Generators (NEMA Standard Publication latest revision) and to NEC, Article 430.

B. Motor requirements apply to factory- and field-installed motors except as follows:

1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another Section.

2. Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.


2.03 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Furnish with adequate ratings to accelerate and drive connected equipment under all normal operating conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings.

B. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger; rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.

1. Finish: Provide rust-resisting prime coat. Finish coat shall be either field applied by Contractor or factory applied in shop in accordance with Section 09 96 00.

C. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase 230/460 volt unless otherwise specified.

D. Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP: Single phase, 120 volt unless otherwise specified

E. Motors indicated on the Contract Drawings and/or specified in the specifications as non-230/460 volt shall be specially wound for voltage indicated and/or specified.

F. Dual-rated motors (i.e., 208/230 volts) are not acceptable for operation on 208 volts.

G. Motors 50 HP and Larger:

1. Thermistors:

a. Motors for constant speed application 100 hp and larger. Motors for adjustable speed application 40 hp and larger.

b. Thermistor embedded in each stator phase winding before winding dip and bake process.

c. In intimate contact with winding conductors.

d. Epoxy-potted, solid state thermistor control module mounted in NEMA 4 box on motor by motor manufacturer.

e. Individual thermistor circuits factory-wired to control module.

f. Control module rated for 120 volts ac power supply.

g. Control module automatically reset contact for external use rated 120 volts ac, 5 amps minimum, opening on abnormally high winding temperature. Manual reset shall be provided at motor controller.

H. Space Heaters: Provide space heaters on all motors 5 hp and larger to prevent condensation inside the motor enclosure after motor shutdown and maintain the temperature of the winding at not less than 5-degree C above outside ambient temperature.

I. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.

J. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which motor is connected.

K. Power Supply Variations: Motors shall operate successfully under running conditions at rated load with plus or minus 10 percent of rated voltage with rated frequency or plus or minus 5 percent of rated frequency with rated voltage at rated load; and at rated load with a combined


variation in voltage and frequency not more than 10 percent above or below the rated voltage and frequency provided that the frequency variation does not exceed 5 percent.

L. Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip-proof motors; 1.15 for totally enclosed motors; 1.15 for submersible; 1.0 for motors with non-sinusoidal voltage source (inverter drive).

M. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 degrees F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

N. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

O. Enclosure and Winding Insulation:

1. Minimum Class F unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents.

2. Refer to Section 01 61 00 for area classifications.

3. Unclassified Indoor Areas: TEFC, Standard insulation.

4. Wet Indoor Areas: TEFC, Encapsulated windings.

5. Outdoor Areas (unless corrosive or explosive areas): TEFC, Encapsulated windings.

6. Corrosive Areas: TEFC, Severe/Chemical duty.

7. Class I, Division 1 Areas: Explosion Proof, Approved for Class I, Division 1 locations.

8. Class II, Division 1 Areas: Explosion Proof, Approved for Class II, Division 1 locations.

9. Class I or Class II, Division 2 Areas: Explosion Proof, Approved for Division 1 locations or TEFC with maximum external frame temperature compatible with the gas or dust in the area (extra dip and bake for moisture), encapsulated windings.

10. Submersible Applications – provide motor winding thermal protection on all motors 1 HP or larger.

11. Encapsulated Windings - Where specified, an additional “dip and bake” will not be acceptable. Encapsulation shall be Contour Mold Everseal by U.S. Motors; Costum Polyseal by General Electric; or equal.

12. Open drip-proof motors shall not be permitted.

P. Motor Power Factors:

1. Minimum of 90 percent.

2. Motors with power factors less than 90 percent shall have power factor correction capacitors, switched integrally with the motors (unless otherwise required by either the motor or starter manufacturer), which will bring the power factor up to a minimum of 90 percent.

3. When capacitors are used with solid-state starters, the capacitors shall be connected to the load side of a bypass contactor via an additional contactor switched with the bypass.


Connection of the capacitor shall be in accordance with the starter manufacturer’s requirements. Contactor shall be sized for 125 percent of the capacitor full load current.

4. Furnish and install, at no additional cost to the Owner, the capacitors and provide all necessary wiring to connect them to the motor terminals or motor controller terminals.

a. Properly size fused switch or circuit breaker to serve as a disconnect for the capacitor.

5. Capacitor and Disconnect Enclosure:

Area Classification NEMA Type Enclosure

Unclassified Indoor NEMA 12, wall mounted

Wet Indoor NEMA 4, wall mounted

Outdoor NEMA 4, wall mounted, pad mounted, or

stand mounted

Corrosive NEMA 4X, wall mounted (disconnect only,

locate capacitor outside corrosive area)

Hazardous NEMA 7, wall mounted (disconnect only; located capacitor outside explosive area)

6. Size capacitors so they do not increase the self-excitation voltage above the motor nameplate rating.

7. Do not use capacitors on motors controlled by variable frequency drives.

8. When used with solid-state starters, energize only after bypass or full speed bypass contactor is energized. Verify with starter manufacturer their connection requirements and follow them.

Q. Lifting Eyes: Motors weighing more than 50 pounds shall be fitted with at least one lifting eye and motors over 150 pounds shall be fitted with two lifting eyes.

R. Conduit Box: Diagonally split, rotatable to each of four 90-degree positions. Threaded hubs for conduit attachment.

S. Vertical Hollowshaft Motors:

1. Where specified, design vertical hollowshaft motors to carry the motors, pumps, and associated equipment’s full thrust. Equip motors with oil lubricated spherical roller thrust bearings and lower grease lubricated radial guide bearings. Provide motors with visual oil level indicators and sufficient oil to fill the motor.

2. Vertical Adjustment - By means of a lockable nut at the top of the shaft.

3. Non-Reversing Ratchets - Provide where specified in the individual equipment specifications and where suitable for continuous operation at any speed between 50 percent and 100 percent of rated speed.

T. Namesplates – Stainless steel in accordance with latest version of MG 1-10.38.

U. Two speed motors:


1. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger - Two windings unless otherwise noted.

2. Motors less than 1/2 HP will be permitted with single windings.

3. Speeds of the motors shall be as specified. Two-speed motors shall be tested at the higher speed

V. Contractor shall provide multi-speed (multiple windings or consequent poles - single winding, wound rotor, etc.) where required as specified in individual equipment specifications.

W. Motors used with belt drives shall have grease slingers on the sheave end and sliding bases to provide for belt take-up.

X. Hazardous or Explosive-Proof Areas:

1. All areas noted as hazardous or explosion-proof (as defined in the latest edition of the National Electrical Code) shall have all work done in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) for that particular “class” and “division” and all equipment enclosures (for motors, starters, switches, capacitors, etc.), fittings, conduits and appurtenances shall be of a type approved for the area.

2. Unless otherwise shown, all hazardous or explosion-proof areas shall be Class I, Division 1 (Groups C and D); locations and all equipment enclosures, fittings, conduits and appurtenances shall be NEMA Type 7 and approved for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D atmospheres.

3. All wiring in these areas shall be done in accordance with the applicable NEC provisions.

Y. Use applicable paragraphs of NEMA MG 1-12.42 in making design selections.

Z. Other Design Requirements:

1. Motors on belt driven equipment shall have slide rails with adjusting screws for belt tension adjustment. Motors exposed to the weather shall be weather protected.

2. Provide motors with drive shafts long enough to extend completely through belt sheaves when sheaves are properly aligned or balanced.

2.04 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Multi-speed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.

D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Statically and dynamically balanced.

2. Have secondary bars of heavy copper silver-brazed to one-piece end rings or they shall have rotor windings of one-piece cast aluminum.


3. Where applicable, construct with integral fans.

E. Bearings: Double-shielded, pre-lubricated (oil) anti-friction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

1. Provide conveniently located oil fill port.

2. Unless otherwise specified, bearings shall be rated at a minimum L-10 life of 100,000 hours under axial loads.

3. Submersible motors shall have bearings rated of an L-10 or B-10 life of minimum of 17,500 hours.

4. Provide motors with aluminum end brackets with steel inserts in bearing cavities.

F. Vertical shaft construction, the motors shall have adequate thrust bearings to carry all motor loads and any other operating equipment loads. Grease slingers to be provided.

G. Horizontal Shaft Construction - Coupled to fluid pumps, the motors shall either have adequate thrust bearings or they shall have the couplings end play and rotor float coordinated to prevent damage to rotor bearings.

H. Resistance Temperature Detectors – 100 ohm platinum.

I. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.

J. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

L. Conduit/Terminal Boxes: Oversized in all cases to leave extra room after all conduits and conductors accounted for. Boxes shall be larger than called for by NEC Article 430-12.

1. Boxes shall have rubber gasket to prevent intrusion of water.

2. Provide grounding lug in terminal box.

3. Horizontal Motors - Locate on the left hand side, when viewing the motor from the drive shaft ends and design such that conduit entrance can be made from above, below or either side of the terminal box.

a. Provide with enhanced rotor and stator designs.

M. Additional Requirements for All Polyphase Motors:

1. Hazardous area motors shall be certified to meet UL requirements for operation over the motors entire speed range.

2. Thermal overload protectors and any auxiliary components necessary to provide required starting characteristics including capacitors, resistors and automatic switching devices


shall be furnished and mounted integrally unless motor starters with overload protection are provided

3. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

4. Torque requirement for greater turndown and slower speed applications is a custom design; refer to the driven equipment specification for additional requirements. Inverter duty rated motors shall be designed to operate over the speed or frequency range specified.

5. Motors for use with variable frequency controllers shall be inverter duty motors specifically designed for inverter service for the speed range and load torque characteristic required by the associated driven equipment. Inverter duty motors shall be specifically certified compatible with the adjustable frequency controller and driven equipment, as specified in Division 26.

6. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

a. 1600 volt insulation.

b. Motors shall be inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA MG 1, Parts 30 and 31.

c. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output.

d. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation.

e. Insulation: Class F; Inverter Grade; comply with NEMA MG 1 Part 31.

f. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.

g. Bearings: Insulated. Provide shaft grounding rings also.

h. Sound power levels not greater than recommended in NEMA M61-12.49. VFD duty rated motors shall not increase by more than 3 dB when operating on VFD.

7. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with non-hygroscopic material.

a. Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer.

8. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1:

a. Measure winding resistance.

b. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.

c. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.


d. Perform high-potential test.

2.05 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. NEMA Design M or Design N, unless otherwise noted, designed to withstand full voltage starting in accordance with MG 1-12.32.

1. Motors shall comply with NEMA Standards for Definite Purpose Motors (paragraphs 18.001-18.717).

B. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.

3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

C. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.

D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

E. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft; sealed, pre-lubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.

F. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1:

1. Measure winding resistance.

2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.

3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.

4. Perform high-potential test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FIELD-INSTALLED MOTOR INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load transfer link.

B. Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 03.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 40 27 00.


D. Make connections and test motor for proper rotation and speed as described herein and in Division 26.

E. Motors shall operate without an undue noise or vibration and shall show no signs of electrical unbalance.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR FIELD-INSTALLED MOTORS

A. All testing shall be witnessed by Engineer.

B. Prepare for acceptance tests.

1. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys, and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Verify bearing lubrication.

3. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at motor design load.

4. Test interlocks and control and safety features for proper operation.

5. Verify that current and voltage for each phase comply with nameplate rating and NEMA MG 1 tolerances.

C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Test report as provided in Section 01 99 00 “Motor Testing Summary Sheet” shall be completed for all motors. Submit form prior to Substantial Completion (see Section 01 77 00). Copy of all test reports shall be included in O&M Manual (see Section 01 78 23).

2. All tests shall be performed at as neat operating conditions as possible.

3. Perform tests all three-phase motors 1/2 HP and larger and for all single phase motors 1 HP and larger.

4. Perform electrical tests and visual and mechanical inspections including optional tests and inspections stated in NETA ATS on factory- and field-installed motors. Certify compliance with test parameters.

5. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

END OF SECTION

SSR-12.41.013.0

21 05 00 - 1 Construction Set

SECTION 21 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Common work results for requirements specifically applicable to Division 21.

B. Requirements of Division 01 Specifications, General Provisions of the Contract and General

and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Division.

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform work specified in Division 21, in accordance with the codes and standards listed below

of the latest applicable edition adopted by the authority having jurisdiction. Where these

Specifications are more stringent, they shall take precedence. In case of conflict, obtain a

decision from the Architect.

1. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler System

2. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code.

3. ANSI Handicapped Code-A117.1

4. U.L. Fire Resistance Index

5. ASTM E814-08B: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems.

6. IBC: International Building Code, with Mechanical and Plumbing Codes.

7. NFPA 10: Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers

8. NFPA 30: Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

9. NFPA 54: National Fuel and Gas Code

10. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code

11. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

12. NFPA 110: Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems

13. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Building Construction, Alteration and Demolition

Operations

14. Special regulations, supplement, and amendments of the State and/or local authorities

having jurisdiction.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.

B. ASME: American Society for Mechanical Engineers.

Construction Set

21 05 00 - 2 SSR-12.41.013.0

C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.

D. AWWA: American Water Works Association.

E. FM: Factory Mutual

F. IRI: Industrial Risk Insurers

G. MSS: Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry.

H. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers' Association.

I. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.

J. U.L.: Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

K. U. L. Fire Resistance Index.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with requirements of Division 01

including the required number of copies.

B. Include Products as specified in the individual sections of Division 21.

C. Submit shop drawing and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related

systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal.

D. Prepare shop drawings completely independent of the Engineer of Record's CADD files.

Should the Contractor or Vendor wish to use the Engineer of Record's CADD files or model as

the basis for developing their shop drawings, a release form, obtainable from the Engineer or

Architect, must be signed.

E. Submit copies of shop drawings in accordance with Division 01, including:

1. Concrete pads and foundations including anchor bolt and sleeve locations

2. Fire protection systems and hydraulic calculations.

3. Prepare and submit coordination drawings specified herein. Facilitate the coordination

effort with other trades, specifically Divisions 22, 23, 26 and 28 and include, but not be

limited to the following:

a. Electrical Switchgear Rooms

4. Coordinated room layouts shall include:

a. Room dimensions

b. Support column locations.

c. Locations and dimensions of equipment foundations and pads required.

d. Locations and dimensions of equipment and apparatus, including electrical control

panels and starters, and service and coil pull areas.

SSR-12.41.013.0


e. Dimensioned floor drain locations

f. Trench locations and sizes.

g. Sleeve locations in mechanical and equipment rooms.

h. Piping 2" and larger.

i. Conduit 2" and larger.

F. Brochures: Submit manufacturer's product data and brochures including:

1. Complete descriptions.

2. Illustrations and wiring diagrams.

3. Rating data, accessories, dimensional data, and applicable options and features marked for

the specific items scheduled on drawings and specified herein.

4. Capacities stated in the terms specified and scheduled.

5. Performance curves for fire pumps and jockey pumps.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products

specified in this Division with a minimum of 5 years of documented experience.

B. Comply with all codes and standards adopted by the authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Perform all required tests of systems, record results and deliver as part of the project closing

file.

1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatical and intended to show relative positions and

arrangement of piping and equipment. Coordinate work with other trades and with

measurements obtained at the job site, as applicable, prior to installation. Generally, install

work in locations shown on Drawings. Provide necessary rises, drops, and offsets to fit in the

available space unless prevented by Project conditions.

B. If prevented by project conditions, prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of The

Work, including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of the

Architect before proceeding.

C. Place anchors, sleeves, and supports prior to pouring concrete or installation of masonry work.

D. Cause as little interference or interruption of existing utilities and services as possible. Schedule

work which will cause interference or interruption in advance with Owner and all affected

trades.

E. Determine sizes and verify locations of existing utilities on or near site.

F. Keep roads clear of materials and debris.

G. Visit site and be informed of conditions under which Work must be performed.

Construction Set

21 05 00 - 4 SSR-12.41.013.0

H. Locate equipment requiring periodic servicing so that it is readily accessible. Provide means of

service access, following appropriate manufacturer's recommended service clearance space or,

as applicable, means of access using wall or ceiling access doors.

I. Install piping to leave sufficient space for AHJ inspection of rated wall construction.

Coordinate pipe routing with other trades including but not limited to the work of Divisions 22,

23, 26 and 28.

1.07 FEES AND PERMITS

A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits and inspection fees required to perform Division 21

work.

1.08 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prior to commencement of installation, prepare coordination drawings for work under this

Division, as specified in Division 01. Fully cooperate with persons coordinating and performing

work under other Divisions.

B. Drawings shall not be formally submitted but shall be kept on site for reference. Notify the

Architect of conflicts that cannot be resolved.

C. Coordination drawings shall be prepared to include the following:

1. Drawn to a scale of 1/4" = 1' - 0".

2. Room dimensions

3. Sheet size matching contract documents.

4. Ductwork sizes with bottom elevation from finished floor.

5. Show fire protection equipment, structural columns and beams.

6. Concrete pad and foundation layouts including anchor bolt and sleeve locations.

7. Dimensioned floor drain locations.

8. Wall mounted equipment.

9. Piping 2" and larger.

10. Suspended equipment and piping to illustrate sprinkler types and heights.

11. Dry pipe cabinets and valves for pre-action systems.

12. Floor to floor and ceiling heights.

1.09 COMPLETENESS OF WORK

A. The Contract Documents depict fire suppression systems which are intended to be complete

and functioning systems. All products, materials, and labor necessary to render a fully

functional system to fulfill the design intent shown on the documents shall be provided by the

Contractor.

B. Catalog numbers referenced throughout the Division 21 Drawings and Specifications are

intended to convey a general understanding of the type and quality of the product required.

SSR-12.41.013.0


Where written descriptions differ from information conveyed by a catalog number, the written

description shall govern. No extra shall be allowed because a catalog number is found to be

incomplete or obsolete.

1.10 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Comply with provisions of Division 01.

1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Provide record drawings that illustrate the work of Division 21 as finally constructed. Deliver

record drawings to the Architect in a form suitable for reproduction. Comply with the

provisions and requirements of Division 01.

B. Record drawings shall reflect all changes made to the Contract Documents, whether generated

by addenda, change orders, or field conditions. Maintain a daily record of these changes and

keep current set of drawings showing these changes.

C. Deliver record drawings in a form suitable for re-production to the Architect within 30 days of

Substantial Completion.

1.12 OWNING AND OPERATING MANUALS

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01, but provide a minimum of three sets.

B. Manuals shall include clear and comprehensive instructions with appropriate graphics and

project specific marked data to enable owner to operate and maintain all systems specified in

this Division.

C. Copies of reviewed submittals on furnished equipment shall be included.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Structural Steel for Supports: ASTM A36.

1. Use galvanized members installed areas of high humidity or condensation, and outside.

2. Furnish other members with shop coat of red primer.

3. Retouch primer after field welding.

2.02 FLASHINGS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS

A. Furnish materials and coordinate installation for flashing and counterflashing roof penetrations

for pipe and drains.

B. Materials:

1. Sheetmetal: 24-gauge minimum ASTM A525, Class G90

2. Sheet Lead: 3 pounds per square foot

3. Stainless Steel: Minimum 20-gauge

Construction Set

21 05 00 - 6 SSR-12.41.013.0

4. Sheet Copper: 24 oz/sf

2.03 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS PANELS

A. Style and type as required for material in which installed.

B. Size: 24"x24" minimum, as indicated, or as required to allow inspection, service and removal of

items served.

C. 14-gauge minimum sheet metal for doors, 16-gauge frames of cadmium-plated or galvanized

construction. Doors shall have expanded plaster rings where located in plaster walls or flanged

finish where located in drywall or block construction.

D. Panels shall have spring hinges with screwdriver locks in non-public areas. Key lock, keyed

alike, for panels in public areas.

E. Prime painted or rust inhibitive paint finish.

F. UL labeled when in fire-rated construction, 1-1/2 hour rating.

G. Provide in walls, floors, and ceilings to permit access to all equipment and piping requiring

service or adjustment. Examples of such equipment needing access are valves, and equipment

needing periodic or replacement maintenance.

H. Furnish and locate access panels under this Division. Coordinate with trades who are

responsible for building system in which panels are to be installed.

I. Acceptable Manufactures: Milcor, Nystrom, Karp, J.L. Industries, or Williams Brothers.

1. For masonry and drywall construction: Milcor Style M

2. For plastered masonry walls and ceiling: Milcor Style K

3. For ceramic tile or glazed structural tile: Use stainless steel panels

2.04 SLEEVES

A. Materials:

1. Concrete Floors, Concrete and Masonry Walls: 18-gauge galvanized sheetmetal.

2. Drywall Partitions: 18-gauge galvanized steel sheet metal.

B. Sleeves shall be sized such that the annular space between outside surface of pipe or pipe

insulation and the inside surface of the sleeve is not less than 1/2". Provide larger annular space

if required by firestopping product installation instructions.

C. Sleeves supporting riser piping 4" and larger shall have three 6" long reinforcing rods welded

radially at 120 degree spacing to the sleeve and shall be installed with the rods embedded in the

concrete slab.

2.05 ESCUTCHEON PLATES

A. Provide B and C No. 10 or equal chrome-plated escutcheon plates where pipes penetrate

partitions or ceilings in finished spaces or areas.

SSR-12.41.013.0


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. Contractor shall review Divisions 31 and 33 and shall perform excavation and backfilling in

accordance with the most stringent requirements. Contractor shall request clarification before

proceeding if there are conflicting instructions.

B. Contract Documents show the approximate location of underground utilities known to exist in

the area of construction. Contractor shall determine the exact location of utilities.

1. Locate and uncover existing utilities which require new connections before trenching in

the vicinity of indicated utility connection. Contact local authority responsible for locating

all existing utilities. Do not perform any excavation until the presence and location of

existing utilities has been determined.

2. Clear all vegetation and other objectionable material from the area required for the

excavation and backfill operations. Disposal of material removed by the clearing operation

shall be approved by the Owner's representative.

C. Provide trenching, excavating, and backfilling necessary for performance of work indicated in

Contract Documents.

D. Excavate to depths indicated on the drawings or as necessary to permit the installation of pipe,

bedding, backfill, structures or appurtenances. Provide a firm, undisturbed, uniform surface in

the bottom of trenches. Where excavation exceeds the required depth, bring the excavation to

proper grade through the use of an approved incompressible backfill material. Store excavated

material and dispose of surplus excavated material.

1. Excavate trench to sufficient depth to permit a minimum of 36" of cover over the top of

the pipe unless otherwise required by pipe elevations indicated on the Drawings. The

trench width shall be 18" plus the diameter of the pipe and/or the largest bell.

E. Trenching and excavation shall be unclassified. No extra will be paid in the event that rock is

encountered.

1. Should rock excavation be required, use only experienced personnel for blasting.

2. Exercise extreme care when blasting with signals of danger given before firing any

charge.

3. Conform to and obey all public authority regulations for the protection of life and

property.

F. Provide sheathing, shoring, dewatering, and cleaning necessary to keep trenches and their

grades in proper condition and to meet applicable codes.

G. Provide a minimum of 6" of No. 67 crushed stone or clean sand bedding, or equal, in the

bottom of the trench to maintain the required grade and continuous support of the bottom

quadrant of the pipe.

H. Upon completion of excavation, and prior to the laying of the pipe, the trench bottom shall be

brought up to the required elevation with min. 6" pipe bedding. Pipe bedding shall be select

material deposited in the trench, and shall be compacted, leveled off, and shaped to obtain a

Construction Set

21 05 00 - 8 SSR-12.41.013.0

smooth compacted bed along the laying length of the pipe. Material for pipe bedding shall

comply with local codes. In absence of local code requirements the bedding shall be bank sand

or select back fill material approved by the Architect. Any material used shall pass a 1/4 inch

screen.

I. Clean and inspect pipe for defects before lowering into trench for assembly. Install pipe in

accordance with provisions of Contract Documents and with the recommendations of the pipe

manufacturer.

1. Ensure pipe is of proper strength and classification for specified service. Discard damaged

or defective pipe discovered during pipe laying operations.

2. Maintain alignment and grade during layout operation. Use acceptable method for

maintaining grade and alignment to produce desired results.

J. Where crushed stone backfill is required, use No. 67 stone, clean sand or equal.

K. After bedding has been shaped and the pipe assembled, place crushed stone carefully around

the pipe and to a point 12" above the pipe. Backfill above this point shall be as described

below:

1. Backfill areas of vehicular traffic shall consist entirely of crushed stone and compacted

crusher run material.

2. Backfill for shoulders of roadways, sidewalk, and slab on grade structures shall consist

entirely of crushed stone.

3. Backfill areas not subject to vehicular traffic may consist of suitable excavated material as

described above.

L. Where crushed stone is not required, suitable excavated material may be utilized. This includes

fine, dry earth or a mixture of earth and shot rock. Rocks larger than 6" in any dimension may

not be included in any portion of the backfill material.

M. Trenches shall be backfilled only after piping has been inspected, tested, and approved by the

Architect. All backfill material shall be placed in the trench either by hand or by approved

mechanical methods. The compaction of backfill material shall be accompanied by tamping,

with hand tools or approved pneumatic tampers, by using vibratory compactors, by puddling, or

by any combination of the three. The method of compaction shall be approved and all

compaction shall be done to the satisfaction of the Architect. Backfill completely around pipe,

including 18" above the pipe, with suitable bank sand, tamped in 4" layers under, around, and

over pipe. Water down backfill as required. The remainder of the backfill shall be select

backfill material tamped at intervals of no more than 12" depths. All materials to be used as

selected material backfill shall be approved by the Architect. If, in the opinion of the Architect,

the excavated material does not meet the requirements of selected material, the Contractor shall

be required to screen the material prior to its use as selected material backfill. Material used in

the upper portion of the backfill or subgrade shall not contain stone, rock, or other material

larger than six inches in its longest dimension. No wood, vegetable matter, or other material

which, in the opinion of the Architect, is unsuitable shall be included in the backfill. The upper

24" of backfill may be water jetted, if desired. Backfill shall be brought up to finish grade

identified on the Architectural Drawings, including additional backfill required to offset

settlement during consolidation.

SSR-12.41.013.0


3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Repair or replace damage caused by cutting or installation of work specified in Division 21.

B. Perform repairs with materials which match existing and install in accordance with the

appropriate section of these specifications.

3.03 FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING

A. Flash and counterflash pipes where penetration of roofs and outside walls occurs. Coordinate

penetration or walls and roof with architectural details and make water and air tight.

3.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Insofar as possible, deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Where deliver

in original packaging is not practical, provide cover and shielding for all items with protective

materials to keep them from being damaged. Use care in loading, transporting, unloading, and

storing to keep items from being damaged.

B. Store items in a clean, dry place, and protect from damage. Equipment may not be staged or

stored outdoors unless intended for outdoor use.

C. Protect nameplates on motors, pumps, and similar equipment. Do not paint or insulate over

nameplate data.

D. Keep dirt and debris out of pipes.

E. Repair, restore, and replace damaged items.

3.05 SLEEVES

A. Floors: Sleeve all pipe penetrations. Extend sleeve 1-1/2" above finished floor, except piping

within fire rated pipe chases. Sleeve shall be flush with underside of floor.

B. Masonry or Concrete Walls: Sleeve all pipe penetrations. Sleeves shall be flush on both sides of

wall.

C. Drywall Partitions: Sleeve all penetrations of piping through fire or smoke rated partitions.

D. Seal voids between outside surface of sleeve and wall, partition or floor. Seals shall be airtight.

E. Install piping and sleeves in strict accordance with applicable U.L. floor or partition assembly

instructions. Coordinate with Division 07 Firestop manufacturer's installation instructions.

F. Penetrations not Sleeved or Firestopped:

1. Seal voids between pipe and partition. Seals shall be airtight.


A. Provide chromium-plated escutcheon plates for exposed uninsulated pipes projecting through

floors and walls in finished spaces. Mechanical rooms, storage rooms, electrical closets and

housekeeping room closets are not considered finished spaces.

Construction Set

21 05 00 - 10 SSR-12.41.013.0

B. Clearance between sleeve and pipe: Minimum of 1/2" or as otherwise dictated by the UL Fire

Resistance Directory.

3.07 CLEANING FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

A. General Cleanup:

1. As work proceeds throughout the construction schedule, clean up dirt, debris, old

materials, etc., and remove from site, keeping premises in neat and clean condition. See

Division 01 of specifications for further requirements.

2. Seepage, discoloration or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, or furnishings

due to Contractor's failure to properly clean piping systems shall be repaired without cost

to the Owner.

B. Factory Finishes:

1. Clean items with factory finishes. Touch up bare places, scratches and other minor

damage to finishes. Use only factory supplied paint of matching color and formula. If

finishes are badly damaged or if there are many damaged, scratched or bare places,

refinish the entire item.

3.08 TESTING FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

A. Test all systems and equipment to demonstrate proper operation to the AHJ, Owner and

Architect.

B. Advise the Architect of scheduled systems testing and system demonstration/operation

schedules so these tests may be witnessed if desired.

C. Correct and retest work found to be defective when tested.

D. Make all repairs to piping systems with new materials. Peening, doping or caulking of joints or

holes will not be acceptable.

E. Test and Balance fire pumps, flow meters and test headers in accordance with applicable

standards. Record results and deliver as part of the project closing file.

F. Test, verify and record standpipe system pressures.

G. Test, verify and record all floor control and test valves and all fire alarm connections for proper

operation.

H. Test and verify all supervised fire valves for proper function and annunciation at the fire alarm

panel. Record and submit proof of testing for Owner's record.

3.09 INFECTION CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate with the Owner the exact requirements for the infection control measures to be

executed and performed during the course of this Project.

B. Prior to execution, present to the Owner for approval a written execution plan for each infection

control measure.

SSR-12.41.013.0


C. Coordinate infection control measures as needed with all other trades and disciplines.

D. Provide documentation of infection control measures to the Owner, as required and specified in

the ICRA.

END OF SECTION

Construction Set

21 05 00 - 12

SSR-12.41.013.0


SSR-12.41.013.0 21 05 20 - 1 Construction Set

SECTION 21 05 20

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, FIRE VALVES AND CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Provide fire suppression/protection components, fire extinguishers, valves and cabinets, as

indicated on the drawings and as herein specified.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping

B. Section 09 96 00 - Painting and Coatings

C. Section 21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression

D. Section 21 13 13 - Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems

E. Division 26: Electrical


A. Refer to Section 21 05 00 for referenced standards and codes.

B. Verify with the AHJ for the latest adopted editions.

1.04 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Comply with local and state licensure requirements for installation of fire protection equipment

and systems.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data and drawings for review in accordance with the requirements of Division

01. Include the following manufacturer's product data with shop drawings:

1. Valves

2. Fire extinguishers

3. Siamese connection

B. Submit product data to Owner's Insuring Agency and AHJ for approval.


A. Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) listed and Factory Mutual (F.M.) approved material.

B. Comply with local fire department standards for hose threads, operating nuts and accessories

for hydrants and siamese connections.

Construction Set 21 05 20 - 2 SSR-12.41.013.0

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Potter-Roemer, Croker, Larsen

B. Potter-Roemer figure numbers are used unless noted otherwise.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. FP-2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER (WALL HUNG - ABC)

1. Extinguisher: #3010, ten pound, multi-purpose dry chemical.

2. U.L. Rating: 4A:60B:C

3. Mounting: Wall mounting bracket.

B. FP-12 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (SIAMESE)

1. Wall mounted connection: #5750-B, 4" x 2-1/2" two-way, polished brass siamese hydrant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation to avoid interference with other systems.

B. Provide power and interlock wiring under Division 26.

3.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND CABINETS

A. Mount top of extinguisher 48" (ADA) above finished floor or as required for ADA compliance.

B. Identify on cabinet with 1-1/4" high red lettering "Fire Extinguisher".

END OF SECTION


SECTION 21 13 13

FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Materials and labor required to completely execute the sprinkler and fire protection work for

this project, as indicated on the drawings and as herein specified including but not limited to:

1. Hydraulic design of fire sprinkler system.

2. Shop drawings.

3. Exterior pipe, fittings and valves.

4. Interior pipe, fittings and valves.

5. Alarm check valves and accessories.

6. Hangers, supports and sleeves.

7. Sprinkler heads and extra sprinkler cabinet(s).

8. Flushing and testing of complete fire sprinkler system, including valves, and test

connections.


A. Division 01: Seismic Requirements

B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping

C. Section 21 05 00 - Common Work Results For Fire Suppression

D. Section 21 05 20 - Fire Extinguishers

E. Division 26: Electrical


A. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

B. NFPA-101: Life Safety Code

1.04 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS

A. Comply with local and state licensure requirements for installation of fire suppression systems.

1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design 100% hydraulically calculated, automatic sprinkler system as applicable in accordance

with Owner's insuring agency guidelines, NFPA 13, and state and local code requirements.


B. Design system to serve entire project unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

C. Design system with sprinkler zones as indicated on drawings. Pipe/mains sizes indicated on

drawing shall not be reduced without engineer of record approval.

D. Base design on the following criteria:

1. Ordinary hazard Group 2 for trash rooms, loading dock, concourse areas, staging areas,

event storage rooms restaurant and retail spaces: 0.20 GPM/SF over most remote area of

2000 SF.

2. Minimum excess pressure of 10 psi including required hose stream allowance and

sprinkler requirements.

3. Maximum pipe velocity of 20 feet/second or as limited by insuring agent.

4. Hose stream allowance based on occupancy classification of remote area in addition to

sprinkler demand or as required by Owner's insuring agency:

a. Ordinary hazard - 250GPM

5. A minimum of 18 inches clearance between bottom of sprinkler deflector and top of

storage shelving.

6. Include a 3/4" ball drip for all types of fire department connections. Route discharge to

outside of building.

7. Base design on results of a recent flow test, not more than one month old, to determine the

adequacy of the water supply at the project site. Submit flow test location and results with

sprinkler system drawings and calculations.

8. Include dry pendant type sprinkler heads located within cooler and freezer boxes with

recess seat located within a conditioned space.

9. Use standard coverage sprinkler heads. Extended coverage heads shall not be used.

1.06 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Contract Drawings show a hydraulically calculated automatic wet pipe sprinkler system at the

most remote zone. Drawings specifically include:

1. Pipe sizes based on hydraulic calculations

2. Center to center dimensions for head location

SSR-12.41.013.0

21 13 13 - 3

Construction Set

3. One calculated area per zone

4. Node identification for the calculated areas

5. Dimensions from source of service

6. Head types

7. Construction details, including details for pipe hangers and pipe hanger spacing.

B. The Contractor shall provide a complete 100% Hydraulic Calculated automatic wet pipe

sprinkler system for the entire building.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare complete detailed working drawings and calculations for fire protection system.

B. Submit drawings and calculations to the State and Local Fire Marshal and to the Owner's

Insuring Agency for approval.

C. After receiving approval from State, Local Fire Marshal and Owner's Insuring Agent, submit

shop drawings and calculations for review prior to start of installation. Submitted shop

drawings shall bear State, Local Fire Marshal's and Owner's Insuring Agent approval stamp.

Sprinkler installation shall not commence prior to obtaining approval of the listed authorities.

D. Purpose of shop drawing is to convey that contractor understands intent of Contract Documents

and to facilitate coordination of sprinkler system with HVAC ductwork, piping and other

trades.

E. Upon completion of required corrections, if any, verified by the engineer, written certification

by the engineer stating that the fire sprinkler system and the water supply (source shall be

indicated) is installed in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements shall be provided. The

certification shall state that the sprinkler system design and installation comply with NFPA 13

(year of edition must be given) requirements. Approval of the fire sprinkler system (both design

and installation) is mandatory before permission to occupy the area protected by the fire

sprinkler system can be given by the state.

F. Submit for review detailed shop drawings and product data for the sprinkler system in

accordance with the requirements of Division 01.

G. Include the following manufacturer's product data with shop drawings:

1. Sprinkler heads

2. Valves

3. Pipe and fittings

4. Hangers

5. Water flow, pressure and tamper switches

H. Submit shop drawing and submittal data to Owner's Insuring Agency for approval.



A. Use only Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) listed and Factory Mutual (F.M.) approved material.

B. The automatic sprinkler system installer shall provide a permanently attached nameplate

located at the controlling riser, indicating the location and the discharge densities over designed

areas of discharge including gallons per minute and residual pressure, and hose stream demand

supplied by the sprinkler piping.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

the section with a minimum of 5 years of documented experience.

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories

(UL) or testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.

1.09 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS

A. Include fire sprinkler as constructed drawings in project close-out documents.

B. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 VALVES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Nibco, Crane, Stockham, Grinnell, Mueller, Watts, Hersey, Febco,

Ames. Nibco model numbers are used to establish required level of product quality.

B. Outside System Valves:

1. Double detector check valves: With bronze by-pass meter or local water department

standard.

2. Gate Valves:

a. Nibco No. F-607-OTS, U.L. Listed and F.M. approved, bolted bonnet, outside screw

and yoke, solid wedge, pregrooved for tamper switch mounting, 175 lb wwp.

b. Nibco No. F-609, U.L. Listed and F.M. approved, bolted bonnet, non-rising stem,

solid wedge, 175 lb wwp.

c. For direct buried valves, provide cast iron roadway box extended to grade.

3. Indicator Posts:

a. Nibco No. NIP1A, vertical post U.L. listed and F.M. approved. Furnish cast iron

barrel, valve stem and post of proper length to provide the required minimum cover

over top of pipe.

C. Interior Valves:

1. Alarm Check Valve: Gem Model F20, F200, or F2001 with F211 retard chamber, divided

seat ring, rubber-faced clapper, U.L. listed and F.M. approved.

2. Check Valves:

SSR-12.41.013.0

21 13 13 - 5

Construction Set

a. All check valves on discharge side of fire pump shall be non-slam type

b. Nibco No. F-908-W, U.L. Listed and F.M. approved, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing,

renewable seat and disc, 175 lb. wwp

c. Nibco No. KW-900-W, U.L. Listed, F.M. approved, wafer style, rubber seat, spring

actuated, 175 lb wwp.

3. Gate Valves:

a. Nibco F-607-OTS, U.L.-F.M. approved flanged pattern outside screw and yoke, 175

psi WP. 2" and smaller shall be O.S.&Y., iron body, flanged.

4. Butterfly Valves:

a. Nibco WD3510-8 or LD3510-8, wafer or lug style, U.L. Listed, F.M. approved, 250

lb wwp, lug style 200 psi wwp dead end rated, internal tamper switch.

5. Globe and Angle Valves (Drains and Flow Regulation):

a. 175 PSI minimum working pressure. 2" and smaller: bronze, renewable composition

disc, screwed. 2-1/2" and larger: iron body, bronze mounted, renewable composition

disc, flanged.

6. Ball Valves:

a. Nibco No. KT-505-8 or G-505-8, threaded or grooved, U.L. listed, F.M. approved,

bronze body, three piece, internal tamper switches, 300 psi wwp.

7. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch.

2.02 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Double Detector Check Valve: UL listed and FM approved, ASSE and USC approved double

check backflow preventer consisting of two resilient seated full flow isolation valves, two

independently operating, spring loaded poppet-type internally epoxy coated cast iron check

valves and four resilient seated test cocks for field testing. Stainless steel springs and corrosion

resistant materials shall be used throughout. Working pressure rating of 175 PSI. Preventer

assembly to be line size or size as called for on drawings. Backflow preventer shall be a Watts,

Silver Bullet, or Febco mount 4 foot maximum above the floor or grade.

2.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Underground Pipe and Fittings:

1. Ductile Iron Pipe:

a. Acceptable Manufacturers: U.S. Pipe, Clow, American.

b. Minimum Class 52, cement-lined ductile iron in accordance with AWWA

C151/ANSI A21.51. Provide bituminous seal coat on inside and outside of pipe.

2. Joints and Fittings:

a. Cement-lined, ductile iron.(AWWA C110/ANSI 21.10 and ANSI/AWWA

C104/A21.4)


b. Push-on joints (AWWA C111/ANSI 21.11). Where joint restraint is needed, provide

restrained push-on joint pipe and fittings in accordance with ANSI/AWWA

C151/A21.51 and C111/A21.11.

c. Mechanical joint, bell with flange, cast iron gland, rubber gasket and bolts and nuts,

U.L. listed and F.M. approved. (ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10)

3. Material used shall be approved by local code authorities.

B. Interior Pipe and Fittings:

1. Schedule 40 ASTM-135, electric-resistance welded steel pipe for pipe sizes 2" and

smaller.

2. Schedule 10 ASTM-135, electric-resistance welded steel pipe suitable for roll grooving

for pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger.

3. Sprinkler piping and fitting shall be galvanized for dry pipe systems, piping exposed to

weather and in corrosive environment.

4. Fittings:

a. Mechanical couplings: Roll or cut groove rigid type by Victaulic, Central Grooved, or

Anvil.

b. Class 125 in accordance with ANSI B16.4 or Class 250 in accordance with ANSI

B16.3 cast iron sprinkler fittings - screwed, flanged, or grooved-end.

c. All fittings shall be by the same manufacturer.

C. Drain Piping:

1. Schedule 40, A106 or A120, galvanized pipe

2. Fittings: Class 250 malleable iron, screwed with galvanized coating

2.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Anvil, B-line, Viking, Reliable, Empire, Fee and Mason. Anvil

model numbers are used to establish level of product quality.

B. Provide U.L. Listed and F.M. approved hangers.

C. Hangers:

1. Anvil #260 MSS, Type 1 for pipe 2" through 12"

2. Anvil #69 for pipe 1/2" through 2"

D. Clamps:

1. Riser Clamps: Anvil #261, MSS Type 8, at floor slab penetrations to support risers

2. C-Clamps: Anvil #92 with retainer clip, MSS Type 23

3. Malleable Beam Clamps: Anvil Figure #218, MSS Type 30

SSR-12.41.013.0

21 13 13 - 7

Construction Set

E. Inserts:

1. Concrete insert: Anvil Figure #281, MSS Type 18, universal concrete insert, adequately

sized and correctly positioned to support full load.

2. Lightweight concrete: Anvil #285.

3. Continuous Concrete Insert: Anvil Powerstrut #PS-349, pregalvanized.

4. Power Insert: HILTI HDI expansion anchor. Use in conjunction with all thread rods.

5. Power inserts shall not be used in post tension construction unless approved by Structural

Engineer.

2.05 SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Reliable Sprinkler Company, Automatic Sprinkler Company,

Viking, Tyco Fire Products.

B. Slip-type escutcheons will not be accepted.

C. Sprinkler heads shall be U.L. Listed and F.M. approved. Concealed type quick response

sprinkler head may be U.L. listed only.

D. Provide quick response heads in all light hazard areas.

E. Provide sprinkler heads as follows:

1. Brass U-Right: Tyco TY-FRB, bulb type, 1/2" orifice, upright. Quick response Tyco TY-

FRB.

2. Provide polyester coated heads in corrosive environments and exterior over hangs.

F. Provide the following sprinkler heads of the proper type, rating and spacing. Appropriate must

be compatible with room finishes. Slip-type escutcheons will not be accepted.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Reliable Sprinkler Company - no substitutions. Reliable model

numbers are indicated below unless noted otherwise.

2. Brass-upright: Model G, bulb type 1/2" orifice. Quick response: Model FIFR, bulb type,

1/2" orifice.

G. Provide one sprinkler cabinet with 24 extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler wrench for emergency

use. Locate cabinet in maintenance area. Provide a minimum of two extra sprinkler heads for

each type of sprinkler head used for the project. Add an extra sprinkler cabinet if necessary to

house the spare heads.

2.06 SWITCHES

A. Provide tamper switches for all fire/sprinkler system control valves unless noted otherwise.

B. Flow Switch: Notifier Model No. WFD-6 vane type flow switch with pneumatic retard

adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds, complete with double pole, double throw micro feature.


C. Tamper Switch: Notifier Model No. SGV for 4" and larger, Potter-Roemer Model No. OSYSU-

A2 for pipe size less than 4", tamper switch double pole, double throw micro feature for 1/2-

inch to 12-inch valves.

2.07 WATER FLOW ALARMS

A. Connect water flow alarms to alarm check valves with bell located on outside of building.

Provide other flow switches as shown on drawings and connect to fire alarm system.

B. Drain Valves: Provide drain valves as required by NFPA 13.

2.08 INSPECTORS TEST ASSEMBLY

A. Cabinet: Potter-Roemer #1812-C white baked enamel, minimum 6-1/2" deep, steel box with

full acrylic panel.

B. Test Module: Victaulic "Test Master" Style 718, threaded with combination sight glass and 1/2"

orifice.

C. Finish: Paint exterior cabinet frame to match wall surface and color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation to avoid interference with other systems.

B. Provide power and interlock wiring under and in accordance with Division 26.

3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Connect to water main as shown on drawings. Install concrete anchor and thrust block at each

change in direction of pipe. Provide restrained push-on or mechanical joints in ductile iron pipe

as needed.

B. Install underground pipe work to provide a minimum cover of 2.5 feet; 3 foot cover under

drives and roads, or below frost line as required per NFPA 24 Figure A-8-1.1., whichever is

greater.

C. Flush the fire service mains before connecting to sprinkler branch piping system.

D. Exterior underground piping shall be buried with a permanent, bright colored, continuous

printed plastic tape. Tape shall be intended for direct burial and buried directly above fire

protection main. Tape shall be 6" wide, 4 mils thick. Tape shall be printed with proper

identification of service located below.

E. Install sprinkler pipe a minimum of 12" above top of ceiling to allow for removal of ceiling tile

and lighting fixtures and for access to equipment above the ceiling.

F. Support vertical pipe risers at 12' maximum distance or at least once at each floor.

G. Use hanger types as specified in Part 2 above. This shall overrule hanger types outlined in

NFPA 13.

SSR-12.41.013.0

21 13 13 - 9

Construction Set

H. Hanger spacing shall be in accordance with NFPA 13.

I. Provide hangers on all arm outs of 12" or more.

J. Seal penetrations of fire rated walls and floors in accordance with U.L. Fire Resistance Index

for Through-Penetration Firestop Systems. Coordinate requirements with Division 07.

K. Provide trapeze type hangers where necessary to support pipe when structural steel is not

directly above for support.

3.03 SPRINKLERS

A. Install sprinkler heads and required piping in areas such as concealed spaces, and other special

areas and spaces as required by NFPA 13, NFPA 101, and IBC.

B. Provide drain valves, pipes and test connections as required by NFPA 13. Pipe drain lines and

test connections to outside building or as shown and detailed on Drawings. Originate test lines

from most hydraulically remote point of each sprinkler zone.

C. Install sprinkler heads centerline of corridors and locate in the center of the ceiling tiles. Install

sprinkler heads in other designated spaces in the center of the ceiling tiles and symmetrically

locate with other heads within the ceiling. Do not install sprinkler heads in other locations any

closer than six inches to any ceiling grid or wall.

D. Provide head guards on heads below 7'-6" above floor or walkway and where heads may be

subject to damage.

E. When exposed sprinkler piping is painted the installed sprinkler heads shall be bagged and

banded to protect the sprinkler heads. Do not use tape for bagging the sprinkler heads. If tape or

paint gets on the sprinkler head, the sprinkler head will lose its listing and shall be replaced.

F. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plans for exact head locations.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 22 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL






A. Perform Work specified in Division 22 in accordance with the codes and standards listed below

of the latest applicable edition adopted by the authority having jurisdiction. Where these

Specifications are more stringent, they shall take precedence. In case of conflict, obtain a

decision from the Architect.

1. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code


3. U.L. Fire Resistance Index

4. ASTM E814-08B: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems

5. IBC: International Building Code, with Mechanical and Plumbing Codes

6. NFPA 30: Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

7. NFPA 55: Standard for Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites



10. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

11. NFPA 99: Health Care Facilities Code.

12. NFPA 101A: Guide on Alternative Approaches to Life Safety

13. NFPA 101B: Standard on Means of Egress for Buildings and Structures

14. NFPA 105: Recommended Practice for the Installation of Smoke Control Door

Assemblies

15. NFPA 110: Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems

16. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Building Construction, Alteration and Demolition

Operations

17. Special regulations, supplements, and amendments of the State and/or local authorities




A. AGA: American Gas Association

B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

C. ASME: American Society for Mechanical Engineers

D. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

E. AWWA: American Water Works Association

F. MSS: Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry

G. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers' Association

H. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association

I. UL: Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 01 including required

number of copies.

B. Include Products as specified in the individual sections of Division 22.

C. Group submittals to include complete information of related systems, products, and accessories

in a single submittal.

D. Prepare shop drawings completely independent of the Engineer of Record's CADD files.

Should the Contractor or Vendor wish to use the Engineer of Record's CADD files or model as

the basis for developing their shop drawings, a release form, obtainable from the Engineer or

Architect, must be signed.

E. Submit copies of shop drawings in accordance with Division 01, for plumbing equipment and

piping systems including:

1. Concrete pads and foundations including anchor bolt and sleeve locations.

2. Prepare and submit coordination drawings specified herein. Facilitate the coordination

effort with other trades, specifically Divisions 21, 23, 26 and 28 and include, but not be

limited to the following:

a. Boiler Room

b. Electrical Switchgear Rooms

c. AHU Equipment Rooms

d. Mechanical Rooms

3. Coordinated room layouts shall include:

a. Room dimensions

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 05 00 - 3

Construction Set

b. Support column locations

c. Locations and dimensions of equipment foundations and pads required.

d. Locations and dimensions of equipment and apparatus, including electrical control

panels and starters, and service and coil pull areas.

e. Dimensioned floor drain locations.

f. Locations of wall mounted equipment

g. Trench and drain locations and sizes.

h. Sleeve locations in mechanical and equipment rooms.

i. AHU and duct layouts in AHU equipment rooms.

j. Piping 2" and larger.

k. Conduit 2" and larger.

4. Roof Layouts including:

a. Air intakes.

b. Plumbing Vents through roof.

c. Boiler and heater flue stacks.

d. Exposed ductwork.



2. Illustrations and wiring diagrams.



4. Capacities stated in the terms specified

5. Performance and rating data for plumbing equipment and performance curves for pumps.


A. Lead Free: All wetted surface of pipe, fittings and fixtures in potable water systems shall have a

weighted average lead content equal to or less than 0.25% per the Safe Drinking Water Act

(Section 1417) as amended January 4, 2011.

B. NSF Compliance: NSF/ANSI 61 and/or NSF/ANSI 372 for valve materials for potable-water

service. Valves for domestic water must be 3rd Party Certified.


A. Layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatical and intended to show relative positions and

arrangement of piping and equipment. Coordinate work with other trades and with

measurements obtained at the job site, as applicable, prior to installation. Generally, install


work in locations shown on Drawings. Provide necessary rises, drops, and offsets to fit in the

available space unless prevented by Project conditions.

B. If prevented by project conditions, prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work,

including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of the Architect

before proceeding.



work which will cause interference or interruption in advance with Owner and all affected

trades.


F. Keep roads and other spaces clear of materials and debris.




as applicable, means of access using duct, wall, or ceiling access doors.

I. Install piping to leave sufficient space for AHJ inspection of wall construction. Coordinate pipe

routing with other trades including but not limited to Divisions 21, 23, 26 and 28.



work.

1.08 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prior to commencement of installation, assist in preparation of coordination drawings for work

under this Division, as specified in Division 01. Fully cooperate with persons coordinating and

performing work under other Divisions.

B. Drawings shall not be formally submitted but shall be kept on site for reference. Notify the

Architect of conflicts that cannot be resolved.

C. Coordination drawings shall be prepared to include the following:

1. Drawn to a scale of 1/4" = 1' - 0".

2. Room dimensions.

3. Sheet size matching contract documents.

4. Show plumbing equipment, structural columns and beams.

5. Ductwork sizes with bottom elevation from finished floor.

6. Concrete pad and foundation layouts including anchor bolt and sleeve locations.

7. Dimensioned floor drain locations.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 05 00 - 5

Construction Set

8. Wall mounted equipment.

9. Piping 2" and larger.

10. Suspended equipment and piping.

11. Backflow preventers.

12. Floor to floor and ceiling heights.


A. The Contract Documents depict plumbing systems which are intended to be complete and

functioning systems. All products, materials, and labor necessary to render a fully functional

system to fulfill the design intent shown on the documents shall be provided by the Contractor.










record drawings to the Architect in a form suitable for reproduction. Comply with the

provisions and requirements of Division 01.

B. Record drawings shall reflect all changes made to the Contract Documents, whether generated



C. Deliver record drawings to Architect within 30 days of Substantial Completion.


A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01, but provide a minimum of three sets.

B. Manuals shall include clear and comprehensive instructions with appropriate graphics and


this Division.

C. Copies of reviewed submittals for furnished equipment shall be included.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




B. Use galvanized members installed in areas of high humidity or condensation, and outside.

C. Furnish other members with shop coat of red primer.

D. Retouch primer after field welding.



for vents, pipe, drains, and ducts.

B. Materials:

1. Sheetmetal: 24-gauge minimum ASTM A525, Class G90

2. Sheet Lead: 3 pounds per square foot

3. Stainless Steel: Minimum 20-gauge

4. Sheet Copper: 24 oz/sf

C. Vent Stack Fitting: Josam 1830 or Jay R. Smith 1750




items served.









service or adjustment. Examples of such equipment needing access are valves, and equipment

needing periodic or replacement maintenance.




1. For masonry and drywall construction: Milcor Style M

2. For plastered masonry walls and ceiling: Milcor Style K

3. For ceramic tile or glazed structural tile: Use stainless steel panels

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 05 00 - 7

Construction Set

2.04 PIPE ENCLOSURES

A. For exposed vertical piping in kitchen: 18-gauge stainless steel (Type 302) with No. 4 finish.

1. Extend from 2" above ceiling to equipment or island partition

2. Size covers to contain number of pipes served

B. Minimize number of covers by enclosing maximum number of pipes in each drop.

C. Anchor to equipment or partition.

D. Fasten seams and joints with stainless steel pop rivets.

E. Provide 1-1/2" ceiling flange as closure.

2.05 SLEEVES

A. Materials:

1. Concrete Floors, Concrete and Masonry Walls: 18-gauge galvanized sheetmetal.

2. Drywall Partitions: 18-gauge galvanized steel sheet metal.





radically at 120 degree spacing to the sleeve and shall be installed with the rods embedded in

the concrete slab.



partitions or ceilings in finished spaces or areas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. Contractor shall review Divisions 31 and 33 and shall perform excavation and backfilling in

accordance with the most stringent requirements. Contractor shall request clarification before

proceeding if there are conflicting instructions.

B. Contract Documents show the approximate location of underground utilities known to exist in

the area of construction. Contractor shall determine the exact location of utilities.

1. Locate and uncover existing utilities which require new connections before trenching in

the vicinity of indicated utility connection.

2. Clear all vegetation and other objectionable material from the area required for the

excavation and backfill operations. Disposal of material removed by the clearing operation

shall be approved by the Owner's representative.


C. Provide trenching, excavating, and backfilling necessary for performance of work indicated in

Contract Documents.

D. Excavate to depths indicated on the drawings or as necessary to permit the installation of pipe,

bedding, backfill, structures or appurtenances. Provide a firm, undisturbed, uniform surface in

the bottom of trenches. Where excavation exceeds the required depth, bring the excavation to

proper grade through the use of an approved incompressible backfill material. Store excavated

material and dispose of surplus excavated material.

1. Excavate trench to sufficient depth to permit a minimum of 36" of cover over the top of

the pipe unless otherwise required by pipe elevations indicated on the Drawings. The

trench width shall be 18" plus the diameter of the pipe and/or the largest bell.

E. Trenching and excavation shall be unclassified. No extra will be paid in the event that rock is

encountered.

1. Should rock excavation be required, use only experienced personnel for blasting.

2. Exercise extreme care when blasting with signals of danger given before firing any

charge.

3. Conform to and obey all public authority regulations for the protection of life and

property.

F. Provide sheathing, shoring, dewatering, and cleaning necessary to keep trenches and their

grades in proper condition and to meet applicable codes.

G. Provide a minimum of 6" of No. 67 crushed stone or clean sand bedding, or equal, in the

bottom of the trench to maintain the required grade and continuous support of the bottom

quadrant of the pipe. On bell and spigot piping, dig bell holes so bottom of bells do not support

pipe.

H. Upon completion of excavation, and prior to the laying of the pipe, the trench bottom shall be

brought up to the required elevation with min. 6" pipe bedding. Pipe bedding shall be select

material deposited in the trench, and shall be compacted, leveled off, and shaped to obtain a

smooth compacted bed along the laying length of the pipe. Material for pipe bedding shall

comply with local codes. In absence of local code requirements the bedding shall be bank sand

or select back fill material approved by the Architect. Any material used shall pass a 1/4 inch

screen.

I. Clean and inspect pipe for defects before lowering into trench for assembly. Install pipe in

accordance with provisions of Contract Documents and with the recommendations of the pipe

manufacturer.

1. Ensure pipe is of proper strength and classification for specified service. Discard damaged

or defective pipe discovered during pipe laying operations.

2. Maintain alignment and grade during layout operation. Use acceptable method for

maintaining grade and alignment to produce desired results.

J. Where crushed stone backfill is required, use No. 67 stone, clean sand or equal.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 05 00 - 9

Construction Set

K. After bedding has been shaped and the pipe assembled, place crushed stone carefully around

the pipe and to a point 12" above the pipe. Backfill above this point shall be as described

below:

1. Backfill areas of vehicular traffic shall consist entirely of crushed stone and compacted

crusher run material.

2. Backfill for shoulders of roadways, sidewalk, and slab on grade structures shall consist

entirely of crushed stone.

3. Backfill areas not subject to vehicular traffic may consist of suitable excavated material as

described above.

L. Where crushed stone is not required, suitable excavated material may be utilized. This includes

fine, dry earth or a mixture of earth and shot rock. Rocks larger than 6" in any dimension may

not be included in any portion of the backfill material.

M. Trenches shall be backfilled only after piping has been inspected, tested, and approved by the

Architect. All backfill material shall be placed in the trench either by hand or by approved

mechanical methods. The compaction of backfill material shall be accompanied by tamping,

with hand tools or approved pneumatic tampers, by using vibratory compactors, by puddling, or

by any combination of the three. The method of compaction shall be approved and all

compaction shall be done to the satisfaction of the Architect. Backfill completely around pipe,

including 18" above the pipe, with suitable bank sand, tamped in 4" layers under, around, and

over pipe. Water down backfill as required. The remainder of the backfill shall be select

backfill material tamped at intervals of no more than 12" depths. All materials to be used as

selected material backfill shall be approved by the Architect. If, in the opinion of the Architect,

[]the excavated material does not meet the requirements of selected material, the Contractor

shall be required to screen the material prior to its use as selected material backfill. Material

used in the upper portion of the backfill or subgrade shall not contain stone, rock, or other

material larger than six inches in its longest dimension. No wood, vegetable matter, or other

material which, in the opinion of the Architect, is unsuitable shall be included in the backfill.

The upper 24" of backfill may be water jetted, if desired. Backfill shall be brought up to finish

grade identified on the Architectural Drawings, including additional backfill required to offset

settlement during consolidation.






A. Counterflash pipes where penetration of roofs and outside walls occur.

3.04 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OWNER

A. Connect or install equipment shown on plumbing drawings that requires plumbing connections.


B. Provide piping, shutoff valves, unions, and other piping appurtenances required for a complete

installation. Provide backflow preventers and/or pressure reducing valves where required by the

equipment design or local code. All components shall be line size unless noted otherwise.


A. Insofar as possible, deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Where

delivery in original packaging is not practical, provide cover and shielding for all items with

protective materials to keep them from being damaged. Use care in loading, transporting,

unloading, and storing to keep items from being damaged.

B. Store items in a clean, dry place, and protect from damage. Plumbing equipment may not be

staged or stored outdoors unless intended for outdoor use.


nameplate data.

D. Protect plumbing fixtures and brass or chromium plated trim, valves and piping from damage.

Cover fixtures during work of finishing trades.

E. Keep dirt and debris out of pipes.

F. Repair, restore, and replace damaged items.

G. Cover factory finished equipment during work of finished trades.

3.06 SLEEVES


within pipe chases. Sleeve shall be flush with underside of floor.


wall.

C. Drywall Partitions: Sleeve all penetrations of piping in systems over 160 degree F.


E. Install piping, insulation and sleeves in strict accordance with applicable U.L. Fire Resistance

Index assembly and with firestop manufacturer's installation instructions for floor or partition

penetrations. Coordinate with Division 07.





floors or wall in finished spaces. Mechanical rooms, storage rooms, electric closets and

housekeeping closets are not considered finished spaces.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 05 00 - 11

Construction Set

B. Clearance between Sleeve and Pipe: Minimum of 1/2" for hot piping and 1" for cold piping or

as otherwise dictated by the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

3.08 CLEANING PLUMBING SYSTEMS

A. General Cleanup:

1. Upon completion of contract and progressively as work proceeds, clean up dirt, debris, old

materials, etc., and remove from site, keeping premises in neat and clean condition to

satisfaction of the Architect. See Division 01 of specifications for further requirements.


due to Contractor's failure to properly clean piping systems shall be repaired without cost

to the Owner.






C. Domestic Water System:

1. Flush system progressively by opening building operable valves, faucets and hose bibs

and permitting flow to continue from each unit until water runs clear.

2. Sterilize system in accordance with requirements of State Department of Public Health by

the following method or other methods acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

a. Introduce chlorine or a solution of calcium or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly

and apply sterilizing agent at a rate of 50 ppm of chlorine as determined by residual

chlorine tests at ends of lines. Open and close all valves while system is being

chlorinated.

b. After sterilizing agent has been applied and left standing for 24 hours, test for

residual chlorine at ends of lines. If test indicates there is less than 25 ppm, repeat

sterilizing process.

c. After system has been standing 24 hours and test indicates at least 25 ppm of residual

chlorine, flush out system until all traces of chemical used are removed.

3. Have local health department check and approve system before connecting it to existing

water system.

4. If the domestic water system is sterilized more than 24 days prior to the owner/user taking

beneficial occupancy, the entire water system shall be re-sterilized so that it is tested clean

as noted above at the time of occupancy.

a. All piping, dead legs, safety showers, eyewashes, and faucets shall be opened and

thoroughly flushed for at least 15 minutes prior to re-sterilization.

5. The domestic water system shall be tested for the presence of Legionella by a third party

testing laboratory certified and experienced in Legionella testing prior to the owner taking

occupancy. The location and results of testing must be documented and presented to the

owner.


6. If only a portion of the domestic water system was opened for repair or other construction

such that the system was subjected to water pressure changes or stagnation, the system or

portions thereof shall be thoroughly flushed and sterilized by high temperature flushing or

chlorination as appropriate. High temperature flushing shall be performed for at least 5

minutes and at temperatures as recommended by the CDC.

3.09 TESTING PLUMBING SYSTEMS

A. Test all systems and equipment installed to demonstrate proper operation.

B. Advise the Architect of scheduled systems testing and completed system

demonstration/operation schedules so that he may witness, if desired.

C. Correct and retest work found defective when tested.

D. Make repairs to piping systems with new materials. Peening, doping, or caulking of joints or


E. Domestic Water Piping: Test hot and cold water piping systems upon completion of rough-in,

before fixtures are connected, at a hydrostatic pressure of 125 psig or 150% of working

pressure whichever is greater for a period of two hours.

F. Flush Valves: Test all flush valves for proper operation.

G. Bed Pan Washers: Test all bed pan washers for proper operation.

H. Drainage and Vent System:

1. Test plug opening to permit system to be filled with water, and subject system to 10 foot

head of water pressure. System shall hold water for 30 minutes with a drop in water level

not to exceed 4 inches in a 4 inch diameter standpipe, and without visible leakage.

2. If system is tested in sections, a minimum head of 10 feet shall apply.

I. All plumbing equipment and systems must be balanced by a certified third party as noted in

Division 23 Testing and Balancing requirements.

J. Records of Testing: Maintain records of system testing and results thereof. Deliver results as

part of the project closing file and on an intermediate basis as requested by the Architect.

3.10 INFECTION CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate with the Owner the exact requirements for the infection control measures to be

executed and performed during the course of this Project.

B. Prior to execution, present to the Owner for approval a written execution plan for each infection

control measure.

C. Coordinate infection control measures as needed with all other trades and disciplines.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 05 00 - 13

Construction Set

D. Provide documentation of infection control measures to the Owner, as required and specified in

the ICRA.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 22 05 23

VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Valves for plumbing systems.


A. Section 22 11 16 - Domestic Water Piping

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for review in accordance with the requirements of Division 01. Valves

used or indicated to be used in domestic potable water systems must be lead free in accordance

with the Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act effective January 4, 2014.





1. NSF Compliance: NSF/ANSI 61 and/or NSF/ANSI 372 for valve materials for potable-

water service. Valves for domestic water must be 3rd Party Certified.

B. Boiler Valves: ASME Boiler Code Specifications.

C. Valve bodies, shells, and seats: Factory tested.

D. Bronze Body Valves:

1. Materials for pressure containing parts: ASTM B-62 (less than 200 psi), B-61 (200 psi and

above)

2. Design, workmanship, testing: MSS-SP-80

E. Iron Body Valves:

1. Materials for pressure containing parts: ASTM A126, Grade B

2. Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions: ANSI B16.10

3. Design, workmanship, testing: MSS-SP-70, 71

F. Butterfly Valves:

1. Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions: MSS-SP-67

G. Pressure Reducing Valves:


1. Pressure reducing valves 2" and less to have bronze body construction meeting ASSE

Standard B356, ANSI A112.26.2.

2. Pressure reducing valves 2-1/2" and up to be cast iron construction, ASTM A126 Class B.

Valve to be epoxy coated inside and outside. Unit to have low flow bronze bypass valve.

H. Valve Stems: ASTM B584-78, Class 13C (cast silicon brass), ASTM B-371-79, Alloy A (rolled

silicon brass), or other material equally resistant to dezincification.

I. Pressure Castings: Free of impregnating materials.

J. Valve name or trademark and working pressure stamped or cast into body.

K. Standard for 200 PSI and 300 PSI valves with metallic seats: ASTM B61-76.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Iron Body valves: Nibco, Apollo, Stockham, Crane, Milwaukee, Dezurik, Mueller or Kennedy

B. Bronze Body Valves: Nibco, Apollo, Stockham, Milwaukee, Dezurik or Kennedy

C. Butterfly Valves: Nibco, Apollo, Stockham, Crane, Milwaukee, Mueller, Victaulic (grooved

only) or Dezurik

D. Ball Valves: Nibco, Apollo, Watts, Milwaukee, Jamesbury or Hammond

E. Pressure Reducing Valves: Watts, Apollo, Nibco.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Nibco Figure numbers are indicated below unless noted otherwise:

B. Check Valves:

1. Domestic Water:

a. 2" and less, Figure T-413-Y-LF, or S-413-Y-LF, threaded or solder, Class 150

b. 2-1/2" and up: Iron body, bronze disc, stainless steel spring, flanged, Class 125, Lead

Free, globe style, F-910-LF.

C. Ball Valves:

1. Domestic Water:

a. 2" and less, Figure T585-80-LF or S-585-80-LF, 2-piece, full port, 600 psi, WOG,

PTFE seats

b. 2-1/2" and up, Watts G4000-FDA-Lead Free-200 psi, 2 piece, full port, cast iron,

flanged, heat fused epoxy coating, stainless steel ball and stem, PTFE seat, Class 125

meeting MSS-SP-72-92 or equal.

2. Provide ball valves with locking handles.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 05 23 - 3

Construction Set

3. Provide extended lever for insulated service.

D. Butterfly Valves - 2-1/2" and Up:

1. Domestic Water: Figure LD-2000, ductile iron body, lug type, 200 psi, Class 125, EPDM

liner and seals, and aluminum bronze disc, meeting AWWA C504-88.

2. Butterfly valves rated bubble tight for dead end service at full pressure in both directions

without the need for downstream blind flange.

3. Provide hand wheel and closed housing worm gear on valves 6 inches and larger. Provide

clamp lock hand lever operators on valves less than 6 inches.

4. Grooved piping: Victaulic Series 608N, brass body, rated bi-directionally to 300 psi,

aluminum bronze disc, fluoroelastomer seat, -20 degrees F to +250 degrees F temperature

range.

E. Pressure Reducing Valve:

1. 2" and less, Watts Series U5 or 223 Lead Free with integral or attached strainer. 300 psi

inlet pressure and bronze body construction.

2. 2-1/2" and up, Watts ACV 115E Lead Free automatic control valves with a 263 reducing

valve. 400 psi inlet pressure with stainless steel seats. Cast iron body with epoxy coating

inside and outside.

F. Valve Connections: Two inches and smaller - threaded; 2-1/2 inches and larger - flanged.

G. Provide chain operators for gate valves, butterfly valves, and plug cocks located in mechanical

rooms as required by plumbing plans or where valves are mounted above 7'-0" A.F.F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish and install valves in each piping connection at each piece of plumbing equipment to

allow equipment to be isolated from piping systems.

B. Furnish and install valves in all piping systems to isolate each floor or main section of the

building. Install sufficient number of valves to minimize the portion of the system which must

be shut down for service or maintenance purposes.

C. Furnish and install valves above each group of plumbing fixtures.

D. Install valves in water piping systems so ordinary maintenance work can be performed on the

equipment that the valves isolate, without having to drain the system beyond the valve.

E. All valves above drywall access panels shall be located within one foot of access panels

including valves located above ceilings.

F. Locate valves so as to be easily accessible by maintenance personnel.

G. Pressure reducing valves shall be installed on equipment as required per manufacturer’s

recommendation and on main lines serving any facility when the static pressure exceeds 80 psi

as required by the State or Local Plumbing Code.


H. All plumbing systems including pumps, domestic water piping and valve settings and hot water

recirculation systems must be tested and balanced. Coordinate with Section 23 05 93 for test

and balance requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 05 29

HANGERS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Hangers for plumbing piping


A. Section 22 11 16 - Domestic Water Piping

B. Section 22 13 16 - Storm And Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping

C. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for review in accordance with the requirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Anvil, Carpenter and Patterson, Fee and Mason, B-Line, Viking, Reliable, and Michigan. Anvil

model numbers are used for reference.

2.02 HANGERS

A. Anvil Figure #260 MSS Type 1, clevis hangers for:

1. Non-insulated steel and galvanized piping 2" through 24" diameter

2. Non-insulated PVC piping

B. Anvil Figure #260 clevis hangers with Figure 167, MSS Type 40 galvanized insulation

protection shields (sized for supporting insulation having a compressive strength of 4 psi).

Support piping on outside of insulation. Size hangers so that pipe insulation passes through

them without interruption.

1. All other insulated piping

C. Anvil Figure CT-69, MSS Type 10 with adjustable wrought tubing ring hanger, copper plated

for:

1. Non-insulated copper tubing with no longitudinal movement

D. Anvil Figure #CT-121, MSS Type 8, riser clamps (at floor penetrations) to support:

1. Copper pipe risers

E. Anvil Figure #261, MSS Type 8, riser clamps (at floor slab penetrations) to support:


1. Steel pipe risers

2. PVC pipe risers

F. Anvil Powerstrut Trapeze Hangers: Where three or more lines of pipe run parallel, support

them with trapeze hangers.

G. Water piping supports within walls to be by Caddy, Holdrite, Sioux Chief or approved

equivalent. Support vertical drops and piping at fixture supplies in wall. Hanger material to be

suitable for piping material installed. Piping supports shall be installed per manufacturer’s

recommendations.

2.03 INSERTS

A. Concrete Insert: Anvil Figure #281, MSS Type 18, universal concrete inserts, adequately sized

and correctly positioned to support full load operating systems.

B. Concrete Insert, Wedge Type: Anvil Figure #281, 1/4" to 7/8"

C. Lightweight Concrete Insert: Anvil Figure #285

D. Continuous Concrete Insert: Anvil Powerstrut Figure #PS-349 pre-galvanized

2.04 EXPANSION ANCHORS

A. Hilti Kwik-bolt, zinc-plated, metal expansion anchor.

B. Anchor to meet U.L., ICBO-4627 and FM listings.

2.05 HANGER RODS

A. Provide mild steel all-thread rods with maximum loads as follows:

1. 3/8" - 300 lbs

2. 1/2" - 600 lbs

3. 5/8" - 1,200 lbs

4. 3/4" - 2,000 lbs

5. 1" - 5,000 lbs

2.06 CLAMPS

A. C-Clamps: Anvil Figure #92, MSS Type 23.

1. Use these for attaching hangers to steel beams. Do not weld hanger rods to structural steel

members.

B. Malleable Beam Clamps: Anvil Figure #218, MSS Type 30: Use these for attaching hangers to

bar joists. Attach clamps to top chord of bar joists only. Confirm with structural engineer for

maximum loading and restrictions.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 05 29 - 3

Construction Set

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PIPE HANGERS

A. Support pipes on specified hangers so that equipment, pumps, and fittings do not bear weight or

stresses from vibration and swaying of pipe. Support pipe risers at regular intervals in pipe

shafts at least once at each floor level or a maximum of 12'-0" apart. Do not use perforated

metal, strap iron, or band iron. Do not make offsets in hangers.

B. Maximum allowable spacing of pipe hangers is listed below. Space hangers and brackets at

closer intervals where necessary to maintain levels, slopes, and drainage, or to prevent sagging

or swaying of pipe.

C. STEEL - Vapor

1. 1/4" to 1-1/2" - 8' 0" O.C.

2. 2" to 2-1/2" - 13' 0" O.C.

D. PVC PIPE

1. 3/4" to 3" - 4' O.C.

2. 4" and above - 6' O.C.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 22 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Nameplates.

B. Tags.

C. Stencils.

D. Pipe Markers.

E. Installation of all tags, markers and identification for plumbing piping, medical gas piping and

equipment.


A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Identification painting.

B. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation


A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001

(Reapproved 2007).

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for plumbing identification.

C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location,

function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Water Heaters: Nameplates.

B. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.

C. Control Panels: Nameplates.

D. Domestic Water Piping: Pipe markers.

E. Storm, Waste and Vent Piping: Pipe Markers

F. Other Plumbing Piping: Pipe Markers

G. Pumps: Nameplates.

H. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.

I. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.

2.02 NAMEPLATES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.

2. Seton Identification Products

B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.

1. Letter Color: White.

2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.

2.03 TAGS


1. Advanced Graphic Engraving

2. Brady Corporation

3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co


B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting

background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 05 53 - 3

Construction Set

C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth

edges.

D. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. Also provide an

Xcel spread sheet of all valves, with location and tag number to owner.

2.04 STENCILS





B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch

high letters.

2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 3/4 inch

high letters.

3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch

high letters.

4. Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters.

C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME

A13.1.

2.05 PIPE MARKERS




3. MIFAB, Inc


B. Colors and lettering: Comply with ASME A13.1.

C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around

pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification

of fluid being conveyed.

D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing

and printed markings.

E. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape,

minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.


F. Color Code as follows:

1. Potable hot and cold water, Other make-up Water: Green with white letters.

2. Storm water: Green with white letters.

3. Sanitary waste and vent: Green with white letters.

2.06 CEILING TACKS


1. Craftmark

B. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.

C. Color Code as follows:

1. Plumbing Equipment: Yellow.

2. Plumbing Valves: Green.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.

C. Piping requiring insulation shall be insulated prior to pipe identification being installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply

with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.

D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install markers at

least once in every room and at no more than 20 foot intervals.

E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

F. Use tags or pipe markers on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller.

1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.

2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.

3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs, at least once in every room and

including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of

structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 05 53 - 5

Construction Set

G. Install equipment with plastic nameplates.

I. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or equipment above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner

of panel closest to equipment.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 22 07 00

PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Insulation of plumbing piping

B. Insulation of plumbing equipment


A. Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed - Equipment and piping in areas which will be visible without removing ceilings or

opening access panels.

B. Concealed - Installed above ceiling, in walls or chases.

C. Underground - Buried.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation procedures for review in accordance with

the requirements of Division 01.


A. Insulation, adhesives, coatings, sealers, jackets and tapes shall have a flame spread rating of 25

or less and smoke development of 50 or less in accordance with ASTM E-84 and UL 723.

B. Materials shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90-A.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001-2000 Certified specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this section.

D. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of the specified products

and the work required to install the products with not less than 5 years experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. Materials for Pipe and Equipment: Provide factory premolded insulation for pipe, pipe fittings,

and valves.

B. Fitting Insulation: Same thickness and material as adjoining pipe insulation.


C. Cellular Glass (Foamglass):

1. Acceptable manufacturers: Pittsburgh Corning "Foamglass" type; minimum "R" value of

2.63

2. Mastic:

a. Outside Applications: Foster Vapor Safe 30-80, Childers Chil Low CP-38 or

Vimasco 749. Coatings must meet MIL 19565C and be QPD listed. Permeance shall

be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mils dry per ASTM E 96.

b. Inside applications: Foster Vapor Fas 30-65, Childers CP-34 or Vimasco 739.

Permeance shall be 0.03 perms or less at 45 mils dry per ASTM E 96."

3. Use on the following services:

a. Domestic water piping above grade at cooling tower to 18" below grade, 1-1/2" thick.

D. Flexible Tubular Elastomeric:

1. Provide fire-retardant closed-cell slip-on flexible type; minimum "R" value of 2.57

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Armacell; Nomaco K-Flex


a. Moisture condensate drains - 1/2" thick

E. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johns-Manville "Micro-Lok 850"; CertainTeed; Knauf; Owens

Corning, Foster. Jacket: ASJ fiberglass reinforced kraft paper with aluminum foil;

minimum R value of 3.7.


a. Domestic hot water supply piping - 1" thick

b. Domestic cold water piping - 1/2" thick

c. Horizontal rain water leaders and roof drain bodies - 1" thick

d. Drain bodies, traps and horizontal drain lines receiving cold condensate - 1/2" thick

F. Fiberglass Equipment Insulation:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johns-Manville; Certainteed; Knauf; Owens Corning, Foster.

2. Apply to equipment as directed by the manufacturer.

3. Install rigid or flexible insulation, 2" minimum thickness with 'K' value of 0.27 at 75

degrees F with a maximum service temperature of 850 degrees F. (1200 degrees F for

engine exhaust insulation).

4. Provide vapor barrier as required when the liquid temperature is below 65 degrees F.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 07 00 - 3

Construction Set

2.02 MATERIALS FOR FITTINGS, VALVES, AND SPECIAL COVERINGS

A. For all services, use premolded insulation for pipe fittings, elbows, tees, butterfly valves, and

couplings 2-1/2 and larger. Finish shall be as specified under Products above or as specified

below. PVC fitting covers with fiberglass inserts may be used on piping fittings elbows and

valves 2" and less for the following services:

1. Domestic Cold Water

2. Domestic Hot Water

B. For piping installed above grade exposed-to-the-weather outside the building, cover straight

pipe insulation with 0.016" thick aluminum jacket equivalent to Childers and cover fittings with

factory formed covers equivalent to Elljacs.

C. For flexible tubular elastomeric pipe and fitting insulation when exposed-to-view inside

building or exposed to the weather, finish with two coats of fire retardant self-extinguishing

vinyl lacquer type highly flexible coating equivalent to Armacell "Armaflex Finish", custom

color blended to match surrounding surfaces.

2.03 JACKETS

A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6oz/sq. yd. plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant

lagging adhesive compatible with insulation.

B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 formed aluminum sheet of 0.016 inch, smooth finish with

longitudinal slip joints and 2" laps, 0.016" thick die shaped fittings with factory attached

protective liner. Adhere with 3/8" wide aluminum bands.

C. PVC Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white in color, 15 mil

thickness, 0.002 per inch maximum in accordance with ASTM E96. Adhere with pressure

sensitive color matching vinyl tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Deliver and store insulation materials in manufacturer's containers and keep free from dirt,

water, chemical and mechanical damage.

B. Complete piping pressure testing prior to applying insulation.

C. Apply insulation in workmanlike manner by experienced and qualified workmen.

D. Surfaces shall be clean and dry when covering is applied. Covering to be dry when installed

and before and during application of any finish, unless such finish requires specifically a wetted

surface for application.

E. Adhesives, cements and mastics shall be compatible with materials applied and shall not attack

materials in either wet or dry state.


3.02 FLEXIBLE SHEET ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Prior to application of flexible sheet elastomeric insulation, thoroughly clean all metal surfaces,

making sure that all dirt, scale, loose paint, plaster, and oil has been removed and that surfaces

are dry. If surface has been primed, test a two square foot section using adhesive equivalent to

Armstrong No. 520 in order to determine whether solvent in adhesive will loosen or lift the

primer. If primer is loosened, then remove it. When testing proves acceptable, adhere insulation

with smooth side out, using thin but adequate coating of same adhesive. Follow manufacturer's

instructions. Coat all butt edges of each sheet. Stagger all joints. Insulate all standing seams or

flanges with same thickness of insulation material as that used on main surface.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND EQUIPMENT COVERING

A. Where glass fiber or flexible tubular elastomeric insulation is used on piping sized 2" and

larger, insert a section of foamglass or calcium silicate insulation, at hanger or support points,

between pipe and metal shield for full length of shield, to prevent crushing of insulation. Where

insulation passes through pipe hangers and across trapeze supports, 12" long metal saddles shall

be used. Insulation thickness to be same as adjoining glass fiber insulation. On cold pipe, vapor

barrier should be carried through the hanger and sealed. Saddles shall be used where rigid

foamglass inserts are not acceptable.

B. Pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms within 8 feet of the finished floor: Finish with

canvas jacket ready for finish painting.

C. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints and valves with

insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe and finish with glass mesh reinforced

vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of

horizontal piping.

D. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,

thickness and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover

with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.

E. Install equipment insulation in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and OSHA

requirements.

F. Apply foamglass insulation as follows:

1. Both the circumferential and longitudinal joints shall be buttered with fire-resistive pliable

sealer. Voids and cracks shall be filled with sealer. Apply appropriate mastic as specified

under Part 2 - Products. Secure insulation with 3/4" wide x 0.010" thick aluminum bands

on 8" centers.

2. The circumferential joints shall be staggered.

3. Fittings, valves, flanges, traps, and air vents shall be insulated with the same thickness of

insulation using factory fabricated fitting sections or pre-molded insulated fittings.

4. Block type insulation shall be adhered by stick-clips or bands, in addition to the sealer, as

required to provide support for the insulation.

5. Finish above furred ceilings and in chases shall be the bare insulation.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 07 00 - 5

Construction Set

6. Finish in equipment rooms and elsewhere where exposed-to-view shall be White ASJ

jacket.

7. Finish where exposed-to-the-weather shall be 0.016 inch thick, Childers, or equal,

aluminum jacket on lines and Elljacs, or equal, pre-formed aluminum covering on fittings.

8. Finish on underground insulation shall be Pittsburgh Corning Pittwrap as recommended

by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 22 11 16

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Piping and pipe fittings for domestic cold, hot and re-circulating water piping.


A. Section 22 05 00 - Common Work Results For Plumbing

B. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

C. Section 22 11 19 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for review on piping and fittings in accordance with the requirements of

Division 01. Submittal data shall include:

1. Manufacturer of pipe.

2. Tests or listings by recognized testing laboratory that certifies material composition is in

accordance with ANSI/ASTM requirements.

3. Product data for pipe and fittings to be used on each piping system.

4. Solder and brazing product data and installation procedures for copper pipe.

5. ProPress installation methods and instructions for copper pipe.





B. NSF Compliance: NSF/ANSI 61, NSF 61-G and/or NSF/ANSI 372 for valve materials for

potable-water service. Valves for domestic water must be 3rd Party Certified.

C. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification and specification and

water pressure rating.

D. Compliance with ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

E. Compliance with ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings.

F. Compliance with ASME B16.51 - Copper and Copper Press-Connect Pressure Fittings.


1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.

B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing

sections of the work and isolating parts of the completed system.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTILE IRON WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS UNDERGROUND

A. Manufactured in accordance with latest revision of ANSI A21.51/AWWA C151.

B. Use Class 52 thickness or heavier for 12" diameter and less and Class 51 thickness or heavier

for 14" diameter and larger.

C. Furnish pipe with standard thickness cement lining on inside with a bituminous seal coat and a

bituminous coating on the outside.

D. Clearly mark pipe exterior to indicate the manufacturer, date of manufacturer, pipe class and

weight.

E. Provide for the following services:

1. Underground domestic water main services, up to first joint inside interior space

F. Fittings:

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Fastite by Acipco, Tyton by U.S. Pipe Co., or Bell-Tite by

James B. Clow and Sons

2. Ductile iron, cement lined, bituminous coated, manufactured in accordance with the latest

revision of ANSI/AWWA C110

3. Furnish with mechanical joints conforming to ANSI A21.11 with 250 psi pressure rating

2.02 CPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. For pipe and fittings 1/2" - 2": FlowGuard Gold compound as manufacturer by FBC, Lutizol.

B. For pipe and fittings 2-1/2" and larger: Corzan CPVC compound as manufactured FBC, Lutizol

C. When CPVC is used, all installers must be trained by FlowGuard Gold

(www.flowguardgold.com) or Corzan CPVC (www.corzancpvc.com) representatives as

provided by Lubrizol. All CPVC shall be manufactured using the FlowGuard and/or Corzan

CPVC Technology.

D. When CPVC is used, all materials to come into contact with CPVC must be deemed compatible

for use with FlowGuard Gold and Corzan CPVC material. Examples include, but are not

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 11 16 - 3

Construction Set

limited to: fire stops, thread sealants, and leak detectors. Current information can be found on

www.systemcompatible.com, or by contacting Lubrizol or any FlowGuard Gold or Corzan

CPVC manufacturer.

E. Copper Tube Size (CTS) FlowGuard Gold CPVC: 2" CTS and smaller: Shall be manufactured

in accordance with ASTM D2846. The Flow Guard Gold CPVC pipe compound shall meet cell

Class 24448 as defined by ASTM D1784 and be certified by NSF to use the NSF-pw mark.

FlowGuard Gold material may be utilized for underground installation. Follow manufacturer's

recommendations and ASTM D2774 for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure

Piping.

F. FlowGuard Gold CTS (1/2" - 2") may be used for the following applications:

1. Domestic hot water

2. Domestic tempered piping

3. Domestic cold water

4. Piping installed under floor slabs

G. CPVC Fitting:

1. CTS fittings shall be FlowGuard Gold CPVC only and shall meet the requirements of

ASTM D2846.

2. IPS fittings shall be Corzan CPVC fittings only. IPS Fittings shall meet or exceed the

requirements of ASTM F437 (Schedule 80 threaded) or ASTM F439 (Schedule 80

socket). The CPVC compound used to produce the IPS fittings shall be pressure rated in

accordance with ASTM D-2837 and PPI TR-3 having Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of

4000 psi at 72 degree F and 1000 psi at 180 degree F as listed in PPI TR-4.

H. Solvent Cement for CPVC: All socket type joints shall be made employing solvent cement that

meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM F493 and primers that meet or exceed the

requirements of ASTM F656. Safe handling of solvent cement shall be in accordance with

ASTM F402. Solvent Cement and primer shall be listed by NSF International for use with

potable water and approved for use with Corzan and FlowGuard Gold manufacturers.

1. Solvent cement joints for copper tube size FlowGuard Gold systems may utilize two step

solvent cement (orange or gray) with primer or one step solvent cement (yellow) with no

primer. Use only Low VOC Solvent Cements.

2. Solvent cement joints for iron pipe size Corzan systems must utilize two step solvent

cement (orange or gray) with primer. Use only Low VOC solvent cement such as IPS

Weld-On 724 for Corzan CPVC systems.

3. Corzan CPVC Flanges are available as transition / valve connections. Use one piece

Corzan CPVC Flanges.

I. FlowGuard Gold CTS CPVC pipe and fittings approved manufacturers:

1. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company

2. Harvel Plastics, Inc.

3. Nibco


4. Bow

J. Corzan IPS CPVC pipe and fittings approved manufacturers:

1. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company

2. Harvel Plastics, Inc.

3. Nibco

4. IPEX

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Clean inside of pipe before installation. Keep installed piping clean, and protect ends from

foreign matter by capping or plugging them.

B. Install pipe so that it does not interfere with opening of doors or apparatus, access to equipment,

or to electrical equipment.

C. Run pipes in straight lines and square with building. Install risers plumb. Make offsets only

where indicated and where necessary.

D. Install branch connections using separate tee or lateral fittings for each branch. Do not combine

branches into "bullhead tee" arrangement.

E. Do not install water pipes in electric rooms, tele/data rooms, transformer rooms. Fire protection

piping runouts serving only these rooms shall be installed in these rooms.

F. Do not install piping above electrical equipment such as starters, variable frequency drives,

motor control centers, or disconnects. Maintain code required clearance above, below and to

sides of electrical equipment.

G. Provide flanges or unions throughout the pipe systems at all equipment. Make provisions for

servicing and removal of equipment without dismantling piping.

H. Piping Expansion:

1. Install piping to allow thermal expansion and contraction without injury to piping,

equipment or structure.

a. Use loops or expansion joints where necessary and where detailed. 22 05 48

b. Provide pipe guides

I. Branch Lines:

1. Where possible branch lines shall come off top of mains to prevent sediment, welding

slag, or pipe deburrs from entering the branch lines and causing valve leakage or failure.

J. Identify piping and systems in accordance with Section 22 05 53.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 11 16 - 5

Construction Set

3.02 PIPE JOINTING

A. Preparing Pipe Ends:

1. Machine cut pipe ends square

2. Ream pipe ends, after cutting, to full diameter

B. Bracing Joints:

1. Provide braces and bridle rods as required to reinforce joints.

2. If mechanical couplings are used, then prepare pipe ends and make joints in accordance

with pipe coupling manufacturer's printed instructions.

3. Where large pipes underground are subject to shock because of sudden changes in liquid

flow rate, provide concrete "kicker" blocks at joints, fittings, and changes of pipe

direction. Provide "kicker" blocks in accordance with applicable pipe industry trade or

research organization recommendations.

a. For example, for ductile iron pipe follow recommendations of Ductile Iron Pipe

Research Association.

3.03 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide chrome-plated escutcheons where uninsulated pipes penetrate walls or ceilings of

finished spaces.

3.04 STRAINERS

A. Install strainers so the strainer basket can be removed without spilling water on motors and

electrical equipment.

3.05 AIR VENTING

A. Provide manually operated air vents at high points in vertical risers to eliminate air from

systems.

B. Use ball valves for manual air vents.

3.06 VALVE ACCESS

A. Locate ceiling/wall access panels at shut-off and control valves for proper access and operation.

Furnish and install access doors in accordance with Section 22 05 00 and other Divisions as

applicable.

3.07 TESTING

A. Before piping is concealed or insulated, recheck it for leaks.

B. Rework or replace defective and leaking joints, and joints which are otherwise unsatisfactory.

Peening, caulking, and doping are not permitted.

C. After ProPress fittings have been installed, a "step test" shall be followed:


1. Pressurize the system with air or dry nitrogen between 0.5psig and 45psig, or with water

between 15psig and 85psig for a minimum of 4 hours.

2. Check the pressure gauge for pressure loss. If the system does not hold pressure, walk the

system and check for un-pressed fittings.

3. When un-pressed fittings are found, ensure the tube is fully inserted into the fitting and the

tube is properly marked prior to pressing the fitting.

4. Make appropriate repairs and retest the system per local code and these specifications.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 11 19

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section includes requirements for:

1. Backflow preventers

2. Shock arrestors

3. Thermometers and pressure gauges

4. Domestic Water expansion tank



B. Section 22 05 23 - Valves For Plumbing Piping

C. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation





B. NSF Compliance: NSF/ANSI 61 and/or NSF/ANSI 372 for valve materials for potable-water

service. Valves for domestic water must be 3rd Party Certified.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Acceptable manufacturers are indicated in subsequent paragraphs.

2.02 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS


1. Beeco

2. Apollo

3. Febco


4. Cla-Val

5. Ames

6. Watts

7. Wilkins Regulator Company

B. Provide completely automatic unit, fitted with tight closing shut-off valves and test cocks at

each end.

C. Construct such that all parts are replaceable without removing unit from line.

D. Total pressure drop through complete backflow preventer does not exceed 12 PSI at rated flow.

E. Provide per local requirements and dimensions as detailed on drawings.

F. Backflow preventers shall meet the following standards: (Apollo Figure numbers are used for

reference.)

1. Atmospheric vacuum breaker - Apollo 38-200 series, ASSE 1001-2008

2. Hose-connected vacuum breakers - Apollo 38-414, ASSE 1011-2004

3. Back siphonage vacuum breakers - Apollo 4A-500-04F, ASSE 1056-2013

4. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers - Apollo 4ALF-200 Series, ASSE 1013-

2011

5. Double check valve assembly - Apollo 4ALF-100 Series, ASSE 1015-2011

6. Pressure type vacuum breaker - ASSE-1020-2004

2.03 SHOCK ARRESTORS


1. Josam

2. Wade

3. Jay R. Smith

4. Precision Products

5. Zurn

6. Sioux Chief

B. Arrestor shall be piston type, polycarbonate with two EPDM O-rings, lubricated with FDA-

approved Dow Corning #111 silicone compound in Type L or K copper body, suitable for 200

psig minimum pressure at 200 degrees F.

C. Arrestor shall be ANSI/ASSE 1010 Certified and be maintenance free with no access panel

required.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 11 19 - 3

Construction Set

2.04 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Trerice, Winters, Dwyer or approved equal.

B. Thermometers shall have a 9" aluminum case with 3.5" or 6" stem, fully adjustable, organic

filled (non-mercury), +/- 1% accuracy, lead free brass or stainless steel thermowell, dual scale,

30 degrees F to 200 degrees F range.

C. Pressure gauges shall have a 4" white aluminum dial with type 304 SS case, lead free brass

socket, glycerin filled with accuracy of +/- 1.5 % of full scale to 150 degrees F; dry type to 200

degrees F. Install with lead free gauge cock.

2.05 DOMESTIC WATER EXPANSION TANK


1. Amtrol

2. Bell and Gossett

3. Taco

B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1;

supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 150 psig, with flexible

EPDM diaphragm sealed into the tank, and steel legs or saddles.

C. Accessories: Pressure gauge, air charging fitting and tank drain. Pre-charge to 12 psig.

D. Capacity: As noted on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION AND TESTING

A. Backflow Preventers:

1. Pipe relief through fixed air gap and discharge to sewer.

2. Install adjacent to wall and/or floor utilizing stand-off brackets, angle frame, and/or

concrete piers.

3. Test unit for leaks and pressure drop. Clean and/or replace soiled strainer media.

4. Provide dual parallel reduced pressure backflow preventers on the main domestic water

entrance to the facility.

5. Provide backflow prevention vacuum breaker on any water line feeding any piece of

equipment which could cause back siphonage such as mechanical equipment, trap primer

lines, etc.

B. Shock Arrestors:

1. Install shock arrestors at each quick closing valve, solenoid type valve. Size shock

arrestors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Install shock arrestors within five feet of valve, provide wall access panel as required.


3. Test and certify shock arrestors by Plumbing and Drainage Institute in accordance with

ANSI/ASSE 1010.

C. Expansion Tanks:

1. Install in locations shown on the drawings and in accordance with the details and

manufacturer's requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 13 16

STORM AND SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Sanitary waste and vent piping

B. Rooftop AC unit condensate drain piping



B. Section 22 05 29 - Hangers for Plumbing Piping

C. Section 22 13 19 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for review on piping and fittings in accordance with the requirements of

Division 01. Submittal data shall include:


2. Tests or listing by recognized testing laboratory that certifies material composition is in


3. Product data for pipe and fittings to be used on each piping system.

4. Identification of where each pipe type will be used.


A. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification and ASTM

Specification.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing

sections of the work and isolating parts of the completed system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe and fittings (4" to 15" diameters) shall be as manufactured by H

and W Industries or equal.

B. PVC pipe, fittings, cement, and joint cleaner for entire project shall be supplied by a single

manufacturer.


C. PVC Schedule 40, Type I, DWV, ASTM D-2665, 1120, 160 PSI at 73 degrees F. Solvent

cement shall meet ASTM No. D-2564 for (PVC-DWV) plastic and pipe fittings. If permitted by

governing code authority, may be used for:

1. Air handling unit condensate drains above grade only if room is not used as return air

plenum.

2. Inside gravity, under floor slab sanitary and storm waste drainage systems, with waste

temperatures below 140 degrees F.

3. Condensate drains from rooftop units shall be UV resistant where exposed.

D. PVC Schedule 40, Type-PSM, Sewer Pipe, ASTM D-3034 with SDR as gasketed slip type

joints. Provide coupling with a rubber ring seal for use in each manhole entry to ensure a

surface for adherence of concrete to manhole wall. If permitted by governing code authority,

may be used for:

1. Outside gravity, underground sanitary sewer drainage piping, from 5'0" outside the

building to the connections point to local municipality.

E. Fittings:

1. Permanently identify each fitting in accordance with MSS-SP-2241, and with

manufacturer's trademark.

2. Include certification with submittal data that fittings and flanges meet applicable

requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. PVC Joints:

1. Make joints in accordance with cement manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Grading Pipes for Drainage:

1. Uniformly place storm drainage pipes and footing drain pipes at elevations and slopes

indicated. If no elevations or slopes are indicated, slope pipes at not less than 1/8" per

foot.

2. Uniformly place sanitary sewer pipes at elevations and slopes required by the local codes

C. Bracing Joints:

1. Provide braces and bridle rods as required to reinforce joints

2. If mechanical lock type couplings are used, then prepare pipe ends and make joints in

accordance with pipe coupling manufacturer's printed instructions.

3. Where large pipes underground are subject to shock because of sudden changes in liquid

flow rate, provide concrete "kicker" blocks at joints, fittings, and changes of pipe

direction. Provide "kicker" blocks in accordance with applicable pipe industry trade or

research organization recommendations.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 13 16 - 3

Construction Set

D. PVC storm water piping shall be limited to 12" in size when penetrating any rated floor slab,

due to fire penetration requirements.

E. Clean inside of pipe before installation. Keep installed piping clean, and protect ends from

foreign matter by capping or plugging them.

F. Do not install piping above electrical equipment such as starters, variable frequency drives,

motor control centers, or disconnects. Maintain code required clearance above, below and to

sides of electrical equipment.

G. Do not install piping above or passing through any IT rooms, IDF rooms, or service entrance

rooms.

H. Run pipes in straight lines and square with building. Install risers plumb. Make offsets only

where indicated and where necessary.

I. Piping passing through or under grade beams or through foundation walls shall be provided

with a Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeve two sizes greater than the piping passing through the

sleeve.

J. Identify all storm, waste and vent piping in accordance with and as specified in Section 22 05

53.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 22 13 19

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section includes requirements for:

1. Cleanouts

2. Trap primers

3. Air Admittance Valves



B. Section 22 11 16 - Domestic Water Piping

C. Section 22 13 16 - Storm And Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping

1.03 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Acceptable manufacturers are indicated in subsequent paragraphs.

2.02 CLEANOUTS


1. Jay R. Smith (Jay R. Smith model numbers are used below)

2. Josam

3. Wade

4. Zurn

5. Sioux Chief

6. Watts

B. Exterior: 4250 Series heavy duty cast iron cleanout housing with internal cleanout body and

plug.

C. Finished Concrete Floor: 4031-PB cast iron body with round adjustable polished nickel bronze

top, ABS plug and carpet marker where required.


D. Wall: 4422, cast iron caulking ferrule with stainless round access cover and screws.

E. Access Covers: Minimum size 12" x 12" located for access to valves, shock absorbers, trap

primers, wall cleanouts, etc.

F. Furnish cleanouts occurring in waterproof floors with clamping devices.

2.03 TRAP PRIMERS


1. Josam

2. Zurn

3. Wade

4. Jay R. Smith

5. Precision Plumbing Products

6. Sioux Chief

B. Provide trap primer of brass construction, with removable operating parts, and integral vacuum

breaker.

C. See Plumbing fixture section for specifications.

2.04 AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES

A. An air admittance valve shall be acceptable as a vent termination for any individual vent,

common vent, circuit vent, loop vent and island fixture vent that is provided to prevent

siphonage of a fixture trap. An air admittance valve can be used as an alternative to extending a

vent through the roof (or sidewall) to the open atmosphere.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Studor, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION AND TESTING

A. Cleanouts:

1. Provide line size cleanouts up to 4"; 4" cleanout for lines larger than 4".

2. Locate cleanouts at all changes in direction greater than 45 degrees and in straight runs as

shown 100 feet outside the building on drawing or spaced not greater than required by

applicable Plumbing Code.

3. Extend inaccessible cleanouts up through floor and/or wall to provide easy accessibility.

B. Trap Primers:

1. Install primers in accessible location or as shown on drawings.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 13 19 - 3

Construction Set

2. Trap primers shall be Plumbing and Drainage Institute approved.

C. Air Admittance Valves:

1. Install air admittance valves in accessible locations. Provide access panels when required

for access to valve. Install only where standard fixture vent system cannot be installed. Air

admittance valves shall be limited to non-standard venting.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 22 13 29

SANITARY WASTE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submersible sewage pumps

B. Pedestal sewage pumps

C. Collection sumps/basins


A. Division 26: Electrical

B. Section 22 13 16 - Storm And Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping

1.03 SUBMITTALS



A. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, rating and capacity

identified by a permanently attached label.

B. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified fluid conditions and are non-overloading in

parallel or individual operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SANITARY WASTE PUMP, SUBMERSIBLE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weil, Chicago, PACO, Goulds, or Swaby.

B. Model number, capacity, accessories, and electrical characteristics as scheduled on the

drawings.

C. Provide non-clog pump, close coupled, bronze impeller, totally submersible type complete with

mechanical seals to prevent moisture from reaching electrical components.

D. Provide control by mercury switches encapsulated in polypropylene float bulbs, control panel

complete with high water alarm, disconnect and starter.

E. Provide rails and chains for pump removal.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Verify location and clearance requirements.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as shown and detailed on the

drawings.

3.02 START-UP AND TEST

A. Start-up pump, verify integrity of connections and electrical phasing.

B. Test and balance pumps and flow rates in operation under design load conditions and record

results. Deliver with project closeout manual.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 33 36

WATER HEATER - ELECTRIC

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Electric Storage Water Heaters

B. Electric Point-of-Use Water Heaters


A. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation


C. Division 26: Electrical

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Include performance, capacity and wiring diagrams for each heater type and size.



specified in this section with a minimum of 10 years of experience.

B. Performance: Ensure the products perform to the requirements, ratings and capacity of the

equipment scheduled on the drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRIC POINT OF USE WATER HEATERS


1. KelTech

B. Equipment:

1. Provide ASME with HLW stamp certified, factory assembled and wired, instantaneous

tankless electric water heater. The heater shall be flow activated and self cleaning type.

The unit shall meet ANSI Z358.1 tepid water requirements.

2. The unit shall have PID digital controls with +/- 1 degree F accuracy to continuously

monitor outlet temperature independent of flow and pressure. Heater to fail to cold supply

on electric failure. The unit shall active in stages to allow eye/face wash and drench

shower to activate independently and maintain the set outlet temperature.

3. Provide the following features:


a. Internal fusing for control and load circuits

b. Flow control device per manufacturer's requirements

c. ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valves

d. Pressure and temperature gauges

e. Terminal block wiring

f. Rated for 140 degrees F water temperature

g. Maximum operating pressure of 150 psi

h. U. L. Listing

i. The unit shall meet UL and other applicable codes.

j. Incoloy 800 sheathed heating elements and NEMA 4X enclosure.

k. Water heater shall be equal to Model SNA as manufactured by KelTech

4. Safety Controls:

a. Electronic low water cut-off

b. High/low water pressure cut-off

c. Fused and switched, 120 volt control circuit

5. Operating and maintenance instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Verify location and clearance requirements.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and contract drawings.

C. Insulation for water connections as specified in Section 22 07 00.

D. Install electric connections under and in accordance with Division 26.

E. Clean and test unit as required by Section 22 05 00. Record results and deliver as part of the

project closing file.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 22 40 00

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Compliance with the provisions of Section 22 05 00.

B. Plumbing fixtures, trim and related items such as supplies, traps, drains, cleanouts, and other

accessory items.

C. Coordination of fixture requirements by reviewing architectural, structural, and equipment

drawings. Install fixtures in accordance with Contract Drawings and manufacturer's rough-in

drawings.

D. Installation of water tempering devices at all public lavatories and similar hand washing

fixtures and elsewhere noted on the drawings.


A. Section 22 13 19 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties



A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes and standards enforced by local authorities.

B. All barrier free fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities

Act (ADA) Rules and Regulations.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data: fixtures; fittings; accessories; and supplies for review in

accordance with Division 01 requirements.



specified in this section with a minimum of five years of documented experience.

B. Products requiring electrical connections must be UL or ETL listed and classified suitable for

the purpose specified.

C. All fixtures, faucets, trim and accessories must be protected from damage at all times including

after installation to prevent unauthorized use.

D. All wetted surfaces of faucets, mixing valves, shower valves in potable water systems must be

lead free and ASSE 1070 and NSF 61 Certified.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fixture stops, supplies, faucets, mixing valves, shock absorbers or any devices in the drinking

water supply shall be lead free per the "Safe Drinking Water Act."

B. Brass Trim: McGuire, Engineered Brass Company, Kohler, Cambridge Brass, ProFLo.

C. Hydrant, Floor Drains and P-Traps: Jay R. Smith, Zurn, Wade, Josam, Watts, MIFAB.

D. Mixing Valves: Leonard, Lawler, Powers, Speakman, Watts, Symmons, Bradley, Apolo.

E. Provide fixtures and trim as a complete unit as required in the individual "P" numbers listed

below.

F. Emergency Equipment: Watersaver, Western, Bradley, Haws, Guardian.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Provide mixing valves per ASSE or CSA Standards as required by the local adopted code.

Mixing valves used in drinking water shall be lead free. Mixing valves shall be used to supply

tempered water to public hand-washing facilities and shall conform to ASSE 1070 or CSA

B125.3.

B. Clamping Device: Provide for drains installed in slabs above grade.

C. Trap Primer: Provide connections for floor drain as shown on drawings.

D. Caulking: General Electric silicon sanitary sealant or equal. Color to match fixture color.

E. Provide FRT wood or metal backing at wall fixtures and fixture trim connections so piping and

connecting faucets and valves are rigid to wall.

F. Provide floor drain located above slab on grade.

G. All fixtures and fittings relating to drinking water shall meet the requirement of ANSI/NSF 61,

Section 9. Any faucet for drinking water shall be certified by U.L. to the ANSI/NSF 61, Section

9 Standards.

2.03 PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. P-17B FLOOR DRAIN (EQUIPMENT ROOMS)

1. Fixture: Zurn #ZN541-P round, cast iron, 12" diameter drain with sediment bucket, flange

and clamp device if drain is installed above slab on grade. Provide trap primer

connections. Size of drain as shown on drawings.

B. P-20A TRAP PRIMER (FLOOR DRAIN CONNECTION)

1. Fixture: Precision Plumbing Products P-1 and P2 Series, sized as required for the number

of floor drains served, with trap primer valve and distribution unit.

SSR-12.41.013.0

22 40 00 - 3

Construction Set

C. P-21A WALL HYDRANT (NON-FREEZE - KEY OPERATED)

1. Fixture: Zurn Z1321-C, anti-siphon non-freeze wall hydrant, stainless steel face, with

integral vacuum breaker. Mounting: 18" from center line of hydrant to finished grade.

D. P-22B HOSE BIBB (COLD WATER - EQUIPMENT ROOMS)

1. Fixture: Zurn Z1341 with vacuum breaker, rough bronze finish

E. P-24E EMERGENCY SHOWER EYE/FACE WASH SAFETY STATION

1. Fixture: Bradley S19-310, galvanized steel with "Bradtect' safety yellow coating.

Combination drench shower/eyewash unit with 10-inch diameter impact-resistant plastic

shower, 10-inch diameter impact-resistant plastic eyewash bowl, separate shower and

eyewash stay-open valves, 1-1/4 IPS supply and inlet and drain, and floor flange

2. Trim: Leonard TM-850-STSTL-EXP thermostatic mixing valve with cold water by-pass

protection in a stainless steel cabinet assembly. Provide unit with adjustable high

temperature limit stop. Provide temperature gauge for outlet side of mixing valve as part

of assembly. Provide 20 GPM flow control valve on discharge side of mixing valve.

3. Mounting: Coordinate location of mixing valve box with location of control handle.

Contractor shall coordinate mounting of boxes in wall with architect. Install spray heads

within code required height range of 33" to 45" and at least 6" away from any obstruction.

Verify with current adopted code.

4. Provide with identification sign designed for wall mounting to read “EMERGENCY

SHOWER AND EYE WASH FOUNTAIN”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Connect to plumbing fixtures and equipment provided under this and other sections of

specification, architectural drawings, and manufacturer's shop drawings. Provide rough-in

connections as shown on drawings.

B. Use schedule and details on drawings and/or manufacturer's shop drawings for connection sizes

to fixtures.

C. Provide separate p-trap for each fixture, floor drain, and piece of equipment.

D. Provide cast iron p-traps under floor drains.

E. Provide deep seal traps under floor drains and elsewhere as indicated on drawings.

F. Install barrier free fixtures in accordance with rules and regulations of the Americans with

Disabilities Act (ADA).

G. Coordinate dimensions required for minimum fixture clearances with other Divisions.

H. Add trap primer connection to floor drain where required. (See drawing for requirement)

I. Caulk around joints at fixtures mounted on wall or floor, or backed up to walls.


J. Mount fixtures rigid to walls as shown on drawings or details.

K. Provide 12" minimum access to fixtures with concealed slip-joint connections.

3.02 TESTING AND CLEANING

A. Inspect and test all work to insure that it is installed in accordance with the drawings,

specifications and manufacturer's requirements and is functioning as designed and required.

Use test procedures and pressures as required under this Division.

B. Correct all deficiencies found and retest.

C. Turn all work over to Owner in a clean, sanitary condition.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL






A. Perform Work specified in Division 23 in accordance with standards listed below of the latest

applicable edition adopted by the authority having jurisdiction. Where these Specifications are

more stringent, they shall take precedence. In case of conflict, obtain a decision from the

Architect.



3. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code

4. NFPA 90A: Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

5. NFPA 90B: Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning

Systems


7. NFPA 101A: Guide on Alternative Approaches to Life Safety

8. NFPA 101B: Standard on Means of Egress for Buildings and Structures

9. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Building Construction, Alterations, and Demolition

Operations

10. NFPA 5000: Building Construction and Safety Code


12. ASTM E814-08B: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests Penetration Firestop Systems.

13. U.L. Fire Resistance Index.

14. International Building Code, with Mechanical and Plumbing Codes

15. All applicable Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Publications,

Rules and Regulations.

16. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

17. Special regulations, supplement, and amendments of the State and/or local authorities




A. AGA: American Gas Association.

B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.

C. ARI: American Refrigeration Institute.

D. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.

E. ASME: American Society for Mechanical Engineers.

F. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.

G. AWWA: American Water Works Association.

H. MSS: Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry.

I. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers' Association.

J. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.

K. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

L. UL: Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

M. U.L. Fire Resistance Index

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01.

B. Incomplete submittals containing unmarked cutsheets or not providing specific detail of what is

being proposed will be rejected and will not be reviewed.

C. Include Products as specified in the individual sections of Division 23.

D. Submit shop drawing and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related

systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal.

E. Prepare shop drawings completely independent of the Engineer of Record's CADD files.

Should the Contractor or Vendor wish to use the Engineer of Record's CADD files as the basis

for developing their shop drawings, a release form, obtainable from the Engineer or Architect,

must be signed. A nominal charge of $50.00 per sheet must be made payable to the engineering

firm to cover the cost of preparing the drawings for use by others.



2. Illustrations.



SSR-12.41.013.0

23 05 00 - 3

Construction Set

4. Capacities stated in the terms specified.

5. Performance curves for all air handling units, fans, and pumps.


A. Layouts indicated on drawings are diagrammatic and intended to show relative positions and

arrangement of equipment, ductwork and piping. Coordinate mechanical work with other trades

and measurements obtained at the job site, as applicable, prior to installation. Generally, install

work in locations shown on Drawings, using as necessary rises, drops, offsets, transitions, and

alternate routings to fit in the available space unless prevented by Project conditions.

B. If prevented by project conditions, prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work,

including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Architect before

proceeding.



work which will cause interference or interruption in advance with Owner, authorities having

jurisdiction, and all affected trades.


F. Keep roads clear of materials and debris.




as applicable, means of access using duct, wall, or ceiling access doors.

I. Install ductwork and piping to leave sufficient space for AHJ inspection of wall construction.



work.


A. The Contract Documents depict HVAC systems which are intended to be complete and

functioning systems. All products, materials, and labor necessary to render a fully functional

system to fulfill the design intent shown on the documents shall be provided by the Contractor.











record drawings to the Architect in a form suitable for production.

B. Provide record drawings that illustrate the work of Division 23 as finally constructed. Deliver

record drawings to the Architect electronic format and also three (3) copies marked in red ink to

reflect work as constructed.

C. Record drawings shall reflect all changes made to the Contract Documents, whether generated



D. Deliver record drawings to Architect within 30 days of Substantial Completion.

E. Coordination drawings are to indicate air terminal units, fan coil units, air handling units, fans,

control panels, all and other devices and materials to proper scale.


A. Manuals shall include clear and comprehensive instructions with appropriate graphics and


this Division.

B. Copies of final reviewed submittals indicating all model numbers, serial numbers, cut sheets,

and all performance criteria on furnished equipment shall be included.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



1. Use galvanized members installed in fan plenums or areas of high humidity or

condensation, and outside. All fasteners shall be stainless steel. Any damage caused by

cutting, drilling, or welding or any other means to galvanized surface must be repaired by

apply two coats of cold-galvanizing.

2. Use hot dipped galvanized members installed in fan plenums or areas of high humidity or

condensation, in tunnels and outside. All fasteners shall be stainless steel. Any damage

caused by cutting, drilling, or welding or any other means to galvanized surface must be

repaired by applying two coats of cold-galvanizing.

3. Furnish other members with shop coat of primer.

4. Retouch primer after field welding.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 05 00 - 5

Construction Set



for ductwork and piping.

B. Materials:

1. Sheetmetal: 24-gauge minimum ASTM A525, Class G90.

2. Sheet Lead: 3 pounds per square foot.

3. Stainless Steel: Minimum 20-gauge.

4. Sheet Copper: 24 oz/sf.




items served.









service or adjustment. Examples of such equipment needing access are fire and/or smoke

dampers, mechanical system valves, and equipment needing periodic or replacement

maintenance.




1. For masonry and drywall construction: Milcor Style M.

2. For plastered masonry walls and ceiling: Milcor Style K.

3. For ceramic tile or glazed structural tile: Use stainless steel panels.

2.04 SLEEVES

A. Materials:

1. Concrete Floors, Concrete and Masonry Walls: 18-gauge galvanized steel sheetmetal or

Schedule 10 galvanized steel pipe.


2. Drywall Partitions: 18-gauge galvanized steel sheetmetal or Schedule 10 galvanized steel

pipe.





radially at 120 degree spacing to the sleeve and shall be installed with the rods embedded in the

concrete slab.



partitions or ceilings in finished areas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION






A. Counterflash ducts and pipes where penetration of roofs and outside walls occur.


A. Insofar as possible, deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Where deliver

in original packaging is not practical, provide cover and shielding for all items with protective

materials to keep them from being damaged. Use care in loading, transporting, unloading, and

storing to keep items from being damaged.

B. Store items in a clean, dry place, and protect from damage. Mechanical equipment may not be

staged or stored outdoors unless intended for outdoor use.


nameplate data.

D. Protect valves and piping from damage. Cover equipment during work of finishing trades.

E. Keep dirt and debris out of pipes and ducts.

F. Repair, restore, and replace damaged items.

G. Cover factory finished equipment during work of finished trades, such as fan coils, fin tubes,

etc.

H. Protect cooling and/or heating coils with temporary filter media during construction.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 05 00 - 7

Construction Set

3.04 SLEEVES


within pipe chases. Sleeve shall be flush with underside of floor.


wall.

C. Drywall Partitions: Sleeve all penetrations of piping in systems over 160 degree F.


E. Install piping, insulation and sleeves in strict accordance with applicable U.L. floor or partition

assembly instructions. Coordinate with Division 07 Firestop manufacturer's installation

instructions.





floors or walls in "finished" spaces. Mechanical rooms, store rooms, electric closets, and janitor

closets are not considered "finished" spaces.

B. Clearance between sleeve and pipe: Minimum of 1/2 inch for hot piping and 1 inch for cold

piping or as otherwise dictated by U.L. Fire Resistance Directory.

3.06 EQUIPMENT GUARDS

A. Use suitable structural frames with minimum 12-gauge, 3/4" galvanized mesh, or expanded

metal mesh. Attach to equipment by removable clips and bolts with wing nuts, or other

approved connectors.

B. At belts, provide opening for measuring RPM.

C. Provide at all belts, couplings, moving machinery and equipment.

D. Design for easy access to belts and other items requiring replacement.

E. Comply with OSHA Regulations.

3.07 CLEANING HVAC SYSTEMS

A. General Cleanup:

1. Upon completion of contract and progressively as work proceeds, clean up dirt, debris, old

materials, etc., and remove from site, keeping premises in neat and clean condition to

satisfaction of the Architect. See Division 01 of specifications for further requirements.


due to Contractor's failure to properly clean piping systems or duct systems shall be

repaired without cost to the Owner.







C. Ducts and Apparatus:

1. Thoroughly clean ducts and apparatus casings before fans and filters are operated.

3.08 OPERATION OF HVAC SYSTEMS DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Install all specified filters prior to system operation. In addition to specified filters, install a

roughing filter upstream of mixed air filter. Roughing filter shall consist of two layers of roll

filter media clipped and sealed to entering side of filter frame. Change roughing filter as

necessary to minimize dust collection on specified filters.

B. Cover return and exhaust air grilles with temporary filter media. Attach media to avoid damage

to grille or ceiling. Change temporary media as required to protect against dust buildup on

ductwork. Remove temporary media from grilles after flooring is installed, walls are sanded

and painted and other dust generating construction has been completed.

C. During periods of excessive dust generation such as drywall sanding, seal off return and

exhaust openings and grilles to prevent dust from accumulating in ductwork.

D. If outside air source contains less dust than building air, adjust A/C unit dampers to operate

with as much outside air as possible without causing a freezing condition for coil or exceeding

capacity of coil to adequately condition supply air.

E. Furnish and install a new set of specified filter media prior to start of system test and balance.

Furnish a new, clean set of the specified media and turn over to Owner's Representative.

3.09 TESTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

A. Test all systems and equipment installed to demonstrate proper operation.

B. Advise Architect of scheduled systems testing and completed system demonstration/operation

schedules so that he may witness, if desired.

C. Correct and retest work found defective when tested.

D. Make repairs to piping systems with new materials. Peening, doping, or caulking of joints or


E. Domestic Water Piping: Test hot and cold water piping systems upon completion of rough-in,

before fixtures are connected, at a hydrostatic pressure of 125 psig or 150% of working

pressure whichever is greater for a period of two hours.

F. Ductwork Pressure Testing: Refer to Section 23 31 13 for required pressure testing for

ductwork.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 05 00 - 9

Construction Set

G. System Balance and Testing: Prepare to assist test and balance firm by assuring systems are

complete and operational.

H. Records of Testing: Maintain records of system testing and results thereof. Deliver results as

part of project closing file and on an intermediate basis as requested by Architect.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 23 05 13

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single phase electric motors.

B. Three phase electric motors.


A. Each motor, controller and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in

accordance with the folling applicable standards:

1. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing

Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).

2. IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and

Generators; 2014.

3. IEEE Standard 112, Test Method "B"; 1996.

4. IEEE Standard 444 (ANSI C34.3); 1992.

5. IEEE Standard 519; 1992.

6. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;

2014.

7. NEMA MG1, Part 31 - Definite Purpose, Inverter Fed Motors; 2012.

8. NEMA - ICS-3-303

9. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent

Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments

and Supplements.

10. Energy Policy Act of 1992

B. All equipment and material to be furnished and installed on this Project shall be UL or ETL

listed, in accordance with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, and suitable

for its intended use on this Project.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 01 for submittal procedures.

B. Submit motor information with submittals and shop drawings for Division 23 equipment.

C. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.


D. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and

lubrication instructions.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and

suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment

and store separately.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. See Division 1 for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide two year manufacturer warranty from the date of substantial completion for motors

smaller than 20 horsepower.

C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty from the date of substantial completion for motors 20

horsepower and larger.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Baldor, General Electric, Gould, Lincoln, MagneTek/Century,

Marathon, Reliance, Siemens, Toshiba, U.S. Motors, and Westinghouse.

B. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01.

2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Service:

1. Motors 1/2 HP and smaller: 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.

2. Motors larger than 1/2 Horsepower: 460 volts, three phase, 60 Hz.

B. Windings and Insulation:

1. All motors shall have copper windings.

2. Motors shall be equipped with Class B, 80 deg. C rise or Class F, 105 deg. C rise

insulation suitable for use in a 40 deg. C ambient temperature.

3. Motors used for cooling tower applications shall be equipped with Class F, 105 deg. C

insulation suitable for use in a 40 deg. C ambient temperature. Windings shall be treated

with an epoxy varnish to inhibit the moisture absorption.

C. Bearings:

1. Single phase, fractional horsepower motors shall be equipped with quiet operating, all

angle babbitt-lined sleeve bearings.

2. Polyphase motors shall be equipped with deep groove type ball bearings, generously sized

for the loads to which applied and for severe duty application. Provide the necessary seals

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 05 13 - 3

Construction Set

on the shaft to keep the bearing system free of contamination and moisture. Lubricant

shall be high temperature, non-bleeding grease.

a. Provide inlet and outlet plugs on poly phase motors so that grease fittings can be

easily inserted for bearing lubrication except as otherwise specified. The end shields

shall be carefully machined to add extra grease capacity. Lower outlet plugs shall be

equipped with combination breather/drains on TEFC and TEAO motors.

D. Motors on belt driven equipment shall have slide rails with adjusting screws for belt tension

adjustment.

E. Sound power levels shall not be greater than recommended in NEMA M61-12.49. VFD duty

rated motors shall no increase by more than 3 dB when operating on VFD.

F. Provide motors with drive shafts long enough to extend completely through belt sheaves when

sheaves are properly aligned and balanced.

G. Motors exposed to the weather shall be weather protected.

H. Install premium efficiency electric motors for motors 1 horsepower and above. Premium

efficiency motors shall have efficiency and losses determined in accordance with the latest

revisions of IEEE Standard 112. Polyphase squirrel cage motors rated 1 through 150

horsepower shall be tested by dynamometer method B. The efficiency shall be determined

using segregated losses in which stray load loss is obtained from a linear regression analysis to

reduce the effect of random errors in the test measurements. Guaranteed minimum load

efficiency shall be as follows:

1. HP: 3/4 Eff: 80.0%

2. HP: 1 Eff: 84.0%

3. HP: 1 1/2 Eff: 86.5%

4. HP: 2 Eff: 86.5%

5. HP: 3 Eff: 89.5%

6. HP: 5 Eff: 89.5%

7. HP: 7 1/2 Eff: 91.7%

8. HP: 10 Eff: 91.7%

9. HP: 15 Eff: 93.0%

10. HP: 20 Eff: 93.6%

11. HP: 25 Eff: 93.6%

I. Motors shall be specifically designed for quiet operation and for severe duty. Standard open

drip proof motors shall be equipped with aluminum or stainless steel stamped nameplates.

Totally enclosed fan cooled and air over motors shall be equipped with stainless steel stamped

nameplates with either zinc or cadmium plated hardware. Motor nameplates shall clearly

indicate manufacturer's name and model number, frame size, horsepower, frequency, voltage,

RPM, starting torque class, insulation class, full load amps, locked rotor amps, service factor,

power factor, efficiency and winding material.


J. Motors shall be specifically designed for quiet operation and for severe duty. Standard open

drip proof motors shall be equipped with aluminum or stainless steel stamped nameplates.

Totally enclosed fan cooled and air over motors shall be equipped with stainless steel stamped

nameplates with either zinc or cadmium plated hardware. Motor nameplates shall clearly

indicate frame size, horsepower, frequency, voltage, speed, starting torque class, insulation

class, service factor, and winding material.

K. Wiring Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials

indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.

2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded

conduit connection in end frame.

2.03 APPLICATIONS

A. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the equipment

manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications.

B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans: Split phase type.

C. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capacitor type.

D. Single phase motors for fans: Capacitor start type.

E. Single phase motors for fans: Capacitor start, capacitor run type.

F. Three phase motors for blowers and fans: Squirrel cage type.

G. Motors located in exterior locations, air cooled condensers, and direct drive axial fans: Totally

enclosed type.

2.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.

C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.

D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service

Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.

E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor,

prelubricated ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector.

2.05 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.

C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 05 13 - 5

Construction Set

D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise)

insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset

overload protector.

2.06 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.

C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.

D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.

E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors

with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds.

F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service

Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings.

G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor,

prelubricated ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector.

2.07 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS

A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.

B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.

C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B

characteristics.

D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B

motors.

E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.

F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from

electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.

G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of

cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors embedded in

motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter;

refer to Section 26 29 13.

I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged

provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours.

Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of

NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.

J. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.


K. Part Winding Start Where Indicated: Use part of winding to reduce locked rotor starting current

to approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while providing approximately

50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque.

L. Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure with

rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with

waterproof non-washing grease.

M. Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with

IEEE 112.

N. Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance

with IEEE 112.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install base mounted motors securely on firm foundation.

C. Align motors on direct drive equipment using dial type gauges.

D. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate. Test motor for proper

rotation under Division 26.

3.02 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Motors, together with driven equipment, shall be dynamically and statically balanced.

Imbalance shall be reduced to minimum specified by equipment manufacturers.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION ISOLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Vibration isolators, pipe supports, and equipment anchors, of appropriate sizes and weight

loading to meet the specified deflection requirements, in accordance with instructions of

isolator manufacturer.

B. Vibration isolation for all Division 22 and 23 systems as noted below. Provide all

miscellaneous items (angle iron, bolts, rods, etc.) required for a complete system. Contractor

and vendors shall thoroughly coordinate all vibration isolation systems.

C. Coordination of installation with other trades (placement of anchor bolts in concrete slabs, etc.)


A. Section 01 45 33 - Code-Required Special Inspections

B. Division 22 - Plumbing

1.03 MANUFACTURER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control products shall have the following

responsibilities:

1. Manufacturer of vibration isolation shall have the following responsibilities:

a. Determine vibration isolation and restraint sizes and locations for mechanical and

plumbing equipment.

b. Determine vibration isolation sizes and locations for mechanical and plumbing

equipment.

c. Provide isolation systems for all plumbing and mechanical of equipment (vibration

isolated and non-isolated) and systems (piping and ductwork).

d. Provide installation instructions and drawings.

B. Vibration isolation specialist shall coordinate his work with that of other trades to verify that

equipment speeds, in revolution per minute (rpm), are based upon actual equipment installed at

the project site.

C. Verify that equipment rpm and spring deflection selected are arranged so that resonance is

avoided.

D. Exact mounting sizes, dimensions and quantity of isolators and static deflection required shall

be determined by the isolator manufacturer based upon equipment that will be furnished and

installed by the contractor under this Contract.


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Certification: Vibration isolator submittals shall include a certification, signed by

an officer representing the Contractor and stipulating that the submittal prepared by the

manufacturer has been reviewed, and checked on an item by item basis against each piece of

mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork and panel shown or specified in the Contract

Documents, which requires vibration isolation and/or support.

B. Manufacturer's Certification: The manufacturer or manufacturers (if there are more than one)

shall each certify that the selections of vibration isolation equipment are based upon the

drawings and specifications, and that each piece of mechanical equipment has been examined

for rotational speed, equipment type, mounting location, and supporting span between column

centers, and that an appropriate isolator has been selected.

C. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product data covering each isolator type for style,

characteristic, and finish. Isolator quantities, dimensions, deflections, capacities and types shall

remain the responsibility of the manufacturer and the contractor.

D. Shop Drawings: Provide layout drawings, drawn to a scale of not less than 1/8-inch to 1-foot,

showing the proposed layout of equipment and piping systems and the location and type of

each vibration isolation and restraint device. Carefully examine other sections requiring

coordinated shop drawings, including but not limited to Section 23 31 13, "Sheetmetal

Ductwork", Section 23 31 14, "Sheetmetal - Special Ductwork", and prepare restraint/isolation

shop drawings to the same scale showing the location of each vibration isolation equipment

base, pipe hanger, flexible connection, and isolator restraint device.


A. Responsibility for Products: Select deflection for spring isolators in accordance with

recommendations in the current issue of ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, unless noted

otherwise on drawings.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section with not less than 10 years of documented experience.

1. Member of Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers Association

(VISCMA).

1.06 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Storage: Store vibration isolation equipment indoors in the manufacturer's original shipping

containers. Preclude the entrance of construction dirt and debris. Vibration isolation equipment

and bases, which show signs of rust, cement or concrete fouling, dirt and construction debris

shall be disassembled and cleaned, approved or removed from the project site and replaced with

new.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Amber Booth, Kinetics Noise Control, Korfund Company, Mason Industries, Vibration

Eliminator Co., or Vibration Mountings & Controls.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 05 48 - 3

Construction Set

B. Furnish vibration isolators by single manufacturer.

C. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements

specified below:

1. Squarehead bolts and heavy hexagon nuts, ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.2.2, and ASTM A

307 or ASTM A 576.

2. Sway Brace Material used for members shown on mechanical drawings, except for pipes,

shall be structural steel conforming with ASTM A 36. Steel pipes shall conform to ASTM

A 501.

2.03 PRODUCTS

A. Type 1: Mason Super "W", 2 layers of 3/4" neoprene pad with 16 ga. galvanized shim.

B. Type 2: Mason BR, two neoprene elements housed in a ductile iron casting.

C. Type 3: Mason SLF, free standing spring isolator, 1/4" neoprene non-skid pad, leveling bolt,

spring diameter no less than 0.8 of compressed height at rated load, minimal additional travel to

solid equal to 50% or rated deflection.

D. Type 4: Mason SLR, restrained spring isolator, vertical limit stops, internal isolation pad.

E. Type 6: Mason 30N, spring and double neoprene hanger, 1-1/4" neoprene element at top of

housing, spring seated in neoprene cup at bottom of housing, designed to allow 30 degrees arc

from side to side of hanger rod.

F. Type 10: Mason BMK rectangular steel frame form for concrete inertia base, 1/2" reinforcing

bars on 6" centers, both ways.

G. Type 11: Mason RSC, spring isolation curb for roof mounted equipment, heavy gauge Z section

sheet metal base that supports adjustable and removable restrained spring mounts, top section to

be continuous rail support for equipment; springs to rest on 1/4" neoprene pads; hardware shall

be plated and springs furnished with rust resistant finish; curb to be waterproofed using

continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing, joined at corners with EDAM bellows; spring

locations to have removable, waterproof access ports.

H. Type 12: Mason BBS flexible stainless steel braided hose; minimum lengths as follows:

1. 1/2" - 1-1/2": 12"

2. 2" 4": 18"

3. 6" - 10": 24"

4. 12" - 16": 32"

I. Type 13: Mason HS spring hanger, spring seated in neoprene cup.

J. Type 14: Mason WF steel frame base, with motor slide rail.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 VIBRATION CONTROL

A. Size vibration control equipment in accordance with weight distribution, pull or the imposed

torque as shown on equipment shop drawings. Minimum static deflections may be revised

subject to prior approval.

B. Provide revised vibration control equipment to match revised or substituted equipment.

C. Install vibration control equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's installation

instructions and as specified.

D. Install equipment on vibration isolation curbs to provide watertight seal.

3.02 APPLICATIONS

A. Equipment: Use the vibration and restraint types listed above on the following applications:

1. A/C units, packaged rooftop: Type 11

2. Fans, suspended

a. Type 6, 14

3.03 ANCHORING

A. Installation: Installation shall comply with manufacturer's published recommendations and shall

be installed so that isolators are plumb and are operating at a manner for which they were

designed.

B. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment shall be securely bolted to isolators, steel bases or

concrete inertia bases.

3.04 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. If the size and number of the anchor bolts are not shown on the drawings then anchor bolts shall

conform to the schedule for the various equipment weights or the manufacturer's installation

recommendations, whichever is the most stringent.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Set anchor bolts when concrete is placed.

B. Install isolators in accordance with recommendations of isolator manufacturer and equipment

manufacturer.

C. Isolate mechanical equipment as indicated.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 05 48 - 5

Construction Set

D. Remove all debris from under equipment, and thoroughly clean steel bases, inertia bases and

check for free movement.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Nameplates.

B. Pipe Painting and Markers.

C. Printed Labels / Ceiling Markers / Tacks


A. Section 09 96 00 - Painting and Coating: Identification painting.


A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2007.

B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1.

B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical systems

identification.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS

A. Access Doors: Stencil painting compliant with NFPA 90A where applicable.

B. Major HVAC equipment including, but not limited to fans and RTU's: Nameplates.

C. Fire, Smoke, and Combination Dampers: Labels.

D. Starters/Variable Frequency Drives: Nameplates

E. Piping: Pipe markers.

F. Unitary Equipment: Nameplates.


G. Thermostats: Printed Labels.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady Corporation, Kolbi Pipe Marker Company, Marking Services, Inc., MIFAB, Inc., or

Seton Identification Products


2.03 NAMEPLATES

A. Rigid plastic with engraved lettering.

B. Fasteners: Commercial quality, rust resisting nuts and bolts with backwashers, self-tapping

screws, or rivets. If equipment surface does not allow for direct attachment, use copper or brass

rings to attach tags.

C. Use names, numbers, and abbreviations appearing in schedules on Contract Drawings or as

otherwise directed by the City of Franklin.

D. Letter Color: White.

E. Letter Height: 1/2 inch.

F. Background Color: Black.

G. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.

2.04 PIPE PAINTING AND MARKERS

A. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around

pipe or pipe covering. At a minimum, marker shall have flow direction arrows and

identification of fluid being conveyed.

B. Colors shall conform to ASME 13.1 where applicable.

2.05 PRINTED LABELS / CEILING MARKERS / TACKS

A. Printed Labels:

1. Printed labels / asset tags to be coordinated with City of Franklin and applied by

Contractor.

2. Prior to Substantial Completion date, Contractor to work with owner, as required, to locate

devices above the ceiling requiring a printed label / asset tag.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Division 09 for stencil painting.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 05 53 - 3

Construction Set

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with

sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at no less than 25

foot intervals, at valves, and at least once in each separate space through which the pipe passes.

Label all vent piping and pressure relief piping.

C. Confirm with City of Franklin or Architect prior to placing ceiling tacks or labels on surfaces

other than lay-in panel ceilings.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. HVAC systems testing and balancing requirements.


A. AABC - Associated Air Balance and Control

B. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau

1.03 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Perform test and balance in accordance with AABC or NEBB Standards.

B. Air balance shall be performed by qualified personnel experienced in this field.

C. The air balance procedure followed and forms used shall agree with AABC or NEBB

Standards.

D. Make changes to pulleys, belts, dampers, impellers, and similar equipment to obtain design

conditions as required by TAB procedures.

E. The Architect, Engineer, Owner, or Owner's Representative may request a recheck, resetting, or

verification of an air or water related item within 90 days of the completion of work. The work

shall be provided at no additional cost.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PROCEDURES

A. On completion of work, submit three copies of the complete report to include the following:

1. Current certification documentation of all TAB equipment used.

2. Current certification of TAB personnel responsible for the work.

3. Dates, time, all personnel, and operating status of cooling and heating systems.

4. A description of the procedure used for air and water balance.

3.02 AIR SYSTEMS

A. Balance supply, return, and exhaust air outlets within outlets within 10% of design while still

maintaining required pressure relationships.


B. On each fan system, measure and report:

1. Design and actual fan RPM. Fan suction and discharge pressure. Fan total static pressure

and pressure drop across components. Design and actual supply, return, exhaust, and

outside air CFM.

2. Actual and motor nameplate voltage and amperage on fans.

3. Design and actual entering and leaving air temperatures, heating and cooling (dry bulb and

wet bulb) of the supply, return, exhaust, and outside air.

C. For diffusers and grilles, measure, adjust, and report:

1. Design and actual CFM at each supply, return, and exhaust outlet.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 07 00

HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pipe insulation

B. Ductwork insulation


A. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed - Equipment, ducts and piping in areas which will be visible without removing

ceilings or opening access panels.

B. Concealed - Installed above ceiling, in walls or chases.

C. Outdoors - Exposed to the weather or ambient conditions.

D. Underground - Buried.


A. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and

Industrial Applications; 2013.

B. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to

Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts; 2011.

C. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2013.

D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors' National Association; 2005.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 01.

B. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation procedures for review. Product data shall

identify specific thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001-2000 certified.


B. Fire-Test Response Characteristics: Testing in accordance with ASTM E84. Insulation and

related materials, adhesives, coatings, sealers, jackets and tapes, shall have a fire-test response

characteristic of: Flame spread rating of 25 or less; Smoke development of 50 or less.

C. Materials shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. Materials for Pipe and Equipment: Provide factory premolded insulation for pipe, pipe fittings,

and valves.

B. Fitting Insulation: Same thickness and material as adjoining pipe insulation.

C. Flexible Tubular Elastomeric:

1. Provide fire-retardant closed-cell slip-on flexible type; minimum "R" value of 2.57

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Aeroflex "Aerocel", Armacell "AP/Armaflex", or K-Flex

"Insul-Tube".


a. Moisture condensate drains: 1/2" thick.

2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Blanket Type Duct Insulation:

1. Minimum 3/4 pound per cubic foot density, factory-reinforced foil-faced, kraft vapor

barrier; with a minimum "R" value of 4.0.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: CertainTeed, Johns-Manville, Knauf, or Owens Corning.

3. Use on the following:

a. Unlined supply air ductwork in an unconditioned space, including concealed above

ceiling: 1-1/2" thick.

b. Unlined exposed supply air ductwork: 1-1/2" thick.

c. Unlined return air ductwork installed in an unconditioned space, including concealed

above ceiling: 1-1/2" thick.

d. Unlined exhaust air ductwork in an unconditioned space, including concealed above

ceiling: 1-1/2" thick.

2.03 MATERIALS FOR FITTINGS, VALVES, AND SPECIAL COVERINGS

A. For flexible tubular elastomeric pipe and fitting insulation when exposed-to-view inside

building or exposed to the weather, finish with two coats of fire retardant self-extinguishing

vinyl lacquer type highly flexible coating equivalent to Armstrong "Armaflex Finish", custom

color blended to match surrounding surfaces.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 07 00 - 3

Construction Set

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Deliver and store insulation materials in manufacturer’s containers and keep free from dirt,

water, chemical and mechanical damage.

B. Complete piping and ductwork pressure testing prior to applying insulation.

C. Apply insulation in workmanlike manner by experienced, qualified workmen.

D. Surfaces shall be clean and dry when covering is applied. Covering to be dry when installed

and before and during application of any finish, unless such finish specifically requires a wetted

surface for application.

E. Adhesives, cements and mastics shall be compatible with materials applied and shall not attack

materials in either wet or dry state.

F. Stop duct coverings, including jacket and insulation, at fire penetrations of fire or smoke rated

partitions, floors above grade and roofs. "Fan-out" or extend jacketed insulation at least 2"

beyond angle frames of fire dampers and secure to wall. Maintain vapor barrier.

3.02 BLANKET TYPE DUCT INSULATION

A. Apply jacketed blanket type glass fiber covering to ducts pulled snug but not so tight as to

compress corners more than 1/4". Use insulation having 2" tab, or cut insulation long enough to

allow for "peel-off" of insulation from jacket to effect a minimum overlap of 2". Staple lap with

flare type staples on 1" centers. Cover standing seams, stiffeners, and braces with same

insulation blanket, using 2" jacket lap and staple lap as herein before outlined. Cover and seal

all staples with Foster 30-80 reinforced with glass cloth. Do not use pressure sensitive tape.

B. Secure jacket to covering using equivalent of Foster No. 85-20 or Childers CP-82 adhesive.

C. For ducts 24" or wider, mechanically fasten insulation to duct bottom, using weld pins having

self-locking, metal discs, locating fasteners on not over 12" centers laterally and longitudinally.

Seal pins as above.

D. For ducts up to 24" deep, mechanically fasten insulation to duct sides, using one row of pins,

plates or discs located on not over 12" centers longitudinally and equidistant laterally between

duct top and bottom. For ducts 24" deep and greater, apply fasteners as before only using

minimum of two rows.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND EQUIPMENT COVERING

A. Apply flexible tubular elastomeric insulation to pipe and fittings with all joints tightly fitted and

sealed with adhesive.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 23 09 13

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Provide input and output control devices to integrate with direct digital control and building

automation system.

B. Furnish instrumentation control devices as an integral part of the Building Automation Section

specified in Section 23 09 23.


A. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC

B. Section 23 31 13 - Sheetmetal Ductwork

C. Division 26 - Electrical

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data and schedules for all input/output devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Provide products and components by manufacturers listed. Where manufacturers are not listed,

provide component that complies with specifications.

B. Manufacturers listed must meet performance and material specifications of product or

component. Listing of a manufacturer as an acceptable manufacturer does not grant permission

to deviate from the specifications.

2.02 INPUT DEVICES

A. General Requirements:

1. Installation, testing, and calibration of all sensors, transmitters, and other input devices

shall be provided to meet the system requirements.

B. Temperature Sensors:

1. General Requirements:

a. Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output summary

and sequence of operations.

b. The temperature sensor shall be of the resistance type, and shall be either two-wire

1000 ohm nickel RTD, or two-wire 1000 ohm platinum RTD.


c. The following point types (and the accuracy of each) are required, and their

associated accuracy values include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire, and A

to D conversion:

2. Room Temperature Sensors:

a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting.

b. Room sensors shall have the following options when specified:

1) Setpoint reset slide switch providing a +3 degree (adjustable) range.

2) Individual heating/cooling setpoint slide switches.

3) A momentary override request push button for activation of after-hours

operation.

4) Analog thermometer.

3. Room Temperature Sensors with Integral Display:

a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting.

b. Room sensors shall have an integral LCD display and four button keypad with the

following capabilities:

1) Display room and outside air temperatures.

2) Display and adjust room comfort setpoint.

3) Display and adjust fan operation status.

4) Timed override request push button with LED status for activation of after-hours

operation.

5) Display controller mode.

6) Password selectable adjustment of setpoint and override modes.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Setra.

C. Smoke Detectors:

1. Ionization type air duct detectors shall be furnished as specified elsewhere in Division 28

for installation under Division 23. All wiring for air duct detectors shall be provided under

Division 28, Fire Alarm System. Coordinate interface with BAS and Fire Alarm System.

2.03 OUTPUT DEVICES

A. Actuators:

1. General Requirements:

a. Damper and valve actuators shall be electronic and/or pneumatic, as specified in the

System Description section.

2. Electronic Damper Actuators:

a. Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 09 13 - 3

Construction Set

b. Modulating and two-position actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence

of operations. Damper sections shall be sized Based on actuator manufacturer's

recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and damper type. The

actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open

or normally closed positions of the dampers, as required. All actuators (except

terminal units) shall be furnished with mechanical spring return unless otherwise

specified in the sequences of operations. All actuators shall have external adjustable

stops to limit the travel in either direction, and a gear release to allow manual

positioning.

c. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power supply, consume no more

than 15 VA, and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, and

the actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2-10 VDC. The

feedback signal shall be independent of the input signal and may be used to parallel

other actuators and provide true position indication. The feedback signal of one

damper actuator for each separately controlled damper shall be wired back to a

terminal strip in the control panel for trouble-shooting purposes.

d. Two-position or open/closed actuators shall accept 24 or 120 VAC power supply and

be UL listed. Isolation, smoke, exhaust fan, and other dampers, as specified in the

sequence of operations, shall be furnished with adjustable end switches to indicate

open/closed position or be hard wired to start/stop associated fan. Two-position

actuators, as specified in sequences of operations as "quick acting," shall move full

stroke within 20 seconds. All smoke damper actuators shall be quick acting.

e. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Mamac.

B. Control Dampers:

1. The BMS Contractor shall furnish all automatic dampers. All automatic dampers shall be

sized for the application by the BMS Contractor or as specifically indicated on the

Drawings.

2. All dampers used for throttling airflow shall be of the opposed blade type arranged for

normally open or normally closed operation, as required. The damper is to be sized so

that, when wide open, the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close-off pressure

drop to shift the characteristic curve to near linear.

3. All dampers used for two-position, open/close control shall be parallel blade type arranged

for normally open or closed operation, as required.

4. Damper frames and blades shall be constructed of either galvanized steel or aluminum.

Maximum blade length in any section shall be 60". Damper blades shall be 16-gauge

minimum and shall not exceed eight (8) inches in width. Damper frames shall be 16-gauge

minimum hat channel type with corner bracing. All damper bearings shall be made of

reinforced nylon, stainless steel or oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers shall be tight closing,

low leakage type, with synthetic elastomeric seals on the blade edges and flexible stainless

steel side seals. Dampers of 48"x48" size shall not leak in excess of 8.0 cfm per square

foot when closed against 4" w.g. static pressure when tested in accordance with AMCA

Std. 500.

5. Airfoil blade dampers of double skin construction with linkage out of the air stream shall

be used whenever the damper face velocity exceeds 1500 FPM or system pressure exceeds


2.5" w.g., but no more than 4000 FPM or 6" w.g. Acceptable manufacturers are Johnson

Controls D-7250 D-1250 or D-1300, Ruskin CD50, and Vent Products 5650.

6. One piece rolled blade dampers with exposed or concealed linkage may be used with face

velocities of 1500 FPM or below. Acceptable manufacturers are: Johnson Controls D-

1600, Ruskin CD36, and Vent Products 5800.

7. Multiple section dampers may be jack-shafted to allow mounting of piston pneumatic

actuators and direct connect electronic actuators. Each end of the jackshaft shall receive at

least one actuator to reduce jackshaft twist.

C. Control Relays:

1. Control Pilot Relays:

a. Control pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or

clips.

b. Mounting Bases shall be snap-mount.

c. DPDT, 3PDT, or 4PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for application.

d. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120VAC.

e. Relays shall have an integral indicator light and check button.

f. Acceptable Manufacturers: Johnson Controls, Lectro

D. External Manual Override Stations:

1. External manual override stations shall provide the following:

a. An integral HAND/OFF/AUTO switch shall override the controlled device pilot

relay.

b. A status input to the Facility Management System shall indicate whenever the switch

is not in the automatic position.

c. A Status LED shall illuminate whenever the output is ON.

d. An Override LED shall illuminate whenever the HOA switch is in either the HAND

or OFF position.

e. Contacts shall be rated for a minimum of 1 amp at 24 VAC.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Local Control Panels:

1. All control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the BMS manufacturer's

standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL inspected and listed as an

assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. Control panels shall be fully

enclosed, with perforated sub-panel, hinged door, and slotted flush latch.

2. In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display module as

specified and indicated on the plans, and I/O devices-such as relays, transducers, and so

forth-that are not required to be located external to the control panel due to function.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 09 13 - 5

Construction Set

Where specified the display module shall be flush mounted in the panel face unless

otherwise noted.

3. All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or fixed screw

terminals.

4. Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring

shall be UL listed, 300-volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring.

5. All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped.

6. A convenience 120 VAC duplex receptacle shall be provided in each enclosure, fused

on/off power switch, and required transformers.

B. Power Supplies:

1. DC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total rated load shall not

exceed 75% of the rated capacity of the power supply.

2. Input: 120 VAC +10%, 60Hz.

3. Output: 24 VDC.

4. Line Regulation: +0.05% for 10% line change.

5. Load Regulation: +0.05% for 50% load change.

6. Ripple and Noise: 1 mV rms, 5 mV peak to peak.

7. An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next to the power

supply.

8. A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply.

C. Thermostats:

1. Electric room thermostats of the heavy-duty type shall be provided for unit heaters,

cabinet unit heaters, and ventilation fans, where required. All these items shall be provided

with concealed adjustment. Finish of covers for all room-type instruments shall match

and, unless otherwise indicated or specified, covers shall be manufacturer's standard

finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Actuation / Control Type:

1. Primary Equipment:

a. Controls shall be provided by equipment manufacturer as specified herein.

b. All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.

2. Air Handling Equipment:

B. HVAC Input Devices - General:


1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation.

2. Space Sensors:

a. Mounted per ADA requirements.

b. Provide lockable tamper-proof covers in public areas and/or where indicated on the

plans.

C. HVAC Output Devices:

1. All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation. The

mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as control valves, dampers,

airflow stations, pressure wells, etc.

2. Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the maximum

system shut-off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth fashion through the

entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator is sequenced with another device, pilot

positioners shall be installed to allow for proper sequencing.

3. Control Dampers: Shall be opposed blade for modulating control of airflow. Parallel blade

dampers shall be installed for two position applications.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 09 33

ELECTRIC CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. HVAC Control Devices

B. Wiring

C. Conduit


A. Division 26: Electrical


A. Install control devices and wiring in accordance with provisions of Division 26 and the

National Electrical Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PROVIDE HVAC CONTROL DEVICES UNDER DIVISION 23.

2.02 CONTROL WIRING

A. Electrical:

1. Under this Division, provide control systems, components and control and interlock

wiring for mechanical equipment. Provide Control devices including, but not limited to

thermostats, fan speed and level control switches, relays and electro-pneumatic switches.

2. Under Division 26, provide motor control centers, magnetic starters, and manual motor

starters.

3. Under Division 26, provide power wiring to starters and contactors.

a. Power wiring to magnetic starters shall consist of wiring to the line side terminals of

the magnetic starter or contactor and wiring away from the load side terminals to the

equipment, except where such wiring is installed pre-wired by the equipment vendor

such as for roof-top units.

b. Power wiring to 120-1-60 and 277-1-60 volt fans, unit heaters, fan coil units and

pumps shall include all portions of the branch circuit wiring at the voltages listed

above.

4. Under this Division, provide all wiring inside an automatic temperature control panel

(ATC) or direct digital control panel (DDC) or magnetic starter.

5. Under Division 28, provide fire alarm control wiring among duct mounted smoke

detectors, fire alarm system, magnetic starters and relays, ATC panels and DDC panels.


2.03 THERMOSTATS

A. Provide thermostat and subbase for each system.

B. Provide locking cover for thermostats in public areas.

2.04 FANS

A. Provide start/stop switch for exhaust fans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish and install all low voltage and line voltage devices, wiring and conduit required for a

complete and operational control system.

B. Coordinate exact locations and mounting heights of all control components with light switches,

door swings, etc.

C. Where voltage characteristics differ, provide transformers, breakers or switching in order to

connect equipment to it rated voltage.

D. Coordinate locations of starters, contactors, panels and other devices furnished under Division

23 which requires electrical power with Division 26.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 11 23

FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Natural gas piping

B. Natural gas valves

C. Natural gas pressure regulators



B. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers for HVAC Piping


A. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1968.

B. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;

2011 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).

C. NFPA 54 / ANSI Z223.1 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for review for piping, fittings, valves, and coatings. Submittal data shall

include:


2. Tests or listing by recognized testing laboratory that certifies material composition is in


3. Product data for piping, fittings, valves and coatings.

4. Welding procedures for steel pipe.


A. Material Standards: Applicable ASTM Standards for material requirements.

B. Dimensional Standard: ANSI B36.10, latest edition.

C. Screw Threads: American Pipe Thread Standards.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel ASTM A 53 seamless or continuous weld.

B. Fittings:

1. Welded fittings: Factory made fittings, full line size for all branches, elbow, or tee. Use

reducers after fittings if dictated by branch pipe size.

2. Screw fittings: Grinnell or approved equal, Class 150, malleable iron.

a. Joint compound: LACO, Rector-Seal, or WKM Key-Tite.

C. Valves:

1. 2" and smaller: AGA or UL approved

2. Provide valves with handle

3. Valves shall be acceptable to local authorities

D. Exterior Coating: Republic Steel Corporation's X-Tru-Coat high density polyethylene extruded

coating.

E. Lubricated Plug Cocks:

1. For valves 2" and less, iron body, threaded, Nordstrom Figure No. 114.

2. Provide visual position indicators on all plug cocks.

3. All valves shall be AGA approved for natural gas service.

F. Valve Connections: Two inches and smaller - threaded; 2-1/2 inches and larger - flanged.

G. Gas Pressure Regulator Valves:

1. Gas pressure regulator valves shall meet ANSI Z21.80a, CSA 6.22a-2005 by Pietro

Fiorentini, Fisher, Maxitrol, or approved equal.

2. Gas regulators for 2 psi and less shall be provided with an automatic vent limiting device

for indoor use only

3. All pressure regulators above 2 psi shall have a vent piped in accordance with

Government and local codes and regulations to the exterior of the building. Provide vent

protectors for outdoor applications to protect vents from foreign particles, insects, dust,

rain or snow

4. See drawings and schedules for location and sizes of gas pressure regulator valves and

vent routing

H. Roof Top Support Mounting Blocks:

1. Roof top supports for mounting natural gas piping by B-Line, Durablok, Miro, or Roof

Top Blox. Wood blocking shall not be used. Material to be UV and whether resistant

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 11 23 - 3

Construction Set

2. Connect piping to support blocking or stands per manufacturers specifications and spacing

requirements

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Jointing: All welded construction, except where required for servicing and for sizes 4" and

smaller as specified herein.

B. Screwed Fittings:

1. May be used in lieu of welded joints for sizes 4" and smaller when pressure is less than 2

psi

2. Install screwed joints to be accessible for repair

3. Do not install screwed fittings in furred ceilings or chases

C. Provide a gas valve at each piece of equipment and where indicated and where indicated on

drawings.

D. Underground gas piping shall be of the same metals and meet the same working pressure

requirements specified herein, except that it shall be coated and protected as follows:

1. Coat exterior surface of underground gas pipe with high density polyethylene extruded

coating.

2. The protective coating shall be factory applied with a fluid mastic undercoat. The

polyethylene coating shall be minimum of 0.040 inches thick.

3. Field welds, joints and fittings shall be protected with mastic undercoat and by wrapping

with at least two (2) layers (half lap) of “X-Tru-Tape” installed as recommended by the

manufacturer or with Raychem “Thermofit” heat shrinkable pipe sleeves applied as

recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Concealed Piping: Where indicated on drawings or when required by local code authorities,

provide an A-53 Schedule 10 black steel pipe to completely enclose the gas pipe through all

chases and concealed areas of the building. Vent sleeve to atmosphere at the top of the building.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 23 31 13

SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Rectangular Metal Ducts

B. Round Ducts

C. Double Wall Round and Flat-Oval Spiral Ducts


A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping

B. Section 09 96 00 - Painting and Coatings

C. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

D. Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation

E. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories

F. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit material/product data as described in Division 01.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings of sheet metal shop ductwork, as follows:

1. Draw to a scale not less than 1/4-inch to one foot

2. Provide sheet sizes equal to Contract Drawings

3. Show duct sizes

4. Show fitting details

5. Show lighting and ceiling diffusers

6. Show bottom of duct elevation above finished floor

7. Show all manual and motorized dampers and associated access doors.

8. Show HVAC equipment, all air terminal units, and air quantities.

C. Certifications: Provide a duct schedule, certified by an officer of the sheet metal fabrication

subcontractor that the ductwork conforms to SMACNA Standards. For each sheet metal system

furnished on the project include:

1. System name


2. Duct material

3. Duct gauge

4. SMACNA rectangular reinforcement number

5. SMACNA intermediate reinforcement number

6. SMACNA transverse reinforcement number

7. Rod diameter and type

8. Sealant type

9. Attachment method

10. Duct system design pressure

D. Field Conditions:

1. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by

sealant manufacturer.

2. Maintain temperature within acceptable range during and after installation of duct

sealants.


A. Provide an installed duct system which will supply the air quantities indicated by the drawings

and have the lowest possible friction loss with the least possible leakage loss. System static

pressure loss for each system shall not exceed that which is indicated in the equipment schedule

as external static pressure or in the fan schedule as static pressure and shall include the losses of

all accessories. Friction losses shall be minimized by reduction in the number of offsets and

elbows by pre-planning the duct system installation and coordination with other trades to

prevent interferences. Maintain access to accessories requiring maintenance, service, and

inspection. Radius elbows are preferred for turns to minimize friction, noise, and vibrations.

B. Provide and/or construct materials, ductwork, joints, transformations, splitters, dampers, and

access doors as specified herein for the sheet metal ductwork as shown on drawings.

C. SMACNA Manual: Sheet Metal Tradesman shall have access on the construction site to

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards". Comply with applicable provisions of the SMACNA

Manual and more stringent requirements of this specification.

D. Quality control involves not only the general performance requirements for air ducts, but also

quality workmanship which includes layout pre-planning so that offsets, rises, falls, elbows,

fittings, etc., are minimized or eliminated. General performance requirements for ducts include:

1. Dimensional stability (shape deformation and strength)

2. Containment of the air being conveyed (leakage control). See Part 3 of this specification

for leakage testing.

3. Vibration (fatigue and appearance)

4. Noise (generation, transmission, or attenuation)

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 31 13 - 3

Construction Set

5. Exposure (to damage, weather, temperature extremes, flexure cycles, wind, corrosive

atmospheres, biological contamination, flow interruption or reversal, underground or other

encasement conditions, combustion, or other in-service conditions)

6. Support (alignment and position retention)

7. Thermal conductivity (heat gain or loss and condensation control)

E. Provide galvanized duct materials which meet applicable requirements of local and state codes,

whichever is the most stringent.

F. Support ductwork in accordance with applicable requirements of local and state codes and

details on drawings.

G. Emboss fittings with material gauge, manufacturer, and type material.

H. Sealers, liners, pre-insulated jackets and flexible ducts shall comply with a flame spread rating

of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of not over 50.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL

A. Sheet metal ductwork, angles, bar slips, hangers, and straps: Galvanized, prime quality steel

sheets.

B. Screws: Cadmium-plated.

C. Joint Sealers: water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.

1. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use, fiber reinforced, with UV inhibitors.

2. Surface burning characteristics: Flame spread of zero and smoke developed of zero when

tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

3. Suitable for use with flexible ducts and UL listed.

4. Acceptable Products:

a. Substitutions: Not permitted.

5. Pressure sensitive tape is not acceptable.

D. Duct Sealing:

1. All longitudinal and transverse joints, seams and duct sidewall penetrations, regardless of

pressure classification, shall be sealed with duct sealer. Follow SMACNA Table 1-2, Seal

Class A for all supply, return, and exhaust ductwork.

2. See Leakage Testing of Installed Systems requirements in Part 3.

E. Sheetmetal Accessories: As specified in Section 23 23 00.


2.02 PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION

A. Ductwork where maximum dimension is less than 97" shall be constructed based on applicable

pressure classification in accordance with SMACNA Manual including sheetmetal gauge,

reinforcement gauge and spacing.

B. Construct the following for 2" pressure classification, Table 1- 5:

1. Return ductwork

2. Exhaust ductwork

3. Supply ductwork

2.03 RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK

A. Transverse Joints:

1. "S" and drive construction for 1" and 2" w.g. pressure classification.

a. Provide duct gauge and reinforcing angles in accordance with Table 1-11

2. Duct Connection System: Connection system as manufactured by Ductmate or Nexus

shall incorporate gasketed joints, metal cleats and bolted corners. Minimum metal gauge

shall be 24-gauge. Connection systems may be used for all pressure classifications.

3. For pressure classifications above 2", use double "S" joint up to 30" and companion angle

or manufacturer's connection system above 30".

B. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburg Lock

C. Transitions:

1. Do not exceed 1" in 7" of slope for increase-in-area transitions.

2. Do not exceed 1" in 4" of slope for decrease-in-area transitions, 1" in 7" is preferable.

3. Do not exceed 45 degrees on the entering or leaving side for angle of transitions at

connections to equipment without the use of approved turning vanes.

D. Elbows:

1. Fabricate ells using one of the following specifications: The fabrication methods are listed

in order of preference. Use radius elbows where ever possible. Use square elbows only

when available space prevents the use of radius elbows.

a. Unvaned, long radius elbow with the throat radius equal to 3/4 of the width of the

duct and with a full heel radius.

b. Six inch throat radius with full radius, single thickness vanes and full heel radius.

Maximum unsupported length of vanes shall be 36". Securely fasten vanes to runners.

Secure vanes in stable position. Construct vane edges to project tangents parallel to

duct sides.

c. Square elbows with airfoil, double thickness turning vanes.

2. Turning Vanes:

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 31 13 - 5

Construction Set

a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Aero Dyne

b. Substitutions: Not permitted.

c. True airfoil design; smoothly-rounded entry nose with extended trailing edge.

Generated sound power level shall not exceed 54 decibels in band 4 at 2000 FPM in a

24"x24" duct.

d. Fabricate assemblies with Aero Dyne Co. side rails; install vanes on design centers of

2.4 inches across the full diagonal dimension of the elbow.

e. Submit Aero Dyne product and performance data for review.

E. Branch Connections:

1. Pressure classification 2" and less:

a. Rectangular branch from rectangular main: 45 degree entry with all corners closed as

shown in Figure 2-8

b. Round branches: Spin-in fitting without scoop.

c. Parallel flow branches: See Figure 2-7.

d. Space duct joints to avoid cutting them for branch take offs and outlet collars.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION

A. Do not exceed 45 degrees for easement transition angle.

B. Seal all transverse and longitudinal joints and seams and duct wall penetrations with approved

sealer in accordance with manufacturer's directions regardless of pressure class.

C. Counterflash ductwork penetrating roof.

D. Support round ducts from building structure with galvanized steel hangers in accordance with

SMACNA. Secure hangers to masonry portion of building by means of inserts or other

acceptable anchors.

E. Secure hangers to steel structure members by means of C-clamps. Vertical risers, and other duct

runs where methods of support specified above are not applicable, shall be supported by angle

brackets as shown in SMACNA Manual.

F. Where appropriate based on duct weight, support rectangular ducts by minimum, 1" x 18

gauge, galvanized band iron or minimum 3/8" galvanized rod hangers attached to reinforcing

angles and spaced same as reinforcing angles. Design hangers, reinforcing angles and other

components to support weight of duct and insulation. Secure hangers to concrete beam or slab

by adequately sized inserts, anchor shield and bolt, toggle bolt, or expansion bold.

G. Attach hangers to ductwork using sheet metal screws.

H. Space hangers approximately 8' along the duct for ducts under 60". For ducts over 60" and

larger and heavier sections, such as welded duct and sound absorbers, space hangers at

approximately 4' intervals.


I. Hangers and bracing used with ductwork shall be galvanized.

J. Provide smooth insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps,

access doors, and similar operating devices. Provide metal collar equivalent in depth to

insulation thickness. Access door locks and damper handles shall be free from mastic or

sealant.

K. In addition to the requirements above, add supplemental bracing as necessary to prevent

sagging and drumming, and/or vibration.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Clean mechanical system thoroughly to assure all foreign matter and dirt is removed.

3.03 AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT OPERATION DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The use of new or existing air handling units, fans, or other permanent air moving equipment

during construction is prohibited unless approved by the owner in writing. If approved for use

during construction, the following procedures shall be followed:

1. The contractor shall protect the interior of all ductwork, air handling units, and other

equipment from the accumulation of dirt and dust and other contaminants. If the

permanent equipment cannot be adequately protected, temporary air moving/ conditioning

equipment and distribution systems shall be utilized as required for finishing trades.

2. Provide all specified filters in equipment to be operated as well as temporary filters on all

return and exhaust air grilles, open ductwork, and transfer openings in the work area.

3. The contractor shall remove all filters used during construction and replace them with new

filters prior to test and balance work and prior to substantial completion.

4. If the ductwork and/or equipment is found to be contaminated at any point during

construction, an independent NADCA certified contractor shall be retained to clean the

ductwork and/or equipment at the contractor’s expense. Refer to Section 23 01 30.51.

5. System operating temperatures shall be maintained to avoid condensation on ductwork

and equipment surfaces. New or existing insulation found damaged shall be replaced.

6. Coordinate use of air handling equipment with ICRA plan, if applicable. Maintain

required pressure relationships in construction areas adjacent to occupied areas.

3.04 LEAKAGE TESTING OF INSTALLED SYSTEMS

A. Test duct for leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

Use prescribed test kit containing test blower, two U-tube manometers and calibrated curve

attached to the orifice tube assembly.

B. Pressure testing shall include taps/take-offs to air terminal units in medium pressure ductwork

and taps/take-offs to air devices in supply, return, and exhaust ductwork.

C. Pressurize all installed duct systems for each pressure class to maximum pressure for

fabrication classification. The leakage amount shall not exceed the allotted amount for the

pressure class or the allotted amount for that portion of the system as follows:

1. 1" Pressure Class - Leakage Class 6; Max. Leakage Factor - 6.0 CFM/100 SF

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 31 13 - 7

Construction Set

2. 2" Pressure Class - Leakage Class 6; Max. Leakage Factor - 9.4 CFM/100 SF

3. 1" and 2" Pressure Class exhaust ductwork connected to or serving fume hoods, bio-safety

cabinets, chemical or hazardous storage rooms, smoke removal/purge systems, laboratory

spaces, isolation rooms, bronchoscopy rooms, and nuclear medicine rooms shall be

construction and tested as follows:

a. 1" Pressure Class - Leakage Class 3; Max. Leakage Factor - 3.0 CFM/100 SF

b. 2" Pressure Class - Leakage Class 3; Max. Leakage Factor - 4.7 CFM/100 SF

D. All ductwork shall be leak tested first before being enclosed in a shaft or above other

inaccessible areas.

E. Correct leaks found in excess of allowable limits. Retest until acceptable leakage is witnessed.

F. Have test results available for review on a progressive and final basis. Include all test results in

project closing file along with name, signature, and date of independent witness to testing. Test

results shall show preliminary and final test results and include all calculations used to

determine system compliance with the maximum specified leakage rate.

3.05 AIR TEST AND BALANCE

A. Prepare the system for tests as specified in Section 23 05 93 and correct deficiencies found by

the Test and Balance firm.

B. Duct dimensions shown on drawings indicate inside clear dimensions. Make calculation

allowances for duct requiring internal sound lining, or insulation to provide "inside clear" (IC)

dimensions.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 23 31 17

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. FRP pipe/duct and fittings

B. FRP ductwork accessories



B. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

C. Section 23 31 13 - Sheetmetal Ductwork

D. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit material/product data as described in Division 01.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings of pipe/duct, as follows:

1. Draw to a scale not less than 1/4-inch to one foot

2. Provide sheet sizes equal to Contract Drawings

3. Show pipe/duct sizes

4. Show fitting details

5. Show lighting and ceiling diffusers

6. Show bottom of pipe/duct elevation above finished floor

7. Show all manual and motorized dampers and associated access doors.

8. Show associated equipment and air quantities.

9. Manufacturer's product brochures, certifications, adhesives, fittings, dampers, and

installation procedures.

C. Coordinated Shop Drawings shall be completed for all areas prior to installation of the major

trades. The coordinated shop drawings are not required to be submitted unless noted above. A

coordinated shop drawing attempt shall be submitted with any request to the owner or design

team to assist with overhead coordination conflicts.



A. Quality control involves not only the general performance requirements for air ducts, but also

quality workmanship which includes layout pre-planning so that offsets, rises, falls, elbows,

fittings, etc., are minimized or eliminated. General performance requirements for ducts include:

1. Dimensional stability (shape deformation and strength).

2. Containment of the air being conveyed (leakage control). (See Part 3 of this specification

for leakage testing.)

3. Vibration (fatigue and appearance).

4. Noise (generation, transmission, or attenuation).

5. Exposure (to damage, weather, temperature extremes, flexure cycles, wind, corrosive

atmospheres, biological contamination, flow interruption or reversal, underground or other

encasement conditions, combustion, or other in-service conditions).

6. Support (alignment and position retention).

7. Thermal conductivity (heat gain or loss and condensation control).

B. Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic which meet applicable requirements of local and state

codes, whichever is the most stringent.

C. Support ductwork in accordance with applicable requirements of local and state codes and the

Contract Documents including any details on the Drawings.

D. Contractor shall be certified by manufacturer and shall utilize manufacturer's recommended

installation procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Fowlco, Smith, or Viron.


2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide an installed duct system which shall supply the air quantities indicated by the plans and

have the lowest possible friction loss with the least possible leakage loss. System static pressure

loss for each system shall not exceed the scheduled external static pressure and shall include the

losses of all accessories. Friction losses shall be minimized by reduction in the number of

offsets and elbows by pre-planning the duct systems installation and coordination with other

trades to prevent interferences. Maintain access to accessories requiring maintenance, service,

and inspection. Radius elbows are preferred for turns to minimize friction, noise, and

vibrations; and, especially, for sections having large volume or higher velocities and sections

which may have turbulence.

B. Provide and/or construct materials, ductwork, joints, transformations, splitters, as specified

herein for the fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork as shown on Drawings.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 31 17 - 3

Construction Set

2.03 PRESSURE RATINGS

A. Provide FRP pipe designed to withstand a minimum of 3” w.c. negative pressure, 5” w.c.

positive pressure, and suitable for burial as described on details and drawings for a range of 3 to

6 feet from top of pipe to grade.

2.04 FILAMENT WOUND PIPE/DUCT

A. Permitted for use for sizes 3” to 60” when exposed to view.

B. Materials:

1. Resin system will be matched to suit the chemical and temperature environment of the

application or as specified by others. The resin, reinforcements, colorants, fillers and other

materials, when combined as a composite structure, shall produce a pipe that meets or

exceeds the requirements in Specifications ASTM D2996-01 and ASTM D2310-06.

C. Duct:

1. Duct shall conform to the requirements of the appropriate regularly standards. Duct shall

have a minimum of a 30 mil resin rich liner and a minimum of 20 mil exterior resin rich

coating. The pipe shall be supplied in nominal lengths of 40 feet, and may be plain end.

The pipe wall thickness shall be as required for the pressure and service. Duct shall be

constructed and tested to support a minimum of 5” w.c. vacuum and withstand 150

degrees F.

D. Fittings:

1. Contact molded fittings shall meet the wall thickness requirements of the National Bureau

of Standards, Product Standard PS-15-69 for the specified service pressure and shall be

constructed of the same resin as the pipe. Fittings up to 28” shall be smooth molded,

fittings above 30” diameter shall be mitered or smooth molded.

E. Adhesives:

1. Duct manufacturer’s recommended adhesive shall be used to fabricate all socket

connections and shall be prepared and applied according to the packaged instructions.

F. Joining:

1. Where plain end joints are used, they shall be joined, “welded”, by the butt and strap

technique, according to manufacturer’s specified “welding” instructions. Butt and strap

welds shall be designed to provide a finished joint as strong as or stronger than the mating

pieces and will be made using the same resin system as the pipe. Flanged joints are

permitted. Bell and spigot joints are permitted only for centrifugally cast pipe.

G. Glass content shall be no less than 60% by weight.

2.05 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST PIPE/DUCT

A. Permitted for use for sizes 3” to 12”.

B. Shall have a corrosion barrier of no less than 30 mils of 100% pure resin.


C. Shall be constructed and tested to support a minimum of 5” w.c. vacuum and able to withstand

150 degrees F.

D. Jointing System: Adhesive joints shall be assembled with manufacturer’s recommended high

strength adhesive for socket connections, according to manufacturer’s recommended

instructions.

E. Duct shall be constructed according to ASTM 2997-01 by means of a centrifugal casting

process.

2.06 CONTACT MOLDED AND LAY UP DUCT

A. Permitted for all fittings and duct sizes 3” to 60” when concealed from view.

B. Constructed in accordance with National Bureau of Standards PS-15-69.

C. The inner surface shall be a minimum of 30 mil resin rich liner with a minimum of 90% resin

(pure resin if possible).

D. The exterior surface shall be a minimum of 20 mil resin rich liner (pure resin if possible).

E. Finished joints shall be built up in successive layers and be as strong as or stronger than the

pieces being joined and as crevice free as is commercially possible. Joints shall be assembled

according to manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions.

2.07 FLANGES

A. Duct walls at hub of flange shall be at least one and one half times the normal thickness of the

duct and taper to a normal thickness over a distance of the flange width.

B. Face of flange shall have no depressions or projections and shall be perpendicular to the

centerline of the duct.

C. Standard flanges shall be supplied undrilled unless drilling is specified by the customer.

2.08 RESIN SYSTEMS

A. Resin system shall be suitable for corrosion resistant use in a water treatment environment.

Resin system shall be approved by resin manufacturer, as well as pipe/duct manufacturer, to be

suitable for use with at least the following chemical substances:

1. Sodium Chloride

2. Sodium Hypochlorite

B. Suggested resin is vinyl-ester resin with fire retardant. Resin manufacturer’s approval and

confirmation should be obtained, as well as the manufacturer’s concerns for the performance of

the resin in the environment described above.

C. Duct exposed to weather shall have its exterior coating contain ultra-violet inhibitors.

2.09 BUTTERFLY DAMPERS

A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Dampers:

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 31 17 - 5

Construction Set

1. FRP dampers shall be manufactured by Swartwout, Belco Manufacturing, or Ershigs

without exception.

2. All FRP dampers shall be the butterfly type. FRP fabrication shall meet the corrosion

requirements specified in this Section for FRP ductwork.

3. Leakage shall not exceed 3 cfm/sq. ft at 10” W.C. and 5.25 cfm/sq. ft at 30” W.C. for

Isolation. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, all dampers are assumed to be

Isolation.

4. Fabrication:

a. Frame and blade: premium vinyl ester. Blade shall fully encapsulate shaft. Blades that

bolt to a single side of the shaft will NOT be accepted.

b. Shaft: Type 316 stainless steel for all dampers.

c. Bearings and bushings: Teflon.

d. Pins and all hardware: Type 316 stainless steel.

e. Shaft seals: EPDM.

f. Provide all isolation dampers with a blade stop consisting of FRP angles with full

circumference EPDM seals.

g. All dampers shall have flanged ends. Contractor to provide connecting bolts, nuts and

washers.

h. All dampers 24 inches or larger shall be provided with Gear Operators with an epoxy

coating. Dampers below 24 inches shall be supplied with hand quadrant actuators

fabricated of Type 316 stainless steel with a 5-stage locking quadrant Indicator. All

balancing dampers shall have a fully adjustable slot with an extra hole drilled in the

handle for contractor to "drill and pin-in place" once system is balanced so handle

cannot vibrate loose. Drawing may indicate motorized actuators; if so that shall take

precedence. Any dampers over 6 feet AFF shall be furnished with Chain wheel gear

operators.

i. All Isolation dampers provided shall bear the AMCA seal. Dampers are to have been

tested in an AMCA laboratory for performance (pressure drop) and leakage.

j. Dampers may be tested after installation to confirm compliance.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe/duct according to manufacturer's instructions and in compliance with local and state

codes.

B. Obstructions shall not be located within ducts.

3.02 AIR TEST AND BALANCE

A. Prepare the system for tests as specified in Section 23 05 93 and correct deficiencies found by

the Test and Balance Firm.


3.03 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support ducts according to local and state codes, and manufacturer’s recommendation, with

corrosion resistant hangers. Secure hangers to masonry portion of building by means of inserts

or other acceptable hangers. All materials used for hanging FRP ductwork shall be constructed

from FRP and stainless steel. Hangers and supports for FRP duct shall be located at maximum

spans as shown in ASTM D3982-08, Table 1.

B. Duct supports located on the exterior of the building shall be designed to include the weight of

the duct and to withstand all applicable combinations of wind and seismic loading in

accordance with the International Building Code. Exterior supports shall be located as shown

on the Drawings and shall be of the "saddle type" support as per the standard detail shown on

the Drawings. The locations of duct supports shown on the Drawings are approximate, and the

Contractor shall be required to confirm the support requirements and locations.

C. The Contractor shall note that not all duct support locations are shown on the Drawings, and the

Contractor shall follow the Specifications herein in locating additional supports as required.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of additional supports and for the overall

stability of the entire support system. Support and hanger details and a detailed layout showing

the location of all duct supports and hangers shall be submitted in the shop drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 33 00

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Air turning devices/extractors.

B. Backdraft dampers - metal.

C. Duct access doors.

D. Duct test holes.

E. Fire dampers.

F. Flexible duct

G. Flexible duct connections.

H. Volume control dampers.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 01 for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for review. Include electrical characteristics

and connection requirements where applicable.

C. Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of volume dampers, rated dampers, access

doors, and test holes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL

A. Manufacturers: Louvers & Dampers, Nailor Industries, or Ruskin Company.

1. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01.

B. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with

center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked

together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin;

counter-balance adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2.02 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Air Balance, Greenheck, or Ruskin.

1. Substitutions: Not permitted.


B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, and as indicated.

C. Material: Galvanized steel or 304 stainless steel to match adjacent ductwork.

D. Dampers shall be curtain or multi-leaf type, 1-1/2 hour rated, suitable for horizontal or vertical

mounting. Blades for curtain type dampers shall be stored out of the airstream.

E. Dampers shall meet Class 1 leakage rates and be dynamic rated for closure against airflow up to

2000 FPM in low pressure systems and up to 4000 FPM in medium pressure systems.

F. Dampers shall have a UL 555 differential pressure rating of 4 in. wg.

G. Provide damper with fusible link melting at 165 degrees causing damper to lock in closed

position.

H. Provide manufacturer's round to horizontal duct adapter as required.

I. Maximum pressure drop shall be as follows:

J. Damper pressure drop shall not exceed 0.05 in. wg. at 1500 FPM or 0.10 in wg. at 2000 FPM.

2.03 SLEEVES FOR RATED DAMPERS

A. Unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction, sleeves for fire dampers, smoke

dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers shall be the rigid type of construction

recommended in Schedule 2 of SMACNA Publication for "Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide

for Air Handling Systems". Use 16 gauge for ducts 24" or less in diameter or either rectangular

dimension and 14 gauge for ducts over 24". Provide minimum 18" long sleeves. Coordinate

required length with wall thicknesses.

B. Install 1-1/2"x1-1/2"x1/8" angle bar on four sides of sleeves and both sides of wall. Fasten

angles to sleeve only. Do not fasten to the wall.

2.04 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers: Ruskin, SEMCO, Greenheck, or Ward Industries.


B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as indicated.

C. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening

locking devices. For insulated ducts, provide minimum 1 inch thick insulation with minimum

24 gauge sheet metal cover on each side.

1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with sash locks.

2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks.

3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside

handles.

4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 33 00 - 3

Construction Set

5. Latches shall permit easy removal of access door while maintaining positive closing and

minimum leakage. Provide continuous sponge rubber gaskets for all doors.

D. Provide insulated doors in ductwork for access to service equipment such as airflow measuring

stations (each side), casing mounted coils (each side), control dampers, duct mounted coils

(each side), duct mounted smoke detectors, humidifiers, rated dampers, and elsewhere as noted

on drawings.

E. Size access doors as follows:

1. Duct sizes under 12": Door sized sufficient to service equipment or replace fusible link.

2. Duct sizes 12" to 20": 12"x12" door.

3. Duct sizes 20" to 36": 18"x18" door.

4. Duct sizes above 36": 24"x24" door.

F. Provide reinforced wire glass view windows (min. 12"x12") in access doors at humidifiers.

G. Mount doors in rigid frame of at least 22 gauge formed galvanized steel or aluminum.

H. Use angle iron bracing as required to make the door frame a rigid assembly.

I. In accordance with NFPA 90A, identify each access door with minimum 1/2" high printed or

stenciled letters as 'Fire Damper', 'Smoke Damper', or 'Combination Fire/Smoke Damper'.

2.05 DUCT TEST PORTS

A. Temporary Test Port: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs,

threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. Repair insulation and vapor barrier.

B. Permanent Test Port: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap equal to

Carlisle PTP-1. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.

2.06 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: Carlisle, Durodyne, or Elgen.



C. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

1. Fabric: NFPA 90A compliant, UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber

fabric, minimum 28 oz. density.

a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide.

2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gauge, 0.0239 inch thick galvanized steel. Provide aluminum or

stainless steel metal as required to match ductwork material.

2.07 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Louvers & Dampers, Greenheck, McGill Airflow, Ruskin, or SEMCO.




C. Splitter Dampers:

1. Material: Same gauge as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gauges heavier

for sizes over 24 inches.

2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with

continuous hinge or rod.

3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged

bushing with set screw.

D. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.

1. Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.

2. Blade: 22 gauge, minimum.

3. Frame: 18 gauge, minimum.

E. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with 3V or airflow shaped blades and

maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or

galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.

1. Blade: 18 gauge, 0.0478 inch, minimum.

F. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple

blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomeric, or sintered bronze

bearings.

G. Quadrants:

1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on multi-blade dampers.

2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or

adapters.

3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Duct Opening Closure Film: Mold-resistant, self-adhesive film to keep debris out of ducts

during construction equal to Carlisle Dynair Duct Protection Film. Use to cover all open ends

of stored or hung ductwork during construction.

1. Thickness: 2 mils.

2. High tack water based adhesive.

3. UV stable light blue color.

4. Elongation before break: 325 percent, minimum.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 33 00 - 5

Construction Set

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in locations specified and as shown on drawings in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction

Standards. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide insulated doors in ductwork for access to service equipment such as airflow measuring

stations (each side), casing mounted coils (each side), control dampers, duct mounted coils

(each side), duct mounted smoke detectors, humidifiers, rated dampers, and elsewhere as noted

on drawings.

C. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

D. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated

components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required

perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs,

bearings, bushings and hinges.

E. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately

adjacent to the equipment.

F. Provide balancing dampers at all points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches

are taken from larger ducts.

G. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.

H. Where diffusers or grilles and registers are not provided with volume dampers, install spin-in

fitting with balance damper in duct run-out.

I. Provide all screws, bolts, nuts, inserts, and material required for attaching sheetmetal to duct,

walls, floors, and ceilings.

3.02 TESTING

A. Check work for satisfactory installation and performance.

B. Insure that adequate access does in fact exist for rated dampers, that damper blade movement is

not restricted, and that damper operator motors are not hindered in operation by proximity to

walls or other objects.

C. Check duct connections at access doors for air leakage or condensation. Correct deficiencies

found.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 23 34 20

BIFURCATED INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP), Bifurcated Inline Centrifugal Fans.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. All sections, drawing plans, specifications and contract documents.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AMCA -99 Standards Handbook

B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.

C. AMCA 211 - Certified Ratings Procedure.

D. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.

E. AMCA 311 - Certified Sound Ratings Program for Air Moving Devices.

F. AFMBA - Method of Evaluating Load Ratings of Bearings (ASA - B3.11).

G. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.


A. Performance ratings: Conform to AMCA standard 211 and 311.

B. Classification for Spark Resistant Construction Conform to AMCA 99.

C. Each fan shall be tested before shipping. Motors to be tested for amperage draw.

D. A certificate shall be supplied for each fan, certifying quality control and compliance to

specifications, prior to shipping.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide dimensional drawings and product data on each fan assembly.

B. Provide fan curves for each fan at the specified operation point, with the flow, static pressure

and horsepower clearly plotted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. M.K. Plastics Corporation, Model AXCL FRP Bifurcated Inline Centrifugal Fan.


B. Approved equal.

2.02 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 Lb/ft3 ).

B. Fans selected shall be capable of accommodating static pressure and flow variations of +/-15%

of scheduled values.

C. Each fan shall be belt or direct driven in AMCA arrangements as stated in the specs or on the

drawings.

D. Fans to be equipped with lifting lugs.

E. Motor mounting plate / bearing mounting plate to be coated steel with a minimum of 4-6 mils

of chemical resistant epoxy.

F. Fasteners to be 304 stainless steel.

G. UV inhibitors are added to the resins and are flame retardant class 1 of 25 or less.

2.03 FAN HOUSING

A. Fan housing shall be of the bifurcated design, in which all impeller drive components are

outside of the corrosive, contaminated air stream. Housing as well as air inlet shall be

aerodynamically designed for high-efficiency, engineered to reduce incoming air turbulence.

Housings shall be resin rich to be smooth exterior and interior.

B. Fan housing shall be manufactured in specifically formulated resins, for maximum corrosion

resistance, and reinforced with fiberglass for structural strength. Fastening bolts holding the

casing to the support plate are to be encapsulated in FRP. No uncoated metal fan parts in the

corrosive air stream will be tolerated.

C. Fans shall be supplied with an internal graphite liner and grounding strap to remove static

electricity, if scheduled.

D. For horizontal airflow applications, a casing drain for condensation removal shall be an integral

part of the fan housing, and attached to the casing at the lowest point.

E. Fan inlet and outlet to be slip connections or flanged.

F. A housing access door shall be supplied for impeller inspection and service.

G. Hub seal to be neoprene or Teflon (when required).

H. Fans shall be supplied with horizontal or vertical mounting brackets, if required by the

equipment schedule.

I. Finish color to be light gray.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 34 20 - 3

Construction Set

2.04 FAN IMPELLER

A. Impellers to be molded FRP, backward inclined or airfoil, backward inclined, manufactured in

solid FRP, unitary construction, with smooth surfaces. A metal backplate integral to the FRP

impeller and encapsulated in resin shall have the hub extending to the outside of the fan

housing. The shaft end in the housing to be covered by a tight fitting FRP cap. Impellers

manufactured in steel and coated with a plastic material are not acceptable.

B. The impellers shall be electronically balanced both statically and dynamically Grade G6.3 per

AMCA 204 Standard and conform to ASTM Standard D-4167.

2.05 FAN MOTORS AND DRIVE

A. Motors to be premium efficiency, standard NEMA frame, 1800 RPM ( Belt Drive) or 900,

1200, or 1800 RPM (Direct Drive), TEFC with a 1.15 service factor.

B. A factory mounted NEMA 3R disconnect switch shall be provided for each fan.

C. Belt drive units shall have belts and sheaves sized for 150% of the fan operating brake

horsepower, and shall be readily and easily accessible for service.

D. Drives up to 5 HP shall be provided with variable pitch sheave.

E. Shaft to be ANSI C-1045 steel, and be protected with TECTYL 822B protective coating.

F. Shafts to be AISI -1045 carbon steel. The shaft shall not be in the corrosive air stream.

G. Belt driven AXCL fans shall have shaft bearings sized for a minimum life of L-10 100,000

hours. Bearings shall be ball or spherical pillow block type, sealed to retain lubricant and

exclude dust and air. Due to the bifurcated fan housing design, bearing inspection and

relubrication shall be accomplished without fan disassembly, and in clear view, without the use

of extended lube lines.

H. Belt drive guards and motor covers shall be supplied, as indicated on the schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans in locations shown on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Connect fans to ductwork only by means of flexible connections.

C. Fans for outdoor mounting shall be completely weatherproofed, with a fan motor and drive

weather cover, and receive a second factory coat of paint.

3.02 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Start-up and checkout fan for proper motor phasing, alignment, and vibration free operation.

Improperly aligned fans to be connected. Change unmatched belts.

B. Test fans in accordance with Section 23 05 00.


C. Demonstrate system operation to Owner's maintenance personnel and instruct them in

operational requirements.

D. Verify that, where applicable, fans are interlocked with supply (and exhaust) fans as required

by control drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 37 00

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Diffusers.

B. Registers/grilles.

C. Louvers and Louvered Penthouses.



B. Section 23 31 13 - Sheetmetal Ductwork

C. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data for review. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and

type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size,

location, application, and noise level.

B. Samples: Submit two of each required air outlet and inlet type upon request.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.


A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.

B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Metalaire, Nailor, Price, or Titus unless noted otherwise.


C. Air devices shall meet these specifications and the requirements noted in the Air Distribution

Device Schedule. Titus model numbers are not inclusive of all listed requirements.

2.02 SUPPLY DIFFUSERS

A. Type S5 (based on Titus 300R):


1. Sidewall, double deflection register with 3/4" blade spacing and front blades parallel to the

long dimension. Blades shall have steel friction pivots on both ends to allow individual

blade adjustment without loosening or rattling. Provide panel, face and neck size

scheduled.

2. Material: Steel with baked acrylic finish.

3. Color: White.

4. Borders and mounting: 1-1/4" wide border on all sides with countersunk screw holes..

5. Dampers: Provide opposed blade manual volume damper with matching finish behind

register. Damper shall be adjustable through the front blades of the diffuser.

6. Accessories: None.

2.03 RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES

A. Type R5 / E5 (based on Titus 355RL):

1. Sidewall grille with 35 degree fixed deflection blades spaced 1/2" apart. Refer to schedule

for blade orientation. Provide face and neck size scheduled.

2. Material: Steel with baked acrylic finish.

3. Color: White.

4. Borders and mounting: 1-1/4" wide border on all sides with countersunk screw holes..

5. Dampers: Provide opposed blade manual volume damper with matching finish behind

register. Damper shall be adjustable through the front blades of the grille.

6. Accessories: Provide with piano hinged 1" filter frame and quarter turn fastener when

noted on drawings. Hinge shall be located on right or left side of grille as required to allow

frame door to fully open.

2.04 LOUVERS AND LOUVERED PENTHOUSES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Louvers:

1. Airolite, Construction Specialties, Dowco Corporation - Model DBE-04 or DBE-06,

Louvers and Dampers, Inc., Penn Airstream - Model M44 or M63, or Ruskin - Model

ELF-375D or ELF-6375D.


B. Acceptable Manufacturers for Louvered Penthouses:

1. Airolite, Construction Specialties, or Louvers and Dampers, Inc.


C. Verify size, location, and placement of louvers prior to fabrication; coordinate field

measurements and shop drawings and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, splicing,

mechanical joints and field assembly of units. Louver depth should match wall thickness.

D. Preassemble louvers in sections as large as practical.

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 37 00 - 3

Construction Set

E. Material: Extruded aluminum with 12-gauge,.081" thick aluminum blades and frame and

welded construction.

F. Blade Angle: Minimum 35 degrees from horizontal.

G. Use blades minimum 4" or 6" deep, blades to match wall thickness, with drain gutter on each

blade and downspouts in jams and mullions.

H. Set blades on 3" or 4-1/2" centers.

I. Provide internally braced corners with caulking slots.

J. Provide interlocked mullions with a provision for expansion and contraction.

K. Design structural supports to carry a wind load of not less than 20 pounds per square foot.

L. Louvered penthouses shall be all welded assembly with mitered corners. Reinforce with

structural angles.

M. Provide bird screen, 1/2" square mesh of 16 gauge,.051", expanded flattened aluminum.

Screens shall be on the interior side of louver and shall be in a removable frame.

N. Provide formed metal sills of the same gauge and material as the louver, sized to lap under the

louver sill and over the outside edge of the wall.

O. Louver finish: As selected by the Architect from submitted color samples. Submit color

samples for review.

P. Provide louvers with the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance and Water

Penetration.

Q. Size louvers to provide no less than the required minimum free area indicated on the drawings.

R. Select intake louver velocity at or below the "Point of Zero Water Penetration".

S. Do not exceed 0.2" of water pressure drop across louvers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations as well as

applicable sections of SMACNA Manual and other standards set forth in Part 1.

C. Provide all screws, bolts, nuts, inserts, and material required for attaching sheet metal to duct,

walls, floors, and ceilings.

D. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform

with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.


E. Where diffusers or grilles and registers are not provided with volume dampers, install spin-in

fitting with balancing damper in duct runout.

3.02 TESTING

A. Check work for satisfactory installation and performance.

B. Check duct connections at air inlets and outlets air leakage or condensation. Correct conditions

found.

3.03 INSPECTION

A. Air inlets and outlets shall be clean and free from scratches and dents. Repair or replace

damaged devices as required.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 23 74 00

PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK

A. Section 23 05 48 – Vibration Isolation

B. Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for review.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Carrier, Daikin, Lennox, Trane or York (JCI)

2.02 COOLING SYSTEM:

A. Refrigerant type: R-410A

B. Capable of operating from 0 to 125 degrees F without installation of additional controls

C. Compressors:

1. Scroll Type

2. Resiliently mounted on rubber mounts for vibration isolation

3. Overload Protected

4. Internal excessive current and temperature protection

5. Isolated from condenser and evaporator fan air streams

6. Refrigerant cooled

D. Thermal Expansion Valve

E. Crankcase heaters

F. High capacity filter/driers

G. High pressure switches

H. Low pressure switches

I. Freezestats


2.03 COIL CONSTRUCTION:

A. Tube and fin condensing/evaporator coil general construction:

1. Aluminum Rippled and Lanced fins

2. Copper tube construction

3. Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes

4. All coils are high pressure leak tested at manufacturing facility

B. Condensing coil general construction:

1. Aluminum/Aluminum construction

2. Aluminum Lanced fins

3. Aluminum fins thermally bonded to aluminum flat tube

4. All coils are high pressure leak tested at manufacturing facility

C. Evaporator Coils:

1. With balanced port thermal expansion valves, freeze protection on each compressor

circuit, pressure and leak tested to 500 psi

2. Each compressor circuit on coil divided across face of coil and active through full depth of

coil 3-25 ton constant air volume models. Each compressor circuit on coil divided by rows

that are active across the entire surface area of the supply air on 20-30 ton variable air

volume models

2.04 WIRING:

A. Keyed and labeled field connections, color coded and continuously marked wire to identify

point-to-point component connections

B. Not in contact with hot-gas refrigerant lines or sharp metal edges

2.05 GAS HEATING SYSTEM:

A. Induced draft

B. Natural gas fired system with direct spark ignition

C. Electronic flame sensors

D. Flame rollout switches

E. High heat limit switches

F. Induced draft failure switch and capable of operating to altitude of 2000 feet with no derate to

manifold pressure.

G. Service access for controls, burners and heat exchanger

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 74 00 - 3

Construction Set

H. Heat Exchanger:

1. Tubular Design

2. Stainless steel

I. Gas piping system tight and free of leaks when pressurized to maximum supply pressure

J. Gas Valve: redundant type gas heat valve with manual shutoff

K. Two stage gas heating

L. Gas Burners: Aluminized steel inshot-type gas burners

M. Direct spark pilot ignition

N. Fan and Limit Control

O. Safety Switches

P. Gas piping system tight and free of leaks

2.06 HEATING CONTROLS:

A. Support 2 stages of heating control from thermostat or DDC

B. Delay time of 30 seconds between low and high heat stages

2.07 SUPPLY AIR FAN MOTOR AND DRIVES:

A. Belt drive

B. Permanently lubricated ball bearings (for belt drive motors)

C. Thermal overload protected motors with automatic reset

D. Adjustable sheaves on belt drive motors for blower speed adjustment

2.08 SUPPLY AIR FAN:

A. Double inlet type, galvanized steel with forward curved blades

B. Statically and dynamically balanced

C. Continuous or automatic control for occupied periods

2.09 SUPPLY AIR FILTERS:

A. Provide filter section with filter type and efficiency as scheduled on drawings.

2.10 CONDENSER FAN MOTOR:

A. PSC motors.


B. Direct drive with permanently lubricated ball bearings.

C. Watertight with thermal overload protection and automatic reset

D. Motor mount isolated from fan safety guard

2.11 CONDENSER FANS:

A. Corrosion resistant propeller type

2.12 UNIT CONTROLLER:

A. Solid state control board to operate unit

B. Scrolling digital display

C. Push button navigation

D. Guided menu setup

E. Shall provide a 5 degrees F temperature difference between cooling and heating set points to

meet ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard.

F. Shall provide and display alarms, alarm history and system status

G. Component and cooling/heating mode run test capability

H. Economizer control

I. Blower on/off delay

J. 2-stage heat/4-stage cool compatible

K. Warm-up mode

L. Indoor air quality input

M. Low ambient control down to 0 degrees F.

N. Component runtime and cycle count data collection

O. Blower proving switch strike 3

P. Real time clock (timestamps)

Q. USB interface with profiles and firmware upgrade capability

R. Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics

1. Outside Air Temperature sensor error

2. Discharge Air sensor error

3. Actuator over voltage

SSR-12.41.013.0

23 74 00 - 5

Construction Set

4. Actuator under voltage

S. Controls Options:

1. Smoke detector supply: Factory

2. Smoke detector return: Factory

2.13 ACCESSORIES (FACTORY INSTALLED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE):

A. High performance economizer (downflow) with hoods:

1. Outside air damper maximum leakage rate: 4 CFM/sq. ft. at 1 in. w.g.

2. Return air damper maximum leakage rate: 4 CFM/sq. ft. at 1 in. w.g.

3. Damper reliability: 60,000 cycles minimum

B. Economizer control: Differential dual enthalpy

C. Power exhaust fan

D. Vibration isolation roof curb: Field

E. Coil hail guards

F. Disconnect switch

G. GFCI service outlets (unit powered)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in locations shown on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Controls to be furnished by the unit manufacturer and factory installed, except for thermostat

and remote monitoring panel furnished by the unit manufacturer and installed under the

electrical division.

C. Controls for unit shall be as shown on drawings.

D. Fill void between bottom of unit and structural slab or deck as detailed on the drawings.

3.02 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Start-up and checkout fan for proper motor phasing, alignment, and vibration free operation.

Correct improperly aligned fans. Change unmatched belts.

B. Test fans in accordance with Section 23 05 00.

C. Demonstrate system operation to Owner's maintenance personnel and instruct them in

operational requirements.


D. Verify that, where applicable, fans are interlocked with return (and exhaust) fans as required by

control drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Basic materials and methods, along with Division 01, General Requirements that are applicable

to Division 26 sections.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 specification Sections apply to all Division 26 sections.


A. Perform Work specified in Division 26 in accordance with standards listed below of the latest

applicable edition adopted by the authority having jurisdiction. Where these Specifications are

more stringent, they shall take precedence. In case of conflict, obtain a decision from the

Architect.


2. NFPA 90A: Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

3. NFPA 90B: Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning

Systems


5. NFPA 241: Standard for Safeguarding Building Construction, Alterations, and Demolition

Operations

6. NFPA 5000: Building Construction and Safety Code


8. UL White Book: General information for electrical construction, hazardous location, and

electrical heating and air conditioning equipment

9. SBC: Standard Building Code

10. International Building Code

11. All applicable Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Publications,

Rules and Regulations.

12. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Foundations and pads required for equipment furnished under this Division

B. Field painting, except such painting as is required to maintain shop coat painting and factory

finish painting


C. Flashing of conduits into roofing and outside walls

D. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment

E. Plumbing equipment

F. Cutting and patching for electrical Work, except for errors and omissions under this Division.

1.04 RELATED WORK - OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Security System Equipment

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit product data, equipment details, capacities, and shop drawings as specified in sections

of this Division.

C. Submit fire alarm point-to-point drawings with product data submission.

D. Organize submittal material to comply with the following submittal and deviation schedules for

ready recognition and uniformity:

1. SD 01 - Data (Calculations and support criteria)

2. SD 02 - Manufacturer's Catalog Data

3. SD 03 - Manufacturer's UL or ETL listing and or rating

4. SD 04 - Drawings (Layout and Assembly Information)

5. SD 05 - Design Data

6. SD 06 - Instructions (Manufacturer's and Engineer of Record)

7. SD 07 - Schedules (Testing and Demonstration)

8. SD 08 - Statements (Installer's and Testing Personnel and Procedures)

9. SD 09 - Reports (Routine Testing and Inspections)

10. SD 10 - Test Reports (NEMA, ANSI, ASTM required)

11. SD 11 - Factory Test Reports (Owner witness and/or collaborative)

12. SD 12 - Field Test Reports (Operating Tests and Demonstration)

13. SD 13 - Certificates (Master UL (Lightning), Elevators, etc.)

14. SD 14 - Samples

15. SD 18 - Records (Tests Results, etc.)

16. SD 20 - Training (To be provided)

E. Submit dimensioned equipment room layouts.

1. Show location of all electrical equipment in rooms including but not limited to:

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 00 - 3

Construction Set

a. Electrical room

2. Draw room layouts to 1/4" scale, with equipment locations shown therein. Clearances

shall be in accordance with NEC and local codes. Indicate on drawing the mechanical

equipment and mechanical and sprinkler pipe routing.

3. Electrical equipment submittals will be rejected without dimensioned equipment room or

equipment location layouts.

F. Prepare shop drawings completely independent of the Engineer of Record's CADD files.

Should the Contractor or Vendor wish to use the Engineer of Record's CADD files as the basis

for developing their shop drawings, a release form, obtainable from the Engineer or Architect,

must be signed and a nominal charge of $30.00 per sheet must be made payable to the

engineering firm to cover the cost of preparing the drawings for use by others.


A. Comply with applicable local, state, and federal codes.

B. Warrant electrical Work against faulty material or Workmanship in accordance with Division

01. If the Project is occupied or the systems placed in operation in several phases at the request

of the City of Franklin, then the warranty of each system or piece of equipment used shall begin

on the date each system or piece of equipment was placed in satisfactory operation and

accepted as such, in writing, by the City of Franklin. The use of building equipment for

temporary service and testing does not constitute the beginning of the warranty.

C. Equipment and material provided under this Division shall be periodically inspected and

serviced by competent mechanics. This function becomes the responsibility of the City of

Franklin when the system is accepted by the City of Franklin. The one year material and

Workmanship warranty is not intended to supplant normal inspection or service and shall not be

construed to mean the Contractor shall provide free service for normal maintenance items such

as periodic lubrication and adjustment due to normal use, nor to correct without charge,

breakage, maladjustment, and other trouble caused by improper maintenance.

D. Turn over electrical equipment provided under this Division to the City of Franklin in

lubricated condition. Include instructions on further lubrication in the operating manual.

E. Upon completion of contract and progressively as work proceeds, clean-up and remove dirt,

debris and scrap materials. Maintain premises neat and clean. Protect and preserve access to

energized equipment at all times. Clean items with factory finishes. Touch-up minor damage to

surfaces; refinish entire piece of equipment when sustained major damage. Use only factory

supplied paints of matching color and formula. Schedule an off-hour shutdown of all electrical

equipment during the 2-week period preceding substantial completion. During this shut down,

clean all buses and insulators inside all switchgear, switchboards, bus ducts, collector buses and

panelboards located inside or adjacent to the project limits.

1.07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Provide manuals in accordance with Division 01.

B. In addition to required submittals, include copies of all test reports required in Part 3,

"Execution" of Section 26 05 00.


C. Provide completed warranty certificates for systems and equipment.

D. Provide tabulation of overload heaters, including each motor identified, nameplate data and o/l

heater part number.

E. Digital Manuals:

F. Submit Operations and Maintenance Manuals in digital format as PDF files and PDF file

naming convention is to be used. Submit Operations and Maintenance Manuals files as one file

with each C.S.I. Division bookmarked.

1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Insofar as possible, deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Where this is

not practical, cover items with protective materials to keep them from being damaged. Use care

in loading, transporting, unloading, and storage to keep items from being damaged.

B. Store items in a clean dry place and protect from damage. Evidence of damage from water or

other contaminants will be cause for rejection.


A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits and inspection fees required for electrical installation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Equipment and materials furnished shall be listed by UL or other nationally accredited testing

laboratory where available. When listing is not available for a piece of equipment, it shall be

submitted in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and shall be approved by the

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Specifications and Drawings indicate name, type and/or catalog number of materials and

equipment to establish standards of quality. Submittals shall be based on the standards

specified. The standards should not be construed as limiting competition.

C. If materials and equipment other than specified herein are intended to be submitted, a letter

providing a list of all the suggested alternates by section number, brand and series or model

shall be submitted to the Architect for review and approval. Submit in accordance with

Division 01 and a minimum of 14 days prior to submission of bids.

D. In accordance with International Building Code and the applicable project seismic qualification

requirements, manufacturer of electrical equipment shall test or analyze equipment components

and its mounting system or anchorage and submit a certificate of compliance for review and

acceptance by Engineer and by the building official. Qualification shall be by an actual test on a

shake table, by three-dimensional shock tests, by an analytical method using dynamic

characteristics and forces, by the use of experience data or by a more rigorous analysis

providing for equivalent safety. Refer the IBC and ASCE 7-05 for complete requirements.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 00 - 5

Construction Set

2.02 FUSES

A. Provide fuses as scheduled on Drawings for switchboards, power panelboards and

disconnecting switches.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bussmann; Gould Shawmut; Littelfuse, Inc

C. Provide fuses of one manufacturer only. Place the same type fuse in each pole of a switch.

D. Use these types:

1. Class RK5-Time Delay-1/10A-600A; Power panels and fusible switches, motor loads

E. Provide a manufactured fuse storage cabinet, mounted on wall in main electrical room,

complete with one set (3 fuses) of spare fuses for each type and rating installed in this Project.

2.03 PIPE FREEZE PROTECTION

A. Comply with provisions of Divisions 21, 22 and 23.

B. Furnish and install heating cable to prevent freezing of water in piping exposed to outdoor

temperatures.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Chromalox, Raychem.

D. Select cable according to pipe size and pipe insulation employed.

1. Condenser water piping

a. 1-5 inch dia. - 7 watts per lineal foot

b. 6-10 inch dia. - 11 watts per lineal foot

c. 12-18 inch dia. - 17 watts per lineal foot

2. Domestic water and drain piping

a. 1/2-1 inch dia. - 3 watts per lineal foot

b. 1-1/4 - 2 inch dia. - 5 watts per lineal foot

E. Heat cable shall be 120 volt for plug-in to receptacle and shall be controlled by integral

thermostat preset to energize tape at 38 degrees F.

F. Install heat cable direct to pipe, under insulation, spiraled along piping. Do not cross tape with

itself. Do not cut factory lengths. Install first six inches of tape exposed, outside insulating

wrap.

G. Provide weatherproof receptacles, GFIC type, at locations required by tape installation.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where conflicts occur

between Contract Documents and these recommendations, request a ruling before proceeding

with such Work.

B. Visit site and observe conditions under which work must be performed. No subsequent

allowance will be made because of error or failure to obtain necessary information to

completely estimate and perform work required by these documents.

C. Examine Specifications and Drawings to be familiar with items which require electrical

connections and coordination. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and shall not be scaled for

exact sizes.

D. Prior to commencement of installation, prepare coordination drawings for work under this

division, as specified in Division 01 and as called for herein. Coordinate work under other

divisions, including but not limited to mechanical, plumbing, fire protection,

telecommunication and miscellaneous steel to develop these coordination drawings that will

serve as the agreed upon plan for a coordinated installation of work for all trades. Include

electrical equipment, switchgear, panelboards, starters, disconnect switches, cable tray, conduit

racks and conduits 3" and larger on drawings confirming coordination with other trades.

Incorporate the information onto the coordination drawings required under Division 01 and 23

to develop master coordination drawings. Account for lighting fixture depths in the

coordination. Inform Design Professional of conflicts that cannot be resolved.

E. Do NOT submit coordination drawings to Architect for review. Keep a copy on site for

reference purposes. Notify Architect of conflicts that cannot be resolved.

3.02 TEMPORARY LIGHTS AND POWER


B. Provide a temporary electrical lighting and power distribution system of adequate size to

properly serve the following requirements, including adequate feeder sizes to prevent excessive

voltage drop. Temporary Work shall be installed in a neat and safe manner in accordance with

the National Electrical Code, Article 305, NFPA 241, and as required by OSHA or applicable

local safety codes.

C. Provide one pigtail socket with 150 watt lamp, CFL medium base, for every 1,000 square feet

of floor area, evenly distributed throughout the building and with minimum of one pigtail

socket per room.

D. Provide suitable guards for temporary lights to prevent accidental contact with lamps.

E. Provide a minimum of one GFCI-protected duplex power outlet for every 1,500 square feet of

floor area, evenly distributed throughout the building. Power outlets shall be GFCI-protected

duplex 20 amp, 120 volt.

F. Provide feeders, disconnects, connections, etc., required for construction equipment, eg: cranes,

pumps, etc.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 00 - 7

Construction Set

G. Prior to installation, determine if any lighting or power outlets over the minimum quantity

noted above are required and if so, provide them.

H. Provide service and panelboards required for above lighting and power outlets.

I. Requirements for payment of utility bills during construction are specified in Division 01.

J. Provide single phase and three phase service as required by Project.

K. Remove temporary wiring upon completion of use.

L. Furnish and install temporary heat detectors and pull stations in the construction area. Provide

detectors, manual stations, wire, conduit, installation, programming and demolition of same

after permanent system is installed. Protect construction area at all unoccupied times utilizing

the hospital’s fire alarm system. Turn over temporary heat detector to the Owner after they have

been removed.

3.03 DEMOLITION

A. Visit the site to observe existing conditions before submitting a bid.

B. Work in existing buildings shall be scheduled well in advance with the City of Franklin. Work

shall be performed at such times and under such conditions as suit the convenience of the City

of Franklin. Plan the Work to minimize disruption of normal operations. Notify City of

Franklin before any circuit is de-energized in occupied areas.

C. Reconnect circuits to other panelboards when required to complete the renovation shown.

D. Remove abandoned wire and conduit back to source. Splice and terminate in junction boxes as

appropriate. Where entire circuit is to be removed, remove conduit and wire back to existing

panelboard. Where such work would not be possible without disturbing areas not being

renovated, consult with the Architect prior to performing the work.

E. Where a circuit is interrupted by removal of a device or fixture from that circuit, install wire

and conduit as required to restore service to the remaining devices and fixtures on that circuit.

Ensure proper grounding is maintained.

F. Lighting fixtures, wiring devices, panelboards, equipment, conduits and conductors removed

shall be transported to the Owner’s designated location and offered to the OWNER. If he

chooses to retain these items or a part of these items, turn those chosen over to him. Items

rejected by the OWNER shall be removed completely from the project site and disposed of

legally by the CONTRACTOR.


A. Comply with provisions of Division 01

B. Repair or replace routine damage caused by cutting in performance of Work under this

Division.

C. Correct unnecessary damage caused due to installation of electrical Work, brought about

through carelessness or lack of coordination.


D. Holes cut through floor slabs shall be core drilled with drill designed for this purpose. All

openings, sleeves, and holes in slabs between floors shall be properly sealed, fire proofed and

water proofed.

E. Holes cut through walls shall be drilled or cut with tools designed for the purpose. All

openings, sleeves and holes in walls that extend to underside of floor above shall be properly

sealed and fire proofed.

F. Repairs shall be performed with materials which match existing materials and be installed in

accordance with appropriate sections of these Specifications.

G. Contractor shall not be permitted to cut or modify any structural members without the written

permission of the Architect.

3.05 TRENCHING, EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND REPAIRS


B. Provide trenching, excavation, and backfilling necessary for performance of Work under this

Division.

C. Provide sheathing, shoring, dewatering, and cleaning necessary to keep trenches and their

grades in proper condition for Work to be performed.

D. Trenching and excavation shall be unclassified. No extra will be paid in event that rock is

encountered.

3.06 FOUNDATIONS AND PADS

A. Provide concrete foundations and pads for equipment per the requirements Division 03. Locate

and size foundations, pads, and anchor bolts as required for equipment in this Division.

B. Provide concrete foundations and pads as required for electrical utility company's equipment

such as transformers, CT cabinets, metering cabinets, switches, fused disconnects, and circuit

breakers. All work shall be in compliance with the utility company's specifications.

3.07 CONTROL SYSTEMS AND INTERLOCK WIRING

A. Control systems, components and control and interlock wiring for mechanical equipment will

be furnished under Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Control devices including, but not limited to

VFD's, thermostats, fan speed and level control switches, relays and electro-pneumatic switches

shall be furnished under Divisions 22 and 23.

B. Provide motor control centers per Section 26 24 19.

C. Provide magnetic starters per Section 26 29 13.

D. Provide manual motor starters per Section 26 29 13.

E. Provide power wiring to starters and contactors under Division 26. Power wiring to magnetic

starters shall consist of wiring to the line side terminals of the magnetic starter or contactor and

wiring away from the load side terminals to the equipment, except where such wiring is

installed pre-wired by the equipment vendor.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 00 - 9

Construction Set

1. Power wiring to 120V, 1-phase, 60 Hz and 277V, 1-phase, 60 Hz volt fans, unit heaters,

fan-coil units, VAV boxes, pumps and other equipment shall include all portions of the

branch circuit, except for wiring inside an automatic temperature control panel (ATC) or

Direct Digital Control Panel (DDC), Building Automation System panels, equipment

control panels, or magnetic starters. Such internal wiring shall be furnished under

Divisions 21, 22 and 23.

F. Under Division 28:

1. Furnish duct mounted smoke detectors.

2. Provide wiring among detectors, fire alarm system, magnetic starters and relays, ATC

panels and DDC panels

G. See Building Automation System sections of Division 23.

3.08 UTILITY COMPANY COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with the serving utility company as to all types of work required to be done by the

contractor for utility equipment.

B. Confirm exact location of point of common coupling, duct banks, pads, etc.

C. Obtain copies of all pertinent utility company specifications relating to duct banks, concrete

pads, raceways, and cable that are contractor installed for the utility company use. Maintain

copies at project site.

D. Install at components in compliance with utility company specifications and project

specifications.

3.09 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS AND LOCK-OUT REQUIREMENTS

A. Submit text of posted operating procedures for each system and principal item of equipment

specified in the technical section of the specification.

B. When 480V Motor Control Center equipment is isolated for electrical work a scissors

attachment with padlock shall be fitted to allow for maintenance locking.

C. The operating procedures shall include the following, but is not limited to:

1. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and

item of equipment

2. Start-up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures

3. Safety Precautions

4. Procedures in the event of equipment failure

5. Other items of instructions as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item

of equipment, i.e. monitoring equipment

D. Provide printed or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or approved laminated

plastic cover. These instructions are to be mounted and secured to prevent easy removal or

peeling and shall not fade when exposed to sunlight.


3.10 TESTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. On completion of work, installation shall be completely operational and entirely free from

grounds, short circuits, and open circuits. Perform operational tests as required to demonstrate

substantial completion of the Work. Balance circuits so that feeders to panels are not more than

10% out of balance between phases with all available load energized and operating. Furnish all

labor, materials and instruments for above tests. All ampere readings shall be made with a true

RMS reading meter.

B. Perform megger tests of all service entrance circuits, feeder and branch circuits size #4 AWG

and larger. Provide a report of all such megger test results.

C. Furnish the Architect a copy of test reports and required certification including but not limited

to the following:

1. Service ground resistance test

2. Switchboard and panelboard load test - include ampere readings of all panels and major

circuit breakers

3. Ground Fault Test

4. Megger test results

D. Prior to final observation and acceptance test, install all electrical systems and equipment

complete and in satisfactory operating condition.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single conductor building wire.

B. Wire pulling lubricant.


A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.

B. Section 26 05 01 - Minor Electrical Demolition: Disconnection, removal, and/or extension of

existing electrical conductors and cables.

C. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for

grounding conductors and grounding connectors.

D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.

E. Section 26 21 00 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for

electrical service conductors.

F. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation.

G. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.

H. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.


A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.

C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for

Electrical Purposes; 2010.

D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded

Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).

E. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical

Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-

95-658).


F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent

Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and

Supplements.

G. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 493 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cables; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 00 05 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and

cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available

sizes, configurations, and stranding.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower

than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation

below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding

with work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and

product listing.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 19 - 3

Construction Set

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,

permitted, or required.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.

D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.

E. Service entrance cable is not permitted.

F. Armored cable is not permitted.

G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.

2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the

purpose indicated.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,

connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.

F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

G. Conductor Material:

1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project.

Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.

2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper

conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless

otherwise indicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

H. Minimum Conductor Size:

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.

I. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having

jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.

3. Color Code:

a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:


1) Phase A: Brown.

2) Phase B: Orange.

3) Phase C: Yellow.

4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.

b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.

4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.

2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Copper Building Wire:

a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.

b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.

c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.

d. Substitutions: See Section 01 00 05 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:

a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Stranded.

b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

E. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated

below.

a. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 19 - 5

Construction Set

2.04 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the

conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as

applicable.

B. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations

designed for terminal lugs.

2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with

mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.

3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can

accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less

than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

4. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate

disconnection.

5. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression

connectors where connectors are required.

C. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications

and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as

complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.

D. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.

E. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.

2.05 WIRING ACCESSORIES

A. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed

and suitable for use at the installation temperature.

END OF SECTION


THE PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Grounding and bonding requirements.

B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.

C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.

D. Ground rod electrodes.

E. Ground plate electrodes.


A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional

requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.

B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.

C. Section 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting: Additional grounding and bonding requirements for pole-

mounted luminaires.

D. Section 33 79 00 - Site Grounding.


A. IEEE 81 - Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface

Potentials of a Ground System; 2012.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2010.

C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; National

Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.

D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent


Supplements.

F. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be

reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are

verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,

connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete

grounding and bonding system.

D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than

applicable minimum size requirements specified.

E. Grounding System Resistance:

1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless

otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not

constitute normally dry conditions.

2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested according

to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.

3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, System

Neutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested using "point-

to-point" methods.

F. Grounding Electrode System:

1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form

grounding electrode system.

a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.

b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical

damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with

bonding jumper.

2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):

a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where

present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet at

an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building.

b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe

electrically continuous.

c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of

meter without disconnecting jumper.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 26 - 3

Construction Set

3. Metal Building or Structure Frame:

a. Provide connection to metal building or structure frame effectively grounded in

accordance with NFPA 70 at nearest accessible location.

4. Ground Ring:

a. Provide a ground ring encircling the building or structure consisting of bare copper

conductor not less than 2 AWG in direct contact with earth, installed at a depth of not

less than 30 inches.

5. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding

electrode system resistance.

G. Separately Derived System Grounding:

1. Separately derived systems include, but are not limited to:

a. Transformers (except autotransformers such as buck-boost transformers).

2. Provide grounding electrode conductor to connect derived system grounded conductor to

nearest effectively grounded metal building frame. Unless otherwise indicated, make

connection at neutral (grounded) bus in source enclosure.

3. Provide bonding jumper to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest metal

building frame and nearest metal water piping in the area served by the derived system,

where not already used as a grounding electrode for the derived system. Make connection

at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection.

4. Where common grounding electrode conductor ground riser is used for tap connections to

multiple separately derived systems, provide bonding jumper to connect the metal

building frame and metal water piping in the area served by the derived system to the

common grounding electrode conductor.

5. Provide system bonding jumper to connect system grounded conductor to equipment

ground bus. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor

connection. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors

and ground on load side of separately derived system disconnect.

6. Where the source and first disconnecting means are in separate enclosures, provide

supply-side bonding jumper between source and first disconnecting means.

H. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:

1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic

equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other

normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical

conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with

NFPA 70.

2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit

raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment

grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.


4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit

equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment

ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to

accommodate conduit movement.

7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This

includes, but is not limited to:

a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water

pipe used as grounding electrode.

b. Metal process piping.

8. Provide bonding for metal building frame where not used as a grounding electrode.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS


1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in addition to requirements of Section 26 05 19:

1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions:

1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with

earth.

2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway).

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors

and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground,

concealed and other inaccessible connections.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or

exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.

a. Exceptions:

1) Use exothermic welded connections for connections to metal building frame.

4. Manufacturers - Mechanical and Compression Connectors:

a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com.

b. Burndy: www.burndy.com.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 26 - 5

Construction Set

c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com.

d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

5. Manufacturers - Exothermic Welded Connections:

a. Burndy: www.burndy.com.

b. Cadweld, a brand of Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.

c. ThermOweld, a brand of Continental Industries, Inc: www.thermoweld.com.

D. Ground Rod Electrodes:

1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.

2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.

3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Ground Plate Electrodes:

1. Material: Copper.

2. Size: 24 by 24 by 1/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been

completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in

accordance with NECA 1.

C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically.

Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury

horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provide

ground plates.

1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches below

finished grade.

D. Ground Plate Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground plate electrodes at a depth

of not less than 30 inches.

E. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.


1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without

cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate

insertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and

contact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the

items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools

and dies.

F. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 00 05 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within

the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with

specified requirements.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical

work.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Materials and requirements for fabricated metal

supports.

C. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits.

D. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes.

E. Section 26 25 01 - Low-Voltage Busways: Additional support and attachment requirements for

busway.

F. Section 26 31 00 - Photovoltaic Collectors: Photovoltaic module mounting systems.

G. Section 26 51 00 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for

interior luminaires.

H. Section 26 51 13 - Luminaires, Ballasts, and Drivers - Lutron: Additional support and

attachment requirements for luminaires.

I. Section 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for

exterior luminaires.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and

components to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials

required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces

at the installed locations.

4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other

potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.


B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has

fully cured in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal channel

(strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete and

masonry anchors.

C. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods

other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.

D. Evaluation Reports: For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC

Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request.

E. Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified requirements.

F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by

product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,

preparation, and installation of product.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Comply with applicable building code.

C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution

requirements.

D. Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners (when specified): Certified by fastener

system manufacturer with current operator's license.

E. Installer Qualifications for Field-Welding: As specified in Section 05 50 00.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS


1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and

hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 29 - 3

Construction Set

2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) or

testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose

indicated, where applicable.

3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in

accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be

supported with a minimum safety factor of _____. Include consideration for vibration,

equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product

listing.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless

specifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where

installed.

a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise

indicated.

b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or

approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.

c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.

d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM

A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Materials for Metal Fabricated Supports: Comply with Section 05 50 00.

C. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be

supported.

1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.

2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

3. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.

b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.

c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:

www.emersonindustrial.com.


e. ______.

f. Substitutions: See Section 01 00 05 - Product Requirements.

D. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.



c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:



e. ______.


E. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel

(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of

supports.

1. Comply with MFMA-4.

2. Channel (Strut) Used as Raceway (only where specifically indicated): Listed and labeled

as complying with UL 5B.

3. Channel Material:

a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.

b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.

c. __________.

4. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch.

5. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 13/16 inch height.

6. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.

b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com.

d. __________.

e. Substitutions: See Section 01 00 05 - Product Requirements.

f. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings, accessories, and

hardware produced by a single manufacturer.

F. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.

1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:

a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.

b. Busway Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.

c. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter.

d. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter.

e. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 29 - 5

Construction Set

f. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter.

g. Luminaires: 1/4 inch diameter.

h. __________.

G. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or

rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof

structure and not penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified.

1. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing

assembly.

2. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated

for equivalent indoor hangers and supports.

3. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component to

top of roofing.

4. Manufacturers:



c. PHP Systems/Design: www.phpsd.com.

d. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com.

e. __________.


H. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener

types indicated for the specified applications.

2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.

3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.

4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.

5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.

6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.

7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

8. Wood: Use wood screws.

9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.

10. Powder-actuated fasteners are permitted only as follows:

a. Where approved by Architect.

b. Use only threaded studs; do not use pins.

c. __________.


11. Hammer-driven anchors and fasteners are permitted only as follows:

a. Nails are permitted for attachment of nonmetallic boxes to wood frame construction

(when specified).

b. Staples are permitted for attachment of nonmetallic-sheathed cable to wood frame

construction (when specified).

c. __________.

12. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically

designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.

a. Comply with MFMA-4.

b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.

c. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch minimum base metal

thickness.

d. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.

13. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC

Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.

14. Manufacturers - Mechanical Anchors:

a. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.

b. ITW Red Head, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc: www.itwredhead.com.

c. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com.

d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc: www.strongtie.com.

e. __________.


15. Manufacturers - Powder-Actuated Fastening Systems:

a. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.

b. ITW Ramset, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc: www.ramset.com.

c. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com.

d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc: www.strongtie.com.

e. __________.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 29 - 7

Construction Set


3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance

with NECA 1.

C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES)

evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.

D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.

E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended

ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.

G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural

Engineer.

H. Field-Welding (where approved by Architect): Comply with Section 05 50 00.

I. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support

equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on

hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations

to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 4 inch high

concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on

its own weight for support.

J. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 34.

K. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 37.

L. Busway Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 25 01.

M. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 51 00.

N. Exterior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 56 00.

O. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage

during concrete pour.


P. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

Q. Remove temporary supports.

R. Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings (only where

specifically indicated or permitted) with color distinguishable from ceiling support wires in

accordance with NFPA 70.



B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 05 34

CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. Aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC).

C. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

D. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

E. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

F. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

G. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

H. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.

I. Conduit fittings.

J. Accessories.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete encasement of conduits.

B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.

C. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes.

F. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.

G. Section 26 21 00 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for

electrical service conduits.

H. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation.

I. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.

J. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.

K. Section 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes.



A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.

B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.

C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC);

2005.

D. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC);

2005.

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical


F. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical


G. NECA 102 - Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit; National Electrical


H. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); National

Electrical Contractors Association; 2003.

I. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).

J. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

and Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.

K. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association; 2013.

L. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;

National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013.

M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent


Supplements.

N. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 6A - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current


Q. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 34 - 3

Construction Set

T. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

U. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70

and product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated

for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the

most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified,

use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:

1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.

2. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal

conduit where emerging from underground.

3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided,

use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.

D. Embedded Within Concrete:

1. Within Slab on Grade (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural

Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC),

PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit.

2. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal

conduit where emerging from concrete.

E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate

metal conduit (IMC).

I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

J. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC),

or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

K. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel

rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).


L. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or

aluminum rigid metal conduit.

M. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal

conduit (IMC), aluminum rigid metal conduit, or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal

conduit.

N. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:

1. Dry, Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquid-tight flexible metal conduit.

2. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.

3. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:

a. Transformers.

b. Motors.

2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only

where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is

verified by pulling a mandrel through them.

B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) or

testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.

D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.

2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com.

2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com.

3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 00 05 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI

C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 34 - 5

Construction Set

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.

b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation:


c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.


2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and

labeled as complying with UL 514B.

3. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL

1203 for the classification of the installed location.

4. Material: Use steel.

a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

5. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and

compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.04 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Manufacturers:





B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5

and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:










4. Material: Use aluminum.




2.05 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)

A. Manufacturers:





B. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with

ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:













2.06 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

2. Robroy Industries: www.robroy.com.

3. ______.


B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl

chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with

UL 6.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 34 - 7

Construction Set

C. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil.

D. PVC-Coated Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.



4. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

5. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil.

E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum

thickness of 15 mil.

2.07 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.

2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.

3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.


B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled

as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:






2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying

with UL 514B.


2.08 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.

2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.


3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.


B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal

conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:







with UL 514B.


2.09 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Manufacturers:





B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3

and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:







with UL 514B.


4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 34 - 9

Construction Set

a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.

5. Damp or Wet Locations (where permitted): Use fittings listed for use in wet locations.

6. Embedded Within Concrete (where permitted): Use fittings listed as concrete-tight.

Fittings that require taping to be concrete-tight are acceptable.

2.10 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cantex Inc: www.cantexinc.com.

2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.carlon.com.

3. JM Eagle: www.jmeagle.com.


B. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC

2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated,

Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees

C.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying

with UL 651; material to match conduit.

2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the

conduit to be installed.

B. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit

and fittings to be installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.


3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.


D. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102.

E. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

F. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by

the manufacturer.

G. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.

H. Install electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) in accordance with NECA 111.

I. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing

required.

3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.

4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Electrical rooms.

b. Mechanical equipment rooms.

c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:

a. Across floors.

b. Across roofs.

c. Across top of parapet walls.

d. Across building exterior surfaces.

6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest

possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or

perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where

practical.

7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.

8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between

pull points.

9. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.

10. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.

11. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at

sealing fittings where moisture may collect.

12. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.

13. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This

includes, but is not limited to:

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 34 - 11

Construction Set

a. Heaters.

14. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.

J. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,

ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support

system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.

a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide

space between conduit and mounting surface.

5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel

surface-mounted conduits.

6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.

7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with

accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.

8. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only

where approved).

9. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted.

10. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.

a. For securing conduits to studs in hollow stud walls.

b. For suspending conduits supported by spring steel conduit clips (only where

specifically indicated or permitted).

11. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ,

comply with the most stringent requirements.

K. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized

steel conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece

couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.

4. Provide drip loops for liquid-tight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of

liquid into connectors.

5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock

nuts for dry locations and rain-tight hubs for wet locations.


6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box or

enclosure, provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with

finished floor.

7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect

conductors.

8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical

continuity.

L. Penetrations:

1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and

grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.

2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set

sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.

4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.

5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to

prevent entry of moisture and gases.

6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of

membrane.

7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and

curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are

necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and

maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for

sealing with submittals.

8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.

M. Underground Installation:

1. Provide trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching.

2. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:

a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches.

b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab.

3. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 05 53 along entire

conduit length.

N. Embedment Within Structural Concrete Slabs (only where approved by Structural Engineer):

1. Secure conduits to prevent floating or movement during pouring of concrete.

O. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion

and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected

equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 34 - 13

Construction Set

1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.

2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

P. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial

temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible

point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.

2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

Q. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.



B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

C. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or

abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection

from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of

conductors.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 26 05 37

BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull

boxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.

C. Boxes for hazardous (classified) locations.

D. Underground boxes/enclosures.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.

C. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed boxes.

D. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

F. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit:

1. Conduit bodies and other fittings.

2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends

between pulling points.

G. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices:

1. Wall plates.

H. Section 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes: Concrete manholes for

electrical systems.


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical


B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical


C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic

Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).


D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National

Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008 (Revised 2010) (ANSI/NEMA OS 1).

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2008.



Supplements

G. SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; Society of Cable

Telecommunications Engineers; 2013 (ANSI/SCTE 77).

H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current


I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.

J. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 1203 - Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous

(Classified) Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BOXES


1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by

NFPA 70 and product listing.

2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway

system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) or

testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose

indicated.

4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable

minimum size requirements specified.

5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors

terminate.

B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull

Boxes:

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 37 - 3

Construction Set

1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.

2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise

indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.

3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal

conduit or exposed intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used.

4. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.

5. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.

6. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration

where required.

7. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.

8. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.

9. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A.

10. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL

514A; furnish with threaded hubs.

11. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and

weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of

luminaire where required.

12. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multi-gang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use

field-connected gangable boxes.

13. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26.

C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL

508A.

2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:

a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

b. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable.

c. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable for

purpose indicated, with 25 percent spare terminal capacity.

5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise

indicated.

6. Manufacturers:



b. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products: www.hoffmanonline.com.

c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiegmann Products: www.hubbell-wiegmann.com.

D. Boxes for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 1203 for

the classification of the installed location.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Appleton, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com.

b. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.

c. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Products: www.hubbell-killark.com.

E. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with

legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.

2. Size: As indicated on drawings.

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than

12 inches.

4. Applications:

a. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular

traffic.

5. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Highline Products, a subsidiary of MacLean Power Systems:

www.highlineproducts.com.

2) Hubbell Incorporated; Quazite Products: www.hubbellpowersystems.com.

3) Oldcastle Precast, Inc: www.oldcastleprecast.com.

4) Substitutions: See Section 01 00 05 - Product Requirements.

b. Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where

applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where

mounting heights are not indicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and NFPA 70.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 37 - 5

Construction Set

D. Box Locations:

1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 31 00

as required where approved by the Architect.

E. Box Supports:

1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using

suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other

than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in

accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other

systems.

F. Install boxes plumb and level.

G. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so

that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more

than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated

raised cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile,

gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the

edge of the box.

H. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.

I. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep.

2. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in

place.

J. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent

devices exceeds 300 V.

K. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00.

L. Close unused box openings.

M. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment

installed or designated for future use.

N. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical identification requirements.

B. Identification nameplates and labels.

C. Underground warning tape.

D. Warning signs and labels.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Identification for Equipment:

1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control

equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.

a. Switchboards:

1) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within

sight of equipment.

2) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.

Do not identify spares and spaces.

b. Panelboards:

1) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with

a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.

2) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify

load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces.

c. Transformers:

2. Service Equipment:

a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.

3. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for

electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter

socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination,

adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

a. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word

message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate

controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure to


comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE

requirements" or approved equivalent.

4. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other

guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with

the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved

equivalent.

B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:

1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19.

2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded

and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or

branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served

by more than one nominal voltage system.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Identification Nameplates:

1. Materials:

a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.

2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-

conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text.

B. Identification Labels:

1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and

abrasion resistant.

2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless


2.03 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil.

C. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 3 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil, unless

otherwise required for proper detection.

D. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.

E. Color:

1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.

2.04 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 05 53 - 3

Construction Set

B. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:

a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive

vinyl signs.

b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs.

2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners.

3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning Labels:

1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-

adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using

materials recognized to UL 969.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories

recommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 26 21 00

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical service requirements.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Materials and installation requirements for cast-in-

place concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

C. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit.

F. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.

G. Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards: Service entrance equipment.

H. Section 26 43 00 - Surge Protective Devices: Service entrance surge protective devices.

I. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation.

J. Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.

K. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.

L. Section 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Service Point: The point of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the

premises wiring as defined in NFPA 70, and as designated by the Utility Company.


A. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers;

2012.




C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent


Supplements.


A. Comply with the following:

1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).

2. The requirements of the Utility Company.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm acceptable to

the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment,

metering provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between Utility

Company point of supply and service entrance equipment.

B. Utility Company: As indicated on drawings.

C. Division of Responsibility:

1. Pad-Mounted Utility Transformers:

a. Transformer Vaults and Pads: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility

Company requirements.

b. Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.

c. Transformer Grounding Provisions: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility


d. Transformer Protective Bollards: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility


e. Primary:

1) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Contractor.

2) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor.

3) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Utility Company.

f. Secondary:

1) Trenching and Backfilling: Provided by Contractor.

2) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor.

3) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Contractor (Service Point at

transformer).

2. Terminations at Service Point: Provided by Utility Company.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 21 00 - 3

Construction Set

3. Metering Provisions:

a. Meter Bases: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company

requirements.

D. Products Furnished by Contractor: Comply with Utility Company requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Utility Company

requirements.

B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.

D. Provide required trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 16.13 - Trenching.

E. Construct cast-in-place concrete pads for utility equipment in accordance with Utility Company

requirements and Section 03 30 00.

F. Provide required protective bollards in accordance with Utility Company requirements.

G. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

H. Provide grounding and bonding for service entrance equipment in accordance with Section 26

05 26.

I. Identify service entrance equipment, including main service disconnect(s) in accordance with

Section 26 05 53.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 26 22 00

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General purpose transformers.


A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit: Flexible conduit connections.


A. IEEE C57.94 - Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and

Maintenance of Dry-Type General Purpose Distribution and Power Transformers; 1982

(R2006).

B. IEEE C57.96 - Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 1999

(R2004).

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.

D. NECA 409 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers; 2009.

E. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2014.

F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014

G. NEMA TP 1 - Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers; 2002.

H. NEMA TP 2 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Distribution

Transformers; 2005.

I. NEMA TP 3 - Standard for the Labeling of Distribution Transformer Efficiency; 2000.

J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent


Supplements.

K. UL 506 - Standard for Specialty Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers; Current Edition,



1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of transformers and adjacent

equipment with all required clearances indicated.


A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or

heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for

the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure,

and finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.

B. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.

C. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.

D. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

E. Source Limitations: Furnish transformers produced by the same manufacturer as the other

electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed and

manufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed, classified, and labeled as suitable

for the purpose intended.

B. Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according to

IEEE C57.96 under the following service conditions:

1. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet.

2. Ambient Temperature:

a. Greater than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 104 degrees F.

C. Core: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis

and eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities substantially below saturation point, even

at 10 percent primary overvoltage. Tightly clamp core laminations to prevent plate movement

and maintain consistent pressure throughout core length.

D. Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to effectively

seal out moisture and other contaminants.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 22 00 - 3

Construction Set

E. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.

F. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding

strap.

G. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.

H. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overload

capacity based on rated winding temperature rise.

2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL

506 or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings.

B. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise:

1. Less than 15 kVA: Class 180 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C average

winding temperature rise.

2. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average

winding temperature rise.

C. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded.

D. Winding Taps:

1. Less than 3 kVA: None.

2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5

percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

4. 500 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two 2.5

percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

E. Energy Efficiency: Standard efficiency complying with NEMA TP 1.

1. Test efficiency according to NEMA TP 2.

2. Label transformer according to NEMA TP 3.

F. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20.

G. Mounting Provisions:

1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.

2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.

3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.

H. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the

following installation locations:


2. Construction: Steel.

a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated.

b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations.

4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

B. Install transformers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install transformers in accordance with NECA 409 and IEEE C57.94.

D. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 05 34, 2 feet minimum length, for

connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.

E. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances as specified on transformer nameplate and

in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

F. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

G. Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to the

enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible noise

transmission.

H. Where not factory-installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as

shown on the drawings.



3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.

B. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Low-voltage (600 V and less) switchboards and associated accessories for service and

distribution applications.

B. Overcurrent protective devices for switchboards.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 21 00 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance.

E. Section 26 27 13 - Electricity Metering: For interface with equipment specified in this section.

F. Section 26 43 00 - Surge Protective Devices.


A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal

Specification; Revision E, 2013.

B. IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; Institute of

Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2008.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical


D. NECA 400 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Switchboards; National Electrical


E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.

F. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association; 2011.

G. NEMA PB 2.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National

Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA PB 2.1).

H. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).


I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent


Supplements.

J. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.

L. UL 891 - Switchboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for switchboards,

enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, bus ampacities, overcurrent protective device

arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal

information, and installed features and accessories.

1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of switchboards and adjacent equipment

with all required clearances indicated.

2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.

3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where

acceptable, series rated systems.

D. Service Entrance Switchboards: Include documentation of Utility Company approval of

switchboard.

E. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance

procedures and intervals.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Franklin's use in maintenance of

project.

1. See Section 01 00 05 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.

3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Provide one portable test set.





A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, NECA 400, and NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Store in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation (including

outdoor switchboards, which are not weatherproof until completely and properly installed).

Where necessary, provide temporary enclosure space heaters or temporary power for permanent

factory-installed space heaters.

C. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to

protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Switchboards:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.

2. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.

3. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

4. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.

B. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements and

prior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor accepts

responsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work, including

any design fees.

2.02 SWITCHBOARDS

A. Provide switchboards consisting of all required components, control power transformers,

instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating

system.

B. Description: Dead-front switchboard assemblies complying with NEMA PB 2, and listed and

labeled as complying with UL 891; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the

drawings.

C. Service Entrance Switchboards:

1. Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A.

2. For solidly-grounded wye systems, provide factory-installed main bonding jumper

between neutral and ground busses, and removable neutral disconnecting link for testing

purposes.

3. Comply with Utility Company requirements for electrical service.

D. Service Conditions:


1. Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for operation under the

following service conditions without derating:

a. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.

b. Ambient Temperature:

1) Switchboards Containing Molded Case or Insulated Case Circuit Breakers:

Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

2. Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for operation at indicated

ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.

E. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide switchboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available

fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

2. Minimum Rating: 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

F. Main Devices: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the

installation. Provide separate pull section and/or top-mounted pullbox as indicated or as

required to facilitate installation of incoming feed.

G. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 891 temperature rise requirements.

1. Through bus (horizontal cross bus) to be fully rated through full length of switchboard

(non-tapered). Tapered bus is not permitted.

2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus through full length of switchboard, with a

suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

3. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.

4. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

1. Line Conductor Terminations:

a. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors

only.

b. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

2. Load Conductor Terminations:

a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

b. Lug Type:

I. Enclosures:



a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1 or Type 2 (drip-proof).

2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.


J. Future Provisions:

1. Prepare designated spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors,

mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

K. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective devices

are provided in accordance with Section 26 43 00, list switchboards as a complete assembly

including surge protective device.

L. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and

labeled as complying with UL 1053.

1. Where overcurrent protective devices equipped with integral ground fault protection are

used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.

M. Arc Flash Energy-Reducing Maintenance Switching: For circuit breakers rated 1200 A or

higher, provide a local accessory switch with status indicator light that permits selection of a

maintenance mode with alternate electronic trip unit settings for reduced fault clearing time.

N. City of Franklin Metering:

1. Provide microprocessor-based digital electrical metering system including all

instrument transformers, wiring, and connections necessary for measurements

specified.

2. Measured Parameters:

a. Voltage (Volts AC): Line-to-line, line-to-neutral for each phase.

b. Current (Amps): For each phase and neutral.

c. Frequency (Hz).

d. Real power (kW): For each phase, 3-phase total.

e. Reactive power (kVAR): For each phase, 3-phase total.

f. Apparent power (kVA): For each phase, 3-phase total.

g. Power factor.

3. Meter Accuracy: Plus/minus 1.0 percent.

4. Features:

a. Remote monitoring capability via PC.

O. Instrument Transformers:

1. Comply with IEEE C57.13.

2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.

3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks.


4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means.

P. Description: NEMA PB 2 switchboard with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated

and specified.

Q. Ratings:

R. Main Section Devices: Panel mounted.

S. Distribution Section Devices: Panel mounted.

T. Bus Material: Copper, standard size.

U. Pull Section:

V. Enclosure: Type 1 - General Purpose.

2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Circuit Breakers:

1. Interrupting Capacity:

a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short

circuit current rating indicated, but not less than specified minimum requirements.

b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than

the short circuit current rating indicated.

2. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

a. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating

circuit breakers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with

FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on

the drawings.

1) Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.

2) Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated.

b. Minimum Interrupting Capacity:

1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC.

2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC.

c. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time

tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element

for short circuit protection.

1) Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker

frame sizes 225 amperes and larger.

2) Provide interchangeable trip units where indicated.

d. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms

sensing trip units.


1) Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:

(a) Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by

setting dial.

(b) Long time delay.

(c) Short time pickup and delay.

(d) Instantaneous pickup.

(e) Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install switchboards in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 400, and

NEMA PB 2.1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide required clearances and maintenance access, including

accommodations for any drawout devices.

D. Where switchboard is indicated to be mounted with inaccessible side against wall, provide

minimum clearance of 1/2 inch between switchboard and wall.

E. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

F. Install switchboards plumb and level.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, mount switchboards on properly sized 4 inch high concrete pad

constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00.

H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

I. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories.

J. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as

required to complete installation.

K. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.

L. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in switchboards.



B. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing.

Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.

C. Before energizing switchboard, perform insulation resistance testing in accordance with NECA

400 and NEMA PB 2.1.


D. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

E. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1.

F. Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in

NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers. Tests listed as optional are not

required.

G. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as

required by NFPA 70.

1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation-resistance

test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.

H. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10.

I. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.

J. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective switchboards or associated components.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.

B. Adjust alignment of switchboard covers and doors.

3.04 CLEANING

A. See Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional

requirements.

B. Clean dirt and debris from switchboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.

C. Repair scratched or marred surfaces to match original factory finish.

3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 77 13 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. Training: Train City of Franklin's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of

switchboard and associated devices.

1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed switchboards from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

B. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.



B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.


A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal

Specification; Revision E, 2013.



C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical


D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.

E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.

F. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of

Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013

(ANSI/NEMA PB 1.1).

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent


Supplements.

H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current


I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,


J. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


K. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker

Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards,

enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,

overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry

locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment

with all required clearances indicated.

2. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where

acceptable, series rated systems.




A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

and NECA 407.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or


C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to

panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS





E. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same

manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained

from a single supplier.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 24 16 - 3

Construction Set

2.02 ALL PANELBOARDS

A. Provide products listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the

purpose indicated.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the

following service conditions:


2. Ambient Temperature:

a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

C. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault

current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the

installation.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.

F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.

1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each

feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.

2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for

each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.



2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.

a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.

3. Fronts:

a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.

b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough

opening.

4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including

bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.


2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit

type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings,

configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:

1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper

conductors.

2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:

1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.

3. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Enclosures:

1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.

2. Fronts: Provide lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent

protective device handles without exposing live parts.

3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit

breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375

where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity:

a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short

circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:

b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than

the short circuit current rating indicated.

3. Conductor Terminations:

a. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping

element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short

circuit protection.

5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 24 16 - 5

Construction Set

6. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

7. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1

(general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.



D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.

E. Install panelboards plumb.

F. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and

rough opening completely covered.

G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or

switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

H. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard

stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.

I. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

J. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.

K. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.

3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended

torque settings.

B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.


END OF SECTION




SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall switches.

B. Receptacles.

C. Wall plates.


A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Manufactured wiring

systems for use with access floor boxes with compatible pre-wired connectors.

B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes.

D. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Cords and plugs for equipment.


A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification;

Revision G, 2001.

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification);

Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical


D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010).

E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Specifications; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008).



Supplements.

G. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.


J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS




B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

C. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com.

D. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

E. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system,

provide accessory matching receptacles and wall plates by the same manufacturer in locations

indicated.

2.02 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS

A. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere

rating not less than that of the branch circuit.

B. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles

installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.

C. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.

2.03 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES:

A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Ivory with white stainless steel wall plate.

C. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Ivory with galvanized steel wall plate.

2.04 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 27 26 - 3

Construction Set

3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

B. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy

contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20

and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for

back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle

type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single

throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

2.05 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers:



3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com.


5. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system,

provide accessory matching receptacles and wall plates by the same manufacturer in

locations indicated.

B. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed

as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the

drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for

back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

C. GFI Receptacles:

1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground fault

tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A.

2. Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V,

NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type

complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

2.06 WALL PLATES

A. Manufacturers:



3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com.



5. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of lighting control system,

provide accessory matching receptacles and wall plates by the same manufacturer in

locations indicated.

B. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.

1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring

devices.

2. Size: Standard; __________.

3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

C. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel.

D. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover

and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with

attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where

applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless


B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for

installation of wiring devices provided under this section.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent

devices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not

connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and

tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in

pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit

equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. Provide GFI receptacles with integral GFI protection at each location indicated. Do not use

feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.

I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

J. Install wall switches with OFF position down.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 27 26 - 5

Construction Set

K. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted

receptacles with grounding pole on left.

L. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely

covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or

improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this

requirement.

M. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed

or designated for future use.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match

original factory finish.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 26 28 18

ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Enclosed safety switches.



B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and

requirements.

D. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical


B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.

C. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum);

National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent


Supplements.

E. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current


F. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,


G. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS






A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or


B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to

enclosed switch internal components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS





E. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed switches and associated components produced by the

same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and

obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as complying

with UL 98; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the

following service conditions:


2. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load.

E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.

F. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side overcurrent

protective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current rating not less than the

available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

2. Minimum Ratings:

a. Heavy Duty Single Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Class J, Class L, or Class

T Fuses: 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes.

b. Double Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Class J, or Class T Fuses: 100,000 rms

symmetrical amperes.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 28 18 - 3

Construction Set

G. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.

H. Fuse Clips for Fusible Switches: As required to accept fuses indicated.

1. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to prevent installation

of fuses other than Class R.

I. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

J. Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is

required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor.

K. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable

lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.

L. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.



a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.

b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

M. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with

capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

N. Heavy Duty Switches:

1. Comply with NEMA KS 1.

2. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.

b. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable of

accepting three padlocks.

a. Provide means for locking handle in the ON position where indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install enclosed switches securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with

NECA 1.



D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.


E. Install enclosed switches plumb.

F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed

switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above

the floor or working platform.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26.

H. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 28 13 for fusible switches as indicated or as required

by equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.


END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 29 23

VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. For motors serving process equipment scheduled on drawings with variable frequency drives,

provide variable frequency motor drive as specific herein.

B. For motors serving process equipment, provide Variable Frequency motor Drive (VFD)

consisting of a 18-pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter designed for use on the specified

motor. Drive manufacturer shall have the following support organizational structure:

1. Sales representative exclusively for Water Process products, with expertise in Process

Systems and Controls.

2. An independent service organization that is factory trained and certified to start, test and

diagnose the VFD provided

C. The drive manufacturer shall supply the drive and all necessary controls as herein specified.

The manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of equipment for a

minimum of twenty years.

D. Contractor shall provide VFDs from a single manufacturer and shall coordinate the

requirements of the driven equipment to match the motor and drive. Submit

documentation to confirm each VFD has been approved by the respective drive

equipment manufacturer and that coordination has been conducted.

1.02 STANDARDS

A. IEEE Standard 519-2014 - IEEE Recommended Practice and Requirements for Harmonic

Control in Electric Power Systems

B. UL 508C or UL 61800-5-1 - Standard for Power Conversion

C. NEMA ICS 7.0-2006 - AC Adjustable Speed Drives

D. NEMA ICS 7.1-2006 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation

and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems

E. IEC 16800-5-1 Parts 1 and 2: Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems – Part 5-1:

Safety Requirements – Electrical, Thermal, and Energy.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. VFDs and options shall be UL listed as a complete assembly. VFD's that require the customer

to supply external fuses for the VFD to be UL listed are not acceptable. The base VFD shall be

UL listed for 100 KAIC without the need for input fuses.


B. CE Mark - The VFD shall conform to the European Union ElectroMagnetic Compatibility

directive, a requirement for CE marking. The VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for

the First Environment restricted level.

1.04 RELATED WORK

A. Section 10 00 248 - 10 00 248

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of certified start-up, not to exceed 30 months from

the date of shipment. The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time and expenses.

There shall be 365/24 support available via a toll free phone number.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall include the following information:

1. Outline dimensions, conduit entry locations and weight.

2. Customer connection and power wiring diagrams.

3. Complete technical product description include a complete list of options provided

Compliance to IEEE 519 - harmonic analysis for particular jobsite including total

harmonic voltage distortion and total harmonic current distortion (TDD).

a. The VFD manufacture shall analyze and provide calculations, specific to this

installation including all non-linear loads such as chillers and other equipment,

showing total harmonic voltage distortion is less than 3%. Electrical design engineer

shall provide specific electrical distribution system data to VFD manufacturer

necessary to perform harmonic calculations. Input line filters shall be sized and

provided as required by the VFD manufacturer to ensure compliance with IEEE

standard 519-2014. Six-pulse VFD's specified herein shall include a minimum of 3%

impedance reactors, no exceptions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Allen Bradley.

A. Square D

B. Eaton

2.02 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. VFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Listed Type 1 enclosure, completely

assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an ISO9001 facility. The VFD tolerated voltage

window shall allow the VFD to operate from a line of +30% nominal, and -35% nominal

voltage as a minimum.

1. Environmental operating conditions: 0 to 40 degree C (32 to 104 degree F) continuous.

VFD's that can operate at 40C intermittently (during a 24 hour period) are not acceptable

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 29 23 - 3

Construction Set

and must be oversized. Altitude 0 to 3300 feet above sea level, less than 95% humidity,

non-condensing.

2. Enclosure shall be rated UL type 12 and shall be UL listed as a plenum rated VFD. VFD's

without these ratings are not acceptable.

3. VFD's serving Raw Water Pump motors 10-P-110-A, 10-P-110-B, 10-P-210-A and 10-P-

210-B shall be furnished with Sine Wave Filters capable of serving motors 1000 Feet

distant from VFD.

4. dv/dt filters shall be installed on VFD's where motor cable runs exceed 100 feet and less

than 300 feet.

5. Overcurrent protection installed in each VFD shall consist of Motor Circuit Protectors

sized in accordance with the motor nameplate rating.

B. Provide VFDs with the following standard features:

1. The same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad, regardless of

horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote mounting and allow

for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start-up of multiple

VFDs.

2. Hand-Off-Auto selections and manual speed control. The drive shall incorporate

"bumpless transfer" of speed reference when switching between "Hand" and "Auto"

modes. There shall be fault reset and "Help" buttons on the keypad. The Help button shall

include "on-line" assistance for programming and troubleshooting.

3. Built-in time clock in the VFD keypad. The clock shall have a battery backup with 10

years minimum life span. The clock shall be used to date and time stamp faults and record

operating parameters at the time of fault. If the battery fails, the VFD shall automatically

revert to hours of operation since initial power up. The clock shall also be programmable

to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter sets and output relays.

Include a digital input that allows an override to the time clock (when in the off mode) for

a programmable time frame and provide four (4) separate, independent timer functions

that have both weekday and weekend settings.

4. VFD's shall utilize pre-programmed application macro's specifically designed to facilitate

start-up. The Application Macros shall provide one command to reprogram all parameters

and customer interfaces for a particular application to reduce programming time. The VFD

shall have two user macros to allow the end-user to create and save custom settings.

5. Cooling fans, designed for easy replacement. The fans shall be designed for replacement

without requiring removing the VFD from the wall or removal of circuit boards. The VFD

cooling fans shall operate only when required. To extend the fan and bearing operating

life, operating temperature will be monitored and used to cycle the fans on and off as

required.

6. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting load (forward or reverse) up to full

speed and accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping or component

damage (flying start).

7. Ability to automatically restart after an over-current, over-voltage, under-voltage, or loss

of input signal protective trip. The number of restart attempts, trial time, and time between

attempts shall be programmable.


8. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1

minute every 10 minutes, 130% overload for 2 seconds. The minimum FLA rating shall

meet or exceed the values in the NEC/UL table 430-150 for 4-pole motors.

9. Provide an integral 3% impedance line reactor to reduce the harmonics to the power line

and to add protection from AC line transients. The 3% impedance may be from dual

(positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 3% AC line reactors. The line reactor shall

provide 3% impedance from 100% full load down to 50% full load. Line reactors

providing 3% impedance only at 100% full load are not acceptable. VFD's with only one

DC reactor shall add AC line reactors.

10. Include a coordinated AC transient protection system consisting of 4-120 joule rated

MOV's (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5% impedance

reactors.

11. Provide capability of sensing a loss of load (broken belt / broken coupling) and signal the

loss of load condition. The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a

keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communications bus. Relay outputs

shall include programmable time delays that will allow for drive acceleration from zero

speed without signaling a false underload condition.

12. If the input reference (4-20mA or 2-10V) is lost, the VFD shall give the user the option of

either (1) stopping and displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable preset speed, (3)

hold the VFD speed based on the last good reference received, or (4) cause a warning to

be issued, as selected by the user. The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition

via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communication bus.

13. Programmable "Sleep" and "Wake up" functions to allow the drive to be started and

stopped from the level of a process feedback signal.

14. For motors indicated on drawings, provide an integral bypass contactor for operation of

motor at constant speed, electrically independent of the inverter. Include motor overload

protection when in bypass mode. Include necessary control relays and switches to allow

automatic controls and safeties to operate when drive is in bypass mode.

C. VFDs shall have the following adjustments:

1. Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from

operating the load continuously at an unstable speed.

2. Two (2) PID Setpoint controllers shall be standard in the drive, allowing pressure or flow

signals to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed

loop control. The VFD shall have 250 ma of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of

loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID setpoint shall be variable from

the VFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications bus. There shall be two

parameter sets for the first PID that allow the sets to be switched via a digital input, serial

communications or from the keypad for night setback, summer/winter setpoints, etc. There

shall be an independent, second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input and

modulate one of the analog outputs to maintain setpoint of an independent process (i.e.

valves, dampers, etc.). All setpoints, process variables, etc. to be accessible from the serial

communication network. The setpoints shall be set in Engineering units and not require a

percentage of the transducer input.

3. Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept current or voltage signals.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 29 23 - 5

Construction Set

4. Two (2) programmable analog outputs (0-20ma or 4-20 ma). The outputs may be

programmed to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Voltage, Output

Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power (kW), DC Bus voltage, Active Reference, and other

data.

5. Six (6) programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with external

devices, typically programmed as follows:

a. There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the

source of a run command (keypad, input contact closure, time-clock control, or serial

communications) the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the

damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a

normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to

an VFD digital input and allows VFD motor operation. Two separate safety interlock

inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be

commanded to coast to stop, and the damper shall be commanded to close. The

keypad shall display "start enable 1 (or 2) missing". The safety status shall also be

transmitted over the serial communications bus. All digital inputs shall be

programmable to initiate upon an application or removal of 24VDC.

6. Three (3) programmable digital Form-C relay outputs. The relays shall include

programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis. Default settings shall be

for run, not faulted (fail safe), and run permissive. The relays shall be rated for maximum

switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0.4 A at 250 VAC; Maximum voltage 300 VDC

and 250 VAC; continuous current rating 2 amps RMS. Outputs shall be true form C type

contacts; open collector outputs are not acceptable.

7. Seven (7) programmable preset speeds.

8. Two independently adjustable accel and decel ramps with 1 - 1800 seconds adjustable

time ramps.

9. Include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce applied motor

voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and audible motor noise.

10. Include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier frequency based on

actual VFD temperature that allows the highest carrier frequency without derating the

VFD or operating at high carrier frequency only at low speeds.

11. Include password protection against parameter changes.

D. Provide a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English words for

programming and fault diagnostics (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable). The keypad shall

utilize the following assistants:

1. Start-up assistants.

2. Parameter assistants

3. Maintenance assistant

4. Troubleshooting assistant

E. Applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) units. A

minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at all


times. The display shall be in complete English words (alpha-numeric codes are not

acceptable):

1. Output Frequency

2. Motor Speed (RPM, %, or Engineering units)

3. Motor Current

4. Calculated Motor Torque

5. Calculated Motor Power (kW)

6. DC Bus Voltage

7. Output Voltage

F. Serial Communications

1. The VFD shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus,

Johnson Controls N2 bus, and Siemens Building Technologies FLN. Optional protocols

for LonWorks, BACnet, Profibus, Ethernet, and DeviceNet shall be available. Each

individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD. The use of third party gateways

and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be "certified" by the governing

authority. Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed.

2. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run-stop control,

speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative PID control adjustments, current

limit, accel/decel time adjustments, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall have

the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as process variable

feedback, output speed / frequency, current (in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt

hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive temperature. The DDC shall also

be capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status, digital input status, and all analog

input and analog output values. All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be

transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible.

The following additional status indications and settings shall be transmitted over the serial

communications bus - keypad "Hand" or "Auto" selected, bypass selected, the ability to

change the PID setpoint, and the ability to force the unit to bypass (if bypass is specified).

The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running in the VFD mode or

bypass mode (if bypass is specified) over serial communications. A minimum of 15 field

parameters shall be capable of being monitored.

G. Provide integral EMI/RFI filters for all VFDs. The onboard filters shall allow the VFD

assemble to be CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for the First

Environment restricted level.

H. All VFD's shall be protected from input and output power mis-wiring. The VFD shall sense this

condition and display an alarm on the keypad.

I. Features specified herein and noted on drawings shall be furnished and mounted by the drive

manufacturer. All Features specified shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a

complete assembly and carry a UL508 label.

J. Provide factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of an output contactor and bypass

contactor. Overload protection and shall be provided in both drive and bypass modes.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 29 23 - 7

Construction Set

K. Door inter-locked, padlock capable circuit breaker that will disconnect all input power from the

drive and all internally mounted options.

L. Fused VFD only disconnect (service switch). Fast acting fuses exclusive to the VFD - fast

acting fuses allow the VFD to disconnect from the line prior to clearing upstream branch circuit

protection, maintaining bypass capability.

1. Bypass designs, which have no such fuses, or that incorporate fuses common to both the

VFD and the bypass will not be accepted.

2. Three contactor bypass schemes and designs will be not accepted.

M. Provide single-phase motor protection.

1. Single phase motor protection shall protection drive in bypass mode.

N. The following operators shall be provided:

1. Bypass Hand-Off-Auto

2. Drive mode selector

3. Bypass mode selector

4. Bypass fault reset

O. The following indicating lights (LED type) shall be provided. A test mode or push to test

feature shall be provided.

1. Power-on (Ready)

2. Run enable (safeties) open

3. Drive mode select damper opening

4. Bypass mode selected

5. Drive running

6. Bypass running

7. Drive fault

8. Bypass fault

9. Bypass H-O-A mode

10. Automatic transfer to bypass selected

11. Safety open

12. Damper opening

13. Damper end-switch made

P. The following relay (form C) outputs from the bypass shall be provided:

1. System started

2. System running


3. Bypass override enabled

4. Drive fault

5. Bypass fault (motor overload or underload (broken belt))

6. Bypass H-O-A position

Q. The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24V or 115VAC (selectable). The bypass shall

incorporate internally sourced power supply and not require an external control power source.

R. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip - provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze,

fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shall remain

fully functional whether the system is in Hand, Auto, or Bypass modes (not functional in

Fireman's Override 2). The remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFD and bypass modes.

S. Dedicated digital input that will transfer motor from VFD mode to bypass mode upon dry

contact closure for fireman's override. Two modes of operation are required.

1. One mode forces the motor to bypass operation and overrides both the VFD and bypass H-

O-A switches and forces the motor to operate across the line (test mode). The system will

only respond to the digital inputs and motor protections.

2. The second fireman's override mode remains as above, but will also defeat the overload

and single-phase protection for bypass and ignore all keypad and digital inputs to the

system (run until destruction).

T. The VFD shall include a "run permissive circuit" that will provide a normally open contact

whenever a run command is provided (local or remote start command in VFD or bypass mode).

The VFD system (VFD or bypass) shall not operate the motor until it receives a dry contact

closure from a damper or valve end-switch. When the VFD system safety interlock (fire

detector, freezestat, high static pressure switch, etc) opens, the motor shall coast to a stop and

the run permissive contact shall open, closing the damper or valve.

U. Class 20 or 30 (selectable) electronic motor overload protection shall be included. There shall

be an internal switch to select manual or automatic bypass.

V. There shall be an adjustable current sensing circuit for the bypass to provide loss of load

indication (broken belt) when in the bypass mode.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install drives under this Division in accordance with the recommendations of the VFD

manufacturer as outlined in the installation manual.

B. Provide power wiring under Division 26. Wire and terminate connections in accordance with

the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer as outlined in the installation manual.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 29 23 - 9

Construction Set

3.02 START-UP

A. Certified factory start-up shall be provided for each drive by a factory authorized service center.

A certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner,

and a copy kept on file at the manufacturer.

3.03 PRODUCT SUPPORT

A. Factory trained application engineering and service personnel that are thoroughly familiar with

the VFD products offered shall be locally available at both the specifying and installation

locations. A 24/365 technical support line shall be available on a toll-free line.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Training of the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with

the Owner, the Construction Management Team, and the Commissioning Professional. Provide

competent, factory-authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance

personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The

instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Owner and the Commissioning

Professional after submission and approval of formal training agendas. Refer to Section 019119

Exterior Enclosure Commissioning and Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning

Requirements, Appendix B – O&M Staff Equipment Training Plan for details associated with

equipment training, systems training, and training tours during construction.

3.05 TESTING

A. System functional performance testing is part of the Commissioning Process as detailed in

Sections 019119 Exterior Enclosure Commissioning and 01 91 13 - General Commissioning

Requirements. Functional performance testing shall be performed by the contractor and

witnessed and documented by the Commissioning Professional.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 26 43 00

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surge protective devices for service entrance locations.



B. Section 26 24 13 - Switchboards.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. SPD: Surge Protective Device.


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.

B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having

Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.05 SUBMITTALS




1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 77 13 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Field-installed, Externally Mounted Surge Protective Devices:

1. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.

2. Schneider Electric; Square D Brand Surgelogic Products; EMA Series:

www.surgelogic.com.


3. Surge Suppression, Inc..

B. Factory-installed, Internally Mounted Surge Protective Devices:

1. Same as manufacturer of equipment containing surge protective device, to provide a

complete listed assembly including SPD.

2.02 ALL SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Description: Factory-assembled surge protective devices (SPDs) for 60 Hz service, listed and

classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated;

system voltage as indicated on the drawings.

B. Protected Modes:

1. Delta Systems: L-G, L-L.

C. UL 1449 Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs):

1. 480V Delta System Voltage: Not more than 1,800 V for L-G mode and 3,000 V for L-L

mode.

D. UL 1449 Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): Not less than 115% of nominal

system voltage.

E. Enclosure Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the


1. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 1.

F. Mounting for Field-installed, Externally Mounted SPDs: Unless otherwise indicated, as

specified for the following locations:

1. Provide surface-mounted SPD where mounted in non-public areas or adjacent to surface-

mounted equipment.

G. Equipment Containing Factory-installed, Internally Mounted SPDs: Listed and labeled as a

complete assembly including SPD.

1. Switchboards: See Section 26 24 13.

2.03 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE LOCATIONS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide field-installed, externally mounted or factory-installed,

internally mounted SPDs.

B. List and label as complying with UL 1449, Type 1 when connected on line side of service

disconnect overcurrent device and Type 1 or 2 when connected on load side of service

disconnect overcurrent device.

C. Provide SPDs utilizing field-replaceable modular or non-modular protection circuits.

D. Surge Current Rating: Not less than 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.

E. UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Current (I-n): 20 kA.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 43 00 - 3

Construction Set

F. UL 1449 Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Not less than the available fault current at the

installed location as indicated on the drawings.

G. Diagnostics:

1. Protection Status Monitoring: Provide indicator lights to report the protection for each

phase.

2. Alarm Notification: Provide indicator light and audible alarm to report alarm condition.

Provide button to manually silence audible alarm.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that the service voltage and configuration marked on the SPD are consistent with the

service voltage and configuration at the location to be installed.

C. Verify that electrical equipment is ready to accept connection of the SPD and that installed

overcurrent device is consistent with requirements of the drawings and manufacturer's

instructions.

D. Verify system grounding and bonding is in accordance with Section 26 05 26, including

bonding of neutral and ground for service entrance and separately derived systems where

applicable. Do not energize SPD until deficiencies have been corrected.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

B. Install SPD in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



D. Unless indicated otherwise, connect service entrance surge protective device on load side of

service disconnect main overcurrent device.

E. Provide conductors with minimum ampacity as indicated on the drawings, as required by NFPA

70, and not less than manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor size.

F. Install conductors between SPD and equipment terminations as short and straight as possible,

not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length. Breaker locations may

be reasonably rearranged in order to provide leads as short and straight as possible. Twist

conductors together to reduce inductance.

G. Do not energize SPD until bonding of neutral and ground for service entrance and separately

derived systems is complete in accordance with Section 26 05 26 where applicable. Replace

SPDs damaged by improper or missing neutral-ground bond.


H. Disconnect SPD prior to performing any high potential testing. Replace SPDs damaged by

performing high potential testing with SPD connected.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Interior luminaires.

B. Emergency lighting units.

C. Exit signs.

D. Ballasts and drivers.

E. Fluorescent emergency power supply units.

F. Lamps.


A. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes.

B. Section 26 09 23 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including

occupancy sensors, outdoor motion sensors, time switches, outdoor photo controls, and

daylighting controls.

C. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.

D. Section 26 50 13 - Luminaire Schedule.

E. Section 26 51 13 - Luminaires, Ballasts, and Drivers - Lutron: Additional lighting products.

F. Section 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting.


A. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources;

Illuminating Engineering Society; 2008.



C. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National

Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

D. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical



E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent


Supplements.

F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.

G. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed

information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements,

listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling

compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

1. LED Luminaires:

a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.




A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting),

NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for

installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 77 13 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

2.02 LUMINAIRES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com.

2. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com.

3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 51 00 - 3

Construction Set

4. Dialite.

B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

D. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,

ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and

protect the lamp and distribute the light.

F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,

connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating

system.

G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any

damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Acuity Brands, Inc; __________: www.acuitybrands.com.

2. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries; __________:

www.cooperindustries.com.

3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc; __________: www.hubbelllighting.com.

B. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and

local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

C. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20

percent voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps

to integral battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and

automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.

D. Battery:

1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where

indicated.

E. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually

activate emergency operation.

F. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge.

2.04 EXIT SIGNS

A. Manufacturers - Powered and Self-Luminous Signs:

1. Acuity Brands, Inc; __________: www.acuitybrands.com.


2. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries; __________:

www.cooperindustries.com.

3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc; __________: www.hubbelllighting.com.

B. All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with

NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with

UL 924.

1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.

2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.

2.05 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting; __________: www.gelighting.com.

2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; www.lutron.com.

3. Osram Sylvania; __________: www.sylvania.com.

4. Philips Lighting Electronics/Advance; __________: www.advance.philips.com.


B. All Ballasts:

1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).

2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable

federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.

2.06 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS

A. Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with

indicated luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and

listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

B. Compatibility:

1. Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy saving, and dimming AC

ballasts, including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits.

C. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically

switches connected lamp(s) to the fluorescent emergency power supply for minimum of 90

minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration

of normal power source.

D. Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator

light to display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency

operation.

SSR-12.41.013.0

26 51 00 - 5

Construction Set

2.07 LAMPS

A. Lamps - General Requirements:

1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.

2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are

not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and

state lamp efficiency standards.

4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish

products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are

determined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for

installation of luminaires provided under this section.

B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general

workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).

D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent

luminaires.

E. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

F. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

G. Emergency Lighting Units:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding

normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting

controls.

H. Exit Signs:

I. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Units:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding

normal ballast(s) in luminaire. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting

controls.

2. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units.

J. Install lamps in each luminaire.


3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as

directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of

egress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

C. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly

designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMINAIRES

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,

ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and

protect the lamp and distribute the light.

E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,

connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a

complete operating system.

F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any

damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION




SECTION 27 13 00

COMMUNICATIONS CABLING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Requirements:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions (if included), and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

2. Approved System Installers (the Installer) for this section are listed below:

a. Digital Group, LLC; Hendersonville, TN, (615) 447-7100

b. Black Box Network Services, Murfreesboro, TN, (615) 890-3505

c. Boe-Tel TN Company, LLC; Nashville, TN, (615) 791-8606

B. Work Included:

1. Supply and install a complete and certified Structured Cabling System consisting of, but not limited to the following components:

a. Multi-mode 50/125 or 62.5/125 micron fiber optic backbone cable.

b. Category 3, Plenum rated or ARMM, intra-building backbone cable.

c. Category 6 Horizontal Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable

d. Fiber and copper termination hardware.

e. Modular Patch Panels.

f. Connectors and faceplates.

g. Patch cords and cross-connects.

h. Cable supports.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2011

B. TIA/EIA 568B

C. BICSI TDMM latest edition


1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Comply with the following sections:

1. Section 26 05 13 – Basic Requirements for Electrical

2. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

3. Section 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems

4. Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Conduit Systems

5. Section 26 05 35 – Outlet Boxes

6. Section 26 05 34 – Pull and Junction Boxes

7. Section 40 90 00 – Controls and Instrumentation

1.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS

A. These submittals must be provided 30 days prior to start of construction.

B. Manufacturer product data sheets for each material and equipment specified. Mark each sheet to clearly identify the specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation.

C. Contractor shall submit faceplate sample to General Contractor for coordination with Electrical device cover plates for color and texture. Approval must be obtained before purchasing and installing face plates.

D. Shop Drawings

E. Detailed dimensional plan views of communication equipment rooms showing equipment racks, cable supports and termination hardware for Copper and Fiber.

F. Assurance/Quality Control Submittals:

G. Proposed test forms for copper riser and horizontal UTP cable.

H. Documentation of manufacturer's qualification of contractor as an approved Installer.

I. Documentation to provide certification for a current BICSI RCDD to manage all installations and testing procedures. The RCDD must be an employee of the contractor.

J. Record drawings shall be kept on site. Record drawings shall include marked up floor plans showing outlet locations, type of cable, and cable label identification.

1.05 FINAL SUBMITTALS

A. These submittals must be submitted and approved prior to final billing and payment. They should be submitted within thirty days of completion of the project.

B. Certification of level of performance as evidenced by comprehensive test results for fiber riser, copper riser and UTP horizontal cabling as specified in this document. Test results should be provided as hard copies and on electronic media.


C. Record drawings with as-built information and finalized versions of the shop drawings. These submittals shall be on the base plan as provided by the system designer. These submittals shall be four copies in reproducible print form and one in electronic format (AutoCAD or DXF file).

1. Plan drawings indicating locations and identification of work area outlets, nodes.

2. Telecommunications rooms (IDF), and backbone (riser) cable runs.

3. Cross-connect schedules including entrance point, main cross-connects, intermediate cross- connects, and horizontal cross-connects.

4. Labeling and administration documentation.

D. Manufacturer's system certification supporting the product warranty. Transfer manufacturer's warranties to Owner's Representative in addition to the General System Guarantee. Submit these warranties on each item in list form along with the certification test results. Detail specific parts within equipment that are subject to separate conditional warranty. Warranty proprietary equipment and systems involved in this contract during the guarantee period. Final payment shall not relieve the contractor of these obligations.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A. The structured cabling system shall be a manufacturer certified, Category 6, Structured Cabling System with a minimum twenty-five (25) year product warranty.

1.07 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Submit schedule for installation of equipment and cabling. Indicate delivery, installation, and testing for conformance to specific job completion dates. As a minimum, dates are to be provided for bid award, installation start date, completion of horizontal cabling, completion of riser cabling, completion of testing and labeling, cutover, completion of the final punch list, and Owner's Representative acceptance.

1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene a meeting one-week prior to commencing work of this section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.

B. Agenda:

1. Tour, inspect and discuss building conditions relating to structured cable system.

2. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed.

3. Review drawings and specifications.

4. Approve proposed equipment.

5. Review and finalize construction schedule of structured cable system and verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment and facilities needed to proceed without delay.

6. Review required inspections and testing.


7. Review cable routing and support.

1.09 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES

A. Take no action that will interfere with, or interrupt, existing building services unless previous arrangements have been made with Owner's Representative. Arrange the work to minimize shutdown time.

B. Owner's personnel will perform shutdown of operating systems. The contractor shall give three (3) days' advance notice for systems shutdown.

C. Should services be inadvertently interrupted, immediately furnish labor, including overtime, material and equipment necessary for prompt restoration of interrupted service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Provide all new, unused, equipment and materials, free of defects. Insure all equipment and materials are clean, free of damage or corrosion and are of the best quality obtainable for the purpose intended.

B. Provide UL Listed communications equipment and materials. When such listing is not available for a piece of equipment, submit equipment and materials for review and approval by Architect and Owner's Representative prior to procurement or installation on the non-listed equipment or materials.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS +

A. Copper UTP cable

1. Belden

2. CommScope

3. Systimax

B. Copper UTP Connecting Hardware:

1. Belden

2. CommScope

3. Systimax

C. Fiber Optic cable:

1. Belden

2. Corning

3. CommScope


4. Systimax

D. Fiber Termination:

1. Belden

2. Corning

3. CommScope

4. Systimax

E. Equipment Rack and Cable Management:

1. Chatsworth

2. Great Lakes

3. Middle Atlantic Products

2.03 COPPER DISTRIBUTION CABLE

A. All high pair count twisted pair copper distribution cable shall be 24 AWG, ARMM type shielded cable. Utilize plenum rated unshielded cable only where required by plenum ceiling conditions.

2.04 FIBER DISTRIBUTION CABLE

A. The Contractor shall install the appropriate cable type, plenum or non-plenum, for the given environment. For a mixed environment, the contractor may install plenum cable entirely to simplify the installation.

B. Cable may be single mode/multimode hybrid cables where both fiber types are in a common outer sheath.

C. Optical fiber cables shall meet or exceed all applicable national and local building fire code requirements. Fiber cables used in a return air plenum environment shall have an Underwriters Laboratories rating that meets or exceeds the requirements of NFPA 262-1985 and UL(r)-910. (OFCP) and (UL(r)) shall be printed every two (2) feet on the cable jacket. The optical fiber riser cable shall have an Underwriters Laboratories rating that meets or exceeds the requirements of UL(r)-1666 (OFCR) and (UL(r)) shall be printed every two (2) feet on the cable jacket. Riser cable exposed to return air plenum spaces in open cable tray shall be plenum rated.

D. Multi-mode, 50/125 micron OM3 grade, tight buffered, armored, OFCR or OFCP rated. 62.5/125 OM1 grade fiber may be utilized only in the case of legacy systems which cannot be supported over 50 micron fiber.

E. Single-mode, 8.3/125 micron OS2 grade, tight buffered, armored, OFCR or OFCP rated.

F. Fiber optic cables utilizing below grade / outside pathways shall be Indoor/Outdoor Gel-free Stranded Loose Tube Cable construction.


2.05 HORIZONTAL UTP CABLE

A. Voice and Data Cable

1. Category: 6

2. Cable type: Plenum / non-plenum rated.

3. Color: Blue

B. SCADA Cable

1. Category: 6


3. Color: Yellow

C. Wireless LAN Cable

1. Category: 6


3. Color: Orange

D. CCTV Cable

1. Category: 6


3. Color: Green

E. Cables Exposed to Moisture Any UTP cable installed in pathways below grade or exterior to the building shall be a filled or indoor/outdoor type cable, to prevent moisture intrusion. These cables shall have the same performance characteristics and rating of other project UTP cables used for the same application, and must be submitted for approval prior to installation.

2.06 PATCH CORDS

A. Copper Patch Cords

1. The Contractor shall provide patch cords of the type/category matching the horizontal cable in the quantity of one pair per faceplate or surface mount box, plus 20 percent. The Contractor shall leave the appropriate number of cords, boxed or bagged, in each network room.

2. Provide a mix of patch cord lengths in each communications space to enable a neat and orderly patching arrangement, utilizing the rack mounted horizontal and vertical cable management.

B. Optical Fiber Patch Cords


1. The Contractor shall provide 2-strand zipcord optical fiber patch cords to activate 50 percent of all fiber data ports, bagged or boxed in each network room. Fiber patch cords shall match the type and optical performance grade of the installed fiber.

2. Provide a mix of patch cord lengths in each communications space to enable a neat and orderly patching arrangement, utilizing the rack mounted horizontal and vertical cable management.

3. Coordinate exact fiber optic patch cable equipment end connector type with Owner and network equipment vendor.

2.07 COPPER CABLE TERMINATING HARDWARE AND CONNECTORS

A. Copper Distribution Cable

1. Copper distribution cable shall be terminated at each end on 110-type wiring blocks equipped with 110-C5 connecting blocks. All 110 type terminating hardware shall match performance specifications of terminated cables. Labels for this hardware shall be white.

B. Horizontal Cable

1. Horizontal cable shall be terminated at the work area on T568B

2. RJ-45 Information Outlets in maximum six port configuration single gang faceplate (color), at the workstation. Dust cover/blank shall be installed as needed.

3. Refer to faceplate details in project drawings for proper jack layout.

4. Faceplate shall be (blank) in color.

5. In the Telecommunications Room (TR), terminate horizontal cable on 24 or 48 port modular patch panels.

6. Install Horizontal Cable Management for each 2 rows (48 ports) of modular terminations.

7. All UTP connecting hardware shall match the performance specifications as dictated by the installed cable to create a manufacturer certified link.

8. Utilize 630A style wall plates with RJ-45 information outlets for wall telephones.

C. Horizontal Wireless LAN Cable

1. Horizontal cable shall be terminated above ceiling on T568B RJ-45 Information Outlets in maximum two port configuration surface mount boxes. Dust cover/blank shall be installed as needed.

2. Refer to faceplate details in project drawings for proper jack layout.

3. Surface mount box shall be Electrical Ivory in color.

4. In the Telecommunications Room (TR), terminate horizontal wireless LAN cable on 24 or 48 port modular patch panels.

5. Install Horizontal Cable Management for each 2 rows (48 ports) of modular terminations.


6. All UTP connecting hardware shall match the performance specifications as dictated by the installed cable to create a manufacturer certified link.

2.08 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM RACKS AND CABLE TRAY

A. 2 POST RACKS AND RACK ACCESSORIES:

1. Chatsworth Universal Rack 7' high 19" Black, part number 48353 - 703

2. Vertical cable management: Chatsworth CCS Combination Cabling Section, part number 30162-703

3. Approved equal

B. 4 POST RACKS AND RACK ACCESSORIES:

1. Chatsworth Megaframe 7' high, 19" 30" deep, part number M1032-70x

2. Approved equal.

C. LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAY

1. Chatsworth Universal Cable Runway, Black, 24", part number 10250-724, or approved equivalent, with associated couplings and supports, shall be installed in the communications rooms as indicated on the construction drawings. Utilize additional equivalent product widths as depicted on the construction drawings. All cable runway shall be securely fastened at all wall terminations at on top of equipment racks.

2.09 CABLE MANAGEMENT

A. Vertical management shall be provided at either side of all vertical racks.

B. Install Horizontal Cable Management for each 2 rows (48 ports) of modular terminations.

2.10 CABLE SUPPORTS

A. All horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 48 to 60 inch (1.2 to 1.5 meter) intervals. At no point shall cable(s) rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels.

B. Supports shall be sized at minimum 2-inch diameter. Limit number of 4-pair cables per bundle of fifty per support.

C. Separate different media type per support. Treat each type of media separately when determining support fill limits.

D. Support design shall allow for a visible sag in the cable. No cable shall be pulled tight.

E. Supports shall be secured to the structural ceiling using manufacturer's recommended supports and appropriate hardware as defined by local code or the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).

F. Supports shall be installed with a minimum clearance of six inches (6") above an acoustical drop ceiling and shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent cables from resting on any piping or mechanical systems.


G. Multiple tiers of supports may be installed.

H. Supports shall be Caddy Cat Links J-Hook, Caddy wide base cable support, Arlington "The Loop" or equivalent type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Pulling tension on communications cable shall not exceed 100 Newtons or 25 foot-pounds, or as otherwise specified by manufacturer specifications.

B. The contractor shall avoid cable stress from cable twist during installation and tension from suspended cable runs and from tightly cinched cable ties.

C. Support all communications cable to the structure, independent of other services, with j-supports, conduit and trays.

D. All horizontal copper UTP cable runs shall be a minimum of fifty feet in length to prevent headend equipment signal interference.

E. Secure all exposed cable in the Telecom equipment rooms to the fire rated plywood backboards or freestanding frames and routed through wire management hardware. The Contractor shall secure the cables to the wall to prevent horizontal movement of the cable (D-rings are acceptable). The Contractor shall secure the cables to the wall in non-deforming manner to prevent vertical movement of the cable, preferably with a wire mesh grip. All work shall be neat and professionally done.

F. Place cable in conduit or cable tray provided for this use. Support cable so that no passageways are obstructed and that no doors are prevented from closing. No cable or attachments shall be installed that inhibit access to any steam line, electrical or communications cable or device or mechanical equipment.

G. When placing cable through floor sleeves or penetrations, the vendor shall patch and seal all holes and gaps around the cable in accordance with floor fire rating.

H. Each station/backbone cable run shall be placed as an uninterrupted conductor section from origination to termination point.

I. System inspection shall be provided through pre-construction, in-progress and final inspections by the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative or authorized representative or the Contractor may, at his/her discretion, perform tests in addition to those specified in this document if there is any reason to question the condition of the material as furnished and installed.

J. After installation is complete, in addition to any other required testing, and at such time as the Owner's Representative directs, the Contractor shall conduct an operational test for approval. The installation shall be demonstrated to be in accordance with the requirements if this specification. Any defects revealed shall be promptly corrected at Contractor's expense and the tests re-conducted. Operational testing is defined for the following circuit types.

1. Station cable

a. Color code compliance


b. Labeling

c. Routing

d. Workmanship

e. Compliance with EIA/TIA 568B requirements

2. Backbone cable

a. Color code compliance

b. Labeling

c. Equipment room and distribution closet jumpers

d. Grounding/bonding

e. Workmanship

f. Continuity of termination block layout

g. Installation and routing

3. Fiber optic cable

a. Labeling

b. Patch panel connections

c. Loss measured in dB/km

d. Workmanship

e. Splice loss

f. Connector loss

g. Circuit length

3.02 COPPER DISTRIBUTION CABLE

A. Installation

1. Any bend in any cable at any point shall have a radius of not less than ten times the outside diameter of that cable.

2. The cable shall be supported in such a manner that there is only minor visible sag and shall be supported vertically with cable grips as required.

3. The cable shield shall be bonded and grounded at each end utilizing the building telecom grounding system.

B. Testing and Inspection


1. All pairs shall be tested end to end for opens, grounds, shorts, transpositions, split pairs and presence of AC current. Any cable pair not passing these tests must be repaired or replaced and retested.

2. A minimum of 10% of all riser pairs shall have a measured loss of no greater that 1 dB.

3. All terminations shall be verified for color code accuracy.

4. Test the continuity of bonds and grounds.

3.03 FIBER DISTRIBUTION CABLE

A. Installation

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including maximum pulling tension and allowable lubricants.

2. At each end, Contractor shall provide at least 10 feet of cable in a wall mounted service loop just below the cable tray.

3. The Contractor shall bond to ground both ends of all armored fiber cables

4. MaxCell will be installed in specified ducts as indicated on drawings. All conduits will be equipped with the appropriate MaxCell pathway devices (with pull strings) to maximize the fill ratio and utilization. MaxCell will be provided and installed by Division 27 contractor.

5. All optical fiber cables are to be continuous and without splicing, unless otherwise specifically described in project documents.

6. Where fiber optic cable passes through vertical riser space or network rooms, secure fiber and / or inner duct to wall vertically every 36 inches. Review fasteners, strain relief and routing with Construction Manager.

7. All optical fiber cable and pathways shall be clearly identified as housing optical fiber at intervals not greater than fifty feet.

B. Testing and Inspection

1. The Contractor shall test all optical fiber strands for insertion loss and length. The Contractor shall perform bi-directional OTDR and optical source and meter tests on all optical fiber strands.

2. The Contractor shall test insertion loss at 850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode cabling using the Method B (1-jumper) test procedure as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A.

3. The Contractor shall test insertion loss at 1310 and 1550 for single mode cabling in at least one direction using the Method A.1 (1-jumper) test procedure as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7.

4. The Contractor shall determine and record length using an OTDR, optical length test measurement device or sequential cable measurement markings.


5. Prior to activation of any network electronics utilizing project fiber, fiber test results must be submitted for review and approval. Fiber test results should also be submitted as a part of the final project documentation package.

6. The Contractor shall calculate the allowable attenuated loss based on final installed length, attenuation coefficient, and connector loss.

7. The Contractor shall remediate any strands testing above calculated limit as determined by the designer.

8. Owner reserves the right to have third party testing to confirm the test results. The Contractor shall remediate, at their expense, any strands exceeding this limit by third party testing.

9. The Contractor shall provide Owner with printed and electronic forms of all test results. Test results shall be unedited and as presented by the tester software. The Contractor may provide supplemental summaries generated by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide Fiber performance calculation worksheets and fiber link attenuation records as illustrated in Section 21 (Figures 21.14 and 21.15) of the BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Workbook, Technician, 2nd Edition.

3.04 HORIZONTAL CABLE

A. Installation

1. All cables installed from the workstation to Telecommunications Room shall be a continuous run.

2. Quantities of cables per workstation shall be provided as indicated on the construction drawings.

3. All cables shall be installed in accordance with TIA/EIA and manufacturer recommendations. Strict attention shall be paid to maintaining sheath integrity, avoiding cable kinks and sharp bends and proper use of cable ties.

4. Cables with severely kinked or cut jackets shall be required to be replaced.

5. No cable shall exceed 295 feet in length.

B. Termination – Voice / Data / SCADA / CCTV

1. At the Telecommunications Rooms, cables will be terminated on rack mounted 24 or 48 port RJ45 modular patch panels.

2. At the work area, cables will be terminated on RJ-45 information outlets. Any unused outlets in the faceplate will be covered with dustcover/blanks.

3. Voice cables serving wall-mounted telephones will be terminated on standard 630A style communications faceplates with RJ-45 4 pair outlets.

4. Pair twist will be maintained as close as possible to the point of termination. Untwisting shall not exceed 0.5 inch. The sheath of the cable shall be removed only as far as required to terminate the individual pairs.

5. Install all communications device plates in full contact with the wall surface.


6. Leave 12" of cable slack above ceiling.

7. Jacks shall match cable color unless otherwise specified.

C. Termination - Wireless LAN Cable

1. At the Telecommunications Rooms, cables shall be terminated on separate rack mounted 24 or 48 port RJ-45 patch panels.

2. At the device end, the data cables will be terminated on RJ-45 Information outlets, housed in 2 port surface mount boxes. Direct modular plug terminations are strictly prohibited.

3. Pair twist will be maintained as close as possible to the point of termination. Untwisting shall not exceed 0.5 inch. The sheath of the cable shall be removed only as far as required to terminate the individual pairs.

4. The contractor shall leave 25 feet of slack at each Wireless AP device location for final adjustment after installation.

5. Jacks shall match cable color unless otherwise specified.

D. Testing and Inspection

1. A link test shall be conducted on each data cable using test equipment approved for "Category 6" testing such as Fluke DSP, Microtest Omni-scanner or equal. Any cable not passing this test shall be repaired or replaced and retested.

2. Printed test results and CD shall be provided for each cable.

3.05 LABELS

A. Labeling scheme shall be as provided by the Owner.

B. All labels must be printed. Hand written labels are not permitted.

C. All horizontal cables shall be numbered at the jack and patch panel. Cables shall be identified with a self-adhesive label in accordance with TIA/EIA 606. At the jack, the label shall be placed on a section of the cable, behind the faceplate, that is accessible when the faceplate is removed. At the patch panel, each cable should be clearly labeled at a location that can be viewed without removing bundle support ties.

D. Cables installed for wireless applications must be labeled on both ends to be in compliance with the National Electrical Code, Article 800.2 and 800.52(B).

3.06 RELAY RACKS

A. Provide in all telecom equipment rooms as specified in this document and on the construction drawings.

B. Vertical and horizontal cable management hardware shall be installed on the racks. Appropriate cable management shall be used to provide support for patch cables. Refer to large-scale room details for hardware placement guidelines.


C. Racks shall be secured to the floor or wall in such a manner that the rack will remain stable when loaded with communications equipment.

D. Racks shall be located within the room so as not to block access to any existing equipment or backboard space. The racks shall be located so that there is a minimum 36" access to both the front and rear of the rack.

E. The racks shall be properly grounded using the communications grounding/bonding system.

F. Utilize cable tray radius type drops and rack radius drops compatible with tray and rack systems at all horizontal to vertical tray to rack cable transitions for proper cable support.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 31 11 00

SITE PREPARATION AND CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Field locate and stake out all construction.

2. Location of Underground piping, utilities and other obstructions.

3. Clearing, grubbing, removal, and disposal of vegetation, rocks, roots, and debris within the limits of the Work except objects designated on the drawings to remain without unnecessary excavation of topsoil and subsoil.

4. Preserve from injury or defacement all vegetation and objects to remain.

5. Removal of paving, curbs, and walks.

6. Disposal of excess materials, trash, and debris.

7. Topsoil excavation and stockpile reusable topsoil for later use.



2. Section 01 76 00 – Protection of Existing Facilities

3. Section 02 41 00 – Demolition

4. Section 31 23 16 – Excavation, Trenching and Grading

5. Section 31 23 23 – Bedding, Backfilling and Compaction

6. Section 32 11 00 – Base and Subgrade Treatment under Pavement

7. Section 32 12 83 – Pavement Cutting

1.02 LIMITS OF WORK

A. Rights-of-way area established by Engineer.

B. Construction area including those areas outside the construction lines established by Engineer.

C. Approved borrow pit areas.

D. Designated stockpiles of construction material other than borrow material.


1.03 LAYOUT WORK

A. Engineer to provide reference points on Base Line and Bench Mark on Contract Drawings.

B. Contractor to perform required field work and establish building lines, hubs, grade stakes, etc.

1.04 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND OBSTRUCTIONS

A. Contract Drawings show approximate location of known obstructions.

B. Contractor shall locate, identify, ascertain size, and protect all underground pipelines, utilities, and other obstructions within construction area, including those that are to remain as well as those to be demolished.

C. Contractor shall provide proper notification prior to commencing any construction activities to Tennessee One-Call and local utilities and follow all guidelines of Tennessee One-Call throughout construction in accordance with Section 01 76 00.

1.05 REGULATORY AND DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies.

B. Conform to applicable local, state and federal codes for environmental requirements, disposal of debris, stockpiling, and use of herbicides.

C. On-site disposal of surplus materials, if permitted by the Owner, shall be as approved by the Engineer.

D. Contractor shall make all arrangements for disposal sites. All expenses for disposal shall be borne by the Contractor. Bidders shall carefully investigate all aspects of surplus material disposing operations.

E. Prior to depositing surplus material at any off-site location, obtain a written agreement between Contractor and the owner of the property on which the disposal of the material is proposed. The agreement shall state that the owner of the property gives permission for the Contractor to enter and deposit material of a particular classification on the owner’s property at no expense to the project Owner, and shall include any other conditions pertinent to the situation as agreed upon by each party. A copy of said agreement shall be furnished to the Owner.

F. Follow standard horticultural practice for cutting and/or pruning of trees, brush, and shrubs.

1.06 PAYMENT

A. All costs associated with surplus or spoil disposal shall be Contractor’s expense and shall be included in applicable payment items, and no separate or additional payment will be made therefor.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Herbicides – Provide product data on herbicides to Engineer for review prior to use on site, if any herbicides are intended to be used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Verify that existing plant life designated to remain, is tagged or identified.

B. Mark limits of clearing by flagging, fencing or other approved methods.

C. Vehicles used to haul soft or wet material over streets or pavements shall be sufficiently watertight to prevent deposits on the streets or pavements. In all cases where any materials are dropped from the vehicles of the Contractor, he shall clean up the same, and keep the crosswalks, street and pavements clean and free from debris.

D. Identify on-site waste or salvage areas for placing removed materials.

E. Maintain bench marks, monuments, and other reference points. Re-establish if disturbed or destroyed at no cost to Owner.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Locate, identify, and protect existing utilities that are to remain, including notification of Tennessee One-Call.

B. Install temporary fences (minimum 3 feet high) to protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain, as final landscaping.

C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, roads, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from damage or displacement from vehicular or foot traffic.

D. Where trees are to be protected or preserved, no excavation and grubbing, except as directly required for construction, shall be performed within the radius of spread of tree branches.

E. No storage of topsoil materials or construction equipment will be permitted within the radius of spread of such tree branches.

F. Treat cut or scarred surfaces of trees or shrubs with a paint prepared especially for tree surgery which is waterproof, antiseptic, elastic and free of kerosene, coal, tar, creosote, and other harmful substances.

G. Maintain designated temporary roadways, walkways, and detours for vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Clear rights-of-way, borrow pit and other stockpile areas of objectionable material to the ground surface except for trees and stumps.


B. Cut trees and remove all stumps where embankments are to be constructed.

C. Clear the construction area, as necessary to access and accomplish work, of all weeds, brush, briars, bushes, trees, stumps, and other protruding obstructions not designated to remain, except within any areas which the Engineer may designate to remain undisturbed.

D. Partially remove paving, curbs, and walks as necessary to accomplish work. Neatly saw cut edges at right angles to surface.

E. Cut trees, shrubs, plants, and bushes and remove all stumps from area(s) indicated on the Drawings.

F. Clear undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing subsoil.

G. Apply herbicide to remaining stumps to inhibit growth.

H. Remove debris, extracted rock, and plant life.

I. Prune branches and/or roots of trees to be preserved or where they interfere with or obstruct construction operations.

1. If exposed, bend and relocate main lateral roots and tap roots.

2. Engage a state-certified arborist or qualified tree surgeon who shall cut roots and/or branches with sharp pruning instruments without breaking or chopping.

3. Qualified personnel shall paint all cuts with standard tree paint or equivalent which is waterproof, antiseptic, elastic and free of kerosene, coal, tar, creosote, and other harmful substances.

4. Where required, extend pruning procedures to restore the natural shape of the entire tree or shrub.

5. Remove low-hanging, unsound or unsightly branches on trees or shrubs designated to remain.

6. Trim branches of trees extending over the roadbed to a clear height of twenty feet above the roadbed surface.

J. Grub construction area of all protruding obstructions.

K. Grub borrow pit and stockpile areas of all objectionable material. Strip overburden over the material to be obtained in stockpile areas.

L. Perform clearing and grubbing well in advance of construction or material removal activities.

M. Perform all clearing and grubbing operations in accordance with the applicable provisions for erosion control as shown in the Contract Documents and as required by local authorities.

N. Stumps and roots shall be grubbed and removed to a depth not less than 2 feet below grade. All holes or cavities which extend below the subgrade elevation of the proposed work shall be filled with compacted layers of crushed rock or earth backfill conforming to the requirements specified for backfill.


O. Damaged Trees - Vegetation which has been damaged by site clearing activities and deemed non-functional by the Owner or Engineer shall be replaced by the Contractor with vegetation of the same genus and species at Contractor’s expense.

3.04 BACKFILLING AND SUBSURFACE PREPARATION

A. Backfill and compact all depressions resulting from clearing and grubbing with suitable materials in accordance with Section 31 23 16, 32 11 00, and 31 23 23.

1. Backfill embankment areas to natural ground elevation.

2. Backfill excavation areas below finished subgrade to finished subgrade.

B. Perform backfilling a satisfactory distance ahead of construction operations.

C. Prepare areas designated on the drawings to receive erosion control matting to smooth surfaces that have been shaped, fertilized, and seeded.

3.05 DEBRIS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL

A. All material shall be treated as surplus material and disposed of promptly off-site in a legal manner in accordance with Part 1 of this specification and at Contractor’s expense.

B. On-site disposal of material, if allowed, will be allowed only at disposal locations designated by Owner and approved by Engineer. Bidders shall assume off-site disposal is required in preparation of bid and shall provide a credit to Owner should on-site disposal be subsequently deemed acceptable.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for locating and providing access to approved disposal sites and for obtaining required approvals from applicable agencies.

D. There shall be no open burning without specific approval of the Owner and local authorities. If burning is approved, a pit burner or similar device must be used.

E. No material shall be disposed of in a flood way or flood plain.

F. All disposal activity shall be in accordance with the regulations of the local governing authority.

3.06 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION

A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded without mixing with foreign materials.

B. All topsoil, loam, or other natural organic materials covering such areas shall be removed; and when suitable for reuse as topsoil shall be stockpiled. Stockpiles shall be established only at approved locations and shall be maintained to prevent erosion and contamination until reuse. To prevent intermixing, topsoil shall not be stockpiled immediately adjacent to other stockpiled materials. All excavated materials shall be stockpiled at locations which will not create public endangerment or inconvenience. Stockpiles shall be kept clear of Fire Department and police facilities and equipment and, where possible, clear of driveways, sidewalks, and crossings.


C. Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Protect from erosion. Remove excess topsoil not being reused to a location designated by Owner.

D. No topsoil shall be removed from the site without Owner’s permission.

END OF SECTION

SSR-12.41.013.0 31 23 16 – 1 Bid Set

SECTION 31 23 16

EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND GRADING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Removing and stockpiling topsoil for finish grading.

2. Excavation for footings, foundations, structures, slabs-on-grade, paving, and landscaping.

3. Excavating trenches for utilities.

4. Rough and finish grading on site.

5. Layout work.

6. Testing.

7. Protection of Work.

8. Removal or reuse of excavated material.




3. Division 03 – Concrete

4. Section 31 11 00 – Site Preparation and Clearing

5. Section 31 23 17 – Rock Removal

6. Section 31 23 19 – Removal of Water


8. Section 31 50 00 – Sheeting and Bracing



11. Section 33 11 00 – Piping

12. Section 33 12 00 – Valves

13. Appendix A – Reports of Geotechnical Explorations

Bid Set 31 23 16 – 2 SSR-12.41.013.0

1.02 REFERENCES

Reference Title

Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction

Standard Material Specifications for gravel, sand, crushed stone and gravel-cement mixtures published by the Tennessee Department of Transportation.

Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices

ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates

ASTM D1556 Density of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D1557 Laboratory Compaction of Soil Using Modified Effort

ASTM D2922 Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods

ASTM D3017 Water Content of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

TOSHA Tennessee Occupational Safety and Health Administration

1.03 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall obtain all required local permits, including street cut permits, prior to commencement of work. Contractor shall contact Tennessee One Call and local utilities to locate existing utilities in accordance with Section 01 76 00.

B. Contractor shall take all required measures for adequate control of dust during performance of Contract in accordance with Section 01 57 00.

C. Contractor shall take all required measures for prevention of erosion during performance of Contract and until satisfactory grass cover has been established in accordance with Section 01 57 13.

D. Contractor shall erect suitable silt and erosion control barriers to prevent siltation of the drainage areas during the performance of the contract in accordance with Section 01 57 13.

E. Contractor shall take all required steps to protect existing roads and drives during the performance of Contract, both from physical damage and deposition of mud or rock in accordance with Section 01 57 00 and 01 76 00.

F. Contractor shall comply with all governing authorities’ regulations in regard to dust control, erosion control, and prevention of pollution of bodies of water and streams.

1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Protection of Property and Persons:

1. Protect existing building structures, curbs, walks, utilities and paving from damage by construction or equipment. Bring back to original condition any damaged in course of construction. Notify utility companies and Tennessee One-Call prior to commencement of intended work.

2. Protect all bench marks and survey points.

3. Protect all vegetation and other features to remain.

SSR-12.41.013.0 31 23 16 – 3 Bid Set

4. Provide adequate protection to persons and property throughout the progress of work.

5. Provide and install construction barriers to protect persons from excavation as required.

6. Current Federal OSHA and Tennessee TOSHA regulations shall be adhered to by the Contractor throughout this work. Excavated cuts and slopes shall be laid back, benched and/or sheeted as required to meet the OSHA and TOSHA regulations.

7. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 24 hours notice to property occupant and owner before any driveway is cut or blocked. Contractor shall schedule any cutting or blocking of driveways to suit property occupant’s convenience. Except in an emergency, Contractor shall not block any driveway without first providing an alternate access to the property.

B. Utilities:

1. Disconnections: Before starting clearing of the site, disconnect, or arrange for the disconnection of utility service connections, such as water, gas, electricity, and telephone, in accordance with the regulations of the utility concerned.

2. Protection: Preserve in operating condition all active utilities transversing the project site; protect all property, including but not limited to mains, manholes, catch basins, valve boxes, poles, guys, and other appurtenances. Repair damage to any such utility due to work under this contract to the satisfaction of the Local Authority.

C. Site Examination – Drawings, Specifications, and the project site shall be carefully examined for thorough familiarization with all existing conditions and limitations and their relationship to and effect upon the work included under this section of the Specifications. No extra allowances will be made for failure to do so.

D. Testing – Owner shall provide laboratory to conduct testing required by this Section at his expense in accordance with Section 01 45 29. Contractor shall cooperate fully with the testing laboratory performing sampling and testing required herein. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory a minimum of 24 hours in advance of when work is to be in progress.

E. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated on Drawings or as provided by Engineer. Bench marks and other reference points shall be carefully maintained and, if disturbed or destroyed, shall be replaced as directed at no cost to the Owner.

F. Layout Work – Excavating and grading contractor shall have the drives, walks, and parking areas staked by a competent surveyor to establish curvatures and grades.

G. Basis of Bid:

1. Excavation shall be bid as unclassified. Excavation contractor is advised to study the site carefully to determine the amount and type of excavation necessary to conform to grades called for on the Drawings. All costs of earth and/or rock excavation shall be included in the Total Base Bid price.

2. Excavation shall be to the required depth, in all cases down to firm subgrade or bearing. If soft spots are encountered, the soft material shall be removed and replaced with compacted fill, as specified herein and Section 31 23 23. Subgrade surface shall be proof rolled with a loaded dump truck to determine if any soft spots exist. The Engineer shall be notified when this is to be done.

Bid Set 31 23 16 – 4 SSR-12.41.013.0

1.05 ADJUSTMENT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Additional excavating and backfilling performed at the written direction of Engineer below or beyond the lines and grades shown or specified will be paid for at the appropriate adjustment prices included in the Contract or if not included, at a price mutually agreed upon by Owner and Contractor, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Restrict measurement for excavating and backfilling to quantities included inside of lines and grades given, and measured to underside of structures, or as shown otherwise, and within vertical planes passing 24 inches outside outer line of footings. Payment will not be made for over-excavated Work nor for replacement materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Planning – Contractor's personnel shall familiarize themselves with the requirements for preservation of topsoil, excavation, backfill, grading, borrow, wasting, and erosion control before beginning work under this section.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. Review subsurface report and other available site information.

B. Identify known underground, above ground, and aerial utilities by marking, staking, or flagging locations. Contact organizations identified in Section 01 76 00. Utilities include water, reclaimed water, gas, electrical, telephone, cable, fiber optic, storm sewers, sanitary sewers, laterals, and services. In the event such locations indicate a possible interference, or when needed to locate points of connection to existing facilities, perform exploratory excavations to determine the utilities’ location and elevation. Provide the Engineer with the results of the exploratory excavations for his review. Allow the Engineer sufficient time to determine any changes required as a result of such exploratory excavations prior to start of construction.

C. Notify utility company to remove and/or relocate utilities.

D. When the project consists of reconstructing sanitary sewers and reconnection of existing sanitary laterals, only reconnect live laterals, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Verify whether the lateral is alive or abandoned and the source of the lateral using such methods as necessary including dyeing, flushing with water, rodding, pipe locators, and exploratory excavations.

E. Abandoned pipes and laterals shall be plugged in with 12 inches of concrete or grout or for large pipes with solid brick masonry.

F. Conduct the operations such that no interruptions to the existing utility system shall occur. Where existing sanitary sewers or storm drain systems are being replaced or interrupted, provide temporary bypass pumping or temporary piping to maintain flow around the work site such that no backups occur in these sewer systems.

SSR-12.41.013.0 31 23 16 – 5 Bid Set

G. Existing sanitary sewer laterals damaged in the work or temporarily disconnected shall be restored to operation by the end of each work day. Existing sanitary sewer laterals where crossing over new pipelines to be restored in accordance with details shown on the drawings.

H. Maintain existing manholes, catch basins, and other utility structures above and below grade which are to remain in their pre-work condition. Any material or debris entering same due to the operation shall be promptly removed.

I. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.

J. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.

K. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic. Preserve the control points provided by the Engineer throughout the life of the project, and accurately replace any such point, which is damaged or moved, at Contractor’s expense.

L. Excavations shall be in complete accordance with all details of applicable codes, rules, and regulations including all local, state, and federal regulations including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations Part 1926, Subpart P - Excavations and Trenching Standards. Contractor shall designate a “Competent Person” 29 CFR 1926.32(f) who shall be responsible for inspections of excavations on a daily basis and document and maintain daily trenching and excavation logs per OSHA 29 CFR 1926.

M. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of insitu compaction. Refer to Section 31 23 23 for details.

N. Brace walls and slabs of structures to support surcharge loads and construction loads imposed by backfilling operations.

O. Maintain a stable, dry backfill area in accordance with Section 31 23 19.

P. Remove all water, snow, ice and debris from surfaces to accept fill materials and from the backfill material.

Q. Areas to receive compacted fill shall be graded to prevent surface runoff and ponding in accordance with this Section.

R. No fill or backfill material may be used without approval of the Engineer. See Section 31 23 23.

S. No geotextile fabric may be used without approval of the Engineer.

T. Backfill operations shall be started at the lowest elevation in the area to be backfilled, and continue, in horizontal layers, upward to the limits specified. See Section 31 23 23.

U. Backfill material shall be within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content for that material. See Section 31 23 23.

3.03 REMOVAL AND STOCKPILING OF TOPSOIL

A. Strip all topsoil to its entire depth, a minimum of 12 inches from all areas to be cut or filled. Contractor may select any method but shall comply with the following:

Bid Set 31 23 16 – 6 SSR-12.41.013.0

1. Scrape areas to be stripped clean of brush, woods, and grass, roots over 1/2 inch diameter, and other foreign materials.

2. Do not strip topsoil in a muddy condition.

3. Do not strip areas indicated not to be disturbed.

4. Avoid including subsoil, debris, stones over 2 inches, and other extraneous matter in topsoil.

5. Leave areas free of trash, debris, and foreign materials.

6. Remove all topsoil from areas over which any construction is to be placed, such as buildings, walks, drives, roads, parking areas, etc.

7. Store topsoil in an approved location for use in finish grading and protect it against loss and from admixture of debris.

B. If borrow topsoil material is required, the Contractor will include in his Proposal the cost of obtaining and placing same.

3.04 PROOF-ROLLING

A. After topsoil stripping is done, proof roll areas to receive compacted fill with a heavily loaded rubber tired tandem axle dump truck. Operate the truck at a normal walking speed so that the Engineer may observe the ground while walking beside the truck.

B. Engineer will review the areas for soft spots. Refer to Part 1 of this specification.

3.05 EXCAVATION – GENERAL

A. All excavation shall be unclassified.

B. Excavate to lines and elevations as indicated on the Drawings and as necessary for the proper construction of the work. The Contractor shall base his bid on the excavation slopes recommended in the geotechnical report provided in Appendix A. If sheeting and/or shoring is required, it shall be installed as recommended and designed by an Engineer employed by the Contractor, the cost of which shall be included in the Contractor’s base bid. Contractor shall employ an engineer to observe and monitor the excavations and engineer shall determine the stability of excavation slopes and recommend and design any sheeting, shoring, bracing, or other methods to be installed. Refer to Section 31 50 00.

C. Equipment and methods shall be suitable for the work at hand. Blasting and shooting shall not be permitted without prior approval from Engineer and Owner.

D. Side slopes shall be as vertical as possible with Contractor employing necessary sheeting, shoring, or bracing, as described in Section 31 50 00 to comply with OSHA and TOSHA regulations. Contractor shall minimize excavation of native material as much as possible except that necessary to accomplish work. Unnecessary excavation shall be backfilled at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including utilities and pipe chases. If required to protect existing structures and improvements or to prevent cave-ins or other unstable soil conditions, Contractor shall utilize sheeting, bracing, shoring,

SSR-12.41.013.0 31 23 16 – 7 Bid Set

or other acceptable methods in accordance with Section 31 50 00. Need for such protection and the design of that product and the cost of that protection shall be borne by the Contractor.

F. Excavate subsoil required to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and construction operations.

G. Excavate to working elevations for piling work. Coordinate special requirements for piling.

H. Machine-slope banks to angle of repose or less, until shored.

I. Excavation cut not to interfere with normal 45-degree bearing splay of foundation. Undercutting of excavation faces will not be permitted.

J. Hand trim excavation to required undisturbed subgrade. Remove loose matter.

K. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock under 1 cubic yard, measured by volume. Refill voids with Fill Concrete or compacted gravel/crushed stone.

L. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on-site. Reusable fill or topsoil in excess of that required or materials unsuitable for fills and backfills shall be disposed of off-site in compliance with all provisions of Section 31 11 00.

M. Rock and shale removed from the excavations shall be disposed of off-site unless deemed suitable for use as backfill by Engineer, in which case Contractor shall be permitted to use the material. Contractor shall at his expense pay for any testing necessary to ascertain the suitability of the material prior to use being approved.

N. Excavation for footings shall be to the footing dimensions unless indicated otherwise.

O. Caved-in excavation materials and other debris shall be removed promptly from the excavation.

P. Owner reserves the right to alter grades and raise or lower established levels after all or any part of the excavation has been completed, and adjustment will be made to the contract price.

Q. Should the Contractor, through negligence or otherwise carry his excavation below the designated subgrade or otherwise over-excavate for footings, base slabs, under slabs, or piping not authorized in advance by Engineer and Owner, Fill Concrete as specified in 03 31 00 or such other materials as may be approved by the Engineer, shall be furnished and placed as backfill in sufficient quantities to reestablish the designated subgrade surface. Granular material used for backfilling shall be spread and compacted in conformance with this Section, Section 32 11 00, and Section 31 23 23 as applicable, and to the percentage compaction outlined therein. The cost of this refilling operation, including any tests associated therewith, shall be borne by Contractor.

R. Excavations shall be kept free from water at all times. Provide drainage openings through foundation walls and flexible plastic drainage piping when required. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. Refer to Section 31 23 19.

S. Pumps or other equipment shall be provided and operated to drain excavated areas and the Contractor shall be responsible for all damages resulting from water in excavated areas or pumping operations. See Section 31 23 19.

T. Ponding which would allow water to percolate to lower strata will not be allowed.

Bid Set 31 23 16 – 8 SSR-12.41.013.0

U. Frozen subsoil, ice, or free water shall be removed prior to placement of concrete.

V. Excavation for footings and trenches may be cut to accurate sizes and side forms omitted if concrete is poured in clean cut trenches without cave-ins.

W. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions, or of questionable soils encountered at required subgrade elevations, and discontinue work in area until notified to resume operations.

X. If indicated on the Drawings or when unstable or unsuitable soil is encountered, excavate soil until suitable material is encountered. Backfill these areas up to the bed level indicated on the drawings. Backfill shall consist of 1 to 2 inch stone except that the last 6 inches shall be No. 67 crushed stone as defined in Section 903 of the latest Tennessee Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Base shall be stable and free from standing water and trench walls shall be stable before normal backfilling operations commence. Follow requirements of Section 31 23 23.

Y. Engineer and testing laboratory shall be notified when excavation for footings have reached the required depth and no footings shall be placed until the excavations have been inspected and approved by the Engineer.

Z. Excavations shall be to the designed subgrade elevation unless specifically directed otherwise. Excavations in shale requiring sound subgrade shall be done by machine excavation as required to reach a sound subgrade. Fractured or disturbed rock subgrade shall not be acceptable where sound bedrock subgrade is indicated. Refer to Section 31 23 17 for acceptable rock removal methods.

AA. Contractor shall be responsible for and shall save the Owner harmless from any loss on account of any damage incurred in this work.

BB. Rock, in areas to be finished grade, shall be removed and backfilled with good material thoroughly compacted.

CC. Footings are to have firm bearing on material as noted on Contract Drawings and with the minimum bearing capacity as notes on the Drawings.

DD. For base slabs on bearing rock, excavation for structure base slabs shall be a minimum of 6 inches below the bottom of slab elevation to allow for placement of a minimum of 6 inches of pug mix base stone on top of the rock bearing.

EE. Contractor shall not cut or block any driveway unless property notice has been provided to the property occupant and owner at least 24 hours in advance.

FF. When excavated trench foundation footings without formwork are shown to be used on the Contract Drawings, opened foundation excavations shall be backfilled with concrete the same day they are opened. Footing widths shall be minimum as indicated on the Drawings. Footings shall be placed “neat” to the excavation. Forgoing paragraph does not apply to concrete footings or walls constructed using formwork.

GG. Rock removal methods may include rock blasting, drilling and chipping, expansive chemical and chipping or other approved methods. Rock excavation, including any required blasting, shall be done in full accordance with local ordinances, regulations, and dictates of safety by skilled operators. Rock excavation shall be evaluated by Contractor during construction for stabilizing considerations. Refer to Section 31 23 17 for rock removal requirements.

SSR-12.41.013.0 31 23 16 – 9 Bid Set

HH. Excavation in sound bedrock shall be performed in such a manner as to provide safe and stable side slopes, per OSHA requirements and with a maximum height between benches of 20 ft. and at transitions from sound bedrock to weathered rock or earth. Benches are to be a minimum of 5 ft. wide. Base of rock excavations shall be at footing edge typical. Excavation for footing shall be with vertical cut.

II. Rock embankment shall not be over-excavated. Rock embankments shall be to slopes indicated and benches at elevations indicated to establish finish grades and provide support for roadways and retaining walls. If embankments are over-excavated to where support of structures above is affected. The embankment shall be established with Fill Concrete backfill anchored to the embankment per recommendations of the geotechnical engineer and subject to the approval of the Engineer and Owner.

3.06 TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. All excavation shall be unclassified.

B. Contractor shall adhere to applicable requirements of general excavation described above that do not conflict with the specific requirements of trench excavation.

C. Trenches for underground piping, ductwork, drains, and similar utilities shall be excavated and maintained as shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section and in such a manner as to form a neat and suitable trench in which to place the bedding, pipe, and appurtenances and so as to cause the least inconvenience to the public.

D. All trench excavations shall be open cut unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. No tunneling shall be done without approval of Engineer of the tunnel cross section and details of construction provided by Contractor.

E. The sides of all trenches shall be vertical to a minimum of 1 foot above the top of the pipe. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, the trench width shall be equal to the sum of the outside diameter of the pipe plus 2 feet, within a tolerance of plus or minus 3 inches. This distance will be measured at an elevation in trench which is 12 inches above the top of the pipe when laid to grade.

F. Cut pavement along neat, straight lines with either a pavement breaker or pavement saw in accordance with Section 32 12 83.

G. Contractor shall excavate by hand wherever necessary to protect existing structures or utilities from damage or to prevent over-depth excavation in the trench subgrade.

H. Trench depths shall be sufficient to provide minimum cover of 36 inches over the top of all pipes or to provide cover as otherwise specified in these Contract Documents or as shown on the Contract Drawings, whichever is greater. Minimum cover specified shall be maintained at all times after installation without exception.

I. Align trench as shown on the Drawings unless a change is necessary to miss an unforeseen obstruction. Alignment changes shall be documented on the record drawings in accordance with Section 01 77 00.

J. Excavation shall be such that a flat bottom trench of allowable width is established at the required subgrade elevation for subsequent installation of pipe foundation material or shape the bottom of the trench provides uniform bearing of the pipe on undisturbed earth throughout its entire length. Bottom of trenches, whether in dirt or crushed stone bedding, must be shaped by hand, and bell holes must be dug so that the full length of pipe is resting on trench

Bid Set 31 23 16 – 10 SSR-12.41.013.0

bottom. Blocking shall not be used, and neither shall the pipe be laid on a trench bottom that has not been leveled to provide support throughout the full length of the pipe. Pipe foundation material shall be as specified in Section 31 23 23.

K. If indicated on the Drawings or when unstable or unsuitable soil is encountered at the trench bottom, refer to Article 3.05.

L. Remove rock encountered in trench excavation to a depth of 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe barrel, backfill with an approved material, and compact to uniformly support the pipe. In no case shall solid rock exist within six (6) inches of the finished pipeline. Refer to Section 31 23 17.

M. When rock borings or soundings are provided, they are for information only and do not guarantee existing conditions. Make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine existing conditions.

N. If a prefabricated, mobile shield is utilized in lieu of conventional sheeting and bracing in pipe trenches, the bottom of the shield shall be maintained as high as possible (preferably above the spring line of the pipe) so as to prevent disturbance of the pipe foundation material and to avoid forces which would tend to pull pipe joints apart when the shield is dragged forward. Gouged openings or troughs left by the shield shall be filled with additional pipe foundation material and thoroughly compacted. Installation of sheeting and bracing and use of mobile shields shall be in complete accordance with all details of applicable safety codes, rules and regulations including all applicable local, State, Federal, and OSHA regulations.

O. Trenches shall be opened up far enough ahead of pipe placement to reveal obstructions, but in general shall not be opened for more than 200 feet in advance of installed pipe. Excavation of the trench shall be fully completed at least 5 feet in advance of pipe laying operations. No more than 40 feet of trench shall be left open overnight.

P. Contractor shall install equipment in trench, backfill when an inspector is present, and provide rough cleanup promptly after excavation of trench. Failure of Contractor to promptly complete work in trench may result in Contractor being prohibited from excavating additional trench.

Q. Excavations beyond those designated in the Contract Documents shall reestablish the designated subgrade as outlined in Article 3.05. If the maximum widths of pipe trenches are exceeded, the installed pipes shall be fully cradled in a minimum of 6 inches of fill concrete, as specified elsewhere, and at the Contractor’s expense. Excavation below subgrade which is ordered by the Engineer because the normal subgrade has been disturbed by the Contractor’s operations shall be considered as unauthorized excavation.

R. Contractor shall gradually increase the depth of trench when approaching cuts, creek banks, or other changes in grade to avoid the use of fittings wherever practical and at no additional cost to the Owner.

S. Trenching required for new connections to existing utilities shall not commence until existing utilities are located and uncovered.

3.07 MAINTENANCE OF EXCAVATIONS

A. All excavations shall be properly and legally maintained while they are open and exposed. Sufficient and suitable barricades, warning lights, flood lights, signs, etc., to protect life and property shall be installed and maintained at all times until the excavation has been backfilled and graded to a safe and satisfactory condition. All signs, markers, barricades shall conform

SSR-12.41.013.0 31 23 16 – 11 Bid Set

to the requirements of the Tennessee Department of Transportation and the Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. All barricades, signs and markers shall be reflectorized.

B. To maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic and safety, temporary plating over trenches consisting of steel plates shall be used to temporarily bridge trench excavations. Plates shall be of size and positioned to provide adequate bearing at plate edges, shall be securely anchored, and shall be fitted in place in a manner to minimize noise when crossed by traffic. Plates shall be of sufficient thickness to safely carry heavy traffic without detrimental deflection; however, unless otherwise specified, the minimum thickness of plates shall be 1-inch.

C. Plate edges exposed to traffic shall be feathered with asphalt mix as part of trench excavation work. Work includes surveillance and adjustment of plating over trenches which shall be provided by the Contractor during non-working hours, weekends, and holidays.

D. Contractor shall maintain all excavations in a dry condition until work is complete. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling groundwater, storm water, and sewage in the excavated areas in conformance with Section 31 23 19. Equipment and facilities shall not be installed in water. Water shall not be allowed to submerge concrete or mortar until concrete and mortar have been set for at least 48 hours.

3.08 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS

A. Excavated materials shall be stored safely away from the edge of the excavation area and shall avoid encroachment on private property.

B. Storage of excavated materials shall be accomplished in a manner to avoid danger to workers, utilities, and vehicular and pedestrian traffic, avoid encroachment on private property, and avoid or minimize blockage of driveways, sidewalks, natural drains, etc.

C. Material shall be stockpiled for future use only if prior approval for material reuse has been approved by Engineer otherwise material shall be considered unsuitable or surplus material and disposed of promptly. Stockpiling shall be in locations approved by Owner and Engineer prior to stockpiling activities.

D. Excess and unsuitable excavated material shall be disposed of off-site in accordance with Section 31 11 00. No on-site material shall be used for backfilling unless testing confirms the suitability of the material and then only with approval of Engineer.

3.09 OBSTRUCTIONS

A. Obstructions shown on the Drawings are for information only and do not guarantee their exact locations nor that other obstructions are not present.

B. When utilities or obstructions are not shown on the Drawings but are present within the work area, the Contractor may request to relocate proposed work if necessary to avoid disturbing the utility or obstructions.

1. If the relocation is approved by Owner and Engineer, Contractor shall receive compensation for additional granular backfill, pavement replacement, and other work as may be necessary to accomplish the modified work.

Bid Set 31 23 16 – 12 SSR-12.41.013.0

2. If the relocation is not approved by Owner and Engineer, Contractor and Engineer shall work together to resolve the conflict with the obstruction.

C. Exercise due care in excavating adjacent to existing obstructions and do not disturb these obstructions unless absolutely necessary and then only with the written approval of the owner of the obstruction.

D. In the event obstructions are disturbed, repair or replace as quickly as possible to the condition existing prior to their disturbance and in accordance with requirements of the owner of the obstruction. Such repair or replacement work shall be at the expense of the Contractor. If owner of obstruction desires to perform repair or replacement work themselves, Contractor shall pay the owner of the obstruction for their repair or replacement work.

E. If replacement or repair of disturbed obstructions is not performed after a reasonable period of time, the Owner may have the necessary work done and deduct the cost of same from payments to the Contractor.

3.10 GRADING

A. Rough Grading:

1. Rough grading shall proceed in a practical sequence as the construction work progresses.

2. Grade for all building construction to the elevations shown on the Drawings making allowances for granular fill where required under concrete slabs.

3. Bring subgrade in project area outside building line to 8 inches below finished elevation for lawns and 18 inches for planting, and to subgrade level where paving is required.

4. Slope rough graded surfaces to drain surface water away from buildings.

5. Rough grading shall be approved before placing of topsoil is started.

B. Finish Grading:

1. All finish earth surfaces in area of the site disturbed for the new construction shall receive topsoil.

2. Topsoil shall not be placed when the subgrade is frozen, excessively wet, extremely dry, excessively compacted, or in a condition detrimental to the proposed planting.

3. Topsoil shall be removed from the stockpile on the site or brought in off the site if quantity of existing is not sufficient, and distributed uniformly and spread evenly to a thickness of 8 inches. Topsoil shall be rock free. Specified thickness shall be after soil has been compacted in accordance with the Contract Documents.

4. Finished surfaces shall be fine graded, neat, and uniform with no visible clumps or particles of soil exceeding 1-1/2 inches in longest dimension.

5. Grade uniformly with rounded surfaces at tops and bottoms of abrupt changes of plane.

6. Finish surfaces properly for seeding. Variation from a plane shall not exceed 1 inch in 10 feet.

SSR-12.41.013.0 31 23 16 – 13 Bid Set

7. Protect graded areas from erosion, or repair and regrade. Refill where noticeable settlement occurs. Refilling of settled areas is included in project's warranty period.

8. Remove rocks, roots, and other foreign materials and leave surface smooth and well-drained.

9. Gravel Areas - Location where gravel is to be used in lieu of grass as ground cover, the gravel shall be placed on top of a geotextile fabric that shall promote drainage and prevent grass growth.

3.11 TESTING

A. Contractor shall employ a qualified and experienced independent testing laboratory to perform monitoring and testing of all compacted fill, monitoring and testing of all consolidated crushed stone backfill, and to certify that the fill and backfill is placed in conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. The testing laboratory shall inspect all bearing and subgrade levels for compliance with the bearing conditions required and shall observe all proof-rolling of subgrade levels. If laboratory employed by Contractor, laboratory shall be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

B. Contractor shall cooperate fully with the testing laboratory performing sampling and testing required herein. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory and Engineer a minimum of 72 hours in advance of when work is to be in progress.

C. Testing shall consist of all required laboratory tests of the fill material including moisture-density relationships (Proctor), Atterburg limits and continuous inspection and field density testing of the fill when it is being placed.

D. Testing laboratory shall submit 2 copies of laboratory report to Engineer or RPR and 1 copy to the Contractor.

E. Suitability of the proposed material for use as fill and backfill shall be verified by the testing lab, and their report shall so state its suitability.

3.12 PERIODIC CLEANUP AND BASIC RESTORATION

A. When work involves installation of sewers, drains, water mains, manholes, underground structures, or other disturbances of existing features in or across streets, rights-of-way, easements or private property, the Contractor shall (as the work progresses) promptly backfill, compact, grade and otherwise restore the disturbed area to a basic condition which will permit resumption of pedestrian or vehicular traffic and any other critical activity or function consistent with the original use of the land. The requirements for temporary paving of streets, walks, and driveways are specified elsewhere. Unsightly mounds of earth, large stones, boulders and debris shall be removed so that the site presents a neat appearance.

B. Contractor shall perform the clean-up work on a regular basis and as frequently as required. Basic site restoration in a particular area shall be accomplished immediately following the installation or completion of the required facilities in that area. Furthermore, such work shall also be accomplished if partially completed facilities must remain incomplete for some time period due to unforeseen circumstances.

C. Upon failure of the Contractor to perform periodic clean-up and basic restoration of the site to the Engineer’s satisfaction, the Owner may, upon five days prior written notice to the Contractor, without prejudice to any other rights to remedies of the Owner, cause such work for which the Contractor is responsible to be accomplished to the extent deemed necessary by

Bid Set 31 23 16 – 14 SSR-12.41.013.0

the Engineer, and all costs resulting therefrom shall be charged to the Contractor and deducted from the amounts of money that may be due him.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00.

3.14 PROTECTION

A. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation. Refer to Section 31 50 00.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation, from freezing.

C. Exposed subgrade surfaces shall remain undisturbed, drained, and maintained as uniform, plane areas, shaped to receive the foundation components of the building or structure.

D. Protect all completed work in accordance with Section 01 57 00.

E. Regrade and recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

3.15 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

A. All backfilling and compaction shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 23.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 31 23 17

ROCK REMOVAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Removal of subsurface rock encountered during excavation, utilizing mechanical or blasting methods.

2. Pre-splitting rock.








7. Section 32 11 00 – Base and Subgrade Treatment Under Pavement

8. Appendix A – Reports of Geotechnical Explorations

1.02 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 495 - Code for Manufacture, Transportation, Storage, and Use of Explosive Materials.

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) - U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Construction Standards and Interpretation, 29 CFR Part 1926.

C. Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms (BATF) - Title XI, Regulation of Explosives (18 U.S.C. Chapter 40; 84 Statute 952) of the Organized Crime Control Act of 1970 (84 Statute 922) and 27 CFR 55.

D. Department of Transportation (DOT) - Title 49 (49 CFR), Parts 106, 107, 171-179, 383, and 390-399.

E. United States Department of the Interior, Bureau of Mines Report of Investigations 8507, “Structure Response and Damage Produced by Ground Vibration from Surface Mine Blasting.”

F. Tennessee Department of Labor regulations.


G. Tennessee Blasting Standards Act of 1975.

H. Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction, The Associated General Contractors of America, latest edition.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. “Rock” is defined to include all sound solid masses, layers and ledges of consolidated and indurated rock or mineral matter of such hardness, durability and/or texture that it is not rippable or cannot be excavated with normal earth excavation equipment.

B. All boulders and detached pieces of solid rock or concrete or masonry 1 cubic yard in volume or greater, shall be classified as “rock.”

C. Should a conflict arise as to the classification of the material to be removed, the following tests shall be used to aid in the determination:

1. Where practicable, a late model tractor-mounted hydraulic ripper equipped with a one digging point of standard manufacturer’s design adequately sized for use with and propelled by a crawler-type tractor rated between 210 and 240 net fly-wheel horsepower, operating in low gear, shall be utilized. Should the suspect material not be effectively loosened or broken down by ripping in a single pass with the aforementioned ripper, the material shall be classified as “rock.”

2. In situations where interbedded strata of “common excavation” material and “rock excavation” material are encountered in the same excavation, the individual classification of those materials shall be made on an average percentage basis of the occurrence of those materials as measured in stratigraphic sections as approved by the Engineer.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Seismic Survey Firm – Contractor shall retain a licensed independent consultant specializing in preparation of blasting programs and seismic surveys with five (5) of documented experience. The seismologist consultant shall not be an employee of the Contractor, subcontractor, explosives firm manufacturer, or explosives distributor. Seismic Survey Firm shall be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

B. Blasting Contractor – Contractor shall retain licensed company, firm, subcontractor or individual specializing in explosives for disintegration of rock, with minimum ten (10) years documented experience and five (5) years of documented experience on water main or sewer installation and water and wastewater structure projects. Blasting Contractor shall be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

1. Blasting supervisors (blaster in charge) shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience, directly related to the specific types of blasting they are supervising.

2. All blasters and supervisors shall be properly qualified and licensed in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local government regulations.

3. Licensed blaster shall be fully conversant with the blasting requirements as set forth in Tennessee Blasting Standards Act of 1975 TCA 68-105 as currently enacted with all additions and amendments.

4. Licensed blaster in charge shall remain physically on project site during course of all blasting activities.


5. Licensed blaster in charge shall be responsible for supervision of all blasting activities conducted by blaster, other licensed blasters and licensed handlers.

6. Licensed blaster in charge shall be available and shall respond to property owner complaints or concerns about blasting as they arise.

7. Licensed blaster in charge shall be responsible for immediately reporting all blasting complaints to Engineer, Owner, and Post-blast coordinator within 24 hours of receiving a complaint.

8. Licensed blaster in charge shall be responsible for reporting any and all fly rock incidents immediately to Engineer and Owner. Fly rock shall be defined as any blasted material that breaks through the natural overburden and mat system and is propelled into air.

9. Licensed blaster shall be required to comply with accident reporting requirements as required by TCA Section 68-105 as currently enacted with all additions and amendments.

C. Pre-Blast Inspections – Contractor shall retain the services of an experienced licensed specialist who will conduct, at required intervals, the pre-blast inspections of existing structures, properties and facilities in vicinity of work area that may be affected by construction operations. The specialist shall be registered in the project state and have performed similar preconstruction survey services on at least three projects of similar scope and complexity. Pre-blast Inspector shall be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

D. Should Contractor elect to use explosives in areas where permitted in the prosecution of Work, Contractor shall employ only workmen familiar with and skilled in use of explosives, carefully cover the explosion with suitable timber, matting and/or excavation, and exercise utmost care so as not to endanger life or property.


A. Contractor shall conform to all applicable Federal, State and local regulations, codes, ordinances, and laws for explosive disintegration of rock and to NFPA 495 for handling explosive materials.

B. Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and/or licenses from authorities having jurisdiction over Work before explosives are brought to site or drilling is started.

1.06 SCHEDULING

A. Contractor shall participate in a meeting held by Engineer and Independent Seismic Surveyor to discuss Contractor’s blasting plan and procedures for notification of neighboring public.

B. Contractor shall schedule work with Owner and Engineer so that Engineer may be present for all blasting operations. Provide written notice of when blasting will occur to both Owner and Engineer.

C. Contractor shall schedule work to avoid disruption to occupied buildings and facilities nearby. Contractor shall confine his blasting operations outside boundaries established by these facility owners.

D. Contractor shall schedule work to minimize disruption of vehicular traffic in nearby public thoroughfares.


E. Contractor shall coordinate schedule with local police and fire departments and other required entities.

F. All rock removal, including production drilling and blasting of rock, shall be done before any other required work is performed that is located within 200 radial feet of rock removal area, including placement of concrete and installation of pipelines. If high spots in subsequent work areas are encountered, such as rock pinnacles, speed bumps, ledges, or other portions of rock that were not adequately fractured by production blasting, secondary blasting defined herein shall apply.

G. Contractor shall Schedule Work to coordinate with concrete placement. Reference Division 03 – Concrete.

H. In no case shall blasting be allowed during concrete placement or within 24 hours after placing and finishing concrete at the job site.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit statements to document experience for the seismic survey firm including sample of previous vibration analysis and/or report, listing of monitoring equipment, the Explosives Contractor experience statement including descriptions of explosives use and damage control measures experience, the pre-blast inspector’s experience statement, and the experience statement from the soils/rock boring contractor used to establish rock profiles. Provide qualifications of the person(s) responsible for design, placement of charges, and directing the blasting, including powdermen who will handle explosives. Firms and Contractors shall all be registered in the State or Tennessee and be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

B. Submit plan of action for rock removal. As a minimum, include a site plan showing starting date, preconstruction inspection requirements, location, direction of progress, finish point, and completion schedule. Submit plan a minimum of 45 days before blasting is to occur. Plan shall include:

1. Submittal shall indicate conformance to required local, state, and federal regulations. Any rock blasting should consider the effects to the conditions and operation of the existing structures, all rock blasting shall be performed following the State regulations in the Tennessee Blasting Laws, Title 6B, and Chapter 105 - Blasting Standards.

2. Plan shall demonstrate that blasting shall be performed in accordance with Tennessee Blasting Standards Act of 1975 TCA Section 68-105 as currently enacted with all additions and amendments and federal laws and regulations, utilizing blasting damage control methods for prevention of personal injury, damage to existing structures and utilities and prevention of interruptions of their service and such as to prevent unwarranted blasting damage. Extreme care shall be taken when blasting to avoid damage to underlying rock strata, existing structures, pipelines, and other appurtenances. Measures shall be described in plan to prevent said damage.

3. Blasting plan shall be designed to control fly rock and keep vibrations and air blast levels within specified limits.

4. Blasting plan shall demonstrate Contractor’s means and methods to maintain good public relations through managed public perceptions of blasting operation and show methods to be utilized by Contractor to facilitate good communication with surrounding community and reduce vibrations and air blasts levels to lowest reasonable levels possible while still accomplishing production required by Work.


5. Blasting plan shall be designed in accordance with these Contract Documents including special provisions for open ditch line production blasting and secondary blasting (pop shooting).

6. Contractor shall retain and pay all costs for an engineering consultant, registered in the State of Tennessee and experienced in the use of explosives and damage control and satisfactory to Owner and Engineer for developing and implementing Blasting Plan.

7. Blasting plan shall delineate proposed shot design for overland production blasting and secondary blasting (pop shooting).

8. Blasting plan shall include specifics of drilling equipment and casing to be used, number of holes, hole diameter, hole depth, hole pattern (burden and spacing), type of delays, delay pattern, stemming material, depth of stemming, number of decks, nomenclature and type of detonators, total explosive charge per hole, total explosive charge per deck, total explosive charge per blast, type of explosive used, and kind of surface protection planned (overburden, matting).

9. Provide details of an audible advance signal system to inform that a blast is about to occur.

C. Contractor shall provide copies of all blasting permits to Owner and Engineer prior to blast operations commencing.

D. Submit blasting log weekly to Engineer. Log shall include amount of explosive used, time of detonation, specific location of each blast, and all other pertinent data as required by Tennessee Blasting Standards Act of 1975 TCA 68-105 as currently enhanced with all additions and amendments.

E. Pertinent information concerning any claim alleged to have been caused by blasting vibration, air blast or fly rock activities associated with the project shall be submitted to Engineer and Owner within 24 hours of being reported. This information shall include claimants name and address as well as date and time of blast that is claimed to have caused damage. Nature of claimed damage shall also be included.

F. Copy of Contractor’s Explosive Users Registration Certificate, which demonstrates that his company is registered and that it is properly insured and that his employees are properly licensed to conduct blasting operations before any blasting begins.

G. Contractor shall have insurance as required by these Contract Documents in full force and in effect before any blasting is done. Contractor shall present to Engineer and Owner evidence of this coverage before any blasting begins. Insurance documents shall show that insurance will be in effect for anticipated duration of blasting.

H. In the event the Contractor’s design round is not effective or results in excessive ground vibrations and/or air blast overpressures, the Contractor shall immediately revise the round design and submit it to the Engineer for review.

I. Documentation regarding refusal by property owners to allow a pre-blast inspection as described herein.

1.08 RESPONSIBILITY FOR BLASTING OPERATIONS

A. Review of the Contractor’s blasting submittals by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the accuracy, adequacy, and safety of the blasting; exercising proper


supervision and field judgment; preventing damage to structures; and producing results within the limits required by the Contract Documents.

B. Blasting contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for the safety of all persons and property during the performance of his work. Contractor shall take whatever measures he deems necessary, in addition to the requirements herein, to protect the safety of persons and property, both at the construction site and away from the site.

C. Contractor shall have full and complete responsibility for the handling, discharging or settling of all damage or annoyance claims resulting from the blasting activities on the project.

D. Contractor shall be fully liable for all damage or nuisance caused by the blasting operations and shall promptly repair all damage of existing or newly installed property at his own expense.

1.09 ORDER OF WORK

A. Contractor shall develop a rock profile over the area to be excavated and pre-split prior to starting blasting operations.

B. Conduct pre-blast inspections. No blasting shall occur until these inspections are fully complete.

C. After the rock profile is determined, proceed with rock removal in accordance with the approved plan of action.

D. Contractor shall schedule operations so that all rock excavation within 200 feet of any proposed structure is completed before any structure work is started.

E. Prior to commencing full-scale blasting operations, the Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of the proposed blasting plan by drilling, blasting, and excavating short test sections to determine which combination of method, hole spacing, and charge works best.

1.10 PRE-BLAST INSPECTIONS

A. Prior to the start of blasting in any area, the Contractor shall conduct pre-blast inspections. These inspections shall be done initially and later repeated as follows:

1. Pre-blast inspections shall, at a minimum, include all structures and facilities located entirely or partially within a radial distance of 1,500 feet from the blast site. Pre-blast inspections shall obtain photographs and engineering diagrams of all walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings showing existing cracks; elevation photographs of exterior cracks or damage; and any other such data as is applicable to locate and define the amount and extent of existing damage. All existing structural deficiencies, major or minor, shall be shown. Foundation walls shall be videotaped and/or photographed (inside and outside) with audio tapes made to document conditions.

2. Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer and fire marshal, a copy of the preconstruction inspection upon request.

3. In the event that any property owner denies access for the survey of structures and facilities within the construction area, notify such property owner by certified mail on the intent of the survey. If, after two weeks, access is still denied, notify the property owner once again by certified mail, stating that this is the final notification. Submit two (2) copies of all such correspondence to the Engineer. Upon review of such correspondence,


the Engineer and Owner may waive the inspection requirement for property owned by owners refusing access.

B. The preceding requirements shall apply for all excavations utilizing blasting. The Contractor shall conduct the preconstruction inspection at work sites as detailed in the preceding subparagraph.

C. Nothing contained herein shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for claims arising from his construction operations. Failure to inspect any structure, whether or not required by these requirements, or inadequacy of the inspections, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.

D. Well Testing

1. Pre-blast inspector shall sample any well not being abandoned under this contract within 1,500 radial feet of any area where blasting is to take place. Samples shall be for turbidity, total dissolved solids, bacteriological contamination, and any other testing as may be required by the Tennessee Department of Environment and Conservation (TDEC).

2. Contractor shall be responsible for contacting TDEC, informing them of proposed blasting operations, and obtaining any testing requirements for nearby wells.

3. If any complaints arise after blasting, Contractor shall resample impacted well. All wells found to be adversely impacted by blasting shall be abandoned and either a new well be drilled or a new water service be connected to nearest water main as directed by Engineer. Either option is at Contractor’s cost.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Explosives - Type recommended by explosives firm following seismic survey and required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Delay Device - Type recommended by explosives firm.

C. Blast Mat Materials - Type recommended by explosives firm.

D. Stemming Material - All space in each blast hole not occupied by the explosive charges shall be filled with stemming material. Stemming material shall be clean stone chips or other approved angular granular material graded as follows:

Sieve Size Percentage of Weight Passing

3/8-inch 100

No. 4 20-25

No. 8 0-10

E. Track drills or any other type of drilling equipment used for this project shall utilize water in the drilling operation to reduce, if not eliminate, dust production. The air compressors used


shall have acoustical cover and functional mufflers. The noise level shall not exceed 90 dB when measured in 5 feet free field.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Store and handle explosives as required by local, state, and federal laws and regulations and as recommended in “Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction”.

1. Whenever explosives are stored or kept, they shall be stored in a safe and secure manner, and all storage places shall be plainly marked "DANGEROUS - EXPLOSIVES."

2. No on site overnight-unattended storage of explosives shall be allowed.

3. Storage of explosives shall be limited to reasonably anticipated quantities required for daily production needs.

4. Every blast site shall have its own set of day boxes to properly store explosives and detonators. Blast site shall be defined as area of loaded holes plus a perimeter of fifty feet from loaded holes.

B. Specifications to follow for maximum blast hole size and maximum load needed to achieve levels less than the maximum vibration identified for this job shall be strictly adhered to.

C. Extreme care shall be taken when blasting to avoid damage to underlying rock strata, existing structures, pipelines, and other appurtenances.

D. Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent personal injury, damage to real or personal property resulting from blasting or vibration or air concussion caused by blasting. These precautions shall include, but are not limited to, investigations by Contractor to establish limits of size and nature of individual blasts, which may be safely accomplished without damage or interference with use of property.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verify site conditions and location of nearby buildings, structures and other facilities, recording irregularities which exist prior to work of this section.

B. Verify locations of nearby underground utilities and structures. Reference Section 01 76 00.

3.03 ROCK PROFILING

A. After clearing the site, the Contractor shall establish access and make rock corings to determine depths of sound bedrock.

B. Contractor can auger to top of bedrock and install casing as required to hold the hole open.

C. Contractor shall core bedrock to either non-rock materials are encountered or until the hole is at least 2 feet lower than the depth of rock to be removed or pre-split.

D. Contractor shall survey to accurately establish coring depths required.


E. Contractor shall record all relevant information at each exploratory hole. This data shall include, but not be limited to grade elevation, top of rock elevation, bottom of boring elevation, rock quality designation (RQD), and soils identification.

F. Contractor shall only utilize experienced personnel for this phase of the work, or subcontract to a soil exploration firm. If outside firm is used, firm shall be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

3.04 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum; establish quantity of rock to be removed to meet project requirements.

B. Conduct pre-blast survey and document conditions of buildings and structures in accordance with Part 1 prior to blasting, photograph existing conditions identifying existing irregularities.

C. Advise owners of adjacent buildings, structures and utilities in writing, prior to executing seismographic survey. Explain planned blasting and seismic operations. Allow sufficient time for owners to implement their own protective measures. Confirm with owners in writing prior to commencement of blasting that they have completed implementing their own protective measures.

D. Contractor shall conduct a pre-blast meeting, at the site, prior to the start of any drilling or blasting activities. The purpose of the meeting shall be to review the blasting procedures and vibration monitoring requirements, and to facilitate coordination between all parties involved. Individuals attending the pre-blast meeting should include Engineer, Contractor, Contractor’s seismologist/blasting consultant, Contractor’s blaster, and any other personnel the Engineer or Contractor deem appropriate.

E. Contractor shall notify all utility companies 48 hours prior to blasting.

3.05 ROCK REMOVAL – GENERAL

A. If measurements are necessary for unit price payment, allow time for Engineer to take site measurements of rock quantities to be removed.

B. Cut away rock at bottom of excavation to form level bearing surface for foundations of buildings and structures.

C. Remove shaled layers to provide sound and unshattered base for footings, foundations, and pipe bedding as work requires.

D. In utility trenches, trim rock to depth of width around pipe as shown on Drawings and specified in Section 31 23 23.

E. Remove excavated materials from site in accordance with Section 31 11 00.

F. Correct unauthorized rock removal in accordance with requirements of this Section and Section 31 23 16 under direction of Engineer.

G. Extreme care shall be exercised in blasting, with signals of danger given before the firing of any charge. Contractor shall, in all acts, conform to and obey all rules and regulations for the protection of life and property that may be imposed by any public authorities or Engineer relative to the storing and handling of explosives and the blasting operations.


H. Contractor shall not blast within 25 feet of any underground utilities including water, sewer, and gas, telephone cables, building footings, gasoline tanks or other hazardous area, or any above-grade structures. Contractor shall remove rock by means other than blasting. Contractor shall exercise due caution whenever blasting near adjacent utilities or structures previously installed to avoid any damage to those utilities and structures.

3.06 ROCK REMOVAL – MECHANICAL METHOD

A. Excavate and remove rock by mechanical methods at locations required by the Contract Documents and when trimming bottom or sides of excavation is necessary to meet project requirements.

B. Drill holes and utilize expansive tools, wedges, and/or mechanical disintegration compound, as appropriate, to fracture rock.

3.07 ROCK REMOVAL – BLASTING METHOD

A. Obtain a seismic survey at the commencement of rock excavation to determine maximum charges that can be used at different locations in area of excavation without damaging adjacent properties or other work.

B. Notify police and fire departments of blasting time schedule.

C. Designate and clear a danger area prior to each blast, and do not store explosives, caps, detonators, or fuses on site during non-working hours.

D. Blasting is to be performed only during the period of 10:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.

E. If, while blasting in the vicinity of utilities, roads, or buildings, the Owner requires additional supervision or monitoring, all such costs shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

F. Blasting shall occur only when a representative of the Engineer is present to witness each blast.

G. Prior to rock blasting, the overburden shall be removed.

H. Cover all shots with blasting mats to prevent flying material.

I. Contractor shall blast an additional 5 feet beyond proposed ends of service lines, stub lines, and dead-end manholes.

J. Provide required signs and signals that are clearly posted to designate areas in which blasting may occur including clear designation of any danger areas. Contractor shall post all required signs, which detail audible warning signals used prior to and after each blast. These signs shall be posted on neighboring streets and in both directions of travel, prior to blasting in that area and shall be relocated as needed to follow course of blasting activity.

K. Contractor shall make audible warning notifications to each blast and audible notification of all clear following each blast as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.909 subpart U, Table U-1, as follows:

Purpose of Signal Blast Sound


Purpose of Signal Blast Sound

Warning Signal 1-minute series of long blasts 5

minutes prior to blast signal.

Blast Signal Series of short blasts 1-minute

prior to the shot.

All Clear Signal Prolonged blast following the

inspection of blast area.

L. Contractor shall send a representative to each structure in the area immediately adjacent to the blast site to notify inhabitants before each blast is detonated.

M. Blasting shall be done with explosives of such quantity and power, and fired in such sequence and locations, as will not injure personnel, damage or crack rock against which concrete is to be placed, damage property, or damage portions of new work.

3.08 PRE-SPLITTING ROCK

A. Pre-split at the designated slope lines, all rock formations within excavation limits that are conducive to excavation by drilling and blasting except where line drilling is indicated on the excavation drawings. Perform pre-splitting before blasting and excavating the interior of the specified cross section at any particular location.

B. Pre-splitting to obtain smooth faces in the rock formations shall be performed by drilling holes at uniform intervals of between 2 feet and 4 feet. All pre-split holes should be detonated simultaneously. Adjust the intervals of the drill holes, as deemed necessary, within the specified range in order to obtain the smoothest faces possible.

C. When accurate drilling can be maintained, the holes for pre-splitting may be drilled to the specified full depth of the excavation to the specified bench elevations. No pre-split holes shall deviate from the intended plans of pre-splitting by more than 9 inches in any direction. For depths that are to be drilled with more than one lift of holes, each additional lift of holes may be offset a distance of 1 foot per lift outside the designated slope lines to allow for the proper positioning of the drilling equipment in subsequent lifts. The Contractor shall begin the pre-splitting taking any later offsets into account. No payment will be allowed for any extra material excavated because of the drill holes being offset outside the designated slope lines.

D. Charge the holes with explosives of a size, kind, and strength and at spacing suitable for the formations being pre-split, and do so with stemming material that passes a 3/8-inch standard sieve and that has the qualities necessary for proper confinement of the explosives.

E. The Engineer may order discontinuance of the pre-splitting when he has determined that the materials encountered have become unsuitable for being pre-split.

F. Locate holes drilled for blasting the interior of the cross sections 3 feet or more from the pre-split faces, charge with proper quantity of explosives so as not to damage the pre-split faces, and detonate separately from the pre-splitting charges. The use of time-delay or caps will be considered separate detonation.

3.09 SEISMIC MONITORING

A. Seismic monitoring shall be conducted by independent seismic consultant retained by Contractor.


B. Seismic monitoring shall utilize a three point monitoring system for each blasting operation.

1. A fixed mounted seismograph shall be located at closest structure throughout entire blasting, hole ramming and tunneling process.

2. In addition to closest seismograph, a second seismograph shall be located at the closest structure in general direction opposite from direction between blasting activity and closest structure.

3. A third seismograph shall be used to conduct vibration tests as needed and respond to any complaints that arise as a result of blasting operation.

3.10 BLASTING VIBRATION AND AIR BLAST LIMITS MONITORING

A. Contractor, at his cost, shall hire an independent seismograph company to record ground vibrations and air blast levels for each blast.

B. A blasting log shall be completed daily for every primary blast including results of ground vibrations and air concussion monitoring.

C. Report of Monitoring Results - Following each blast, Contractor shall immediately report measured ground vibrations and air blast (overpressure) to Engineer. In event seismic vibrations caused by Contractor’s operations approach established limits for this project, Contractor shall modify his blasting operations to reduce vibrations prior to his next blast. If seismic ground vibration and/or air blast (overpressure) attains or surpasses established limits, operations shall cease. Blasting shall not be resumed until measures have been taken to reduce produced vibrations and/or air blast (overpressure) below established limits.

D. Contractor shall be required to comply with blasting vibration limits established herein. Vibration limits shall be incorporated into Contractor’s blasting plan, as required. Blasting vibration and air blast limits shall apply to all vibrations produced by blasting, boring, hole ramming, or other mechanical vibration producing operations, as recorded by state of the art seismographs capable of monitoring and recording three mutually perpendicular components of peak particle velocity.

E. Contractor shall provide seismographic monitoring at a minimum of three blasting locations for vibrations, both ground and air blast (overpressure) produced as a result of construction activities and shall provide for a pre-blast condition survey of structures. Knowledgeable personnel shall be used to operate seismographs to insure that ground vibrations do not exceed legal limits or those established herein.

F. Seismograph vibration sensor shall be properly coupled with ground near foundation wall of structure on side of structure closest to blast. When other physical conditions limit this, sensor shall be similarly installed and oriented as close as possible to foundation wall of structure on closest side of structure closest to blast. Acoustical microphone shall be directed toward blast.

G. All blasting, boring, hole ramming, or other mechanical vibration producing activities shall be conducted so that peak particle velocity as recorded by seismograph shall be within following guidelines:

1. 1.75 inches per second or less peak particle velocity at nearest dwelling house, public building, school, church, in ground swimming pool, commercial or institutional building normally occupied and that is located 50 feet or less from blast.


2. 1.50 inches per second or less peak particle velocity at nearest dwelling house, public building, school, church, in ground swimming pool, commercial or institutional building normally occupied and that is located between 51 feet and 100 feet from blast.

3. 1.25 inches per second or less peak particle velocity at nearest dwelling house, public building, school, church, in ground swimming pool, commercial or institutional building normally occupied and that is located between 101 feet and 150 feet from blast.

4. 1.00 inches per second or less peak particle velocity at nearest dwelling house, public building, school, church, in ground swimming pool, commercial or institutional building normally occupied and that is located greater than 150 feet from blast.

5. All blasting conducted in and around existing pipelines shall comply with special provisions for such blasting as defined by TCA Section 68-105 as currently enacted with all additions and amendments.

6. Lesser limits on blasting vibration shall be adhered to as specified for blasting near fragile or distressed buildings as may be indicated by any pre-blast survey.

7. If blast induced ground vibrations exceed the limits for maximum peak particle velocity, then alternative rock excavation techniques shall be implemented by Contractor. All non-explosive methods of rock excavation are subject to approval by Engineer.

H. All blasting, boring, hole ramming, or other mechanical vibration producing activities shall be conducted so air blast levels at any normally occupied structure shall not exceed 128 decibels peak and shall not exceed 136 decibels peak at any normally uninhabited structures when measured by an instrument having a flat or linear response scale.

I. Contractor shall cooperate in adjusting his blasting plan and procedures to maintain the vibration limits specified herein and to minimize vibration-related claims and complaints.

J. All vibration monitoring instrumentation shall comply with following characteristics:

1. Measure, display, and provide a permanent record on a strip chart of particle velocity components.

2. Measure three mutually perpendicular components of particle velocity in directions vertical, radial, and perpendicular to vibration source.

3. Instruments shall have a flat frequency response between 2 and 250 Hz for particle velocity and from 2 to 200 Hz for air overpressure.

4. All equipment shall display date of most recent calibration.

5. Calibration must have been performed within last 12 months and must be performed to a standard traceable to National Bureau of Standards or equipment shall be capable of performing a self-calibration check.

6. All air blast (overpressure) measurements taken shall be linear scale

3.11 POST-BLASTING SURVEY

A. Upon completion of all earth/rock excavation and blasting work, the Contractor shall conduct a post-blast survey of any properties, structures, and conditions where complaints of damage have been received or damage claims have been filed.


B. Notice shall be given to all interested parties so that they may be present during the final examination.

C. Records of the final examination shall be distributed the same as the original pre-blast condition survey.

3.12 CLAIMED DAMAGE FROM USE OF EXPLOSIVES

A. Contractor shall immediately inform Engineer and Owner orally and in writing of all matters concerning damage complaints received by Contractor but in no case more than 24 hours after receipt of such complains. In event that Contractor causes damage, injury or interference as stated herein, Contractor shall modify his blasting procedures to prevent a reoccurrence of damage.

B. Fire marshal shall also be notified of all complaints and shall immediately be notified of any investigations, hearing or orders received from any governmental agency, board, or body claiming to have authority to regulate blasting operations.

C. Such reports shall include name, address, date, time received, date and time of blast complained about, and a brief description of alleged damages or other circumstances upon which complaint is predicated. Each complaint shall be assigned a separate number, and all complaints shall be numbered consecutively in order of receipt. In event that more than one complaint is received from same complainant, such later complaint shall show all previous complaint numbers registered by same complainant. When a settlement of a claim is made, notification shall be made to Owner and Engineer. Engineer shall be notified immediately, throughout statutory period of liability, of any informal claims or demands made by attorneys on behalf of claimants, of serving of any notice, summons, subpoena, or other legal documents incidental to litigation; and of any out-of-court settlement or court verdicts resulting from litigation.

D. Contractor shall immediately inform Engineer and Owner both orally and in writing if fly rock occurs as a result from any blast.

E. Contractor shall perform proper notifications as required to comply with accident reporting requirements as specified by TCA Section 68-105 as currently enacted with all additions and amendments.

F. Contractor hereby assumes all liability for all personal injury, any damage to real or personal property by reason of blasting or resulting vibration or air concussion. Contractor assumes full responsibility for operating all equipment and performing all blasting in conformance with Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and ordinances prescribed by any other Governmental authority limiting amount of vibration or air concussion.


A. Provide for Engineer’s inspection of foundation bearing surfaces and cavities formed by removed rock.

B. Contractor shall avoid unnecessary overexcavation of bedrock. Overexcavation shall be corrected in the manner described in this Section and Section 31 23 16.

3.14 OVERBLAST

A. Where Contractor’s means and methods results in rock that is overblasted, proceed as follows:


1. For structures bearing directly on bedrock, dress top of rock to underside of structure with Fill Concrete as specified in 03 31 00.

2. For structures bearing on compacted fill above bedrock, fill overblasted areas with additional compacted backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 23.

B. Contractor shall not be compensated for any overblasting or overblasting repairs, including additional backfill and paving that may be necessary.

3.15 OVERLAND AND CREEK CROSSING OPEN DITCH LINE BLASTING

A. Maximum blast size shall be limited to 40 feet of linear ditch line.

B. No more than one hole shall be on any one-delay period.

C. Excavation to free face of trench depth to pipe sub-grade depth shall be performed as needed prior to each blast in order to relieve confinement of previously blasted material, so as to reduce blasting vibrations to nearby structures in order to comply with vibration specifications. When excavation is performed overburden shall be replaced at the free face as required to supplement required matting specified herein in order to prevent fly rock.

D. At a minimum, two layers of blasting mats shall be used to cover each open cut trench line blast. Blast itself, open or free face of the ditch line, and surrounding areas shall be covered in their entirety. Matting shall overlap area around blast and open or free face of ditch line by a minimum of five feet from ditch line perimeter blast holes.

E. Blast hole size shall be limited to 3 inches or smaller for loading diameter. If casing is required, blast hole portion of hole and subsequent loading diameter shall be limited to 3 inches diameters or less.

F. All blasting conducted in and around existing pipelines shall comply with special provisions for such blasting as defined by TCA Section 68-105 as currently enacted with all additions and amendments.

G. At any time should a lightning storm be an imminent danger and a blast be in wait of next blast window to be detonated then that blast shall be properly detonated prior to window. If during the preparation and matting of a blast, a blasting mat breaks a wire and shot cannot be readied in time for blast window Contractor shall wait until next blast window to detonate blast. If a wire break occurs in conjunction with last window of day shot shall be readied and fired as soon as possible.

3.16 SECONDARY BLASTING (POP SHOTS)

A. Secondary blasting shall be used to remove rock pinnacles, speed bumps, ledges, that were not adequately fractured by production blasting.

B. No more than one blast hole shall be on any one-delay period.

C. Secondary charge blasting shall be used within 10 feet of any existing sewer line.

D. At a minimum, two layers of blasting mats shall be used to cover each Secondary charge blast. Blast itself and all surrounding areas shall be covered in its entirety as required to prevent any fly rock. Matting shall overlap area around blast and open or free face of the ditch line by a minimum of five feet from outer most blast holes. Overburden shall be replaced as needed at free face as required to supplement required matting in order to prevent fly rock.


E. No more than three pounds maximum per delay period shall be used for Secondary charge blasting and pounds of explosive per delay shall be selected in order to break necessary rock and produce minimum vibration and air blast.

F. At any time should a lightning storm be an imminent danger and a blast be in wait of next blast window to be detonated then that blast shall be properly detonated prior to window. If during the preparation and matting of a blast, a blasting mat breaks a wire and shot cannot be readied in time for blast window Contractor shall wait until next blast window to detonate blast. If a wire break occurs in conjunction with last window of day shot shall be readied and fired as soon as possible.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 31 23 19

REMOVAL OF WATER

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Providing equipment, materials and labor required to successfully complete the work included in this Section.

2. Maintaining and operating pumps and related equipment, including standby equipment, of sufficient capacity to adequately perform dewatering as required by this Section.

3. Lowering the groundwater table elevation.

4. Intercepting seepage from excavation slopes.

5. Controlling groundwater flow that may adversely affect excavation or construction activities.

6. Collecting, removing and disposing of all excess groundwater.

7. Collecting, removing, and disposing of all sanitary sewage.

8. Removing and/or disposing of spoil, excess materials, equipment, trash and debris used for or resulting from the work included in this Section.









A. Conform to applicable local and state codes for legal disposal of water.

B. Temporary water supplies shall meet requirements of local, state and federal regulatory agencies.

C. Conform to applicable Federal OSHA and Tennessee TOSHA standards.


1.03 WELLPOINT DEWATERING SYSTEM

A. If wellpoint dewatering methods are proposed by Contractor, he shall prepare a plan of dewatering system and discuss plan with Owner and Engineer. Review or comments by Owner and Engineer concerning the proposed plan shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibilities for dewatering his excavations in conformance with this Section of the Specifications.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Review the subsurface investigation report, if available, and conduct appropriate investigations and become familiar with the groundwater conditions at the site. Allocate sufficient time and use appropriate procedures based on these conditions for dewatering excavations.

B. Arrange for water sampling and analysis of each water supply source which may be affected by dewatering operations and submit a copy of the results to the Engineer.

C. Examine adjacent structures and utilities, both existing and under construction, for possible settlement, movement or other adverse effects resulting from dewatering methods or water removal. Take necessary precautionary steps to protect such structures and utilities both from water accumulation and water removal.

D. Should the drawdown of groundwater levels by removal or dewatering systems critically reduce or disrupt public or private water supplies, the Contractor shall be prepared to:

1. Provide adequate potable water to the Owners or users of the affected water supplies until groundwater levels have recovered, so as to sufficiently restore those deficient water supplies.

2. Provide to the Engineer documentation to confirm that temporary water supplies meet the requirements of Local, State and Federal Regulatory Agencies.

3.02 REMOVAL OF WATER

A. Contractor shall take all necessary measures to keep excavations clear of ground water, sewage or storm water during the process of the work and until the finished work is safe from injury.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for site, surface and subsurface drainage. Maintain such drainage as specified herein during the life of the contract.

C. Supply all supervision, labor, material, equipment, including standby equipment, necessary to maintain a dry excavation as may be necessary to construct the project.

D. Maintain groundwater in or below the bearing strata at a safe level at all times by methods which prevent loss of fines, which preserves the undisturbed state of subgrade soils and which sufficiently lowers the groundwater level in permeable strata at or below excavation and fill


levels such that blowing or unstable conditions do not develop in the bottom or sides of excavation or fill areas.

E. Water shall be kept out of exaction areas as necessary to protect the supporting strength of foundation material, to permit efficient and satisfactory assembly or replacement of facilities, to prevent floatation of equipment or structures, to prevent misalignment of facilities, and to prevent unstable conditions developing in the bottom or sides of excavation areas.

F. Protect all adjacent structures, existing and under construction, from settlement, flotation, damage or other adverse effects resulting from accumulation of water, water removal or dewatering methods.

G. Install all drains, ditching, sluiceways, pumping and bailing equipment, wicking, sumps, wells, well points, cutoff trenches, curtains, sheeting, drains, and all other equipment and structures necessary to create and maintain a dry excavation and a groundwater level at a minimum of 2 feet below excavation subgrades.

1. As part of any dewatering system, observation wells or piezometers shall be provided and installed, as required, to effectively and efficiently monitor drawdown to required levels.

H. Discharge water removed from the site to natural watercourses, storm drains or channels.

1. Disposal of water shall be in a manner satisfactory to Engineer and Owner and in conformance with all Federal, State, and local rules, regulations, codes, and permits.

2. Disposal of water shall cause no damage to property or any work under construction or constructed.

3. Large quantities of water shall not be discharged as overland flow. Overland flow is not permitted onto private property.

4. No water shall be discharged to sanitary sewers.

5. Sanitary sewage shall be disposed of in a manner satisfactory to local, state, and federal officials.

I. Dewatering operations shall cease when all foundations, structures, pipe installations and other excavated areas have been properly backfilled and compacted, and are safe from damage, flotation, settlement, displacement, or other injury.

J. No pipe shall be laid in water, and water shall not be allowed to run over masonry until concrete or mortar has set at least forty-eight (48) hours.

K. Necessary precautions shall be taken to protect all new and existing structures against flooding and/or floatation from hydrostatic uplift.

L. Dewatering of the excavation shall be considered an integral part of the excavation work, and therefore shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.03 MAINTENANCE

A. Operate and maintain dewatering and removal operations on a 24-hour basis for the time required to complete that portion of the Work which requires dewatering prior to its construction and which requires protection from flotation or displacement of such Work until proper backfilling and compaction is completed.


B. Corrective work required as a result of Contractor failing, refusing, or neglecting to maintain a dry excavation or otherwise dewater a work area shall be performed at no additional cost to the owner.

3.04 REMOVAL

A. After groundwater levels have returned to elevations appropriate for conditions and time of year, without causing damage to the work, remove all dewatering equipment and related equipment from the site and restore site to original conditions or rehabilitate site to meet requirements of Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 31 23 23

BEDDING, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Materials authorized for use for backfilling.

2. Pipe foundations and bedding.

3. Trench backfilling.

4. Filling and backfilling around and under structures.

5. Compaction for piping, foundations and other structures.

6. Compaction test methods.

7. Removal or reuse of excavated materials.







6. Section 31 23 17 – Rock Removal


8. Section 31 50 00 – Sheeting and Bracing


10. Section 32 12 00 – Asphalt Concrete Paving

11. Section 32 90 00 – Site Restoration

12. Section 33 11 00 – Piping

13. Section 33 12 00 – Valves


1.02 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the stricter of the two shall apply as determined by the Engineer.

Reference Title

Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction

Standard Material Specifications for gravel, sand, crushed stone and gravel-cement mixtures published by the Tennessee Department of Transportation.

ASTM C136 Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM D698 Laboratory Compaction of Soil Using Standard Effort

ASTM D1556 Density of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D1557 Laboratory Compaction of Soil Using Modified Effort

ASTM D2922 Density of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods

ASTM D3017 Water Content of Soil in Place by Nuclear Methods

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

TOSHA Tennessee Occupational Safety and Health Administration

1.03 PRECAUTIONS

A. Contractor shall take all necessary steps and precautions, including those outlined in these Contract Documents, to notify owners of utilities and identify utilities within the construction area or those that might be disturbed by work activities, protect all features of the site that are to remain, and protect bench marks and survey points.

B. Refer to Sections 01 76 00 and 31 23 16 for more specific details on precautions to be taken to protect life and property.


A. Contractor shall adopt compaction methods which will produce the degree of compaction specified herein, prevent subsequent settlement, and provide adequate support for the surface treatment, pavement, structure and piping to be placed thereon, or therein, without damage to the new or existing facilities.

B. Natural subgrade for all footing, mats, slabs-on-grade for structures or pipes shall consist of firm undisturbed natural soil.

C. After excavation to subgrade is completed, the subgrade shall be compacted if it consists of loose granular soil or if its surface is disturbed by the teeth of excavating equipment.

1. This compaction shall be limited to that required to compact loose surface material and shall be terminated in the event that it causes disturbance to underlying fine-grained soils, as revealed by weaving or deflection of the subgrade under the compaction equipment.

2. If the subgrade soils consist of saturated fine or silty sands, silts, or clay or varved clays, no compaction shall be applied.


D. Testing – Contractor shall provide laboratory to conduct testing required by this Section at his expense in accordance with Section 01 45 29. Contractor shall cooperate fully with the testing laboratory performing sampling and testing required herein. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory a minimum of 48 hours in advance of when work is to be in progress.

1.05 ADJUSTMENT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Additional excavating and backfilling performed at the written direction of Engineer below or beyond the lines and grades shown or specified will be paid for at the appropriate adjustment prices included in the Contract or if not included, at a price mutually agreed upon by Owner and Contractor, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Restrict measurement for excavating and backfilling to quantities included inside of lines and grades given, and measured to underside of structures, or as shown otherwise, and within vertical planes passing 24 inches outside outer line of footings. Payment will not be made for over-excavated Work nor for replacement materials.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Materials required for filling, backfilling, subbase and other purposes shall be as shown on Contract Drawings, specified herein, or as ordered by Engineer. Prior to bidding, Contractor shall familiarize himself with available quantities of acceptable on-site and off-site materials.

B. For all materials proposed, notify Engineer of source of material (whether on-site or off-site) and furnish to Engineer a certified gradation analysis clearly describing particle sizes and other testing data necessary to demonstrate full compliance with Contract Documents. Analysis shall be provided to Engineer at least 10 calendar days prior to anticipated use of proposed material. Only off-site approved materials shall be utilized unless Contractor demonstrates to satisfaction of Engineer that on-site material meets specified requirements. Contractor shall, at his own expense, engage an approved testing laboratory to perform such testing, and submit certified test results to the Engineer. If similar tests of material from a particular source were performed previously, submit results of these tests to Engineer for consideration (test data must be dated within one year of anticipated use). Should any on-site material fail to compact to required levels, on-site material shall be re-excavated, disposed of properly, and replaced with approved off-site material at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Engineer reserves right to inspect proposed source of all materials and to order such tests of materials as he deems necessary to ascertain its quality and gradation of particle size. Any additional testing required for approval of material by Engineer shall be at Contractor’s expense.

D. No materials shall be used on this project for fill, backfill, subbase, or other purpose until Contractor demonstrates to satisfaction of Engineer that proposed materials meet requirements of Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be hard and durable.

B. Materials shall be free from organic matter, asphalt, trash, shale, debris, snow, ice and other frozen or mechanically deleterious material.


C. Materials shall meet the specified gradation requirements.

D. Unless otherwise specified, crushed stone shall be composed of limestone pieces, chips, and fines.

E. Materials shall meet the most recent specified Tennessee Department of Transportation (TDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction requirements.

F. For Structures

1. Topsoil

a. Earth containing minimum 6 percent organic material which is capable of supporting vegetation planned for this project and in accordance with Section 32 90 00.

2. Granular Fill

a. Crushed stone conforming to ASTM D448 Size No. 57, Type A.

b. Selected shot rock shall be reasonably well graded and free of fines with maximum fragment size of 6 inches.

3. Earth Fill

a. Clean earth, free from organic material, rubbish, cinders, ice, and rocks over 2 inches in their longest dimension, consisting of either low plasticity clay having a plasticity index of less than 25, or a cohesionless soil with less than 15 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. Existing on-site allurial soils consisting of silty clay or clayey silt with liquid limit less than 50 and P.I. less than 25 may be used. Contractor, at his cost, shall provide to Engineer for review and acceptance necessary test results showing compliance with these requirements and others stipulated in the Contract Documents prior to use of on-site materials.

b. Alternate earth fill shall be "Crusher Run" conforming to Tennessee Department of Transportation Standard Specification for mineral aggregate base, "C" or "D" grading.

c. On-site earth removed during cutting operations or off-site borrow material may be used, subject to meeting the specifications noted above and approval of the Owner and Engineer.

4. Off-Site Borrow

a. Off-site borrow material to be used for fill and backfill shall meet the requirements of this Section. Contractor, at his cost, shall provide necessary test results showing compliance prior to use to Engineer for approval.

G. For Underground Piping

1. Outside Roadway

a. Bedding

1) Dry earth trench excavation –


a) Plastic Pressure Pipe and Gravity Sewers – TDOT Section 903 Type "A" aggregate No. 67 aggregate.

b) Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe –TDOT Section 903 Type "A" aggregate No. 67 aggregate.

2) Wet trench excavation – TDOT Section 903 Type "A" No. 57 aggregate

3) Rock trench excavation – TDOT Section 903 Type "A" aggregate No. 57 or 67 aggregate.

b. Backfill

1) General Earth – Sound, loose earth containing optimum moisture content for compaction as indicated herein, free from all wood, vegetable matter, debris, and other objectionable material, and having scattered clods, stones, or broken concrete and pavement less than 6 inches in maximum dimension.

2. Inside Roadway

a. Bedding and Backfill – TDOT Section 903 Type "A" No. 57 aggregate.

3. Unstable Soils

a. Bedding and Backfill – TDOT Section 903 Type “A” No. 67 aggregate.

H. For Asphalt and Concrete Pavement – Granular Fill

1. See Section 32 11 00.

I. Fill Concrete

1. TDOT Class “B”.

2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 3,000 psi.

3. Concrete shall not contain less than 550 pounds of cement per cubic yard.

4. Refer to Section 03 31 00.

5. Use when over-excavation has occurred due to error or because soft spots were encountered.

J. Pug Mix Base Stone – Mineral aggregate base per the requirements of TDOT Section 303, Grading D, for Type A base and Class A aggregate.

K. Other Materials – All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer.

L. Unsuitable Material – Shale, weathered shale, and other unsuitable materials shall not be used for fill and/or backfill material, and shall be disposed of off-site in accordance with Section 31 11 00.

M. Geotextile Fabric:


1. Piping Applications – Woven – Mirafi 500X by Tencate, or equal.

2. Structural Applications – Non-Woven – Geotex 451 by Propex, Mirafi 140N by Tencate, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION BEFORE BACKFILLING

A. Verify fill materials to be used are acceptable and approved by Engineer.

B. Verify that all subsurface installations for the project have been inspected and are ready for backfilling.

C. Verify that foundation walls are properly shored and braced to withstand lateral soil pressures created when backfilled material is placed against such walls.

D. Verify that underground tanks are anchored to their own foundation to avoid flotation after backfilling.

3.02 PREPARATION BEFORE BACKFILLING

A. Install barriers and other devices to protect areas adjacent to construction.

B. Protect and maintain all benchmarks and other survey points.

C. Perform excavations and trenching in conformance with Section 31 23 16.

D. Generally, compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.

E. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of in situ compaction. Backfill these areas with 1 to 2 inch stone except that the last 6 to 12 inches (refer to Drawing details for thickness) shall be No. 67 crushed stone as defined in Section 903 of the latest Tennessee Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Compact these areas to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.

1. When unstable soil conditions are caused by Contractor’s failure or neglect to properly handle groundwater or protect against entrance of water into excavation, Contractor shall remove and replace unstable material at no additional cost to Owner.

F. Inspect spaces to be backfilled and remove all unsuitable materials including sheeting, bracing, forms and debris prior to commencing backfilling operations as required.

G. Method of backfilling shall not disturb or damage adjacent walls, drainage systems, damp-proofing, waterproofing, protective coverings, utilities in trenches, underground conduits or tanks.

3.03 BACKFILLING – GENERAL

A. Backfilling shall be started as soon as practicable and after structures or pipe installations have been completed and inspected, concrete has acquired a suitable degree of strength, and subgrade waterproofing materials have been in place for at least 48 hours. Backfilling shall be


carried on expeditiously thereafter. Backfill shall be started at the lowest section of the area to be backfilled. Natural drainage shall not be obstructed at any time.

B. Backfilling Prior to Approval – Contractor shall advise Engineer and Testing Laboratory, whether Owner’s or Contractor’s as required by Section 01 45 29, before beginning any backfill and shall allow ample time for inspection. Where any portion of the work is backfilled prior to inspection and approval, Contractor may be required to uncover the work for inspection at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Backfill spaces shall be inspected prior to backfilling operations and all unsuitable materials, including sheeting, bracing forms and debris, shall be removed. No backfill shall be placed against foundation walls on structural members unless they are properly shored and braced or of sufficient strengths to withstand lateral soil pressures.

D. If sufficient materials are not available from excavations, or the excavated material is unsuitable for backfill, Contractor shall bring in off-site materials. All fill material shall be subject to the approval of Engineer.

E. Backfill material shall be inspected prior to placement and all roots, vegetation, organic matter, or other foreign debris shall be removed. Stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension shall be removed or broken. Stones shall not be allowed to form clusters with voids.

F. Backfill material shall not be placed when moisture content is more than two percent above optimum or is otherwise too high to allow proper compaction. When material is too dry for adequate compaction, water shall be added to the extent necessary.

G. Do not start until fill material, fill areas, and equipment to be used in performing the work have been approved by Engineer and all foreign materials have been removed.

H. Before compacted fill is placed, the excavated areas shall be proof rolled with a 20-ton pneumatic tire roller or loaded dump truck to determine if any soft spots exist. If soft spots are found, they shall be excavated and be replaced with compacted fill as directed by Engineer.

I. Contractor shall fill all voids or holes in the trench wall that later could lead to trench settlement.

J. Backfill all areas to required contours, grades and elevations with unfrozen materials. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. No calcium chloride or other chemicals shall be added to prevent freezing.

K. Backfill behind walls and around structures shall be granular fill as specified below:

1. Granular fill material, Size No. 57 crushed stone per ASTM D448 to the dimensions indicated on the Contract Drawings or at a minimum width at base of footing or bottom of wall plus 1 foot and proceeding upwards at a slope of 2 vertical for every 1 horizontal to within 1 foot below final grade; remaining 1 foot of fill to final grade shall be earth fill or other materials as may be required given final grade conditions. Backfill beyond the specified envelope of No. 57 stone shall be earth fill.

2. Fill material shall be placed in maximum 8 inches thick loose lifts and consolidated until material is densified and stable using bulldozer, roller, vibratory tamping using a vibratory plate or sled, or equivalent equipment. Fill and backfill in other areas shall be earth fill material unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents compacted as specified herein.


L. Before placing compacted fills, the existing subgrade, after removal of topsoil, shall be benched so that the slope of the subgrade does not exceed five (5) feet per 100 feet unless sheeting, shoring, and bracing is utilized.

M. Loosen top two inches of existing soil just before placing earth fills.

N. Do not place fill in water, on muddy, frozen, or frost areas or other debris, wood, or foreign material.

O. Place all earth fills and backfills in 8-inch maximum when compacted, horizontal layers. Perform this work when soil moisture will permit proper compaction or when the addition of water by spraying will approach optimum conditions.

P. Compact earth fills and backfills as required by this Section.

Q. Crusher run used for fill or backfill is to be compacted in layers to the minimum densities required by this Section. Crusher run fill is to be treated same as for earth fill.

R. Install geotextile fabric prior to placing backfill and at completion of backfill as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as required herein.

S. Ruts or holes from construction equipment shall be graded smooth.

T. Fills shall be shaped to provide natural drainage and shall be sealed at the end of each day's work or when precipitation is likely.

U. Surfaces of new subgrades shall be left clean.

V. Sealed fills shall be scarified before placing the next layer of fill.

W. Backfill operations adjacent to concrete walls shall not commence until all forms and debris have been removed and footing drains, waterproofing, damp-proofing, and exterior wall construction have been examined and approved by the Engineer and successful hydrostatic testing of watertight structures has been completed..

X. Contractor shall use precaution in backfilling against walls to prevent damage to waterproofing.

Y. Backfill or fill to be placed against concrete walls shall not be started until the concrete has been cured as per Division 03. Motorized equipment shall not be used closer to the structure than the lesser of the structures depth below grade or 8 feet. In these areas, hand operated motorized equipment shall be used. Backfill around tanks shall not commence until tanks have been hydrostatically tested, tanks are structurally sound to receive such backfill, and Engineer has approved commencement of backfilling.

Z. Where fill is to be placed on both sides of a grade wall, the fill shall be placed in layers alternating on each side of the wall. The concrete shall have been cured for at least 7 days during which the average air temperature has been above 50 degrees Fahrenheit or when test cylinders show a compressive strength of seventy-five (75) percent 28-day strength.

AA. Where fill is to be placed on one side of a wall only, the fill shall not be placed until the concrete has obtained full design strength. When temporary shores are required to support the wall until the permanent structural support has been constructed, they shall be provided by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.


BB. Backfilling around pipes shall be carried out simultaneously on both side of pipe in such a manner that prevents damage to the pipe.

CC. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls.

DD. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.

EE. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet unless noted otherwise.

FF. Rough grade all backfilled and filled areas to meet subsequent topsoiling or paving requirements. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.

GG. Remove surplus backfill materials from site in compliance with Section 31 11 00.

HH. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.

II. Material incorporated in the backfilling operation which is not in satisfactory condition shall be subject to rejection and removal at the Contractor’s expense.

JJ. If the Contractor fails to stockpile and protect on-site excavated material acceptable for backfill, then the Contractor shall provide an equal quantity of acceptable off-site material at no expense to the Owner.

KK. Crevices and void slots in bedrock at subgrade levels shall be filled with grout or Fill Concrete. Soil seams in bedrock at subgrade level shall be over-excavated and backfilled with Fill Concrete.

LL. If pipe, conduit, duct bank, or cable is to be laid within fill or backfill:

1. Fill or backfill to an elevation 2 feet above top of item to be laid.

2. Excavate trench for installation of item.

3. Install bedding, if applicable.

4. Install item.

5. Backfill remaining trench, as specified herein before resuming filling or backfilling area.

3.04 PIPE BEDDING

A. All pipes, fittings or specials which are to be installed in open trench excavations shall be properly bedded in, and uniformly supported on pipe foundations of the various types specified herein and shown on the Drawings. Flat-bottom trenches of required width shall be excavated to the necessary depth and maintained in accordance with this section prior to installing the foundation. Trenches shall be dewatered and all work performed in a dry trench.

1. Required depth of trench below pipe shall be as shown in the following table:


Nominal Pipe Diameter (inches)

Depth Between Bottom of Pipe and Bottom of Normal Pipe Foundation

(inches)

4 6

6 8

8 8

10 8

12 8

14 8

15 8

18 8

20 8

21 8

24 8

27 12

30 12

36 12

42 12

48 12

54 12

60 12

B. Bedding material shall be spread in maximum of 8-inch layers until the minimum required total depth of the bedding has been built up above the pipe. Compaction shall be in accordance with this Section. The Contractor shall perform his bedding operations with care to maintain line and grade. When PVC, plastic or polyethylene pipe is used, do not compact directly over pipe until the depth of backfill has reached 2 feet above the top of the pipe.

C. Type I – Normal Soil Conditions - Unless shown otherwise in the Drawings, all pipe shall be supported on Type I foundation. The trench shall be excavated below the depth of the pipe, depending on the diameter of the pipe. No. 57 or No. 67 aggregate, depending on the location of the pipe as described above, shall be furnished, placed and compacted in the trench for its full width such that, after the pipe has been uniformly bedded in this material, the required minimum depth of aggregate remains between pipe and undisturbed trench bottom. Suitable holes shall be provided in the trench bottom to permit adequate bedding of bells, couplings, or similar projections. The aggregate shall extend upward to a point 12 inches over the top of the pipe. Width of pipe foundation shall be outside diameter of pipe plus 2-3 feet as shown on Drawings.

D. Type II - Moderately Unstable Soil Conditions - When specifically called for on the Drawings, or when ordered by the Engineer, the pipe shall be supported on Type II foundation. The foundation shall be installed where a suitable supporting soil or rock stratum occurs within two feet, more or less of the bottom of the pipe. The trench shall be excavated to the depth necessary to reach the suitable supporting stratum. No. 57 or No. 67 aggregate, depending on the location of the pipe as described above, shall then be furnished and placed in the trench for


its full width. The material shall be spread in 8-inch layers, and each layer shall be compacted. The pipe foundation material to be supported on Type VII foundation, geotextile fabric foundation. Suitable holes shall be provided in the trench bottom to permit adequate bedding of bells, couplings, or similar projections. The aggregate shall extend upward to a point 12 inches over the top of the pipe. Width of pipe foundation shall be outside diameter of pipe plus 2-3 feet as shown on Drawings.

E. Type III - Unstable Soil Conditions - When specifically called for on the Drawings, or when ordered by the Engineer, or required by the governing authority having jurisdiction over the work the pipe shall be supported on Type III foundation. The foundation shall be installed where no suitable supporting soil or rock stratum exists within two feet of the bottom of the pipe. The trench shall be excavated two feet deeper then the bottom of the pipe. Each side of the trench shall be supported and maintained by a permanent system of tight, continuous sheeting (and bracing) which shall be driven below the trench bottom a minimum of 12 inches and shall extend to an elevation of at least 12 inches above the top of the pipe. Minimum plank size to be 2-inch x 12-inch tongue and groove per Section 31 50 00. No. 57 aggregate shall then be furnished and placed in the trench for its full width, and to a depth of 8 inches. The pipe foundation material to be supported on a Type VII Foundation, Geotextile Fabric Foundation. No. 3 aggregate meeting TDOT specifications shall then be furnished and placed in the trench for its full width. All material shall be spread in layers and each layer shall be compacted until their respective total depths have been built up as required. No. 3 aggregate depth shall extend a distance of 12 inches from the top of the No. 57 aggregate up to an elevation 6 or 12 inches below the bottom of the pipe, depending upon the pipe diameter. No. 57 or No. 67 aggregate, depending on the location of the pipe as described above, shall then be furnished, placed in 8-inch layers and compacted on top of the No. 3 aggregate in the trench for its full width such that, after the pipe has been uniformly bedded in this material, the required minimum depth of aggregate remains between pipe and No. 3 aggregate. Suitable holes shall be provided in the trench bottom to permit adequate bedding of bells, couplings, or similar projections. The aggregate shall extend upward to a point 12 inches over the top of the pipe. Width of pipe foundation shall be outside diameter of pipe plus 2 feet. All installed sheeting below an elevation established at 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall be left in place and undisturbed. Only the cross struts and whalers shall be gradually removed as construction proceeds.

F. Type IV - Reinforced Concrete Encasement - When specifically called for on the Drawings or the Specifications, or when ordered by the Engineer or required by the governing authority having jurisdiction over the work, the pipe shall be supported on Type IV foundation. The trench shall be excavated to a depth below the bottom of the pipe equal to one-quarter of the inside diameter of the pipe or 6 inches, whichever is greater. The excavated space shall then be completely filled with, and the entire pipe encased in, concrete such that the minimum concrete encasement at any point around the outside barrel of the pipe measures 6 inches thick. The total minimum width of the concrete encasement shall equal the outside diameter of the pipe plus 12 inches and such minimum width shall be constant for the entire length of the encasement. Concrete mix, formwork, reinforcing, curing, etc., shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 03. Freshly placed concrete shall be maintained free from groundwater and no backfilling of the trench shall begin until initial set has taken place, but not less than 3 hours has elapsed after the encasement has been cast. Backfill a depth of 12 inches over top of concrete before beginning compaction with mechanical equipment.

G. In the event an underground pipe is shown under a base slab, the pipe shall be encased in concrete for its entire length under the slab and within the base slab influence in accordance with details shown on the Drawings and the Type IV foundation described above. Where no detail is shown, encasement shall be formed to provide a minimum of 8 inches of concrete cover reinforced with No. 5 reinforcing bars spaced 12 inches each way. When the top of the pipe is within 12 inches of the bottom of the slab, the encasement shall be tied to the base slab


with reinforcing. The General Contractor shall be responsible for encasement of all pipes under slabs.

H. Type V - Concrete Cradle - When specifically called for on the Drawings or when ordered by the Engineer or required by the governing authority having jurisdiction over the work, the pipe shall be supported on Type V foundation. The foundation shall be furnished and installed equal to the Type IV foundation, “Concrete Encasement,” except that only that portion of the encasement at and below the horizontal diameter of the pipe shall be encased, forming a true cradle under the bottom half of the pipe. Maintain cradle free from groundwater for a period of 3 hours or until initial set has taken place. No. 57 or No. 67 aggregate, depending on the location of the pipe as described above, shall then be furnished, placed in 8-inch layers and compacted on top of the concrete cradle until the depth of the aggregate is 12 inches over the top of the pipe.

I. Type VI - Plain Concrete Encasement - When specifically called for on the Drawings, or when ordered by the Engineer or required by the governing authority having jurisdiction over the work, the pipe shall be supported on Type VI foundation. The foundation shall be furnished and installed equal to the Type IV foundation, “Reinforced Concrete Encasement,” except that no steel reinforcing is required. Maintain encasement free of groundwater for a period of 3 hours or until initial set has taken place.

J. Type VII - Geotextile Fabric Foundation - When specifically called for on the Drawings of these Specifications, or when ordered by the Engineer or required by the governing authority having jurisdiction over the work, the pipe foundation shall be supported on a geotextile fabric foundation. The fabric to be placed on the bottom of the excavated foundation and extend upwards to 12 inches above the pipe or the top of the aggregate bedding whichever is greater where it can then be placed flat with a minimum overlap of 6 inches. Longitudinal overlaps to be a minimum of 2 feet. Fabrics to be installed and stretched tight and have no wrinkles so that the fabric will be in tension when placing the pipe foundation material. Geotextile material shall be Mirafi Type 500X by Tencate; or equal.

K. Type VIII - Pressure Pipe Foundation

1. Pressure pipe foundations for rock trenches shall be Type I. All PVC or HDPE pressure pipe shall be have a Type I bedding regardless of whether the trench is in earth or rock.

2. Ductile iron pressure pipe foundations in earth shall conform to Type VIII requirements and shall be used only if specifically called for on Drawings or ordered by Engineer. Otherwise, Contractor shall install ductile iron pipe in a Type I bedding as specified herein unless site conditions require otherwise.

3. Pipe and fittings shall be laid on stable foundations, free from standing water, and trimmed to shape. Approved earth backfill material as described above, shall be used for pipe foundation unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. At the joints, enough depth and width shall be provided to permit the pipe layer to reach entirely around the pipe so that the joints may be made in a proper manner. Pipes shall have full bearing throughout their entire length, which shall be accomplished by shaping the bottom of the ditch so that suitable holes are provided to permit adequate bedding of bells, couplings, or similar projections or adequately tamping the backfill under the pipe in accordance with Minimum Compaction Requirements of this Section. When laid in tunnels, pipes shall be blocked in such a manner as to take the weight off the bells. Pipe laid in normal trench excavation shall not be laid on wood blocking. Mechanical type joints shall be tightened within the AWWA recommended torque range.


4. The following sources shall be reviewed by the Contractor for installation guidelines and requirements:

Pipe Material Sources

Ductile Iron AWWA Standard C600; Project Specification, Section 33 11 00; Project Drawings; manufacturer’s recommendations.

Gray Cast Iron AWWA Standard C600; Project Specification, Section 33 11 00; Project Drawings; manufacturer’s recommendations.

PVC Pipe ASTM Standard D2321; Project Specification, Section 33 11 00; Project Drawings; manufacturer’s recommendations.

PE Pipe AWWA Standard C901, including Appendix A; ASTM D2774; Project Specification, Section 33 11 00; Project Drawings; manufacturer’s recommendations.

Prestressed

Concrete Pipe

Project Specification, Section 33 11 00; Project Drawings; manufacturer’s recommendations.

Copper Project Specification, Section 33 11 00; Project Drawings; manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, as a minimum, all pipe shall be backfilled to the springline, including hand tamping with T-bars, shovel slicing, and flatheads, and mechanically compacted and the remaining backfill placed in 8-inch lifts to 18 inches above the crown of the pipe in accordance with Minimum Compaction Requirements of this Section. Backfill material within 12 inches of the pipe shall be free of stones greater than 2 inches in any dimension. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the minimum total finished cover over the top of the pipe barrel of all pressure pipes shall be 36 inches.

L. Bedding requiring compaction shall be compacted as defined in this section.

M. Conform to Article 3.03 as applicable in bedding installation.

N. Always maintain proper grade and alignment during the bedding and tamping process. Any pipe dislodged during this process shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

3.05 INITIAL BACKFILLING OF PIPING

A. Conform to Article 3.03 as applicable.

B. Do not begin backfilling before the Engineer has inspected the grade and alignment of the pipe, the bedding of the pipe, and the joints between the pipe. If backfill material is placed over the pipe before an inspection is made, reopen the trench in order for an inspection to be made.

C. Perform backfilling by hand, together with tamping, until fill has progressed to 18 inches above the top of the pipe.

1. Deposit backfill material in layers approximately 8 inches thick.

2. Compact by hand, or with manually operated machine tampers actuated by compressed air or other suitable means.


3. Use tamps and machines of a suitable type which do not crush or otherwise damage the pipe.

3.06 FINAL BACKFILLING OF PIPING

A. Conform to Article 3.03 as applicable.

B. After the backfill has reached a point 18 inches or more above the top of the pipe, perform final backfilling depending upon the location of the work and danger from subsequent settlement.

C. Place all earth fills and backfills in 8-inch maximum when compacted, horizontal layers

D. Backfilling in unimproved areas.

1. Dispose of and replace all soft or yielding material which is unsuitable for trench backfilling with suitable material.

2. Deposit backfill to the surface of the ground by dragline, bulldozer, or other suitable equipment in such a manner so as not to disturb the pipe.

3. Compact soil as required in this Section.

4. Neatly round sufficient surplus excavated material over the trench to compensate for after settlement.

5. Dispose of all surplus excavated material in accordance with Section 31 11 00.

6. Maintain trench surface until completion of contract.

7. Prior to final acceptance, remove all mounds to the elevation of the surrounding terrain.

E. Backfilling beneath driveways, streets, alleys, and sidewalks where non-rigid and rigid type surfacing is to be replaced.

1. Conform to Section 32 11 00 where applicable and where requirements are more stringent than those indicated in this Section.

2. Carefully deposit backfill in uniform layers, not to exceed 8 inches thick.

3. Compact each layer thoroughly by rolling, ramming, and tamping with tools suitable for that purpose in such a manner so as to not disturb the pipe.

4. Flowable fill material shall be used only where indicated on the Drawings.

F. Backfilling of shoulders along streets and highways.


2. Backfilling methods and materials for shoulders along streets and highways shall be in accordance with this Section or the requirements of governing local, county, or state departments maintaining the particular roadway or highway, whichever is more stringent.


3. Replace with similar materials, all shoulders which may be damaged or destroyed as a result of pipe trenching.

4. Backfilling of shoulders shall not be directly measured for payment unless traffic dislodges the shoulder material rather than settling it, then any additional crushed stone placed shall be paid for as crushed stone for shoulder replacement.

5. Where shoulders along state highways have seal coat surfaces, replace with double bituminous seal in accordance with Section 32 12 00.

6. Where the State Highway Department or local authority requires trenches to be backfilled entirely with granular material in the shoulder of roads, granular material so placed shall not be a pay item, but included in the prices per linear foot of pipe.

7. Compaction shall be as described in this Section or as required by the governing local, county, or state departments maintaining the particular roadway or highway, whichever is more stringent.

G. Crushed stone for pavement maintenance and shoulder replacement.


2. Where possible, salvage and reuse all base material that is removed during construction.

3. Wet and thoroughly compact crushed stone and blade to tie into the existing surface prior to final acceptance.

4. Base material placed as a portion of pavement replacing items will not be directly measured for payment unless traffic whips out the base material rather than settling it, then any additional base material placed shall be paid for as crushed stone for pavement maintenance.

3.07 EXAMINATION BEFORE COMPACTION

A. Examine spaces to be filled beforehand and remove all unsuitable materials and debris including sheeting, forms, trash, stumps, plant life, etc.

B. Inspect backfill and fill materials beforehand and remove all roots, vegetation, organic matter, or other foreign debris. Stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension shall also be removed or broken into smaller pieces.

C. No backfill or fill material shall be placed on frozen ground nor shall the material itself be frozen or contain frozen soil fragments.

D. Spaces to be filled shall be free from standing water so that placement and compaction of the fill materials can be accomplished in “dry” conditions.

3.08 COMPACTING

A. Method of compaction shall not disturb or damage adjacent walls, drainage systems, damp-proofing, waterproofing, protective coverings, utilities in trenches, underground conduits or tanks.


B. Brace walls and slabs of structures to support surcharge loads and construction loads imposed by compaction operations.

C. Proof-roll all subgrade surfaces to accept fill material in accordance with this Section, and in accordance with Sections 32 11 00 and 32 12 00 under asphalt and concrete pavement.

D. Each layer of fill shall be compacted to the specified density the same day it is placed.

1. Moisture content of backfill or fill material shall be adjusted, if necessary to achieve the required degree of compaction.

E. Compact each lift in accordance with Table 1 and in accordance with Section 32 11 00 for asphalt and concrete pavement. Compactions are expressed as percentages of maximum densities as determined by ASTM D698, Method D or AASHO T-99-74, Method D.

F. Match compaction equipment and methods to the material and location being compacted in order to obtain specified compaction, with consideration of the following guidelines:

1. Rubber-tired rollers are preferred for most areas to prevent bridging of softer materials.

2. Double smooth drum rollers may be used provided that careful inspection can prevent bridging.

3. Compaction roller should be lighter in weight than proof-rolling equipment, with a minimum compaction force of 350 pounds per linear inch (PLI).

4. Vibratory compaction is preferred for dry, granular materials.

5. Hand compaction equipment such as impact rammers, plate or small drum vibrators, or pneumatic buttonhead compactors should be used in confined areas.

6. Hydraulic compaction by pounding or jetting will not be permitted except in unusual conditions, and then only upon written approval by the Engineer and after a demonstration of effectiveness by the Contractor and written acceptance by Engineer.

7. Backhoe mounted hydraulic or vibratory tampers are preferred for compaction of backfill in trenches under pavements over 4 feet in depth. The upper 4 feet shall be compacted as detailed above or with hand-guided or self propelled vibratory compactors or static roller. Do not use until depth of backfill over crown of pipe is more than 4 feet.

8. For plastic pipelines (PVC or PE) do not compact directly over center of pipe until backfill has reached 2 feet above top of pipe.

TABLE 1: COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS

Construction Element ASTM Minimum

Compaction

I. STRUCTURES

a) Fill beneath foundation elements and under slabs-on-grade – hand-guided compaction

D1557 98 percent

b) Fill beneath foundation elements and under slabs-on-grade - self-propelled or tractor-drawn compaction

D1557 98 percent


TABLE 1: COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS

Construction Element ASTM Minimum

Compaction

c) Fill around structures and above footings D1557 98 percent

II. TRENCHES

a) Fill under pipelines and pipe bedding D1557 98 percent

b) Pipe sidefills and top 2 feet of pipe backfill under pavements D1557 100 percent

c) Backfill below 2 feet under pavement D1557 95 percent

d) Backfill under lawns, gardens and cultivated fields D1557 90 percent

e) All other trenches D698 90 percent

III. EMBANKMENTS AND FILLS

a) Fill under streets, parking lots, and other paved areas* D1557 100 percent

b) Embankments not supporting pavement or structures D1557 95 percent

c) Rough site grading D698 90 percent

* Top 2 feet below subgrade shall be compacted to this standard; below this may be compacted to 95 percent.

3.09 TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Pavement Subgrade – plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas – plus or minus 1/2 inch from required elevations.

C. Top Surface of General Backfilling – plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.


A. Material Testing.

1. Contractor shall provide at his expense the services of a qualified laboratory in accordance with Sections 01 45 00 and 01 45 29, to conduct testing to verify that backfill materials are in compliance with the Contract Documents.

2. Testing will be done by a qualified, independent testing laboratory in accordance with this Section and Sections 01 45 00 and 01 45 29 and results of testing shall be provided to Engineer in accordance with Section 01 45 29.

3. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557 and these Contract Documents.

4. Contractor shall aid the Engineer in obtaining representative material samples to be used in testing.

5. For each material which does not meet specifications, Contractor shall supply an equal quantity of acceptable material, at no additional compensation.


6. Contractor shall anticipate these tests and incorporate the time and effort into procedure. All re-testing costs shall be borne by the Contractor.

7. Select Material - On-Site

a. Any on-site material may be used for fill material provided it meets all the requirements of the equivalent off-site material. However, Contractor shall assume that all on-site material is unsuitable in preparation of bid.

b. No on-site material shall be used without prior approval of the Engineer.

B. Compaction Testing.

1. Contractor shall provide at his expense the services of a qualified laboratory in accordance with Section 01 45 29, to conduct testing to verify that compaction is in compliance with the Contract Documents. Test results shall be provided to Engineer in accordance with Section 01 45 29.

2. Testing may be conducted for every 200 cubic yards of fill or backfill, or every 75 linear feet of trench backfill placed. Engineer reserves the right to increase the frequency of testing.

3. Contractor shall dig test holes and provide access to all backfill areas at no additional compensation when requested by the Engineer.

4. For each test which does not meet specifications, Contractor replace all material included in that lift or section, replace with acceptable material, and compact to specifications at no additional compensation.

5. Contractor shall anticipate these tests and incorporate the time and effort into procedures. All re-testing costs shall be borne by Contractor.

6. Nuclear moisture density testing by “probe” methods will be acceptable for compacted layers not exceeding 8 inches in thickness.

a. Nuclear “backscatter” methods will be acceptable only for testing asphalt paving layers not in excess of 3 inches in thickness.

b. Only certified personnel will conduct nuclear testing.

c. If the nuclear method is utilized, the results shall be checked by at least one in-place density test method described above.

7. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2922, and these Contract Documents.

8. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade pavers, paving, and foundations.

C. Unacceptable Stockpiled Material - Stockpiled material may be tested according to Material Testing Materials.

D. Alternate Methods of Compaction - Contractor may employ alternate methods of compaction if the desired degree of compaction can be successfully demonstrated to the Engineer’s satisfaction.


E. Systematic Compaction - Compaction shall be done systematically, and no consideration shall be given to incidental coverage due to construction vehicle traffic.

3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect Finished Work under provisions of Section 01 57 00.

B. Re-grade and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

C. Prior to terminating work for the day, the final layer of compacted fill, after compaction, shall be rolled with a smooth-wheel roller if necessary to eliminate ridges of soil left by tractors or equipment used for compaction or installing the material.

D. As backfill progresses, the surface shall be graded so as to drain off during incidence of rain such that no ponding of water shall occur on the surface of the fill.

E. Contractor shall not place a layer of fill on snow, ice or soil that was permitted to freeze prior to compaction. These unsatisfactory materials shall be removed prior to fill placement.

F. Settlement of backfilled areas as well as any damage caused by said settlement shall be repaired at cost to Contractor. Repair shall consist of removal of backfill, and re-backfill and re-compaction as well as any repairs to all equipment and structures. Repair work shall conform to these Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 31 50 00

SHEETING AND BRACING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Sheeting and bracing installation, removal, and left in place.

2. Design requirements.

3. Regulatory codes and requirements.

4. Materials.











A. All sheeting and bracing including the use of mobile shields shall conform to Public Law 91-596 (Williams Steiger Act); the Occupational Safety and Health Administration Act (OSHA) of 1970 and its amendments and regulations and to the Tennessee State OSHA (TOSHA) requirements, whichever are the most stringent.

1.03 REFERENCES

Reference Title

ASTM A6/A6M General Requirements

ASTM A328 Steel Sheet Piles

NFPA National Forest Products Association


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. None.

1.05 BIDDING

A. If Contractor determines that sheeting, shoring, bracing, or trench boxes are required to accomplish work, Contractor shall at his expense have the necessary equipment designed, installed, and if necessary removed, in accordance with this Section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Wood – Tongue and groove, No. 3 Common Douglas Fir or Hemlock or Utility grade Southern Pine; NFPA grading or equal, meeting the requirements of the NFPA.

B. Steel – ASTM A36 as required by ASTM A328.

C. Trench Boxes – Fabricated Steel or Aluminum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION

A. When so designated on the drawings or stated in the Specifications or to comply with Local, State, or Federal (OSHA) regulations, or when sloped excavations are not feasible, not possible or allowed or if excavations endanger adjacent facilities, sheeting, shoring, bracing, or trench boxes shall be installed by the Contractor.

3.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for when, where, and manner to utilize sheeting, shoring, bracing, and trench boxes to protect life and property.

B. All sheeting and bracing shall be designed and monitored by a professional engineer, licensed in Tennessee.

C. Design shall include all loading conditions to which the sheeting and bracing will be subjected during construction.

D. Design sheeting and bracing systems against failure from the maximum loads that will occur during construction, including surcharge loads and additional loading due to construction equipment.

E. Design sheeting and bracing systems to enable safe construction of structures, utilities and appurtenances, and prevent excessive ground loss, settlement, displacement, or undermining of adjacent foundations, structures, buildings, pavement, or bottom of excavation. Contractor shall decide when there is a necessity to underpin adjacent structures or features, with the approval of the Owner and Engineer.


F. Sides of all excavations shall be sufficiently sheeted, shored and braced whenever necessary to prevent slides, cave-ins, settlement or movement of the banks and to maintain the excavation clear of all obstructions. Wood or steel sheeting of adequate design and type shall be used in wet, saturated or flowing ground. All sheeting, shoring and bracing shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand the pressure exerted.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Provide all materials, equipment and labor necessary to construct and maintain all required excavation support systems.

B. Sheeting and bracing support systems shall include, but shall not be limited to, wall support such as wood sheeting, ringwales, lagging, soldier piles, steel sheeting, trench boxes and bracing members such as stringers, wales, struts, rakers, shores, tieback anchors, etc. necessary to prevent damage to the work and for the safety of workers, the general public or adjacent property.

C. No excavation shall be performed below a line drawn down and away at a slope of two horizontal and one vertical from the nearest footing or grade beam of the existing building or as shown on the drawings without providing sheeting, shoring and bracing to provide lateral support for soils beneath the foundations of the building and to prevent damage to the building.

D. Design of bracing shall be such as to permit proper construction of the walls and footings and proper installation of the utilities as shown on the drawings.

E. Sheeting shall not be driven while concrete is being placed, or within 24 hours after placement.

F. Do not brace to concrete without written approval of the Engineer.

G. Install sheeting and bracing systems in a logical sequence as excavation operations are performed.

1. If a prefabricated mobile shield is used, the bottom of the shield shall be maintained as high as possible (preferably above the spring line of the pipe, maximum 2 feet) to prevent disturbance of the bedding material and tension forces on pipe joints.

2. Openings or troughs created by the use of a shield shall be filled and compacted in accordance with Sections 31 23 16, 32 11 00 and 31 23 23.

3.04 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall maintain on a continuous basis, until removed, all sheeting and bracing systems installed as part of the Work.

1. If sheet and bracing systems are to be left in place after completion of Work, Contractor shall maintain these systems on a continuous basis until they are permanently buried.

B. Take care to avoid voids on the outside of the sheeting. If voids are formed, immediately fill them with suitable material and ram/compact fill to the approval of the Engineer.

C. Provide a means of determining movement of excavation walls, and adjacent soil, buildings and structures and utilities.


1. If movement or damage occurs, immediately cease all construction activities, install temporary measures to prevent further movement or damage and notify the Engineer.

2. Movement or damage due to failure of sheeting and bracing systems shall be permanently repaired as soon as possible, at no cost to the Owner and at no additional cost for time.

D. Contractor is solely responsible for the effectiveness of any sheeting, shoring, bracing, and trench box installation and for the safety of all persons and property in and adjacent to the work area, and for all injuries and damages arising from the use of the sheeting, shoring, bracing, and trench boxes.

3.05 REMOVAL

A. Remove sheeting and bracing as the work progresses in a manner which shall prevent damage to finished work, adjacent structures and property whether public or private, and so that cave-ins or slides will not occur. Sheeting shall not be removed for pipeline work until there is at least 18 inches of fill above the pipe unless this will result in damage to work or adjacent facilities, in which case the Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the conditions and receive approval from Engineer prior to removal of the sheeting. No sheeting shall be removed until work has been installed, checked, and backfilled to a level necessary to prevent damage to newly installed work and existing property.

1. All voids created by removal of sheeting and bracing shall be filled and compacted in accordance to the guidelines of Sections 31 23 16, 32 11 00 and 31 23 23.

B. Sheeting and bracing materials shall not be left in place unless otherwise shown by the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer in writing. Sheeting to be left in place shall be new and unused material. Where shown on drawings, specified or approved, sheeting shall be cut off as specified, or a minimum of 2 1/2 feet below proposed final grade. For pipelines, sheeting shall be shall be cut off at the depth corresponding to the top of the pipe unless this will result in damage to the work or adjacent facilities.

1. Contractor may elect to leave sheeting and bracing in place (cut off as described above) if he elects to do so at his own expense and with Engineer’s approval.

2. Provide to the Engineer a drawing of cut-off sheeting locations. Drawing should show site plan with dimensioned locations of sheeting, type of material remaining, and depths or elevations to top and bottom of remaining sheet.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 31 68 13

FOUNDATION ROCK ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This work consists of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary to properly install

and test rock anchors and accessories at locations shown on the Contract Drawings. Work

includes designing rock anchors to provide the required load capacity, providing adequate bond

length and stressing length to meet the requirements specified herein and shown on the Contract

Drawings, providing materials and equipment for, and installing rock anchors to carry the

design loads, prestressing all rock anchors, and testing rock anchors as specified herein.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following codes, standards, and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been specified herein.

ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel

ASTM A53 – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc coated

welded and Seamless

ASTM A722 – Standard Specification for Uncoated High Strength Steel Bars for Prestressed

concrete

ASTM A615 –

ASTM C109 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars

ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM D256/D638/D790/D2240 – Test methods for Corrugated Polypropylene pipe

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals prior to and during construction shall be made in accordance with Division 1 specifications.

B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for review prior to start of fabrication or installation.

1. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to:

a. Placing Drawings

b. Bar Details

C. Manufacturer’s data, recommendations, and instruction for project specific use for following products:

1. Bars

2. Couplers/splices

3. Grout


D. Test data for couplers/splices.

E. Laboratory test reports for anchor bats showing stress-strain curves and ultimate strength.

F. Grout tests results.

G. Volumes of grout take for each grouting of each anchor hole.

H. Pullout test results.

I. Calibration data for the pullout test load measurement system.

J. The contractor shall also submit a report to the Construction Manager within 20 working days after completion of the rock anchor work. The report shall contain as-built drawings showing the locations of the rock anchors, elevation, total rock anchors length, and bond length.

K. A manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheer (MSDS) must be submitted when applicable.


A. The work shall be performed in accordance currently adopted building code and all federal, state, and local regulations.

B. The Contractor shall submit records documenting a minimum of five (5) years experience in rock anchor installation of similar size and scope as qualifications for this project. A minimum of 5 names of individuals (with address, affiliation, title, and telephone number) who can attest to the adequacy of the work done on those projects shall also be submitted.

C. Do not install rock anchors until the Engineer has reviewed and approved the submitted shop drawings.

D. Provide the Engineer and Testing Agency a minimum of three (3) working days notice prior to installation.

E. Alignment and Tolerances

1. Install rock anchors to within one degree from vertical.

2. Install rock anchors within two (2) inches of the required location unless otherwise

directed by the Engineer.


1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. Rock anchor – a high strength, threaded, steel bar fitted with an anchorage at each end capable of permitting force transfer from the structure to the ground.

B. Anchorage – Portion of the rock anchor, including anchor head and anchor plate, which is used to transfer load from the structure to the rock anchor.

C. Bonded Length – Portion of rock anchor which transfers the tensile force from the rock anchor to the ground.


A. All rock anchors and components shall be handled and stored in a manner to avoid corrosion and physical damage.

B. Damage, such as abrasions, cuts, nicks, welds, weld splatter or heavy corrosion and pitting, will be cause for rejection of the element. Rejected elements shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner in terms of material replacement or resulting time delays.

1.07 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Limited variations from the patterns or locations shown on the Drawings will be permitted to accommodate local conditions, subject to review of the Engineer.

B. Standing water shall be removed prior to installation of the rock anchors. The site shall be sloped away from drilled holes as necessary to limit the inflow of water.

1.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. The contract price paid for rock anchor shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in constructing the rock anchors (including testing), complete in place, as shown on the Drawings, as specified in these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Bars: Bars for rock anchors shall be continuously threaded Grade 150, or 75 steel bars

conforming to ASTM A722 or Grade 60 bars conforming to ASTM A615

1. The sheath encapsulating the threaded bars shall be able to safely withstand

deformations occurring during transportation, installation, and transferring load to the

bars.

2. The bonded length of a threaded bar for a rock anchor shall not be less than the

length shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. Steel: Steel, except threaded bar, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36.

1. Steel bearing plate shall be designed so as not to exceed the bearing stress of the

concrete foundation in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350.

C. Grout: FOSROC 10-35 TEKROC P, Williams Wil-X, or approved equal shall be used for

rock anchors.

1. Grout bags which have been in storage more than 90 days shall not be used.

2. Grout bags shall be kept under cover and in a dry condition.

3. The lowest practical water grout ratio with acceptable workability shall be used.

4. Prior to testing anchors, verify that the grout has sufficient strength to transfer the

rock anchor load to the ground.

5. Expansive admixtures may not be added to the grout.

6. Water for mixing grout shall be potable, clean and free of injurious quantities of

substances known to be harmful to Portland cement or steel.

7. Mix grout in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Centralizers

1. Centralizers shall be placed at five foot intervals in the bond length starting at the end

so that no less than 0.5 inches of grout cover is achieved along the threaded bar.

2. Centralizers may be made of any material, except wood, that is not deleterious to the

steel or plastic sheath.

3. Centralizers shall permit the free flow of grout.

E. Miscellaneous Steel Hardware

1. Steel plates shall conform to ASTM A36.

2. All bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the anchor bar manufacturer’s

specifications.

3. All anchorage components shall develop at least 95 percent of the minimum

guaranteed ultimate strength of the tendon.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Grouting Equipment: Equipment for mixing grout shall be a high speed colloidal mixer with

shearing action.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Threaded bars shall be fabricated in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings and shall be

free of dirt, oil, grease, detrimental rust, or other deleterious substances.

B. The bonded length shall be degreased prior to installation. No solvent residue shall remain on

the tendon.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION CONTROL

A. The rock anchor shall be properly inspected before placement into the borehole. While

inserting the rock anchor into the hole, it shall be protected from any damage, especially

damage to the corrosion protection media.

B. Rock anchors shall be inserted freely to the prescribed length in the hole. They shall not be

driven into the hole or cut off for insertion.

C. The threaded bar shall be concentric in the hole through the use of centralizers.

D. Grout pressure shall be measured at the point of injection. The grout gate mechanism shall be

cleaned prior to delivery to the site and periodically during the project to prevent clogging.

E. Grout components shall be mechanically mixed for 5 to 10 minutes to ensure proper

dispersion of grout mix.

F. The established water grout ratio shall be accurately controlled.

G. Pumping and injection of the grout shall commence immediately after mixing.

H. Grouting shall continue until the returning grout escaping from the hole is of the same

composition as grout being injected.

I. Verify that grout has sufficient strength to transfer the anchor load to the ground.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. The hole for rock anchors shall be drilled at locations indicated on the Contract Drawings.

B. The hole diameter shall be determined by the Contractor to produce the required load

capacities. The rock anchor hole shall extend one foot beyond the threaded bar length to be

installed.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining an obstruction-free and open hole for

grouting the rock anchor. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining the

drilling method, grouting pressures, and rock anchor bonded length, subject to the provisions

stated herein and review by the Engineer. The Contractor shall design the bonded length to

satisfy the rock anchor testing acceptance criteria in accordance with the design loads. The

grouting pressure and grouting method shall be based on consideration of existing ground


conditions.

D. The drilling method used shall:

1. Cause minimum disturbance to the surrounding ground and not result in any ground

loss.

2. Not result in collapse of the hole during drilling.

3. Maintain the position and inclination of the drilled hole, allow the hole to reach the

design depth, and produce the design diameter of the drilled hole.

E. Before installation of the grout or anchor, the bonded length of each hole shall be cleaned of

all debris and dust by a method reviewed by the Design Engineer.

F. The Contractor shall immediately revise his operations to prevent reoccurrence of obstructed

or otherwise unsatisfactory holes and modify rock anchor installation procedures as required.

G. Grout shall be injected at the lowest point of the rock anchor hole. Grouting shall proceed

such that the hole is filled without formation of air voids, grouting progressively from the

bottom to top.

H. Grout shall terminate one foot below the anchor plate area or bottom of the concrete

foundation.

I. The grouting equipment shall be capable of continuous mixing and shall produce a grout free

of lumps. The grout pump shall be equipped with a grout pressure gauge at the nozzle

capable of measuring at least 150 psi or twice the actual pressure used.

J. If grout loss from the drilled hole exceeds three times the volume of the annular space

between the drilled hole and rock anchor, then rock anchor installation shall be discontinued

and the tendon removed from the hole and cleaned. The Contractor shall fully pressure grout

the drilled hole with a cement grout at a pressure of at least 5 psi above hydrostatic pressure,

redrill the hole 24 hours after the grout sets, and install rock anchors as described herein

above.

K. The Contractor may, at his option, conduct a water pressure test in the drilled hole prior to

grouting. When water loss is greater than 0.25 gallons per mixture at a pressure of at least 5

psi above hydrostatic pressure (within the bonded length of the drill hole) measured for at

least 10 minutes, then the drilled hole shall be pressure grouted as described above.

L. A grout pad shall be placed under the bearing plate to level the plate prior to testing.

3.04 ROCK ANCHOR TESTING

A. 2 rock anchors shall be performance tested and 5% of production rock anchors shall be proof

tested.

B. Copies of all test results and graphs shall be transmitted to the Construction Manager as each

test is completed.

C. Rock anchors shall be tensioned by direct pull with a hollow ram hydraulic jack of a model

recommended by the anchor manufacturer, so mounted as to prevent bending of the rock


anchor. Tensioning of a rock anchor shall not commence until the cement grout has set and

achieved its design strength.

D. Jacks shall have ram travel at least equal to theoretical elastic elongation of the bonded length

at the maximum test load. A pressure gauge shall be used with each jack. Gauges shall be

calibrated with a single jack. All gauges shall be accurate enough to read 100 psi changes in

pressure. For performance tests, the jack used shall have two (2) calibrated gauges: a master

gauge and a back-up gauge. The pump shall be capable of applying each load increment in

less than 60 seconds.

E. A load cell, which has been calibrated by a certified independent testing laboratory no more

than 20 days prior to the start of testing, shall be used to measure the changes in load during

the load-hold portion of the performance tests. There will be no substitute for the load cell

during conduct of the performance tests. Load cells are not required for proof tests. The

Contractor shall provide the Construction Manager with the calibration curve for the load cell

prior to testing.

F. For the performance tests, the master gauge and back-up gauge shall be connected to the same

pressure hose between the pump and jack and be used to measure the applied loads. If the

load measured by the master gauge and back-up gauge differ by more than ten (10) percent,

the jack, master gauge and back-up gauge shall be recalibrated as a unit at no expense to the

Owner.

G. The weight of the jack and load cell shall be supported externally and not by the tendon.

H. Use a dial gauge, with 0.001 inch precision, aligned perpendicular to the loading head to

measure elongation of the tendon. The dial gauge shall be supported on an

independent reference point and shall be in contact with the tendon head or an extension of

the tendon head.

I. All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer or Testing Agency. Notice

shall be given to the Engineer and Testing Agency not less than 72 hours prior to the start of a

test.

J. Maintain each load increment or decrement for at least 1 minute, or until movement ceases.

K. Performance (Verification) Test:

1. Performance tests shall be performed on the first two rock anchors installed at each

major structure requiring rock anchors prior to delivery of remaining anchors to

confirm design.

2. The performance tests will include stressing and monitoring a rock anchor. During

testing, rock anchor movement, measured at the anchor head, shall be monitored for

each load increment to the nearest 0.001 inch from an independent, fixed reference

point. The loading sequence shall be as follows:


Cycle Load

1 AL

0.25 P

AL

2 0.25 P

0.50 P

AL

3 0.25 P

0.50 P

0.75 P

AL

4 0.25 P

0.50 P

0.75 P

1.00 P

AL

5 0.25 P

0.50 P

0.75 P

1.25 P

AL

6 0.25 P

0.50 P

0.75 P

1.00 P

1.50 P (CREEP TEST) ( 75ksi bar required)

AL

P = Design Load (as shown on Contract Drawings)

AL = Alignment Load = 0.05P

4. The maximum test load shall be held for 10 minutes. Total movements with respect

to a fixed reference point shall be recorded at 1 minute, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 10 minutes.

If the total movement between 1 minute and 10 minutes exceeds 0.040 inches, the

test load shall be held for an additional 50 minutes. Total movements shall be

recorded by the Testing Agency at 15 minutes, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 and 60 minutes.

5. The Testing Agency will plot the tendon head movement vs. load for each load

increment. He will also plot the creep movement for the load-hold stage as a function

of the logarithm of time. The Engineer will review these data from each performance

test to determine whether the rock anchor is acceptable.

6. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, significant differences are indicated from

previous performance tests, run additional performance tests on the next adjacent

rock anchor to be installed.


L. Proof Test

1. 5% of rock anchors not performance tested shall be proof tested. The requirements

for loading and monitoring for proof tests are the same as for performance tests,

except that the load sequence shall be as shown in the following:

P = Design Load

AL = Alignment Load (0.05P)

AL

0.25 P

0.50 P

0.75 P

1.00 P

1.33 P (75 ksi bar required)

AL

2. For proof tests, maintain the maximum proof load for 10 minutes. The jack shall be

repumped as necessary in order to maintain a constant load. Anchor movement shall

be measured and recorded at 1 minute, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 10 minutes. If the anchor

movement exceeds 0.04 inches between 1 and 10 minute readings, maintain the

maximum proof load for an additional 50 minutes. Total movements shall be

recorded at 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50 and 60 minutes.

3.05 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

A. The following criteria shall be satisfied:

1. The Total elastic movement at the maximum test load exceeds 80% of the theoretical

elastic elongation of the unbounded length.

2. Creep per log cycle (d2-d1)/log (t2/t1) shall be less than 0.04 inch between the 1 and

10 minute readings and less than 0.08 inch between the 6 and 60 minute readings,

where,

d1 = measured displacement at time t1

d2 = measured displacement at time t2

t1 = time of first displacement measurement

t2 = time of second displacement measurement

B. Rock anchors not meeting Criterion 1 shall not be incorporated into the structure and shall be

replaced at no cost to the Owner. Those not meeting Criteria 2 may be accepted to work at

loads less than design values; the acceptable load for these rock anchors will be determined by

the Engineer and Design Engineer. When additional anchors are needed due to anchors not

meeting Criteria 2, the additional anchors shall be installed at no cost to the Owner.


3.06 RECORD OF WORK

A. Documentation of all work done shall be recorded accurately and completely. This shall

include drilling of the rock anchor hole, water testing, grouting, testing of rock anchors,

equipment used for testing and their calibration data, type of steel threaded bar, materials and

procedures used for corrosion protection of anchors.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 05 19

GEOTEXTILES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Separation geotextile.



1.02 REFERENCES

Reference Title

Specifications for Geotextiles, July 1986

Task Force #25, AASHTO-ABC-ARTBA Joint Committee

ASTM D3776/D3776M Standard Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric

ASTM D3786/D3786M Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics—Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method

ASTM D4354 Standard Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics and Rolled Erosion Control Products(RECPs) for Testing

ASTM D4491 Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity

ASTM D4595 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the Wide-Width Strip Method

ASTM D4632 Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles

ASTM D4751 Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile

ASTM D4833 Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products

ASTM D4873 Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Contract Documents including Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit a 1-foot square sample of each geotextile proposed for use on this project.

C. Certification that each geotextile meets criteria listed in Part 2.

1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading:


1. Equipment shall be shipped and handled in accordance with requirements of Section 01 61 00 of these specifications.

B. Storage and Protection:

1. Equipment shall be stored and protected in accordance with requirements of Section 01 61 00 of these specifications.

C. Requirements for identification, storage and handling of geotextiles in ASTM D4873 shall be followed also. Conflicts between ASTM D4873 and Section 01 61 00 shall be resolved in favor of more stringent standard.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Separation Geotextile

1. Shall be heat-bonded geotextile specifically designed for drainage and separation applications.

2. Shall be composed of polyester and/or polypropylene polymers.

3. Shall meet minimum acceptance criteria for geotextiles listed in table below.

Test Description Test Method Criteria

Mass per unit area ASTM D-3776 ≥ 8 oz/SY

Apparent opening size (AOS) ASTM D-4751 < No. 70 sieve

Puncture resistance ASTM D-4833 ≥ 60 lb.*

Tensile strength ASTM D-4632 ≥ 150 lb.*

Permittivity ASTM D-4491 ≥ 0.1 sec1*

Burst strength ASTM D-3786 ≥ 200 psi*

*Minimum Average Roll Values (MARV)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall inspect all geotextile upon delivery and verify that proper materials and quantities have been supplied.

B. Contractor shall inspect subgrade for protrusions or other unacceptable conditions prior to installation of geotextiles.

C. Contractor shall continuously inspect needle-punched geotextiles during deployment for broken needles remaining from needle-punching operations.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Subgrade shall be prepared as indicated in specifications.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect all geotextile materials from damage due to exposure to sunlight, dirt, dust and other hazards.

B. Maintain protective wrapping on geotextile rolls at all times.

C. Geotextiles shall be covered after installation within a 10-day period.

D. During spreading operations of backfill, a minimum depth of 12 inches of aggregate shall be maintained over geotextiles when possible. Construction equipment shall not operate directly on geotextile.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, and appurtenances according to Contract Documents, including Sections 01 61 00, and equipment manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations. Conflicts of information shall be called to attention of Engineer before proceeding with work.

B. Geotextile rolls shall be positioned as required and unrolled.

C. When placed on prepared subgrades, geotextile shall be overlapped a minimum of 1.0 feet on all edges.

D. When geotextile is placed on unstable subgrades or slopes steeper than 1V:5H, horizontal overlaps shall be sewn.

E. When geotextile is placed on slopes steeper than 1V:5H, longitudinal seams shall be sewn or overlapped a minimum of 2 feet.

F. Sewing Requirement

1. Thread color shall contrast that of geotextile.

2. Sewing operations shall employ a thread tension which secures geotextile rolls without cutting material.

3. Sewing operation shall use a “J” seam secured with a minimum of one row of four-stitch per inch two-thread chain stitch.

G. When geotextile is placed in trenches, material shall be overlapped a minimum of 1 foot over top of trench. Longitudinal seams between adjacent rolls of material shall be overlapped a minimum of 2 feet.

H. Geotextile rolls shall be cut and laid flat such that buckling of roll does not occur.

I. If geotextiles are damaged during any phase of construction or installation, a new piece of same type shall be cut and placed over damaged area with a 2 foot minimum overlap and sewn.


J. Aggregate shall be spread in direction of overlap wherever possible.

3.05 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain geotextile rolls until backfilling operations have completed one lift.

3.06 SPECIAL CONDITIONS

A. Unauthorized Work - Unauthorized work shall be remediated by Contractor, as directed by Engineer, at no additional compensation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 11 00

BASE AND SUBGRADE TREATMENT UNDER PAVEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Preparing and stabilizing subgrade to receive a base or pavement.

2. Placing and compacting base material.

3. Placing and compacting stabilized base.









A. Compact all subgrade materials to 100 percent of maximum density unless otherwise specified.

1. Determine maximum density and optimum moisture in accordance with the "Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relationship of Soils Using a 5.5 Pound Rammer and a 12-inch Drop," AASHTO Designation T-99, Method A.

B. Compact Type A Base materials to an average dry density of at least 100 percent of theoretical density based upon 83 percent of a solid volume, unless otherwise specified.

1. No individual test shall be less than 97 percent of theoretical density.

2. Theoretical density of limestone aggregates shall be based on bulk specific gravity AASHTO T-85.

3. Theoretical density of all other aggregates shall be based on bulk specific gravity AASHTO T-84 and T-85.

C. Compact Type B base materials to at least 95 percent of maximum density, unless otherwise specified.


1. No individual test shall be less than 92 percent of maximum density.

2. Determine maximum density and optimum moisture in accordance with the "Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relationship of Soils Using a 5.5 Pound Rammer and a 12-inch Drop," AASHTO Designation T-99, Method D.

1.03 TESTING

A. Testing – Contractor shall provide laboratory to conduct testing required by this Section at his expense in accordance with Section 01 45 29. Contractor shall cooperate fully with the testing laboratory performing sampling and testing required herein. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory and Engineer a minimum of 72 hours in advance of when work is to be in progress.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MINERAL AGGREGATE MATERIALS – GENERAL

A. Mineral aggregate: sound, tough, and durable fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed or uncrushed gravel or chert.

B. Fine aggregate: natural sand, silt-clay, or other inert materials with similar characteristics conforming to AASHTO M-6, M-29, and M-45 requirements except as specified herein.

C. Coarse aggregate: AASHTO M-43, except as specified herein, consisting of crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed chert, or a combination thereof, or other inert materials with similar characteristics, having hard, strong, durable pieces free from adherent coatings.

D. Coarse aggregates: graded to standard sizes between the limits specified and to the gradation requirements set forth in the following table:


SIZES OF COARSE AGGREGATE: AASHTO M-43

Size No.

Nominal Size

Square Openings

(1)

Amounts Finer Than Each Laboratory Sieve (Square Openings), Percentage by Weight

4 3-1/2 3 2-1/2 2 1-1/2 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 50 No. 100

1 3-1/2 to 1-1/2 100 90-100 25-60 0-15 0-5

2 2-1/2 to 1-1/2 100 90-100 35-70 0-15 0-5

24 2-1/2 to 3/4 100 90-100 25-60 0-10 0-5

3 2 to 1 100 90-100 35-70 0-15 0-5

357 2 to No. 4 100 95-100 35-70 10-30 0-5

4 1-1/2 to 3/4 100 90-

100 20-55 0-15 0-5

467 1-1/2 to No. 4 100 95-

100 35-70 10-30 0-5

5 1 to 1-1/2 100 90-100 20-55 0-10 0-5

56 1 to 3/8 100 90-100 40-75 15-35 0-15 0-5

57 1 to No. 4 100 95-100 25-60 0-10 0-5

6 3/4 to 3/8 100 90-100 20-55 0-15 0-5

67 3/4 to No. 4 100 90-100 20-55 0-10 0-5

68 3/4 to No. 8 100 90-100 30-65 5-25 0-10 0-5

7 1/2 to No. 4 100 90-100 40-70 0-15 0-5

78 1/2 to No. 8 100 90-100 40-75 5-25 0-10 0-5

8 3/8 to No. 8 100 85-

100 10-30 0-10 0-5

89 3/8 to No. 16 100 90-

100 20-55 5-30 0-10 0-5

9 No. 4 to No. 16 100 85-100 10-40 0-10 0-5 10-30

10 No. 4 to 0 (2) 100 85-100

(1) In inches, except where otherwise indicated. Numbered sieves are those of the United States Standard Sieve Series. (2) Where Size No. 10 (Screenings) is specified in asphalt pavement design the percent passing the No. 4 sieve shall be 90-100 and the percent passing the No. 200 sieve shall

be from 5-16.


2.02 SUBGRADE STABILIZATION MATERIAL

A. Thoroughly pulverize and mix all subgrade and aggregate material until not more than five percent of the material exclusive of gravel or stone is retained on a 2-inch sieve.

B. Add sufficient water during the mixing and compacting operation to provide optimum moisture content, as determined by AASHTO t-99, plus or minus three percentage points.

2.03 MINERAL AGGREGATE BASE MATERIALS

A. Base aggregates shall conform to the requirements of Article 2.01 and shall be Type A. Type B aggregates shall be used only with permission of Owner and Engineer.

B. Base aggregate gradations:

SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT

1-1/2 inches 100

1 inch 85 – 100

3/4 inch 60 – 95

3/8 inch 50 – 80

No. 4 40 – 65

No. 16 20 – 40

No. 100 9 – 18

C. Type A aggregate: crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, or crushed chert, and other fine grained mineral matter.

1. Crushed stone: free from adherent coatings, clay, or other soils with wear not exceeding 50 percent and sodium sulfate soundness loss not exceeding 15 percent.

2. Crushed slag: quality as for crushed stone having a uniform density.

3. Crushed gravel and chert: screened and all oversize material crushed and fed back over the screen in a uniform manner.

4. Coarse aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve shall not have a percentage of wear exceeding 30 percent.

5. Material passing the No. 40 sieve: non-plastic, or with a liquid limit not exceeding 25 and a plasticity index not exceeding 6.

6. Only aggregate meeting base aggregate gradations described above shall be used.

D. Type B aggregate: crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed or uncrushed chert, or a combination of these materials, and other fine grained material. The quality of Type B aggregate shall be the same as for Type A aggregate except as follows:

1. Gravel or chert: screened and the oversize material wasted or crushed and blended in a uniform manner with the remainder of the material.


2. Gravel or chert: no more than 12 percent clay.

3. Coarse aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve shall not have a percentage of wear exceeding 40 percent.

4. Additional binder or mineral aggregate may be incorporated into the material to meet gradation, density, or bonding requirements.

5. Only aggregate meeting base aggregate gradations described above shall be used.

E. Furnish test reports on quality of all aggregates for approval by the Engineer prior to blending or mixing. If requested by the Engineer, furnish samples for testing by an independent laboratory. Test methods for aggregate base quality shall be by the following AASHTO methods:

Test Method

Sampling T-2

Percentage of Wear T-96

Soundness T-104

Unit Weight T-19

Sieve Analysis T-27

2.04 CEMENT STABILIZED BASE MATERIALS

A. Engineer will determine the proportions of materials to be used that will produce a workable lean concrete.

1. Maximum design slump of 1-1/2 inches, AASHTO T-119.

2. Minimum compressive strength of 500 psi in seven (7) days.

3. Cement content of 200 pounds per cubic yard of concrete.

4. Maximum entrained air of 5 percent.

5. Water reducer quantity as recommended by the manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clear construction areas as stipulated in Section 31 11 00.

B. Maintain bench marks, monuments, and other reference points.

3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

A. Prepare subgrade in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades as shown on the drawings or as designated by Engineer.


B. Haul, spread, and compact suitable material in sufficient quantity when the roadbed is below grade.

C. Prepare subgrade across the entire sub-base section when sub-bases are to be constructed on the subgrade.

D. Construct subgrade 12 inches wider on each side of the base or pavement when forms are required for the base or pavement.

E. Clear subgrades, as stipulated in Section 31 11 00, required reworking to the limits described above.

F. Grade subgrade in such a manner as to provide ready drainage of water from subgrade. Maintain ditches and drains during construction.

3.03 SUBGRADE COMPACTION

A. Compact the finished subgrade to not less than 100 percent of the maximum density.

B. When the density requirement is not met, loosen the subgrade by discing, harrowing, or other approved methods to a depth of not less than six inches, then reshape and re-compact.

C. Moisten and aerate the subgrade material as necessary during mixing and compacting to provide optimum moisture content.

D. Rework or remove, replace, and re-compact all soft, yielding material which will not compact readily.

E. Protect subgrade from damage and limit hauling over the finished subgrade to, that which is essential for construction, purposes.

F. Smooth and re-compact all ruts or rough places that develop in a completed subgrade.

G. Check the lines, cross sections, and grades of the subgrade as completed for reasonably close conformity with those shown on the drawings for the bottom of the sub-base, or pavement, or with those established by Engineer.

3.04 SUBGRADE STABILIZATION

A. Add and incorporate granular stabilizing material, with or without additives as required, into existing subgrade.

B. Replace unsuitable subgrade material with stabilizing material in reasonably close conformity to the widths and depths shown on the drawings, specified herein, or as directed by the Engineer.

C. Spread the quantity of aggregate for subgrade treatment, as designated on the drawings or as directed, by means of a mechanical spreader and thoroughly mix with the subgrade material by means of a mechanical mixer. Spreading and mixing may be performed by other approved methods on short sections to be established, when permitted by the Engineer.

D. Spread material uniformly by motor grader to the required cross section and compact. Accompany compaction operations with sufficient blading by motor graders to assure a smooth, uniform surface.


E. Maintain the complete subgrade until covered by the following stage of construction or until the project has been completed and accepted.

3.05 PLACING AGGREGATE BASE

A. Place one or more courses of aggregates, and additives if required, on a prepared subgrade in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings or established by the Engineer.

B. Construct mineral aggregate base in one or more layers with a compacted thickness as shown on the drawings.

C. Subgrade shall be checked and approved by the Engineer at least 500 feet in advance of spreading any mineral aggregate. This distance may be shortened by permission of the Engineer to as little as 200 feet between November first and April first or during periods of prolonged wet weather.

D. Mineral aggregate bases shall not be spread on a subgrade that is frozen or contains frost.

E. Hauling over material already placed will not be permitted until it has been spread, mixed, shaped, and compacted to the required density.

3.06 MIXING AND SPREADING AGGREGATE BASE

A. Unless otherwise specified, mix and spread base course materials, including additives if required on the drawings. Furnish sieve analyses of mix gradations for all materials for approval by Engineer prior to beginning work. Methods of sampling and testing shall be in accordance with current AASHTO requirements.

B. Stationary Plant Method – For Type A or B base materials.

1. Mix and add water in an approved stationary mixing plant capable of producing a well-graded mix.

2. Add water and calcium or sodium chloride, if specified, during the mixing operation in the amount necessary to provide a moisture content satisfactory for compacting.

3. If combining of materials is required to meet the grading requirements, blend prior to mixing by uniformly adding the material. Blending of materials in stockpiles will not be permitted.

4. All material fed into the plant shall travel the full length of the pugmill.

5. After mixing, transport the material for each layer of base to the job site while it contains the proper moisture content, and spread to the required thickness and cross section by means of an approved mechanical spreader.

6. Test samples may be taken from the conveyor feeding the mixer or from the mixer output.

C. Road Mix Method (Mechanical Mixer) – For Type B base materials.

1. Place the material for each layer of base course through an aggregate spreader or window-sizing device capable of being adjusted to spread the materials in the proper proportions.


2. After placing, mix the material with an approved mechanical mixing machine of rotary or pugmill type capable of producing a uniform blend.

3. During mixing, add water in the amount sufficient to provide a moisture content satisfactory for compacting.

4. If two or more materials are to be blended on the road, spread each material separately in the necessary proportions prior to blending and mixing, unless moisture control additives are specified.

5. If two or more materials are blended, test samples shall be taken after mixing and before compaction. If blending is not required, test samples may be taken from plant production or stockpiles.

D. Road Mix Method (Motor Grader) – For Type B base materials.

1. After depositing and uniformly spreading the material for each layer of base course, sprinkle it with water in sufficient quantity to moisten all particles, but not in such quantity that segregation of sizes or softening of the subgrade will occur.

2. Immediately following the application of water, thoroughly mix the material by windrowing and spreading with motor graders until the mixture is uniform throughout, unless moisture control additives are specified or if two or more materials are to be blended.

3. Spread the base material while at optimum moisture content in layers of specific thickness and cross-section by means of approved motor graders.

4. If the required compacted depth of the base course exceeds 6 inches, construct the base in two or more layers of approximate equal thickness. The maximum compacted thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 6 inches except when vibrating or other approved types of special compacting equipment are used. The compacted depth of a single layer of the base course may be increased to 8 inches upon approval of Engineer.

5. Immediately following spreading, shape the base material to the required degree of uniformity and smoothness.

6. Compact to the required density prior to any appreciable evaporation of surface moisture. Continuously compact each layer until the minimum density requirement is achieved.

7. Test samples may be taken from stockpiles or plant production.

3.07 COMPACTING AGGREGATE BASES

A. For compaction testing purposes, each completed layer will be divided into lots of approximately 10,000 square yards. Smaller lots may be considered when approved by the Engineer.

B. Five density tests will be performed on each lot and the results averaged.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 12 00

ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Asphalt concrete paving.

2. Driveways and parking areas.

3. Road shoulders.

4. Compaction

5. Tolerances.

6. Field Quality Control.








7. Section 32 14 23 – Pavement Patching

8. Section 32 17 23 – Pavement Marking

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Tennessee Department of Transportation (TDOT) Standards and Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition.

B. Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Paving and repaving accomplished under this contract shall meet the finished grades, elevations and profiles shown on the Drawings.


1. Where pavement replacement is being accomplished, match the sectional profiles of the existing pavement unless otherwise stated herein or shown on the Drawings.

B. All thicknesses of pavement courses described herein or shown on the Drawings are after completion of compaction.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall provide certification of TDOT approved job mix formulas for types to be used on this project. TDOT approvals shall be less than 12 months old.

1. If TDOT approvals are not available, Contractor shall obtain independent verification of the asphalt mix design compliance with TDOT standards and these Contract Documents from a TDOT certified laboratory.


A. Perform work in accordance with the latest edition of TDOT Standards and Specifications as they apply to the following:

1. Materials and batch plant requirements.

2. Construction procedures except as modified herein.

3. Weather and seasonal limitations except as modified herein.

B. Paving work shall be performed by a qualified paving contractor or subcontractor acceptable to the Owner and Engineer.

C. Obtain asphalt concrete materials from same source throughout project.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate field work under provision of Sections 01 31 13 and 01 51 00 including maintenance of traffic, access to private driveways, and emergency vehicle access.

1.07 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule the paving operations such that all paving necessary to provide safe and adequate maintenance and protection of traffic or for protection of previously laid courses is completed within the weather limitations.

1. Such scheduling shall include expediting construction operations to permit paving before the weather limitations or by limiting the length of work to that which can be completed before weather stops work.

2. Cost of scheduling and sequencing of work to conform to the weather limitations shall be reflected in the bid prices for the related contract items.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall maintain driving surfaces, free of ruts and potholes, for maintenance of traffic until temporary paving or permanent paving is installed.


1. All temporary paving and pavement replacement shall be maintained in a safe, drivable condition until the pavement wearing course is installed.

2. All subgrade, subbase and base courses shall also be maintained in their specific finish condition prior to placement of the next course.

B. If the Contractor fails to complete the necessary paving operations prior to weather limitations, all temporary materials and work which become necessary as a result of such failure, such as the lowering or shimming of castings and protrusions, drainage of the roadway, providing acceptable rideability, and other work needed for the adequate maintenance and protection of traffic until paving operations can resume, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

C. For a period of one year after issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall promptly patch, maintain, repair, and/or replace any pavement that settles or becomes damaged due to settlement or defective materials or workmanship.

1. Areas to be repaired shall be cut out in a square or rectangular shape to the depth matching the top course.

2. Vertical face of asphalt to be painted with asphalt emulsion prior to placing the asphalt concrete.

3. If more than top course depth of 1-1/2 inch settlement has occurred, the pavement shall be removed to the subbase and subbase and/or binder and base course restored to proper grade before restoration of the wearing course.

4. Centerline finished grade, in any case, shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL MIXES

A. Mineral Aggregate shall meet the general requirements of Section 32 11 00 and additional requirements specified for each type paving mixture.

B. Contractor shall furnish test reports for aggregate and bituminous materials to be approved for quality by the Engineer prior to incorporation into the mix.

C. Engineer may require samples of aggregate, bituminous materials, or the plant mixed material for testing in an independent laboratory.

D. All methods of sampling and testing will be in accordance with current AASHTO methods for use on highway materials and TDOT standards and specifications.

E. Submit a job-mix formula for approval by the Engineer, for each mix to be used on the project to establish:

1. Percentage of each size aggregate to be used in the mix.

2. Percentage of bituminous material.

3. Discharge temperature of the mix.


F. Job-mix formula shall be within the range established for each type mix with allowable tolerances as follows:

Parameter Tolerance Tolerance

Aggregate passing 3/8-inch sieve and larger plus or minus 6.5 percent plus or minus 5.7 percent

Aggregate passing No. 4 sieve and larger plus or minus 4.62 percent plus or minus 4 percent

Aggregate passing No. 8 to No. 50 sieves plus or minus 3.8 percent plus or minus 3.3 percent

Aggregate passing No. 100 to No. 200 sieves plus or minus 1.8 percent plus or minus 1.6 percent

Bitumen plus or minus 0.3 percent plus or minus 0.25 percent

Temperature of mix plus or minus 20 degrees F plus or minus 20 degrees F

G. Submit a new job-mix formula if a change in materials is made or if an unsatisfactory mixture results.

H. Bituminous mixing plants, either batch or continuous, sufficiently equipped and coordinated to provide paving mixes in an amount necessary for orderly prosecution of the work and to:

1. Produce a uniform mixture having complete and uniform coating of all aggregate and a uniform distribution of the bituminous material in the mix.

2. A canvas cover or cover of suitable material to protect the mix during transit.

3. Insulation, if required, so that the mix can be delivered to the paving machine at the specified temperature or not more than 25 degrees F less than the discharge temperature at the plant.

4. Do not produce bituminous mixed material when the surface on which the material to be placed is wet or otherwise unsuitable; the air temperature is below 40 degrees F or when other conditions would prevent the proper placing and compacting of the mix.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS – HOT MIX PAVEMENTS

A. The following shall conform to Tennessee Department of Transportation Standards and Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition. Alternative mix designs may be submitted to the Engineer for review and consideration.

1. Hot mix pavements.

2. Hot mix base.

3. Hot mix binder.

4. Hot leveling course.

5. Hot mix asphaltic concrete (crushed limestone).

6. Hot mix asphaltic concrete (crushed gravel, slag, or granite).

7. Hot mix leveling course for wearing surface.

8. Cold mix pavements.


9. Cold mix base.

10. Cold mix surface course.

11. Prime coat.

12. Tack coat.

13. Double bituminous surface treatment.

2.03 GEOXTEXTILE FABRICS – REINFORCED ASPHALT CONCRETE OVERLAYS

A. Geotextile fabric shall be woven polypropylene or polyester fabric especially manufactured and treated for this use. Fabric shall be Mirafi MTK 700 or equal. Fabric shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions and in accordance with TDOT specifications and standards.

2.04 PAINTED TRAFFIC MARKINGS

A. Contractor shall replace all markings in accordance with Section 32 17 23 and local, county, state, or federal specifications (depending on jurisdiction) and whichever paint standard is more stringent and matches with existing markings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Permanent restoration of pavements shall not begin until 30 days after trench or structure backfill has been completed in accordance with the applicable specifications or until testing of the installed utility has been completed in accordance with the specifications (whichever is the longest period of time after completion of trench or structural backfill).

1. Completion of backfill shall include compaction tests to ascertain compliance with degree of compaction required as described in Sections 32 11 00 and 31 23 23.

a. Verify base conditions per Sections 31 23 16, 32 11 00, and 31 23 23.

b. Verify that compacted subgrade granular base and existing bituminous surface is dry and ready to support paving.

c. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

B. If painted traffic markings on the pavement are to be interrupted by the new pavement replacement, they are to be restored using an approved TDOT traffic paint.

C. Driveway and Parking Areas

1. Driveways and parking areas that are disturbed or damaged by the Contractor’s operations shall be restored equal to a new condition.

2. Driveway or parking area aprons which do not meet the elevation of the edge of new road pavement installed under this project shall be adjusted to meet the new pavement at a


slope not to exceed 1 inch per foot with top course material of the new pavement, so that the apron conforms to the elevation of the road pavement at each location.

3. New driveways or parking areas shall be constructed as described herein and as shown on the Drawings.

4. Contractor shall completely replace driveway apron from trench to the road edge of pavement if trench is within 10 feet of road edge.

D. Road shoulders to be constructed or reconstructed as described herein and as shown on the Drawings.

1. Road shoulders that are disturbed or damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be restored equal to, or to conditions superior to that which existed prior to construction.

2. Road shoulders that do not meet the elevation of the edge of new road pavement installed under this project shall be adjusted to meet the new pavement at a slope not to exceed 1-1/2 inches per foot. Paving materials shall match existing unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

3. New road shoulders shall be constructed as described herein and as shown on the Drawings.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Construct bases and subgrades in conformance with Sections 31 23 16, 32 11 00, and 31 23 23.

B. Obtain approval of Engineer for the mix and surface to be treated prior to placing any materials.

C. Protect all adjacent trees, surfaces, and structures from the bituminous material during construction.

D. Prepare all receiving surfaces in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the drawings.

E. Where project consists of reconstructing existing streets or driveways, lower valve boxes and existing manholes to subgrade level by removing frame and cover and brick masonry.

1. Cover valve boxes and manholes with steel plates and locate with measured ties.

2. After constructing the subbases and pavement courses, and prior to placing the final top course, recover valve boxes and manholes and raise to finished grade.

F. All existing and new manholes, frames and covers, valve boxes, curb boxes, etc., shall be raised or lowered to be 1/2 inch below the new pavement grade.

1. No manhole covers or valve box covers shall be covered with paving material, or be exposed in a depression in the pavement greater than 1/2 inch.

G. Catch basin frames and grates shall be raised or lowered to be 1 inch below the new pavement finished grade.

H. Pavement Cuts


1. Pavement cuts for final pavement replacement shall be made as described herein and in Section 32 12 83.

2. Pavement cuts shall be made parallel to the centerline of the trench, shall be located a minimum of 12 inches outside the backfilled trench on undisturbed subgrade and shall be in a straight line for minimum length of 100 feet between manholes or between those stations where changes in direction of the installed piping were made.

3. Where a full street width overlay is to be installed the cutbacks may follow the backfilled trench alignment.

4. Loose, torn, cut, marked up or damaged pavement outside the cutback areas shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense and match the proposed permanent paving.

5. Pavement cuts in driveways shall be cut back 12 inches and made in a straight alignment perpendicular or parallel to the driveway and for its full width.

6. Pavement cuts in parking areas shall be cut back 12 inches and made in a straight alignment parallel to the centerline of trench.

I. Preparation of Existing Surfaces

1. Prior to placing of asphalt concrete, the existing pavement surfaces shall be cleaned including brooming, mechanical sweeping, and flushing with water such that no dust or foreign material remains on the existing surface and in accordance with TDOT Specifications and Standards.

2. After cleaning of surface, all unsealed or inadequately sealed cracks and joints shall be cleaned with compressed air and then sealed as required under TDOT specifications and Standards.

3. Prior to placing of asphalt concrete, vertical faces of existing pavement, structures, curbs and gutters shall receive a tack coat as described in TDOT Specification and Standards. Curbs and gutter faces to be sprayed only to the extent to be covered by the asphalt concrete.

J. All new pavement where meeting existing pavement shall be butted up against a vertical face in the existing pavement.

1. This vertical face to be cut to the depth of the new pavement.

2. Where the new pavement is an overlay, the beginning and end of the top course shall be similarly butted against a vertical face.

3. The existing pavement shall be removed for a minimum length of 2 feet, as measured parallel to the direction of paving, or greater if required to eliminate any noticeable bump or to provide adequate drainage away from structures, and to the width of new pavement.

K. Removal of Existing Pavement

1. Where shown on the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall remove a portion of an existing pavement including Portland Cement concrete paving, asphalt concrete pavement, or to remove an asphalt concrete overlay pavement from a Portland cement


concrete pavement base course, to the limits and profile specified by grinding, milling, or planing methods.

2. This process shall yield a base upon which a final pavement course will be applied.

3. Contractor shall employ equipment especially designed and manufactured for the grinding, milling or planing of pavements.

4. In general, grinding machines are designed for removing and profiling Portland Cement concrete pavement surfaces while milling and planing machines are designed for the removing of asphalt concrete pavement surfaces.

L. The resulting ground, milled or planed surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from dust, loose pavement material or other material.

1. The surface shall be free from gouges, large cracks and unsound, soft or broken-up areas.

2. Gouges shall be made level and true by the use of a trueing and leveling course of asphalt concrete if allowed by the Engineer.

3. Cracks greater than 1/4-inch shall be cleaned and filled as described herein and in accordance with TDOT standards.

4. Unsound, soft or broken-up areas shall be excavated and repaired in accordance with Section 32 14 23 of these Specifications.

5. Asphalt concrete removed by these processes shall become the property of the Owner and be stockpiled at a location required by the Owner for subsequent recycling.

3.03 PREPARATION – RESET MANHOLE FRAMES

A. Prior to placing wearing (top) course, make final adjustments of manhole frames, catch basin frames, valve boxes and any other utility structures located in the pavement in relation to finished grade.

1. Manhole frames, valve boxes, etc. to set 1/2 inch below finished grade and parallel to finished crown.

2. Catch basin frames to set 1 inch below finished grade and parallel to finished crown.

a. Bevel slope of wearing course (for 6-inch width) around catch basin frame.

3.04 INSTALLATION – GENERAL

A. Install Work in accordance with TDOT standards and specifications.

B. Place asphalt within four hours of applying primer or tack coat.

C. Compact pavement by rolling. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact with vibratory pans and hand tamps in area inaccessible to rolling equipment.

D. Develop rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.


3.05 LIMITATIONS FOR HOT MIX PAVEMENT

A. Place bituminous plant mix only on an accepted subgrade.

B. Subgrade and the surface upon which the bituminous plant mix is placed shall not be wet nor shall it be raining.

C. Place in accordance with the temperature limitations of the following table and only when weather conditions otherwise permit the pavement to be properly placed, compacted, and finished.

Compacted Thickness Minimum Placement Temperature*

Less than 1-1/2 inches 50 degrees F

1-1/2 inches or more 40 degrees F

* Minimum temperature is for both air and surface, whichever is less at the time of placement. All surface

temperatures shall be measured by laying glass thermometer on surface and read after temperature has

stabilized where the paving is to be placed and the controlling temperature shall be the average of three

temperature readings taken at locations plus or minus 25 feet apart.

3.06 MIXING HOT MIX PAVEMENT

A. Measure and combine dried aggregates and the bituminous material within the mixer in the amount specified by the job-mix formula.

B. After the required materials have been introduced into the mixer, mix until a complete and uniform coating of the particles and a thorough distribution of the bituminous material throughout the aggregate is secured.

C. Wet-mixing time shall be determined by the Engineer for each plant and type of aggregate used, but in no case less than 25 seconds for batch plants and 40 seconds for continuous mix plants.

D. Temperature of the completed mixture (determined at the time it is dumped from the mixer) made with aggregates containing absorbed moisture which causes foaming or boiling shall be not less than 225 degrees F.

E. Temperature for grading A-S mixtures shall be between 225 and 275 degrees F.

3.07 SPREADING AND FINISHING HOT AND COLD MIX PAVEMENT

A. Deliver and spread bituminous mixtures in ample time to secure thorough compaction during daylight hours.

B. Deposit the mixture in the paver hopper within 25 degrees F of the temperature at which it was discharged from the mixer.

C. Place the mixture upon an approved surface, spread, and strike-off to the established line, grade, and elevation by means of approved asphalt paving machines. Surface and air temperatures shall meet the specified requirements prior to placement.

D. Echelon paving will not be permitted on 2-lane projects where traffic is being maintained.


E. Control alignment of the outside edge of the pavement using preset control string lines or other approved methods.

F. For multi-course pavement, the longitudinal joint in one layer shall offset that in the layer immediately before by approximately one foot; for 2 lanes of width, the joint in the top layer shall be at the centerline or at lane lines if the roadway is more than two lanes in width.

G. Coordinate plant production and paving operations so that a uniform continuity of operation is maintained.

H. Use automatic screen controls of such as the string line or ski type grade reference system on all work regardless of the paver width.

1. String line reference system may be required on new construction.

2. If the base has been finished with equipment having automatic grade control or the contractor demonstrates that an alternate method of spreading and finishing will result in a satisfactory riding surface, the Engineer may conditionally waive the string line requirement and authorize use of the ski type reference system.

3. Engineer may at any time require the use of a string line reference system, even if previously waived, if the string line system will result in a superior riding surface.

4. When the string line system is required on a multi-course pavement, use at least two courses exclusive of the surface course.

5. For the ski type system, use the maximum practical length not less than 40 ft.

6. Pavement lanes previously placed with automatic controls or to form grade may serve as longitudinal control reference for placing adjacent lanes by utilizing a ski or joint matching shoe.

I. String line reference system: suitable wire or twine supported by approved devices compatible with the automatic paver control system.

1. String line and supports shall be capable of maintaining the line and grade designated by Drawings at the point of support while withstanding the tensioning necessary to prevent sag in excess of 1/4 inch between supports spaced 50 ft. apart.

2. Install additional supports to provide a minimum spacing of 25 feet, or less as directed by the Engineer, to remove the apparent deviation of the string line from theoretical grade.

3. Establish the reference system from the control points shown on the Drawings.

4. Maintain the reference system until its use is no longer required.

5. String line reference system shall be complete in place at least 300 feet in advance of the point where the pavement is being placed.

J. Automatic screen controls will not be required on sections where service connections or other conditions interfere with their efficient operation.

K. On areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impracticable, take the mixture from the hopper of the spreading machine and distribute immediately into place by means of suitable shovels and other tools


and spread with rakes and lutes in a uniformly loose layer of such depth as will result in a completed course having the required thickness.

3.08 COMPACTION OF HOT AND COLD MIX PAVEMENTS

A. After the bituminous mixture has been spread, stuck off, and surface irregularities adjusted, it shall be thoroughly compacted in accordance with TDOT standards and specifications.

B. Method employed must be approved by the Engineer and be capable of compacting the mixture to the specified density while it is in a workable condition.

C. When no density requirements are specified, employ a system of compaction for roadway pavement which has previously produced required densities. A control strip and random density samples may be employed to aid the Engineer in evaluating the system.

D. Minimum roller requirements:

1. For each paver 16 feet wide or less use two rollers.

2. For each paver 16-26 feet wide, use three rollers.

3. For each paver 26 feed wide or more, use four rollers.

4. Increase the number of rollers if the required results are not being obtained.

5. Alternative roller arrangements may be submitted to the Engineer for consideration.

E. Minimum number of rollers listed above may, with the approval of the Engineer, be reduced to one roller of either the steel-wheel or vibratory type on the following types of construction:

1. On shoulder construction.

2. On incidental construction such as bridge approaches, driveways, etc.

3. On projects containing less than 10,000 square yards of bituminous pavement.

F. Begin rolling at the low side and proceed longitudinally parallel to the road centerline.

1. When paving in echelon or abutting a previously placed lane, roll the longitudinal joint first, followed by the regular rolling procedure.

2. When paving in echelon, do not compact within six inches of an edge where an adjacent lane is to be placed.

3. Roll at a slow, uniform speed with the drive wheels nearer the paver and keep as nearly as possible in continuous operation.

4. Continue rolling until all roller marks are eliminated.

G. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the rollers, properly moisten with water or water mixed with very small quantities of detergent or other approved material. An excess of liquid shall not be used. If required to prevent pneumatic tire pickup, the pneumatic drive wheels may be coated with a fine mist spray of fuel oil or other similar material. In all instances, the surface of the pavement shall be protected from drippings of fuel oil or any other solvents used in


pavings, compaction or cleaning operations. Do not park or refuel rollers on the bituminous pavements.

H. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory compaction is being obtained or damage to highway components and/or adjacent property is occurring using vibratory compaction equipment, the Contractor shall immediately cease using this equipment and proceed with the work in accordance with the conventional static compaction procedures at no additional cost.

3.09 REQUIRED DENSITY OF HOT MIX PAVEMENTS

A. Bituminous plant mix base, Grading A and B (Black Base and Binder). An average of 90 percent of maximum theoretical density with no individual test less than 87 percent. Density requirements for these mixes will be waived if placed in lifts of two inches or less.

B. Bituminous plant mix base, Grading C (Leveling). Same as for Grading A and B, except density requirements of this mix will be waived if placed in lifts of 1-1/4 inch or less.

C. Bituminous plant mix base, Grading C-W (Leveling-Wearing). An average density not less than 90 percent of maximum theoretical density with no individual test less than 87 percent. Density requirements on this mix will be waived if placed in lifts 1-1/4 inch or less.

D. Bituminous plant mix base, Grading B, BM and BM-2 (Binder). An average of 90 percent of maximum theoretical density with no individual density test less than 87 percent.

E. Asphaltic concrete surface course, Grading D or E. An average of 93 percent of laboratory density as determined by the Marshall Method, 75 blow with no individual test less than 90 percent. When these mixes are used for shoulder construction, the average density shall not be less than 90 percent of maximum theoretical density with no individual test below 87 percent. Density requirements for these mixes will be waived if placed in lifts of one inch or less.

F. Asphaltic surface course, Grading F and sand-asphalt surface course. An average of 92 percent of laboratory density as determined by the two-inch Hubbard-Field Method with no individual density test less than 89 percent. Density requirements on this mix will be waived if placed in lifts of 3/4 inch or less.

G. For density testing purposes, divide the pavement into lots of approximately 10,000 square yards, except for Grading "A", "B" and “BM” with lots of approximately 5,000 square yards. Perform five density tests in each lot and compare the average results with the requirements listed above.

3.10 JOINTS FOR HOT MIX PAVEMENTS

A. Rollers shall not pass over the unprotected end of a freshly laid mixture unless authorized by the Engineer.

B. Form transverse joints by cutting back on the previous run to expose the full depth of the course.

C. When directed by the Engineer, use a brush coat of bituminous material on contact surfaces of transverse joints just before additional mixture is placed against the previously rolled material.

3.11 SEPARATING COLD MIX AGGREGATES

A. Produce the aggregate for the bituminous mixtures in two fractions:


1. Separate Mix No. 1 on the 1-1/4-inch, 1-1/2-inch, or 1-3/4-inch screen.

2. Separate Mix No. 2 on the 1-inch or 1-1/4-inch screen.

3.12 MIXING COLD MIX PAVEMENTS

A. Measure and combine the aggregate and the bituminous material within the mixer in the amount specified by the job-mix formula.

B. Temperature of the bituminous material shall not exceed 180 degrees F. when combined with the mineral aggregate.

C. Mix the materials until a complete and uniform coating of the aggregate particles and a thorough distribution of the bituminous material throughout the aggregate is secured.

D. Mixing time will be determined by the Engineer for each plant and type of aggregate used.

E. The temperature of the completed mixture, determined at the time it is dumped from the mixer, shall not be less than 110 degrees F. nor more than 200 degrees F.

3.13 PLACING PRIME COAT

A. Seasonal and temperature limitations for applying bituminous prime coat shall conform to the same requirements as those specified for the succeeding stage of construction except the prime may be applied to a surface that is slightly damp, but not wet.

B. If prime coat is specified, apply bituminous material to the width of the section to be primed with a pressure distributor at a uniform, continuous spread.

C. Correct any areas containing an excess or deficiency of priming material by adding blotter material or bituminous material.

D. If, after the bituminous material has been applied, it fails to penetrate before the time that the roadway must be used by traffic, spread dry cover material between 8 and 12 pounds per square yard to prevent damage to the primed surface. Avoid an excess of cover material.

3.14 PLACING TACK COAT

A. Immediately after cleaning the surface, apply bituminous material with a pressure distributor at a rate not exceeding 0.05 gallon of residual bitumen per square yard for all materials except asphalt cement.

B. For asphalt cement AC-20, apply at the rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gallons per square yard.

C. Allow the tacked surface to dry until it is in a proper condition to receive the next course.

D. Apply only so far in advance of the paving operations as is necessary to obtain the proper condition of tackiness.

E. Protect the tack coat from damage until the next course is placed.


3.15 DOUBLE BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

A. Make the first application of bituminous material by pressure distributors at a uniform rate of between 0.38 and 0.42 gallons per square yard.

B. Each width of spread shall not be less than one-half the surface to be treated.

C. Before beginning each spread, lay building paper across roadway surfaces with the forward edge exactly coinciding with the end of the preceding covered spread.

D. Start distributors on the paper, the width of which shall be such that the full-force of all nozzles shall be in effect before the forward edge of the paper is reached.

E. Correct all defects in any application at once.

F. Treat areas inaccessible to the distributor either with hand sprays or pouring pots.

G. If less than the full width of roadway is being treated, do not spread aggregate on the inside 6 inches of either the first or second application until the adjacent lane has been treated.

H. Immediately after each application, cover uniformly with Size No. 6 mineral aggregate reasonably free of surface moisture.

I. Spread the aggregate by self-propelled mechanical spreaders between 30 and 40 pounds per square yard. Back the truck on the aggregate being spread and not on or over uncovered bituminous material.

J. Length of spread of bituminous material shall not be in excess of that which trucks loaded with cover material can immediately cover.

K. Apply the second application of bituminous material in the same manner as the first application, at a uniform rate between 0.30 and 0.35 gallon per square yard as established by the Engineer.

L. Spread mineral aggregate, Size No. 7, in the same manner as the first spread at a rate of 20 to 25 pounds per square yard.

M. Hand-broom each spread of cover aggregate for uniform coverage. Place additional aggregate by hand on thin or bare areas.

N. Roll the entire surface, beginning at the edges and progressing to the center, within 30 minutes after spreading. Initial rolling shall normally be done with a pneumatic tire roller, followed by steel-wheel rolling.

O. Allow the first application to cure for such length of time as deemed necessary before the second application is begun. Immediately before the second application of bituminous material, roll the surface with a steel-wheel roller.

P. Repeat the same rolling and curing procedures required in making the first application for the second application.

Q. Allow slow-moving traffic to use sections of the roadway where the bituminous material has been covered with mineral aggregate.


3.16 DRIVEWAY AND PARKING AREAS

A. Paving materials, type of paving, depth of various courses, etc., shall be as shown on the Drawings.

1. Driveways and parking areas shall be cut back 12 inches from outside disturbed or damaged areas as described above and in Section 32 12 83.

2. Minimum depth of the subbase shall be 8 inches of No. 57 aggregate as defined by TDOT Standards and Specifications.

3. Work shall include proper compaction of any necessary subbase, base course and paving courses, in accordance with Sections 32 11 00 and 31 23 23.

B. Bituminous surfaces shall be restored with asphalt concrete matching existing, but in no case shall be less than 2 inches of binder and 1 inch of wearing (top) course as specified in the applicable Articles of this Section.

3.17 TOLERANCES

A. Surface Tolerance - The pavement surface shall be constructed to a 1/4-inch tolerance. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the pavement surface is not being constructed or has not been constructed to this tolerance based upon visual observation or upon riding quality, he may test the surface with a 16-foot straight edge (furnished by the Contractor) or string line placed parallel to the centerline of the pavement and with a 10-foot straight edge or string line placed transversely to the centerline of the pavement on any portion of the pavement.

1. Variations exceeding 1/4-inch shall be satisfactorily corrected or the pavement relayed at no additional cost as ordered by the Engineer.

B. Thickness Tolerance - The thickness indicated for each of the various courses of bituminous pavement is the nominal thickness. The pavement shall be so constructed that the final compacted thickness is as near to the nominal thickness as is practical, and within the tolerances specified below.

1. Material which is part of a trueing or leveling course or shim course will not be considered in pavement thickness determinations.

2. A tolerance not to exceed 1/4-inch from the nominal thickness required for the course specified under one pay item will be acceptable where the required nominal thickness is 4 inches or less. A tolerance not to exceed 1/2-inch from the nominal thickness required for the course or courses specified under one pay item will be acceptable where the required nominal thickness is over 4 inches. In addition, the sum total thickness of all bituminous mixture courses shall not vary from the total of the nominal thickness indicated on the Drawings by more than 1/4 inch where the total nominal thickness is 4 inches or less; or more than 1/2-inch where the total nominal thickness is over 4 inches but not more than 8 inches; and by not more than 5/8-inch where the total nominal thickness is more than 8 inches.

3.18 PROTECTION

A. Any pavement, constructed or reconstructed, which is subsequently damaged due to activity of work under this contract, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.


B. Protect pavement from vehicular traffic until compaction is completed.

C. After installation of binder course, install asphalt patching materials as described in Section 32 14 23 around manhole covers or other facilities that may be damaged due to the top course not being installed.

3.19 TESTING OF ASPHALT CONCRETE

A. Contractor shall engage a testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner and Engineer to perform “Marshall Tests” on the asphalt concrete supplies in accordance with Section 01 45 29. The tests to determine percent air voids, asphalt content, mix gradation and thickness of courses in the pavement after placing and compaction. The following table lists the size and type of projects and number of such tests:

TESTING OF ASPHALT CONCRETE

Description

Marshall Test

Field Cores and Air Void, Asphalt Content, Gradation and Thickness

of Pavement Determination

Projects consisting of OVERLAY over existing pavement:

a) Up to 1,000 tons of material placed

b) Over 1,000 tons of material placed

a) None

b) 2 tests for each 1,000 tons placed

a) None

b) 10 cores and tests for each 1,000 tons placed

Projects consisting of NEW ROAD OR STREET construction or reconstruction:

a) ≤200 tons of top course material placed

b) Between 200 tons and 300 tons of top course material placed

c) Over 300 tons of top course material placed

a) None

b) 2

c) 1 test for each additional 100 tons placed

a) None

b) Minimum of two for each 100 tons placed

c) 2 for each additional 100 tons placed

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 12 83

PAVEMENT CUTTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Pavement cutting.

2. Pavement scoring.

3. Pavement (concrete) breaking.

4. Pavement grinding.

5. Pavement removal and disposal.








1.02 REFERENCES

A. Tennessee Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition.

B. Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices


A. Coordinate pavement cutting with utility companies.

B. Conform to applicable local, state, and federal codes for legal disposal of pavement materials.

C. Refer to Section 31 11 00 for requirements of disposal of surplus material.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Notify local officials, Fire and Police Departments of streets to be blocked off, detours or restrictions to maintaining of traffic on a daily basis.

B. Set up barricades, warning signs and traffic direction information prior to start of pavement cutting.

C. Provide flagmen to direct traffic.

3.02 PAVEMENT CUTTING AND BREAKING

A. Pavements covering those areas to be excavated shall be broken up, removed, and then disposed of in accordance with Section 31 11 00. All paved areas shall be first cut or scored continuously along a straight line, parallel to and on each side of the centerline of the trench or excavation, at a width sufficient for the trench excavation or structure excavation.

B. Pavement cuts in concrete pavement or pavement with a concrete base shall be made by scoring or cutting the concrete with a concrete saw. The depth of the saw cut shall be to the full depth of the concrete pavement thickness. Before excavation, the concrete pavement shall then be broken up with hand operated, pneumatic paving breakers, or mechanical drop hammers designed for such purpose, providing they may be used without endangering existing utilities or causing undesirable vibrations. Hoe-rams or “Headache balls” will not be permitted for breaking up concrete pavement.

C. Pavements cuts in blacktop pavement shall be made by scoring or cutting the pavement with a concrete saw, wheel cutter, pneumatic paving breaker or drop hammer type pavement cutter. The pavement cut must be continuous, and made for the full depth of the pavement.

D. Pavement cuts for final pavement replacement shall be made as outlined above. Pavement cuts shall be made parallel to the centerline of the trench, shall be located at a minimum of 12 inches outside the backfilled trench on undisturbed subgrade and shall be in a straight line for minimum length of 100 feet between manholes or between those stations where changes in direction of the installed piping were made. Where a full street width overlay is to be installed the cutbacks may follow the backfilled trench alignment. Loose, torn, cut, marked up or damaged pavement outside the cutback areas shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense and match the proposed permanent paving.

E. Pavement cuts in driveways shall be made in a straight alignment perpendicular or parallel to the driveway and for its full width.

F. Pavement cuts in parking areas shall be made in a straight alignment parallel to the centerline of trench.

G. Material removed by these processes shall be removed and disposed of off-site at Contractor’s expense.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 13 13

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Concrete pads in front of overhead coiling doors.

2. Placing, Finishing and Curing.

3. Tolerances.

4. Field Quality Control.

5. Aggregate Base Preparation.

B. Related documents:


2. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Formwork.

3. Section 03 15 00 – Concrete Accessories.

4. Section 03 21 00 – Concrete Reinforcement.

5. Section 03 31 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.

6. Section 03 35 00 – Concrete Finishing.

7. Section 03 39 00 – Concrete Curing.

8. Section 31 11 00 – Site Preparation and Clearing.

9. Section 31 23 16 – Excavation, Trenching and Grading.


11. Section 32 11 00 – Base and Subgrade Treatment under Pavement.

12. Section 32 12 83 – Pavement Cutting.

13. Section 32 14 23 – Pavement Patching.

14. Section 32 17 23 – Pavement Marking.


1.02 REFERENCES


B. Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

C. Additional References:

Reference Title

ACI 304 Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete

ASTM A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM D1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

ASTM D1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

FS TT-C-800 Curing Compound, Concrete, for New and Existing Surfaces


A. Paving and repaving accomplished under this contract shall meet the finished grades, elevations and profiles shown on the Drawings.

1. Where pavement replacement is being accomplished, match the sectional profiles of the existing pavement unless otherwise stated herein or shown on the Drawings.

B. All thicknesses of pavement courses described herein or shown on the Drawings are after completion of compaction.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall provide certification of TDOT approved job mix formulas for types to be used on this project. TDOT approvals shall be less than 12 months old.

1. If TDOT approvals are not available, Contractor shall obtain independent verification of the asphalt mix design compliance with TDOT standards and these Contract Documents from a TDOT certified laboratory.

B. Provide product data for the following, if proposed to be used:


1. Joint filler.

2. Admixtures.

3. Curing Compounds.


A. Perform work in accordance with the latest edition of TDOT Standards and Specifications as they apply to the following:

1. Materials and batch plant requirements.

2. Construction procedures except as modified herein.

3. Weather and seasonal limitations except as modified herein.

a. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F.

1) Protect surfaces of freshly placed concrete from adverse weather conditions, rain, freezing, and damage from defacement.

B. Perform work in accordance with Sections 03 11 00, 03 21 00, 03 15 00, 03 31 00, 03 35 00, and 03 39 00 as applicable.

C. Paving work shall be performed by a qualified paving contractor or subcontractor acceptable to the Owner and Engineer.

D. Obtain concrete materials from same source throughout project.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate field work under provision of Sections 01 31 13 and 01 51 00 including maintenance of traffic, access to private driveways, and emergency vehicle access.

1.07 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule the paving operations such that all paving necessary to provide safe and adequate maintenance and protection of traffic or for protection of previously laid courses is completed within the weather limitations.

1. Such scheduling shall include expediting construction operations to permit paving before the weather limitations or by limiting the length of work to that which can be completed before weather stops work.

2. Cost of scheduling and sequencing of work to conform to the weather limitations shall be reflected in the bid prices for the related contract items.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall maintain driving surfaces, free of ruts and potholes, for maintenance of traffic until temporary paving or permanent paving is installed.


1. All temporary paving and pavement replacement shall be maintained in a safe, drivable condition until the pavement wearing course is installed.

2. All subgrade, subbase and base courses shall also be maintained in their specific finish condition prior to placement of the next course.

B. If the Contractor fails to complete the necessary paving operations prior to weather limitations, all temporary materials and work which become necessary as a result of such failure, such as the lowering or shimming of castings and protrusions, drainage of the roadway, providing acceptable rideability, and other work needed for the adequate maintenance and protection of traffic until paving operations can resume, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

C. For a period of one year after issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall promptly patch, maintain, repair, and/or replace any pavement that settles or becomes damaged due to settlement or defective materials or workmanship.

1. Areas to be repaired shall be cut out in a square or rectangular shape to the depth matching the top course.

2. Adjacent existing concrete shall be chemically treated before placement of new concrete to allow a chemical bond to form between the old and new concrete.

3. If more than top course depth of 1-1/2 inch settlement has occurred, the pavement shall be removed to the subbase and subbase and/or binder and base course restored to proper grade before restoration of the wearing course.

4. Centerline finished grade, in any case, shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL MATERIALS

A. Mineral Aggregate shall meet the general requirements of Section 32 11 00 and additional requirements specified for each type paving mixture.

B. Contractor shall furnish test reports for aggregate and concrete materials to be approved for quality by the Engineer prior to incorporation into the concrete.

C. Engineer may require samples of aggregate, concrete materials, or the plant mixed material for testing in an independent laboratory.

D. All methods of sampling and testing will be in accordance with current AASHTO methods for use on highway materials and TDOT standards and specifications.

E. Submit a concrete job-mix formula for approval by the Engineer, for each mix to be used on the project in accordance with Section 03 31 00.

F. Submit a new job-mix formula if a change in materials is made or if an unsatisfactory mixture results.

G. Concrete mixing plants, either batch or continuous, sufficiently equipped and coordinated to provide paving mixes in an amount necessary for orderly prosecution of the work and to:


1. Produce a uniform mixture having complete and uniform coating of all aggregate and a uniform distribution of the concrete material in the mix.

2. A canvas cover or cover of suitable material to protect the mix during transit.

3. Do not produce concrete material when the surface on which the material to be placed is wet or otherwise unsuitable; the air temperature is below 40 degrees F or when other conditions would prevent the proper placing and compacting of the mix.

2.02 FORM MATERIALS

A. As specified in Section 03 11 00 and in accordance with TDOT standards.

B. Form material shall be profiled to suit conditions.

2.03 JOINT FILLER

A. Joint Filler – In accordance with TDOT standards.

2.04 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants – In accordance with TDOT standards.

2.05 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcement – in accordance with TDOT standards.

2.06 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Provide concrete materials, air entrainment, and slump requirements in accordance with TDOT standards and Section 03 31 00.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Curing and sealing of wearing course cement-concrete shall be by the impervious membrane method using a clear or white chlorinated rubber base or polymer resin base curing compound which meets ASTM Specification C309 Type 1-D and TDOT standards.

1. Coverage shall be complete and at a rate of not more than 300 square feet per gallon.

2. Acceptable products are EUCO floor coat by the Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, Ohio; Protex Triple Seal by Protex Industries, Denver, Colorado or equal.

3. Curing of base course concrete to be covered by asphalt courses shall be waterproof blankets, polyethylene curing covers and quilted covers. Sprayed or curing compounds shall not be used on base courses.

2.08 PAINTED TRAFFIC MARKINGS

A. Contractor shall replace all markings in accordance with Section 32 17 23 and local, county, state, or federal specifications (depending on jurisdiction) and whichever paint standard is more stringent and matches with existing markings.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Permanent restoration of pavements shall not begin until 30 days after trench or structure backfill has been completed in accordance with the applicable specifications or until testing of the installed utility has been completed in accordance with the specifications (whichever is the longest period of time after completion of trench or structural backfill).

1. Completion of backfill shall include compaction tests to ascertain compliance with degree of compaction required as described in Sections 32 11 99 and 31 23 23.

a. Verify base conditions per Sections 31 23 16, 32 11 00, and 31 23 23.

b. Verify that compacted subgrade granular base or existing concrete surface is dry and ready to support paving.

c. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

B. If painted traffic markings on the pavement are to be interrupted by the new pavement replacement, they are to be restored using an approved TDOT traffic paint.

C. Driveway and Parking Areas

1. Driveways and parking areas that are disturbed or damaged by the Contractor’s operations shall be restored equal to a new condition.

2. Driveway or parking area aprons which do not meet the elevation of the edge of new road pavement installed under this project shall be adjusted to meet the new pavement at a slope not to exceed 1 inch per foot with top course material of the new pavement, so that the apron conforms to the elevation of the road pavement at each location.

3. New driveways or parking areas shall be constructed as described herein and as shown on the Drawings.

4. Contractor shall completely replace driveway apron from trench to the road edge of pavement if trench is within 10 feet of road edge.

D. Road shoulders to be constructed or reconstructed as described herein and as shown on the Drawings.

1. Road shoulders that are disturbed or damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be restored equal to, or to conditions superior to that which existed prior to construction.

2. Road shoulders that do not meet the elevation of the edge of new road pavement installed under this project shall be adjusted to meet the new pavement at a slope not to exceed 1-1/2 inches per foot. Paving materials shall match existing unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

3. New road shoulders shall be constructed as described herein and as shown on the Drawings.

4. Compact shoulders in accordance with Section 31 23 23.


5. Base course shall be in accordance with TDOT standards and Sections 31 23 16 and 32 11 00.

3.02 UTILITIES

A. Where project consists of reconstructing existing streets, lower valve boxes and existing manholes to subgrade level by removing frame and cover and brick masonry.

1. Cover valve boxes and manholes with steel plates and locate with measured ties.

2. After constructing the subbases and aggregate base course, and prior to placing the concrete base or top course, recover valve boxes and manholes and raise to finished grade.

a. Utility manhole frames, valve boxes and catch basin frames to be set parallel to finished grade and crown.

3.03 PAVEMENT CUTS

A. Pavement cuts for final pavement replacement shall be made as described herein and in Section 32 12 83.

1. Pavement cuts shall be made parallel to the centerline of the trench, shall be located a minimum of 12 inches outside the backfilled trench on undisturbed subgrade and shall be in a straight line for minimum length of 100 feet between manholes or between those stations where changes in direction of the installed piping were made.

2. Where a full street width overlay is to be installed the cutbacks may follow the backfilled trench alignment.

3. Loose, torn, cut, marked-up or damaged pavement outside the cutback areas shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense and match the proposed permanent paving.

4. Pavement cuts in driveways shall be cut back 12 inches and made in a straight alignment perpendicular or parallel to the driveway and for its full width.\

5. Pavement cuts in parking areas shall be cut back 12 inches and made in a straight alignment parallel to the centerline of trench.

3.04 SUBBASE

A. Construct bases and subgrades in conformance with Sections 31 23 16, 32 11 00, and 31 23 23.

3.05 PREPARATION

A. Obtain approval of Engineer for the mix and surface to be treated prior to placing any materials.

B. Protect all adjacent trees, surfaces, and structures during construction.

C. Prepare all receiving surfaces in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the drawings.


D. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. Refer to Section 03 31 00.

E. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin frames, if and as necessary, with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement.

F. Notify Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

G. Construct or correct the base to such grade tolerances as will insure the concrete pavement thickness required in accordance with Section 32 11 00.

H. The base grading machine and slip-form paver shall be equipped with automatic line guidance and grade controls.

3.06 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install Work in accordance with TDOT standards and specifications.

3.07 REINFORCEMENT

A. Place welded wire fabric reinforcement at 1/4 the pavement depth and measured from the bottom of the pavement slab or as required by TDOT standards.

1. Support on approved metal supports.

B. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints.

C. Place dowels or reinforcement to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.

3.08 FORMING

A. Place and secure forms to correct location, elevation and profile.

B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

C. Place expansion or construction premoulded bituminous 3/4-inch joint filler in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.

1. Extend for full width and full depth leaving room for top sealer, either liquid sealer or premolded elastomeric sealer.

3.09 PLACING, FINISHING AND CURING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with TDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Part 5 – Rigid Pavement, Section 501 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, except as modified by this Section and Section 03 31 00. Conflicts between the TDOT standards and those specified herein shall be resolved in favor of the more stringent standards.

B. For areas of trench replacement of less than 1/2 pavement width or small or irregular areas, hand methods of placing, spreading, vibrating and finishing may be substituted for mechanical methods.

C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints and other components are not disturbed during concrete placement.


D. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

E. Cement concrete base course (for asphalt concrete wearing course) finish shall be a scratched finish consisting of first leveling and floating the surface to the correct grade and then roughening the surface with stiff brushes or rakes before final set.

3.10 JOINTS

A. New Concrete Pavements:

1. Place contraction joints at 20 foot intervals. Align curb, gutter and sidewalk joints.

2. Place expansion joints at 100 foot intervals, at changes in direction, irregular shaped areas, around structures, for construction joints at the end of each day’s paving or where paving is interrupted for more than 30 minutes.

B. Existing Concrete Pavements:

1. Where replacing existing concrete surfaces, match existing jointing systems.

C. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler 1/4 inch for sealant placement.

D. Contraction joints to be formed or sawed to within 1 inch of the center of reinforcing.

E. Provide keyed joints where shown on Drawings.

F. Cement Concrete Base Course Joints:

1. Sealing of joints in base course concrete is required before placing a wearing course of asphalt concrete.

G. Cement Concrete Base Course Curing:

1. Sprayed on curing compounds shall not be used on base courses.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Sections 01 45 00 and Section 03 31 00.

B. Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with ACI 301 and Section 03 31 00.

C. The surface shall be tested after screeding is completed, but before initial set of concrete occurs. Irregularities of more than 1/8-inch shall be corrected before the pavement hardens.

3.12 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Painted traffic markings on the pavement to be restored where interrupted as a result of the work of this Contract.

1. They are to be restored using an approved traffic paint. Refer to Section 32 17 23.


3.13 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures and mechanical injury.

B. Any pavement, constructed or reconstructed, which is subsequently damaged due to activity of work under this contract, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 14 23

PAVEMENT PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Bituminous pavement patching.

2. Compaction.








1.02 REFERENCES

A. Tennessee Department of Transportation (TDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition.

B. Other applicable TDOT requirements and standards.

C. Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices

1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS

A. Patching to be done only when temperature and weather meet the requirements as described in Section 32 12 00.

1.04 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule patching work in coordination with local authorities having jurisdiction over the site.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Refer to Sections 32 11 00 and 31 23 23 aggregate for description of screened gravel or crushed stone for base course.

B. Refer to Section 32 12 00 for description of bituminous material for patching.

1. Patches up to 2 inches deep install wearing course asphalt concrete.

2. Patches over 2 inches deep use a combination of courses of base, binder and wearing course as approved by the Engineer.

C. Provide asphalt emulsion for tack coating of existing edges of patch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. All bituminous pavement patching shall be done with asphalt concrete material matching existing pavement.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prior to all patching, the effected area shall be cut out as per Section 32 12 83 in a rectangular or square shaped manner.

1. Cutting and removal of existing material to extend 12 inches outside the effected area.

2. Two sides of the area shall be at right angles to the direction of traffic.

3. All material within the cut-out area to be removed down to a firm subgrade and disposed off site as surplus material.

4. The surface area to be cleaned of all partially weathered or disturbed material and compacted to provide a clean hard foundation and clean interface between patch and existing pavement.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Subbase shall be brought to grade with No. 57 aggregate defined by TDOT standards.

1. For bituminous patching a tack coat shall be applied to the vertical faces of the existing pavement prior to placing asphalt material. Refer to Section 32 12 00.

B. A bituminous (asphalt concrete) patch shall then be applied to a depth equal to the original bituminous material, but not less than two courses of 1-1/2 inches each (material to be placed against the edges of the hole first).

1. Avoid pulling material from center of patch to the edges, instead if more material is needed at the edge, it should be deposited there, and the excess raked away.


2. Sufficient material should be used to ensure that after compaction, the patched surface will be at the correct grade and slope, slightly higher than the adjacent pavement, and not below the adjacent pavement.

3. Each course shall be thoroughly compacted by the use of mechanical tampers, vibratory plate compactors and hand tampers for small areas and roller for large areas.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. After completion of patching, the Contractor shall check smoothness with straight edge or stringline. Deviations of 1/8 inch or more shall be corrected.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 32 15 00

TEMPORARY PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Temporary paving of roads, streets, driveways, parking areas, and walks.

2. Schedule.

3. Compaction.

4. Maintenance.

5. Tolerances.







1.02 REFERENCES



1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. None.

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Provide temporary paving consisting of Type A No. 67 crushed stone in conformance with Section 31 23 23 compacted to a minimum depth of 6 inches.

A. Provide temporary paving as detailed on the Contract Drawings.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that aggregate base has been compacted and graded in accordance with Section 31 23 16.

B. Verify that traffic controls, as required, are in place in accordance with Section 01 57 00.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Install traffic control devices, as required, in accordance with the Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

B. Excavate, fill, grade and compact the aggregate base coarse surface to a smooth, stable condition prior to placing of the temporary paving.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Temporary paving to match the slope, grade and alignment of the original pavement, driveway, parking area, or walk.

B. Temporary paving to match the elevation of the adjacent surface and to continue the existing drainage pattern.

3.04 SCHEDULE

A. Place temporary paving as directed by the Engineer over all trenches, excavations in streets, driveways, parking areas, and walks as soon as the backfilling and compaction operations have been completed.

1. In any event, required surfaces shall be temporarily paved by each Friday afternoon prior to the weekend shutdown of construction activity.

2. Contractor shall replace painted traffic markings, as necessary, or provide alternative traffic markings in accordance with local, county, or state specifications (depending on jurisdiction).

3.05 MAINTENANCE

A. Temporary pavement to be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, Owner, and authorities have jurisdiction over project.

B. Contractor shall install additional material, as necessary throughout construction, to maintain a satisfactory surface at no additional cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 16 13

CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Concrete curbs, gutters, and sidewalks.

2. Base preparation.

3. Formwork including shoring, bracing, and anchorage.

4. Reinforcement including required supports, spaces, and related accessories.

5. Placing, finishing, and curing.

6. Tolerances.

7. Flatness test.

8. Warranty.








7. Section 32 90 00 – Site Rehabilitation

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C-33 – Concrete Aggregates.

B. ASTM C-309 – Liquid membrane forming compounds for curing concrete.

C. ASTM D-1751 – Preformed Expansion Joint Filler.

D. TDOT Standards and Specifications.



A. Contractor shall perform all work within the prescribed temperature, moisture and weather limitations imposed herein and by Section 03 31 00.

B. Competent, experienced concrete finishers shall be employed for this work.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Per Division 03 specifications.

B. Submit curing procedures and single-page catalog cuts of any proposed curing products.


A. Perform work as described herein and in accordance with Division 03 specifications.

B. Obtain all concrete and its materials from the same source throughout construction.

C. Wavy undulating, or ponding walks will not be acceptable and shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.


A. Conform to TDOT standards and specifications for placement of sidewalks, curbs, and gutters and the requirements of this Section, whichever is more stringent.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not place concrete when base surface is less than 40 degrees F or when surface is frozen.

B. Do not place concrete when the air temperature is 40 degrees F and falling.

C. Do not place concrete on saturated sub-grade.

D. Protect surface of freshly placed concrete from adverse weather conditions, rain, freezing and damage or defacement from vandalism.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. For a period of one year after issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall promptly maintain, repair, and/or replace any sidewalk, curb, or gutter which settles, cracks or becomes damaged due to settlement or defective materials or workmanship.

1. If settlement or tilting of plus or minus 1/4 inch or more as measured length or width each square block has occurred, the sidewalk, curb, or gutter shall be removed and the subbase and/or base course restored to proper grade before restoration of the surface course.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FORM MATERIALS

A. Either wood or steel, free from warp with sufficient strength to resist the pressure of the concrete without springing, extending for the full depth of concrete.

B. Use curbed forms of proper radius on all radial sections and of acceptable design to Engineer.

C. Use 1/8-inch thick metal templates between 10 foot section with:

1. Width – same as curb, gutter, or sidewalk.

2. Depth – at least 1/4-inch more than curb, gutter, or sidewalk depth.

3. Lugs or other devices to hold templates in position and permit removal without causing damage to concrete.

D. Use a metal strike-off template to shape the top surface of gutters or sidewalks.

2.02 AGGREGATE BASE

A. Aggregate base course shall be a minimum of 4 inches of No. 57 aggregate as defined by TDOT Standards and Specifications for sidewalks, curbs, and gutters.

2.03 REINFORCING

A. Reinforcing steel shall comply with ASTM A615, Grade 60.

B. Welded wire mesh reinforcement shall consist of 6-inch by 6-inch – 6/6 wire fabric in accordance with ASTM A185, Drawings, and Section 03 21 00.

C. Dowel Bards shall comply with ASTM A36 or A307.

2.04 CONCRETE

A. Use Class "A" concrete as specified in Section 03 31 00.

2.05 JOINT MATERIALS

A. 1/2-inch thick preformed filler, unless otherwise specified.

B. Cut to full cross section of curb, gutter, and/or sidewalk.

C. True, even, and of satisfactory appearance.

D. Expansion joint material shall be bituminous joint filler in accordance with ASTM D-1751.

E. Joint sealant to be a grey polyurethane sealant.

1. Acceptable products are the following or equal:

a. Sikaflex 1CSL by Sika Corporation

b. Sonolastic SL2 by Sonneborn


2.06 CURING

A. Curing shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 00.

B. After the seven-day cure is complete, the concrete shall be sealed with a sealer membrane compound manufactured by Sika Corporation, “Sikagard 701W,” Anti-Hydro “Clear Cure,” or equal. Apply sealer in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Coordinate with the membrane curing compound in used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade has been properly graded and compacted to receive aggregate base course.

B. Verify that aggregate base course is properly compacted and graded to receive concrete.

C. Verify forms are correctly placed true to line and grade.

D. Contractor shall construct all walks, curbs, and gutters in accordance with the spot elevations, details, and cross sections shown on the Drawings.

E. Finished grade and alignment of sidewalk, curb, and gutter replacements to match existing conditions, jointing and shape that existed prior to removal, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clear construction area in accordance with Section 31 11 00.

B. Subgrade

1. In accordance with Sections 32 11 00 and 31 23 23, the subgrade shall be free from all bumps, depressions, standing water, roots, organic material and all deleterious material.

2. The subgrade shall be graded, leveled and compacted by tamping or rolling to a smooth surface, parallel to the final surface.

3. Subgrade shall be at a minimum depth of 10 inches below final grade for sidewalks.

4. Thoroughly wet base or subgrade prior to placing concrete.

C. Prior to the start of each day’s concrete placement, the sidewalk, curb, and gutter forms shall be placed and graded to the proper alignment and grade.

D. Where new or replacement concrete sidewalk, curb, or gutter is to meet existing sidewalk, curb, or gutter, the existing sidewalk, curb, and gutter shall be removed back to the first expansion or contraction joint.

1. In all cases the horizontal and vertical faces of the new sidewalk, curb, or gutter shall be flush with the face of the existing sidewalk, curb, and gutter.


2. Grading of the new sidewalk, curb, or gutter shall be performed so as to continue drainage in its existing pattern.

E. Tree roots which interrupt the proposed alignment and profile on the new sidewalk, curb, or gutter shall be removed to provide a 6 inch clearance between root and edge or bottom of sidewalk, curb, or gutter.

F. Any valve boxes, curb boxes, manhole covers, etc., encountered or to be located in the sidewalk area shall be adjusted so that the cover is flush with the top surface of the sidewalk.

1. All valve boxes, curb boxes, etc., shall be left in such a way that the covers are easily removed and the boxes shall function in the manner in which they were intended.

2. All covers shall be cleaned and restored to their original condition, free from concrete and asphalt.

G. Other obstacles such as power poles or street lights which interfere with sidewalk, curb, or gutter alignment shall remain in place and the alignment of the sidewalk, curb, or gutter adjusted as approved by the Engineer.

3.03 FORMWORK

A. Place forms so finished concrete will be true to line, grade, and cross section as shown on the Drawings.

B. Uniform section lengths - Maximum of 10 feet and minimum of 6 feet.

C. Place joints at locations shown on drawings or in line with joints of adjoining construction, unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

D. Brace and stake forms to maintain vertical and horizontal alignment until their removal.

E. Carefully set templates and leave in place until the concrete has set sufficiently to hold its shape. Remove templates while forms are still in place.

F. Provide construction joints between new construction and all adjoining construction and around all utility appurtenances extending into the sidewalks, unless otherwise specified.

G. Clean and coat forms with light oil immediately before placing concrete.

3.04 CONCRETE PLACING

A. Concrete thickness shall be 6 inches for sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Curbing shall have a minimum height of 6 inches or as shown of the Drawings. Widths shall be shown on the Drawings.

B. All curbs and gutters shall be installed to a straight alignment parallel to the centerline of the road, or along the required radius or curvature shown on the Drawings, or along the line which existed prior to construction.

C. Deposit the concrete on the base:

1. When central or transit mixed concrete is used, place the mixture where it will require as little rehandling as possible.


2. Continuously place between transverse joints without the use of intermediate bulkheads.

3. Perform necessary hand spreading with shovels, or other approved tools.

4. Do not allow workmen to walk in the freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoes coated with foreign substances.

D. Consolidate concrete against and along the faces of all forms and along the full length and on both sides of all joint assemblies, by means of vibrators inserted in the concrete.

1. Fresh concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated without damaging or misaligning the forms.

2. The vibrator shall be introduced into the concrete at 1 foot intervals for a period of at least 2 seconds for each immersion and shall vibrate at not less than 5,000 impulses per minute.

3. Do not permit vibrators to come in contact with a joint assembly, the grade, or a side form.

4. Do not operate the vibrator longer than 5 seconds in any one location.

5. Operate vibrators mounted on a machine only while in motion.

E. Deposit concrete as near to expansion and contraction joints as possible without disturbing them, but do not dump from the discharge bucket or hopper onto a joint assembly unless the hopper is well-centered on the joint assembly.

F. Curbs and gutters shall be cast in place in sections approximately 15 feet long, and provision made at each joint for expansion.

1. Expansion joints 1/2 inch in width shall be located opposite each pavement or sidewalk expansion joint.

2. Expansion joint material shall be premolded bituminous, cut to conform to the cross section of the curb and be set slightly indented.

G. Final horizontal surface of sidewalks, curbs or gutters shall be leveled, floated and allowed to “set” slightly prior to the final finishing.

H. New or replacement concrete sidewalks, curbs or gutters at crosswalks shall be constructed to the standards for access by physically handicapped persons and in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and the Americans With Disabilities Act.

I. Should any concrete materials fall on or be worked into the surface of a complete slab, remove immediately by approved methods.

J. Provide a 1/2-inch slope to drain sidewalks.

3.05 FINISHING CONCRETE – GENERAL

A. When necessary, strike-off concrete using transverse templates resting upon the side forms.

B. Remove templates, then the forms when the concrete has set sufficiently to hold its shape.

C. Tamp and screed concrete true to grade and section, bringing sufficient mortar to the surface for finishing.


D. Finish surface with floats and straightedges, when required, to a smooth even finish.

E. Round edges at templates and expansion joints with an edging tool of 1/4-inch radius.

F. Remove all tool marks with a wetted brush or wooden float.

G. Clean the top and ends of expansion joint materials and trim to slightly below the concrete surface.

H. Remove forms, without exerting pressure on the concrete, at any time when such removal will not damage the concrete.

I. Protect concrete work until finally accepted.

J. Remedy damaged work that has not been accepted by removing and reconstructing each section that is damaged.

3.06 FINISHED CURBS AND GUTTERS

A. No plastering will be permitted.

B. Unless otherwise specified, the edges of the curb and gutter shall be rounded to a radius of 3/4 inch.

C. Finish the back of curbs not less than 3 inches below the top of backfill against the curb.

D. Any exposed surface or surfaces against which some rigid type of construction is to be made shall be left smooth and uniform so as to permit free movement of the curb, gutter, or combined curb and gutter.

E. When the use of curb machines is permitted, finish as specified above except that contraction joints may be sawed a minimum depth of 1/4 the thickness of the section at intervals not less than 6 feet nor more than 10 feet in lieu of construction the curbs in sections.

F. Place weep holes or drainage openings through curbs as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, with at least one-half cubic foot of coarse aggregate behind each opening.

3.07 FINISHING SIDEWALKS

A. When the surface of the concrete is free from water and just before the concrete obtains its initial set, finish and sweep lightly with a broom in order to produce a sandy texture (broom textured finish).

B. Longitudinal surface variations shall be not more than 1/4 inch under a 12 foot straightedge, nor more than 1/8 inch on a 5 foot transverse section.

C. Surface of the concrete shall be so finished as to drain completely at all times.

D. Round the edges, including those along expansion joints and grooves, with an edging tool having a radius of 1/4 inch.

E. Divide the surface of sidewalks into blocks by use of a grooving tool.


1. Space the grooves approximately 5 feet apart with the blocks rectangular unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer.

2. Cut the grooves to a depth of not less than 1 inch.

3. Edge the grooves with an edging tool having a radius of 1/4 inch.

4. Place grooves in median pavement in line with corresponding joints in adjoining construction or as directed by the Engineer.

F. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, place marks or grooves at right angles to the centerline of driveways and approximately 8 inches apart.

1. These markings shall be between 1/8 inch and 1/4 inch in depth and shall be made with a suitable marking tool.

2. A grooving tool, 6 to 8 inches in width, with multiple grooves for grooving alternate strips 8 inches apart, may be used.

3. All marking edges shall be rounded satisfactorily.

G. Do not place grooves in the surface of sidewalks reinforced for beam action where the full thickness of concrete is required for strength.

3.08 CURING

A. Reference Article 2.06 above and Section 03 31 00.

B. No forms shall be removed for at least 24 hours after placement of concrete. Forms shall not be removed beyond 24 hours until concrete can hold its form and shape.

C. Edges and faces of concrete exposed by the removal of forms shall be protected immediately to provide these surfaces with continuous curing treatment equal to the method selected for curing the walk surface.

D. Selection of materials and methods shall provide protection from freezing temperatures.

E. Concrete shall be kept cured and free of vehicles for at least seven days. Where necessary to provide vehicular access, provide suitable bridging or plates (not supported by the fresh concrete) during the curing process.

F. After curing, the exposed concrete surfaces shall be sealed with a liquid-applied sealing membrane as specified above.

3.09 TOLERANCES

A. Finished subgrade shall be plus or minus 1/2-inch of its proposed grades.

B. Finished aggregate base course shall be plus or minus 1/4-inch of its proposed grade.

C. Finished sidewalk surfaces shall be plus or minus 1/4-inch of its proposed grade.

1. Joints having more than 1/4-inch differential between one side or the other shall be corrected to the same elevation.


D. Finished curbs and gutters shall present a neat, uniform and continuous line with no apparent dips, high spots or bulges, or variations in line or grade greater than 1/8-inch as measured by a 10-foot straight edge.

3.10 FLATNESS TEST

A. After the concrete has hardened sufficiently to avoid marking the surface, Engineer shall test the surface, longitudinally and transversely, with a straight edge or string line 6 to 10 feet long (two walk blocks long).

1. Areas with high spots of more than 1/4-inch but not exceeding 1/2-inch shall be marked and ground down with an approved grinding tool such that the surface deviations shall not exceed 1/4-inch in 6 to 10 feet.

a. Grinding shall be accomplished in such a manner as to match the texture of the adjacent walk surfaces.

2. Where surface is concaved and exceeds 1/2-inch in 6 to 10 feet, the sidewalk shall be removed to the nearest joints and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and other loads for at least three (3) days after placement, or until the Engineer has determined that the concrete has attained sufficient strength for such loads.

B. Any sidewalk, constructed or reconstructed, which is subsequently damaged due to negligence or activity of work or failure to protect surfaces from vandalism or becoming marked by vehicular or pedestrian traffic shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.12 GRADING FOR CURBS AND GUTTERS

A. Grading in back of curbing, either new or reset, shall conform to the details shown on the Drawings.

1. When no specific details are shown, Contractor shall backfill with compacted screened (maximum 2 inch size) gravel to driveway or walk subbase or to within 2 inches of top of curb if in lawn areas.

2. The remaining depth to be backfilled with topsoil and lawn restored per Section 32 90 00. Slope backfilled area to drain from sidewalk to curb.

3.13 EXTRUDING/SLIP-FORMING OF CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS

A. Construction of curbs, gutters, and sidewalks using extrusion and/or slip-forming techniques may be approved by the Owner and Engineer. Equipment and methodology proposed for use shall be submitted for review. Additional finishing in accordance with Articles 3.04, 3.05, 3.06, and 3.07 may be required.

END OF SECTION




SECTION 32 17 23

PAVEMENT MARKING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Surface Preparation.

2. Pavement Marking.






1.02 REFERENCES

A. Tennessee Department of Transportation (TDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition.


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Certification that paint and thermoplastics meet specified requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PAINT

A. Shall meet TDOT standards and specifications.

B. White or Yellow as shown on drawings.

C. Paint shall be quick dry traffic marking. Drying time shall be 3 to 5 minutes when heated to application temperature.

D. Application temperature shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Each paint container shall be labeled showing details of paint, application procedure, and date of manufacture.


2.02 DROP ON GLASS BEADS

A. Shall met TDOT standards and specifications.

B. Glass beads shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M-247, Type I moisture resistant beads, with the following gradation:

Sieve Size Percent Passing By

Weight

No. 20 100

No. 30 75-95

No. 50 15-35

No. 100 0-5

2.03 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Shall meet TDOT standards and specifications.

B. Shall be White or Yellow as shown on drawings.

C. Application temperature shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Each container shall be labeled showing details of material, application procedure, and date of manufacture.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Perform pavement marking in accordance with Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices and TDOT specifications and standards.

B. Apply marking in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, but with a minimum wet film thickness of 15 plus or minus 1 mil with 6 pounds of glass beads per gallon.

C. Mark pavement in close conformity to the lines, dimensions, patterns, locations, and details shown on the drawings or established by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 31 00

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Fence framework, fabric, and accessories.

2. Excavation for post bases; concrete foundation for posts and center drop for gates.

3. Operated gates and related hardware.

4. Type I or II fence materials.



2. Section 03 31 00 – Cast-in-place Concrete

3. Section 40 90 00 – Instrumentation and Controls

4. Division 26 - Electrical

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the stricter of the two shall apply as determined by the Engineer.

Reference Title

ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A120 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses

ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A121 Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire

ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A392 Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric

ASTM A428 Weight of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Articles

ASTM A491 Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric

ASTM A569 Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality


Reference Title

ASTM A585 Aluminum Coated Steel Barbed Wire

ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-dip Galvanized Coating

ASTM A817 Metallic-Coated Steel Wire for Chain Link Fence Fabric and Marcelled Tension Wire

ASTM A824 Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for Use With Chain Link

ASTM B221 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bars, Rods, Wire Profiles and Tubes

ASTM F552 Standard Terminology Relating to Chain Link Fencing

ASTM F668 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric

ASTM C94 Ready-mixed Concrete

ASTM F567 Installation of Chain-Link Fence

ASTM F626 Fence Fittings

ASTM F900 Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates

ASTM F934 Standard Colors for Polymer-coated Chain Link Fence Materials

ASTM F1043 Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework

ASTM F1083 Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures

ASTM F1184 Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates

ASTM F1664 PVC-Coated Steel Tension Wire used w/ Chain-Link Fence

ASTM F1665 PVC-Coated Steel Barbed Wire used w/ Chain-Link Fence

ASTM F2200 Automated Vehicular Gate Construction

UL 325 Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators

WLG2445 Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute, Chain Link Fence Wind Load Guide for the Selection of Line Posts and Line Post Spacing

Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI)

Product Manual

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Fence Height – as indicated on Drawings.

B. Line Post Spacing – At intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Straight runs shall not exceed 500 feet provide corner or pull posts for any change in direction of 15 degrees or more.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 01 33 00.

B. Shop Drawings – Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components.

C. Manufacturer’s Product Data – Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware.

D. Certifications:


1. American Welding Society AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code.

2. All welds on the gate frame shall conform to Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record to insure conformance to the AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code. All individual welders shall be certified to AWS D1.2 welding code.

3. Gate manufacturer shall provide independent certification as to the use of a documented Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record to insure conformance to the AWS D1.2 welding code. Upon request, Individual Certificates of Welder Qualification documenting successful completion of the requirements of the AWS D1.2 code shall also be provided.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Submit under provisions of Sections 01 77 00 and 01 78 39.

B. Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts relative to property lines and easements.


A. Fence shall be installed by experienced personnel of a company regularly engaged in this type work. Work shall conform to recommendations of the American Fence Association.

B. Perform Work in accordance with CLFMI Product Manual and manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Obtain chain link fence and gates as a complete unit including necessary fittings and accessories, from a single source provider or manufacturer

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer – Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum five (5) years’ documented experience.

1.08 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Shall be in accordance with Section 01 61 00.

1.09 GUARANTEES AND BONDS

A. The Contractor shall provide guarantee shall be provided against defective materials and workmanship in accordance with requirements of Section 01 78 36.

B. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a special warranty against defective or deficient equipment, workmanship and materials under normal use, operation and service. The warranty shall end fifteen (15) year(s) from the date of Engineer’s written acceptance of the equipment for permanent operation. Cost of materials and labor to repair defects shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. The warranty shall be in printed form and apply to all similar units with Owner named as beneficiary.

1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Field verify that measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and within Owner’s property limits, if not notify Engineer immediately.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Cyclone Fence Division of USX Corporation.

B. Master Halco, Inc., Anchor Fence Products.

C. Or approved equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Framework – Type I or II Steel Pipe.

1. Type I – Schedule 40 steel pipe with 1.8 ounces of zinc coating per square foot of surface area conforming to Standard Specification ASTM F-1083. Yield strength of 30,000 psi. Exterior of pipe to have F1043 PVC thermally fusing color coating; 10 mils minimum thickness. Color to match fence fabric.

2. Type II – Cold formed electric resistance welded steel pipe complying with ASTM F1043 Group IC having minimum steel yield strength of 50,000 psi. External protective coating F1043 Type B, 0.9 ounces per square foot minimum hot-dip zinc coating plus a chromate conversion and a clear polymer coating. Add additional exterior coating of 10 mil minimum thermally fused PVC color coating per ASTM F1043. Color to match fence fabric. Internal coating F1043 Type D, 81-percent nominal zinc pigmented coating minimum 3 mil thick or Type B, minimum 0.9 ounces per square foot zinc.

B. All coatings to be applied inside and out after welding.

C. Pipe shall be straight, true to section and conform to the following weights:

Pipe Size (OD), inches Type I Weight, lbs/ft Type II Weight, lbs/ft

1-5/8 2.27 1.84

1-7/8 2.72 2.28

2-3/8 3.65 3.12

2-7/8 5.79 4.64

3-1/2 7.58 5.71

4 9.11 6.56

6-5/8 18.97 9.76

D. Steel Fabric Wire – Two-inch diamond mesh interwoven wire 9-gauge thick, top selvage twisted tight, bottom selvage knuckle and closed, with minimum tensile strength of 80,000 pounds per square inch. Zinc coating shall be 2.0 ounces of zinc coating per square foot of surface area. Per ASTM A392.

E. PVC-coated Steel Fabric Wire –Two-inch diamond mesh interwoven wire 9-gauge thick, top selvage twisted tight, bottom selvage knuckle and closed, with minimum tensile strength of 80,000 pounds per square inch. PVC coating shall be fused and adhered (Class 2b) per ASTM F668. Color of fabric to be dark green brown black per ASTM F934.


F. Concrete – Mix C as specified in Section 03 31 00.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Fence Posts

Fabric Height, feet

Type I (and II)

Line Post (O.D.), inches

Corner and Terminal Post (O.D.), inches

Up to 6 1-7/8 2-3/8

6 to 8 2-3/8 2-7/8

8 to 10 2-7/8 4

10 to 12 2-7/8 4

12 to 16 4 4 – 6-5/8

B. Gate Posts

1. Fabric heights up to 6 feet.

Single Gate Width, feet Double Gate Width,

feet Post (O.D.) Type I (and II),

inches

Up to 4 Up to 8 2-3/8

4 to 10 8 to 20 2-7/8

10 to 18 20 to 36 4

2. Fabric heights 6 – 12 feet.

Single Gate Width, feet Double Gate Width,

feet Post (O.D.) Type I (and II),

inches

Up to 6 Up to 12 2-7/8

6 to 12 12 to 24 4

12 to 18 24 to 38 6-5/8

18 to 24 36 to 48 8-5/8

C. Rails and Braces – 1-5/8-inches outside diameter, 2.27 pounds per foot.

D. Fittings

1. All fittings to be PVC thermally fused color coated having a minimum thickness of 0.006 inches per ASTM F626. PVC color to match fabric and framework. Moveable parts, nuts and bolts to be field coated with PVC liquid touch up after installation.

2. Post Caps – Pressed steel (with set screw retainer), cast iron or cast aluminum alloy designed to fit snugly over posts to exclude moisture. Supply cone type caps for terminal posts and loop type for line posts. All fittings to conform to ASTM F626.


3. Rail and Brace Ends – Galvanized pressed steel, cup-shaped to receive rail and brace ends.

4. Top Rail Sleeves – Galvanized tubular steel, 0.051 thickness by 7 inches long; expansion type.

5. Tension Bars – Galvanized steel, minimum 3/16-inch wide x 3/4-inch thick per ASTM F626.

6. Tension Bands – Galvanized pressed steel, 12-gauge thickness x 3/4 inch wide. Secure using minimum 5/16-inch galvanized carriage bolt and nut.

7. Brace Bands – Galvanized pressed steel, 12-gauge thickness x 3/4 inch wide. Secure using minimum 5/16-inch galvanized carriage bolt and nut.

8. Truss Ends – Galvanized steel rod, minimum 5/16-inch diameter with turnbuckle.

E. Tension Wire:

1. ASTM A824 Type II, 7-gauge galvanized steel wire with minimum coating of 1.2 ounces per square foot.

2. PVC-coated metallic coated steel tension wire per ASTM F 1664 7 gauge steel core wire. PVC coating class and color to match chain link fabric.

F. Hog Rings – Galvanized steel, 9-gauge for attachment of fabric to tension wire. Per ASTM F626.

G. Wire Ties – Galvanized steel, 9-gauge for attachment of fabric to line posts and rails. Per ASTM F626.

H. Sliding Gates:

1. Gate frames: Fabricate chain link cantilever slide gates in accordance with ASTM F-1184, Type II, Class 2, using PVC-coated aluminum members conforming to ASTM B221, alloy and temper 6061-T6. Vertical members shall be 2-inch square aluminum, weighing 1.13 pounds per foot, 2-inch by 4-inch aluminum bottom frame member weighing 1.73 pounds per foot, and a one-piece aluminum track/frame member weighing a minimum of 7.95 pounds per foot. The 2-inch square frame member of said track/frame shall have a wall thickness of not less than .250 inches on all four sides. Aluminum alloy used shall be 6061-T6 only. Internal uprights shall be 2-inch square aluminum spaced equally at no more than 6 feet on center subdividing the gate frame into panels. Weld all members together forming a rigid one-piece frame integral with top track. Provide 2 truck assemblies for each gate leaf, except as indicated for gates larger than 30 feet. Frame sizes over 27 feet in length shall be shipped in 2 parts and field spliced with special attachments provided by the manufacturer. Include barbed wire if used on fence.

2. Gate Sizes

Gate Opening (feet) Cantilever Support

(Overhang), feet Overall Panel Width (feet)

18 8 28


3. Gate Frame Finish: Natural Aluminum.

4. Chain Link Filler Finish: To match specification of existing fence.

5. All Operated Chain-Link Cantilever slide gates will be filled across the entire length of the panel (including the back frame counterbalance) to satisfy UL325 and ASTM F-220 safe gate design guidelines.

6. Chain Link mesh size, and wire gauge to match that of existing fence. Fabric shall be attached between each internal upright with hook bolts spaced no more than 15 inches (380 mm) on center as recommended by the manufacturer.

7. Trussing: Each bay shall be cross-trussed by means of 1/4” cable with adjustable turnbuckles. Trusses will maintain the structural integrity of the gate while allowing for expansion and contraction of aluminum in varying weather conditions.

8. Top track/rail: Enclosed combination one-piece track and rail, aluminum extrusion with weight of:

a. Openings up to 30 feet; 4.62 lbs./ft. Top track/rail to be a single formed profile with integrated center stabilizing web without welding. All wall thicknesses to be 0.25-inch.

9. Truck assembly: Swivel type, zinc die coated steel, with 6 sealed lubricant ball bearing rollers, 2 inches in diameter by 9/16 inches in width, and 2 side rolling wheels to ensure truck alignment in track. Mount trucks on post brackets using 7/8-inch diameter ball bolts with 5/8-inch shank. Truck assembly shall withstand same reaction load as track 2,000 pounds.

10. Gate hangers, brackets, guide assemblies, receivers, and latches: Malleable iron or steel, galvanized after fabrication.

11. Operated cantilever gates are shipped without standard latching/locking hardware per ASTM F-2200. Provide positive latch with padlock and three (3) keys.

12. Bottom guide wheel assemblies: Each assembly shall consist of two, 3-inch diameter wheels, straddling bottom horizontal gate rail, allowing adjustment to maintain gate frame plumb and in proper alignment. Attach one assembly to each support post.

13. End Plug: After gate has been installed, both ends of the combination track/frame member shall be closed off with a shock absorbing plastic block that shall also serve as a stop bracket.

14. Gate posts:

a. For gates less than 31 feet 0 inches: galvanized steel 4-inch outside diameter (OD) schedule 40 pipe, ASTM F 1083, weighing 9.1 pounds per foot. Provide 1 latch post and 2 support posts for single slide gates and 4 support posts for double slide gates.

b. For gates 31 feet 0 inches or larger: 2 pairs of support posts for each leaf (dual) 4-inch OD schedule 40 pipe, ASTM F 1083, weighing 9.1 pounds per foot each. Posts connected by welding 6-inch x 3/8-inch plate between posts as shown on drawings. Also one 4-inch latch post.

1) Finish: to match fence.


H. Swing Gates

1. Fabricate chain link cantilever slide gates in accordance with ASTM F-1184, Type II, Class 2, using PVC-coated aluminum members conforming to ASTM B221, alloy and temper 6061-T6. Vertical members shall be 2-inch square aluminum, weighing 1.13 pounds per foot, 2-inch by 4-inch aluminum bottom frame member weighing 1.73 pounds per foot. Internal uprights shall be 2-inch square aluminum spaced equally at no more than 6 feet on center subdividing the gate frame into panels. Weld all members together forming a rigid one-piece frame. Include barbed wire if used on fence.

2. Gate Sizes: Double leaf, sized as shown on the Contract Drawings. Provide double leaf

3. Gate Frame Finish: Natural Aluminum.

4. Chain link mesh size and wire gauge to match that of existing fence. Fabric shall be attached between each internal upright with hook bolts spaced no more than 25 inches on center as recommended by the manufacturer.

5. Trussing: Each leaf frame shall be cross-trussed by means of ¼” cable with adjustable turnbuckles. Trusses will maintain the structural integrity of the gate while allowing for expansion and contraction of aluminum in varying weather conditions.

6. Gate hangers, brackets, guide assemblies, receivers, and latches: Malleable iron or steel, galvanized after fabrication.

7. Gate Posts:

a. For gates less than 31 feet 0 inches: galvanized steel 4 inch outside diameter (OD) schedule 40 pipe, ASTM F 1083, weighing 9.1 pounds per foot.

b. For gates 31 feet 0 inches or larger: 2 pairs of support posts for each leaf (dual) 4-inch OD schedule 40 pipe, ASTM F 1083, weighing 9.1 pounds per foot each.

c. Finish: to match fence

I. Carriage bolts and nuts – Galvanized.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Gate Hardware:

1. Sliding Gates: Provide gate hangers, latches, brackets, guide assemblies, and stops of malleable iron or steel, galvanized after fabrication. Provide positive latch with provisions for padlocking.

1. Swing Gates: Provide gate hangers, latches, brackets, guide assemblies, and stops as required of malleable iron or steel, galvanized after fabrication. Provide positive latch with provisions for padlocking.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with the Drawings, CLFMI Product Manual and the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Set line, terminal, gate, and corner posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above finish grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff. Posts to remain unburdened or undisturbed for 10 days following concrete pour.

C. Locate terminal post at each fence termination and change in horizontal or vertical direction of 30 degrees or more.

D. Space line posts uniformly at a maximum of 10 feet on center.

E. Corner, Gate, Line, and Terminal Post Footing Depth below Finish Grade - As indicated on Contract Drawings.

1. Where bedrock is encountered, termination into bedrock shall be 12 inches minimum for line posts and 18 inches minimum for gate, pull, and termination posts.

F. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6 inch long rail sleeves. Top rail and fabric shall closely parallel finish grade without excessive angle changes.

G. Install center and bottom brace rail on corner gate leaves and all terminal posts.

H. Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 100 feet maximum, whichever is less.

I. Position bottom of fabric 2-inch above finished grade.

J. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 15 inches on centers.

K. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips.

L. Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts. Bottom wires to be within 4 inches of the respective fabric line.

M. Top rail – Install in lengths of 21 feet. Connect ends with sleeves forming a rigid connection, allow for expansion and contraction.

N. Install support arms sloped outwards and attach barbed wire, if using); tension and secure.

O. Use gate posts to secure gate; do not swing gate from building.

P. Install gate with fabric to match fence (and barbed wire overhang if using barbed wire). Install three hinges per leaf, latch, catches, and drop bolt.

Q. Gates to be plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Provide concrete center drop to footing depth and drop rod retainers at center of double gate openings.

R. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and 3/8-inch diameter diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail, one bay from end and gate posts. Place the truss rod in tension by adjusting the turnbuckle.


S. Touch up any scratches of the PVC coating with liquid PVC paint.

T. Operated Gate:

1. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Gate movement shall not be initiated by gravity when an automated gate operator is disengaged / disconnected per ASTM F-2220 (Section 4.9).

2. There shall be a maximum gap of 2-1/4-inch between the horizontal plane of the moving gate panel and any fixed obstacle (support posts, “fall-over” posts, hardware, pilaster, etc.) Except that said obstacle be more than 16 inches from the moving horizontal plane of the gate panel per ASTM F-2200 (Section 6.1.4.).

3. Gate Receiver Guides shall be recessed behind the leading edge of the receiver post or any other fixed object per ASTM F-2200 (Section 6.1.6).

4. No device designed to provide activation for the automated gate operator is to be installed within 6 feet of the horizontal plane of the gate panel per UL-325.

5. All Operated Chain-Link Cantilever slide gates are required to have Gate Warning Placards fully visible to the approach on both sides of the gate per UL-325.

6. Attached hardware by means which will prevent unauthorized removal.

7. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

8. All operated gate installations to conform to all applicable federal, state, and local codes as well as: ASTM F-567, ASTM F-1184, ASTM F-2200, and Underwriters Laboratory UL-325 safety standards.

U. Grounding when required shall be the responsibility of a licensed electrical contractor and performed in accordance with Division 26.

3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4-inch.

B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1-inch.

C. Components shall not infringe adjacent property lines.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 32 90 00

SITE REHABILITATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Preparation of landscape area including loosening, pulverizing, and fertilizing.

2. Placement of seed, sprigging, sod, and topsoil including mulch, where required.

3. Watering of landscaping.

4. Site rehabilitation of disturbed areas.

5. Restoration of uncultivated lands.

6. Site modifications and development to meet new conditions.

7. Removal and disposal of all excess materials, equipment, trash and debris used for, or resulting from, the work included in this Section.




1.02 REFERENCES

A. The American Association of Nurserymen Standards - ANSI Standard 2-60.1, “Nursery Stock.”

B. Soil Conservation District of the Department of Agriculture.


A. Areas and Features to be Restored

1. All areas, including natural features occurring thereon, which are damaged or disturbed by the Contractor’s operations, shall be restored, repaired or replaced to the same or superior condition which existed prior to construction or as modified herein or as shown on the Drawings.

2. Artificial features shall be restored equal to a new condition or as modified herein or as shown on the Drawings.


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit the source nursery for all plantings.

C. Topsoil - Submit sieve analysis and characteristics of topsoil as listed in PART 2 - MATERIALS.

D. Seed mixture data.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. All planting material to be furnished from a nursery which meets the requirements of the American Association of Nurserymen.

1.06 PACKING AND SHIPPING

A. All seed furnished for this project shall be delivered in standard size unopened bags of the vendor, showing weight, mixture, vendor’s name and guaranteed analysis.

1.07 STORAGE

A. Seed shall be properly stored in dry conditions at the site of the work.

1. Any seed damaged or spoiled during storage shall be replaced by the Contractor.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Topsoil shall not be delivered or placed in a frozen or muddy condition.

B. Seeding is to be done on dry or moderately dry soil.

1. Seeding is to be done when the wind velocity does not exceed 5 miles per hour.

1.09 GUARANTEE

A. Any new, reestablished, replaced or disturbed plant material that fails to respond properly within the one-year guarantee period shall be replaced as specified above at the Contractor’s expense.

B. Provide a uniform stand of grass by watering, moving, and maintaining seed and sod areas until Substantial completion and subsequently, until the end of the Contractor’s required maintenance period. Re-sod and re-seed areas, with specified materials, which fail to provide a uniform stand of grass until all affected areas are accepted by the Owner.

C. Acceptance of all site rehabilitation work shall be at sole discretion of Owner who shall make final determination regarding whether work provided is acceptable. Any additional work required to meet Owner’s requirements shall be at sole cost of Contractor.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SEED MATERIALS

A. Inspect and test seed for germination and purity prior to mixing. All seed shall be fresh and of the latest crop year.

B. Uniformly mix by Group.

Seed Group and Use Schedule:

Seed Group Seed Name Quantity

(% By Weight) Allowable Periods Of Use

A

Lespedeza (common or Korean) 20%

February 1 to August 1 Sericea Lespedeza 15%

Kentucky 31 Fescue 40%

English Rye 25%

B

Kentucky 31 Fescue 55%

August 1 to December 1 Redtop 15%

English Rye 30%

C

Sericea Lespedeza 50% February 1 to December 1 (only when specified on the Drawings or otherwise

approved) Kentucky 31 Fescue 30%

English Rye 20%

C. All seed shall meet the requirements of the Tennessee Department of Agriculture and any more stringent Federal requirements, including those for purity and germination. Weed content of each component shall not exceed 0.1 percent.

D. Furnish Engineer a certified laboratory report showing the analysis of the seed to be furnished. The report shall bear the signature of a senior seed technologist.

E. Inoculate for legumes:

1. Nitrogen fixing bacteria cultures adapted to the particular seed to be treated.

2. Furnish in containers of a size sufficient to treat the specified quantity of seed to be planted.

2.02 MULCH MATERIAL

A. Hay composed of approved stalks from grasses, sedges, or legumes; or straw composed of stalks from rye, oats, wheat, or other approved grains.

B. Air dried and reasonably free from noxious weeds, weed seeds, and other detrimental plant growth.

C. Suitable for spreading with mulch blower machinery.

D. Hardwood fiber mulch, when used, shall meet the following specifications.


1. Moisture Content – 10.0 percent plus or minus 2.0 percent

2. Organic Matter – 99.4 percent plus or minus 0.2 percent

3. Ash Content – 0.6 percent plus or minus 0.2

4. Water Hold Capacity – 1,050 grams minimum (per 150 grams of oven dry fiber)

E. Mulch binders.

1. Cut back asphalt, Grade RC-70 or RC-250 conforming to AASHTO M-81, M-82, or M-141, for the type and grade specified.

2. Emulsified asphalt, Type SS-1 conforming to AASHTO M-140. In addition to Type SS-1, a special mixing material AE-3 or a special priming material AE-P may be specified.

2.03 EROSION MATTING

A. Excelsior Matting:

1. Machine-produced mat of curled wood excelsior fibers, 80 percent of which are 6 inches or longer in length, evenly distributed over the entire area of the mat, with one side of mat covered with a maximum 1 inch by 1 inch photodegradable extruded plastic mesh; mats minimum 47-inch width and weigh 0.975 pounds per square yard plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Wire staples machine made of No. 11 gauge new steel wire “U” shaped, not less than 6 inches in length with not less than a 1-inch wide throat.

B. Straw Matting:

1. Manufacturers: Propex, Inc. (formerly SI Geosolutions), Chattanooga, Tennessee 37416 USA, Phone (423) 899-0444, LandLOK S2 Erosion Control Blanket, North American Green, S150 Blanket or approved equal.

2. Description: Machine-produced mat of straw fibers, evenly distributed throughout the blanket, with a photodegradable, extruded plastic netting covering the top and bottom of each blanket.

3. Netting shall be photodegradable polypropylene with mesh openings of approximately 0.4 in by 0.4 in.

4. Ground Anchoring Devices:

a. Length: 8 to 18 inches; sufficient ground penetration to resist pullout. Use longer anchors for loose soils.

b. U-shaped wire staples, or metal pins.

c. Metal pins: Steel, minimum 0.20 inches in diameter with 1.5-inch steel washer.

2.04 JUTE MESH

A. Open plain weave of single jute yarn and non-toxic to vegetation.


B. Tag jute rolls for identification with 58 warp ends per yard, 41 weft ends per yard and weighing approximately 0.9 pounds per square yard with an acceptable tolerance of 5 percent.

2.05 STAPLES

A. New and unused, machine made of No. 11 gauge steel wire formed into a "U" shape, not less than 6 inches in length with not less than a 1-inch wide throat.

2.06 SOD MATERIAL

A. Live dense, well-rooted growth of permanent grasses, free from Johnson grass, nutgrass, and other undesirable grasses or weeds and well-suited for the proposed application to particular soils.

B. Cleanly cut in strips having a reasonably uniform thickness of not less than 2 1/2 inches, a uniform width of approximately 8 inches, and a minimum length of 12 inches.

2.07 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZERS

A. Unless otherwise specified, inorganic 10-20-10 nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash for seeding and 10-10-10 or 1-1-1 for sodding.

B. Furnish in standard containers with the brand name, weight and guaranteed analysis of the contents clearly marked.

C. Comply with Federal, State, and local laws.

D. Ammonium nitrate shall be a standard commercial product, having a minimum of 33.5 percent nitrogen.

E. Agricultural limestone shall contain a minimum of 85% of calcium carbonate and magnesium carbonate combined, and be of particular size that 85% will pass a No. 10 mess sieve.

F. Not withstanding the above, fertilizer shall be as recommended by the local Soil Conservation District of the Department of Agriculture for the type(s) of soil(s) and plant(s).

2.08 WATER

A. Free from harmful organisms or other objectionable materials.

2.09 TOPSOIL

A. Natural, friable, fertile, fine, sandy loam possessing characteristics of representative topsoil in the vicinity which produces heavy growths of vegetation.

B. Free from subsoil, noxious weeds, stones larger that one inch in diameter, lime, cement, ashes, slag, or other deleterious matter.

C. Well-drained in its original position and free from toxic quantities of acid or alkaline elements. The pH of topsoil shall be between 5.0 and 7.0.

D. Topsoil shall contain no less than 6.0 percent organic matter.

E. Topsoil shall contain less than 52 percent sand.


F. Topsoil may be from previously excavated, stockpiled and protected materials, provided the materials meet the requirements for topsoil.

G. Topsoil shall meet the following gradation requirements free of stones, roots, sticks and other foreign substances:

Grain Diameter Sieve Size Percent Passing By

Weight

6.3 mm 6.3 mm 100

4.75 mm No. 4 60-85

0.075 mm No. 200 20-45

0.002 mm -- 7-27

2.10 GEOSYNTHETIC MATERIALS

A. Geosynthetic materials may be submitted for consideration by the Engineer. Such material shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.11 PLANTINGS

A. Trees, shrubs, vines, ground cover and other vegetation to be replaced or installed new as specified which meet the requirements of the American Association of Nurserymen. Classifications of plants, dimensions, planting procedures, etc., shall conform to ANSI Standard Z 60.1, “Nursery Stock.”

2.12 PEAT MOSS

A. As recommended by the supplier of nursery stock.

2.13 METAL EDGING

A. Edging shall be 3/16-inch thick by 4-inches high steel in 16- and 20-foot lengths.

B. Secure edging with 16-inch long tapered steel stakes at 30 inches on center.

C. All steel materials shall be painted with one coat of epoxy primer and two coats of epoxy finish.

2.14 STONES

A. All stones used for landscape surfacings shall be between 2 and 4 inches in maximum dimension and average to about 3 inches.

B. Stones shall be well-rounded.

C. All stones used for mowing strips shall be a washed crushed stone, size 1/2-inch to 1-inch size.

2.15 TREE WRAPPING

A. Tree wrapping for trees shall be 8 ounce first quality burlap.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Determine that surface area is ready for fine grading and/or to receive topsoil and seeding or plantings.

1. Remove trash, debris, large stones and other foreign materials from surface areas to be restored or rehabilitated.

2. Topsoil shall be free of frozen fragments, debris, large stones, and other foreign materials.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Fine Grading - Areas requiring topsoil shall be fine graded to within 4 inches of finished grade to provide a minimum compacted thickness of 4 inches of topsoil at all locations.

1. All such areas, whether in cut or fill, shall be raked to a depth of 1 inch, be parallel to finished grade as shown on Drawings or required and shall be free of all stones, larger than 1 inch, roots, rubbish and other deleterious material.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Areas to be Developed

1. When the project site is to be modified and developed to meet new conditions, the Contractor shall perform all required grading, topsoiling, fertilizing, seeding, planting, mulching and maintenance of areas, all in accordance with the Drawings and as specified herein.

2. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, the entire unpaved area within the grading limits and within the overall areas excavated and backfilled shall be so developed.

3. New landscaping work and artificial features, if any, are shown on the Drawings and specified elsewhere.

B. Contractor shall reestablish all existing cultivated or landscape items, trees, shrubs, vines and ground covers as practicable.

1. Contractor shall provide additional or modify existing vegetation, as shown on the Drawings.

2. Existing trees, plants, shrubs, saplings, ground cover, vines, etc., which are disturbed or damaged by the Contractor’s operations shall be replaced with new plant materials.

3.04 TOPSOIL

A. Furnish and spread topsoil at depths and locations shown on the drawings, but no less than 4 inches in depth and in all areas requiring rehabilitation unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

1. Stockpiled topsoil may be used if it is acceptable to the Engineer.


2. In the event this topsoil is not satisfactory, or is inadequate to cover the required areas, the Contractor shall furnish the required amount of satisfactory topsoil from approved sources off the site.

B. Soil shall be uniformly compacted with a light hand roller to a final depth of not less than 4 inches.

1. When finished, the surface shall conform to the finished lines and grades shown on the Drawings or required and shall have a smooth pulverized surface at the time of seeding.

2. Any irregularities shall be corrected before the fertilizer and seed are placed.

3. Any subsequent settlement or displacement of the topsoil shall be restored to an acceptable condition at the Contractor’s expense.

3.05 FERTILIZER

A. Fertilizer shall be uniformly spread by a mechanical spreader at the rate of 25 pounds per 1000 square feet for grade 10-20-10 or equivalent when seeding or 12 pounds per 1000 square feet for grade 10-10-10 or equivalent when sodding.

B. If sprigging, fertilizer shall be uniformly spread by a mechanical spreader at the rate of 12 pounds per 1000 square feet for grade 0-20-20 or equivalent.

C. Not less than 100 pounds per 1000 square feet for agricultural limestone.

D. Fertilizer shall be incorporated into the upper 2 inches of topsoil immediately after spreading for seeding or upper 1/2-inch when sprigging.

E. Fertilizer need not be incorporated in the soil as specified above when mixed with seed in water and applied with power sprayer equipment, also known as hydroseeding.

3.06 SEEDING

A. Scarify, disc, harrow, rake, or otherwise work each area to be seeded until it has been loosened and pulverized to a depth as directed by the Engineer.

B. Sow seed of the specified group as soon the seedbed has been prepared.

C. Sow uniformly by means of a rotary seeder, hydraulic equipment, or other satisfactory means at the rate of 1-1/2 pounds per 1,000 square feet, unless otherwise specified.

D. Inoculate Group "C" seed and seeds of legumes, when sown alone, before sowing in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the inoculant.

E. Upon completion of the seeding, the area shall be raked lightly and rolled with a light hand roller.

F. Do not perform seeding during windy weather, or when the ground surface is frozen, wet, or otherwise non-tillable. No seeding shall be performed during December through February unless otherwise permitted.

G. Provide seeding with mulch unless otherwise specified:


1. Spread hay or straw mulch evenly over the seeded area at an approximate rate of 75 pounds per 1,000 square feet immediately following the seeding operations. This rate may be varied by the Engineer, depending on the texture and condition of the mulch material and the characteristics of the area seeded.

2. Hold hay or straw mulch in place by the use of a mulch binder applied at the approximate rate of 4 gallons per 1,000 square feet as required.

3. Cover bridges, guardrails, signs, and appurtenances, if the mulch binder is applied in such a way that it would come in contact with or discolor the structures.

4. When wood fiber mulch is used, uniformly apply at the rate of 28 to 35 pounds per 1,000 square feet with hydraulic mulching equipment.

H. Process of spraying grass seeds, water, fertilizer and mulch known as hydroseeding or hydro-mulching may be utilized provided that water hazards are minimized.

1. Presoaking, the spraying of the materials and watering after spraying shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. All materials, protection, maintenance, etc., shall be in conformance with this specification.

3. Mulch may be a wood fiber material compatible with the spray equipment.

3.07 MULCHING AND PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall protect and maintain seeded areas to assure a full even stand of grass.

B. Immediately after seeding and rolling, the Contractor shall apply oat, wheat or rye straw, free from noxious weeds, as a mulch, to a loose depth of about 1 inch.

C. Contractor shall perform all watering and reseeding as necessary for a minimum of 30 days and until final acceptance of the Contract, to ensure the establishment of a uniform stand of specified grasses.

D. For slopes 3:1 or greater or where shown on Drawings, provide erosion matting. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for soil type, slope and, where applicable, channel flow; secure with staples.

3.08 SPRIGGING

A. Perform sprigging during September-November or April-May and only when the soil is in tillable or workable condition.

B. Do not set crowns during windy weather or when the ground surface is frozen.

C. Set crowns as soon as preparation of the sprig bed has been completed.

D. Set crowns at the rate of three sprigs per sq. yd. by means of a tree-planting bar or equal.

E. When specified, perform mulching before sprigging.


1. Spread mulch material evenly over the area to be planted at the rate of 100 pounds per 1,000 square feet. This rate may be varied by the Engineer depending upon the texture and condition of the mulch material and the ground surface.

2. Cover with a uniform layer of mulch so that 20 percent to 25 percent of the ground is visible. The mulch shall be loose enough to allow sunlight to penetrate and air to circulate slowly, but thick enough to partially shade the ground and to reduce erosion.

3. Hold the mulch in place with mulch binders applied at the rate directed by the Engineer, not to exceed 0.1 gallons per square yard, as required to hold the mulch in place.

3.09 SODDING

A. Place sod at all locations shown on the Drawings or where directed.

B. Loosen the surface of the ground to be sodded to a depth of not less than one inch with a rake or other device.

C. If necessary, sprinkle with water until saturated for a minimum depth of one inch and keep moist until the sod is placed.

D. Place sod as soon as practical after removal from the point of origin, and keep in a moist condition during the interim.

E. Carefully place, by hand, on the prepared ground surface with the edges in close contact and, as far as possible, in a position to break joints.

F. Each strip of sod laid shall be fitted and pounded into place using 10 inch by 10 inch wood tramps, or other satisfactory implements.

G. Immediately after placing, thoroughly wet and roll with an approved roller or hand-tamp as approved by the Engineer.

H. On slopes of 2:1 or steeper, pinning or pegging may be required to hold the sod in place.

3.10 PLANTING

A. All new plant materials which are to replace existing plant materials shall be of the same genus and species as the original, and shall be placed in the same location as the item being replaced.

1. Size of the new plant materials shall, if practical, match that of the item being replaced, consistent with normally available sizes from nursery stock.

2. Depending on the size and type of material, and when ordered by Engineer, guy wires, stakes, anchors and wrappings shall be furnished and installed in a proper manner to brace and protect the plant.

3. Contractor shall, as soon as practicable, water and maintain all reestablished, replaced or disturbed plant materials until final acceptance of total.

B. Plant shall be set plumb and true. Shape area around saucer to form drainage grades.

C. Install wooden posts, guy wires and hose section for protection. Provide three guy wires per planted item.


D. For all trees of 2-inch caliber or larger, wrap with tree wrap.

1. Begin at base of tree and work upward to the first branches.

2. Tie the burlap wrap with cord (no synthetic cord nor wire) at 2-foot intervals and at the bottom and top.

E. Place weed barriers on prepared subgrade. Turn up weed barrier at all edges and corners.

F. Place washed stone over weed barriers to the specified depths. Rake stone to produce a smooth, uniform surface.

G. Install metal edging such that the top edge projects 1/4 inch above surrounding soil and stone.

3.11 MAINTENANCE

A. Seeded Areas: Any portion of seeded areas failing to produce a full uniform stand of grass from any cause shall be re-seeded at full rate and re-fertilized at one-half rate and protected and maintained until such a full stand has been obtained.

B. Sodded Areas:

1. Maintain sodded areas until Substantial Completion and for a period of at least 60 days after Substantial Completion and acceptance of sodding operations.

2. Maintain sodded areas, including watering, spot weeding, mowing, applications of herbicides, fungicides, insecticides, and reseeding until a full, uniform stand of grass free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease, and insects is achieved and accepted by the Owner.

a. Water sodded areas thoroughly every 2 to 3 days to establish proper rooting.

b. Repair, re-work, and re-sod all areas that have washed out or are eroded. Replace unacceptable or dead areas with new sod.

c. Mow sodded areas as soon as top growth reaches a 3-inch height. Cut back to 2 inches in height. Repeat mowing as required to maintain specified height. Do not remove more than 40 percent of grass leaf at any single mowing.

d. Apply fertilizer to lawns approximately 30 days after sodding at recommended rate in soil test report. Apply with mechanical rotary or drop distribution. Thoroughly water into soil.

e. Apply herbicides as required to control weed growth or undesirable grass species.

f. Apply fungicides and insecticides as required to control diseases and insects.

g. Remove sod pegs.

C. Plantings: Plantings to be maintained for 1 year.

3.12 RESTORATION OF UNCULTIVATED LANDS

A. Areas of uncultivated land shall be restored as follows:


1. Disturbed surfaces shall be rough-graded to the original elevations (+1 inch) and general appearance which existed prior to construction (or to the new elevations and grades which are required), all debris, loose stones over 1 inch, boulders, etc., being removed in the process.

2. Surface shall then be seeded with perennial rye grass, being spread at the rate of 1 lb. per 800 square feet.

3. Area need not be raked or rolled after completion of seeding.

3.13 SPECIAL CONDITIONS

A. Damaged Trees - Vegetation which has been damaged by site preparation activities and deemed non-functional by the Owner or Engineer, shall be replaced by the Contractor with vegetation of the same caliper, genus and species at no additional compensation to the Contractor.

END OF SECTION